KADABRA®



Kadabra Manual

A visual, technical guide to the whole Kadabra Ecosystem: Installation, the Kadabra OS Shapes (each with its own color accent and Main / Thumb sections), the K-Player DAW, the K-Sampler instrument, the K-Plugins, KAI and how to combine them into music.

Kadabra button diagram in English

The Kadabra Ecosystem

Seven parts, one instrument. Open any part below, or use the sidebar.

1

Installation

Purchase, download, install and run the bundle in the right order: Surge XT first, then the Kadabra OS Full Installation.

2

Kadabra OS

The brain. 15 Shapes turn your playing into MIDI: Performer, Sampler, Scaler, Harmoner, Looper, Arper, Viber, FXer, Sounder, Arranger, Shaper, Setuper, Senser, Master and Temper.

3

K-Player

The sound. Kadabra's own DAW: 24 channels of instruments and effects, two DJ decks, an arrangement timeline, a production mix page and a recorder.

4

K-Sampler

The instrument. A VST3 pad sampler with 11 groups of 12 pads, round robins, velocity layers, beat repeat, envelope, amp and sends, plus the Kadabra factory banks.

5

K-Plugins

The effects and supporting plug-ins: the K-Channel channel strip (EQ, Gate, Compressor), Surge XT and how they sit inside K-Player.

6

KAI

Kadabra's AI assistant inside Kadabra OS. Today it answers questions about this manual; it will grow into a creative partner.

7

Combining

How the Shapes, K-Player and K-Sampler work together to make music. Workflow recipes, growing over time.

GlossaryOpen common Kadabra terms
Kadabra EcosystemThe Bundle of software installed by Kadabra Full installation.
Kadabra OSKadabra's software environment, that communicate, display and control it.
K-PlayerKadabra's own DAW: it hosts the VST3 instruments and effects that make Kadabra sound, on up to 24 channels, with DJ decks, an arrangement and a recorder.
K-SamplerKadabra's VST3 pad sampler instrument (macOS): 11 groups × 12 pads, banks, round robins and velocity layers. Lives inside K-Player or any VST3 host.
BankA K-Sampler preset: 132 pads with their samples and settings, stored as a folder. Factory banks are read-only; SAVE makes your own copy.
PadOne of K-Sampler's 12 pads in a group. MIDI note n plays pad n. A pad can hold up to 5 round-robin takes × 8 velocity layers.
SessionA saved K-Player setup (.kplayer): channels, plug-ins and their exact state, decks, arrangement and mix.
InsertA plug-in box on a K-Player channel. A MIDI channel has one Instrument box followed by three effect inserts.
PERFORM / EDITThe two modes of K-Player and K-Sampler. PERFORM never interrupts the music; EDIT unlocks studio work like removing plug-ins or rearranging channels.
K-PluginsTribal-Tools' own plug-ins bundled with Kadabra, such as the K-Channel channel strip (EQ, Gate, Compressor).
KAIKadabra's Artificial Intelligence, reached from the Kadabra OS menu. Ask it anything about the manual.
ShapeOne main Kadabra mode, such as Performer, FXer, Sounder, or Viber.
SectionMain, Thumb 1, Thumb 2, or Thumb 3. Thumb sections are reached by holding a Thumb.
CombiOne of the 12 round buttons in the left-hand Combi area.
Press / SelectA quick press and release of a button.
HoldPress and keep holding the button while options may appear.
hold ThumbHold a Thumb button, usually before pressing a Combi in that Section.
Opened option menuA deeper Combi set that appears while a Combi is held or after a Combi opens extra choices.
Combi 2 (Save Mode)Example for the physical Combi number plus the Kadabra OS button title.
StateA saved Kadabra setup: sounds, loops, arpeggios, scale, key, and other settings.
Quick questionsOpen common workflows and FAQs
BPMHow do I keep BPM when loading a State?
  1. Go to Performer > Main Section.
  2. Hold Combi 2 (Save Mode).
  3. While holding it, press Combi 6 (BPM — Keep BPM / Load BPM).
  4. Choose whether the loaded State keeps the current BPM or loads the BPM saved inside that State.
FXHow do I control plugin FX?
  1. Go to FXer.
  2. Choose the Sound or MIDI channel you want to control.
  3. Hold the FX Combi you want to set.
  4. Touch a Keyboard Key to set the FX amount, or move the Wheel to adjust the CC number when available.
ShiftHow do I assign FXer to a Shifter?
  1. Go to Shaper.
  2. Choose the Shifter button you want to assign.
  3. Select FXer as the assigned Shape.
  4. Save or release to keep the assignment.
LIVEHow do I make a Sound follow live harmony?
  1. Go to Sounder.
  2. Choose the Active Sound.
  3. Hold Thumb 1 (SET — ACTIONS).
  4. Press Combi 1 (Follow Harmony), then choose Follow Live Harmony.
5How do I set the active sound?
  1. Go to Sounder.
  2. Hold Thumb 3 (SET ACTIVE).
  3. Press the Combi of the Sound you want to set as Active.
  4. That Sound becomes the Active Sound for editing and Shape actions.
SeqHow do I save a sequence?
  1. Go to Looper.
  2. Prepare the Active Sound and Pattern you want to save.
  3. Hold Combi 12 (Save Seq Pattern).
  4. While holding it, touch the Keyboard packet slot where you want to save the Sequence.
GateHow do I change the Viber gate length?
  1. Go to Viber.
  2. Press Combi 11 to make the Gate longer.
  3. Press Combi 12 to make the Gate shorter.
  4. For motion control, assign Viber Gate in Senser.
RECHow do I record what I play into K-Player?
  1. In K-Player, press ARM on every channel you want (or send CC 84 on its MIDI channel from the Kadabra).
  2. Press RECORD in the top section; the first time, choose the folder K-Player records into.
  3. Play. Press STOP when done.
  4. The audio takes land on the PRODUCTION page and the MIDI takes on their ARRANGEMENT lanes, all starting at the same instant.
KEYHow do I make Kadabra follow a record's key?
  1. In K-Player's Audio Settings, check the Kadabra row: it should say (auto: a port named Kadabra) or name the Kadabra's port.
  2. Load the track on a deck. If it has no markers, open DETECTION and press DETECT.
  3. Check its tonality markers; correct any with the marker editor row.
  4. Press LINK-KADABRA in the top bar so it is lit.
  5. Play the deck: at each tonality marker in force, the Kadabra gets the key, the scale and the harmony.
BANKHow do I change a K-Sampler bank from the Kadabra?
  1. Open K-Sampler's BANK menu: every bank shows its program number.
  2. Send bank select 0 (factory banks) or 1 (your banks) and that program change on the channel's MIDI channel, for example from a Sounder or Master shape combi.
  3. The bank loads while the music carries on.
FILLHow do I turn one sample into a playable octave?
  1. In K-Sampler, load the sample into any pad of a group (File… or drop it).
  2. Keep AUTO-TONE on and switch AUTO-FILL on in the INPUT panel.
  3. The group is filled C … B, every pad tuned to its note, with the source's round robins.
WAVEHow do I play my own wavetable in K-Synth?
  1. On the SYNTH page, click the A (or B) tab of OSC.
  2. Click the wavetable box (its name).
  3. Choose Load a wavetable file… and pick the file.
  4. Turn POSITION to move through its cycles.
KICKHow do I give a K-Kick kick a real drum's feel?
  1. In TOP · PUNCH, click the BD tab and raise LEVEL.
  2. Set TUNE: 60–80 Hz for a kick drum, 100 Hz and up for a tom.
  3. Turn BEATER left for felt, right for wood.
  4. Set DECAY, BEND, TONE and SHELL by ear.
  5. For mostly drum, lower BODY in MIX. The K-Acoustic group starts you off.
No matching manual entries found. Try clearing the Combi filter or using a shorter search.
Installation

Installation

Purchase, download, install and run the Kadabra software in the correct order.

Begin here after purchasing Kadabra. Your account contains the software, licenses and updated downloads needed for your computer.
Required installation order: install Supporting Plugins (Surge XT) first, and ONLY THEN install Kadabra OS Full Installation, for the best user experiance.
Back to top
Flow Purchase → Download → Install → Run
1 Purchase
  1. Complete the Kadabra purchase.
    from: https://tribal-tools.com/shop

  2. A Kadabra User Area was created automatically for you inside the Tribal-Tools website.
  3. Open the purchase email sent to you.
  4. Use the email instructions to create or change your password.
  5. Enter the My Account Area.
  6. Open the Software & License tab.
2 Download
  1. Inside the User Area, in Software & License, first download Surge XT. the link will take you to Surge XT download site.
    choose and download the correct version for your operating system
    • For Mac with Apple Silicon (M1, M2, M3 etc.), choose the ARM version.
    • For Mac with an Intel processor (usually older Macs), choose the x86 version.
    • For Windows, choose the Windows Full Installation.
  2. Then download the correct Kadabra OS Full Installation.
    choose the correct version for your operating system
    • For Mac with Apple Silicon (M1, M2, M3 etc.), choose the ARM version.
    • For Mac with an Intel processor (usually older Macs), choose the x86 version.
    • For Windows, choose the Windows Full Installation.
3 Install
  1. Run and complete the downloaded Surge XT installer.
  2. ONLY AFTER Surge XT is installed, run the Kadabra OS Full Installation.
  3. Follow the installer made for your operating system.
macOS installation
• The important items to install are the Kadabra OS, Kadabra K-Player (DAW), the VST3 Plugins (K-Channel) and the K-Sampler with its Factory Banks.
Windows installation
• The important items to install are the Kadabra OS, Kadabra K-Player (DAW), and the VST3 Plugins and Samplers, and finally: Windows Driver for the wireless radio box (K-Box).
4 Run Kadabra OS
  1. Before connecting any Kadabra cable to your computer:
    open the Kadabra OS program.
    • on Mac: Applications -> Kadabra OS.
    • on Windows: Kadabra OS icon on the desktop.
    (if there is no Kadabra OS icon on the desktop, open it from Program Files -> Tribal-Tools -> Kadabra OS)
  2. Kadabra’s K-Player should start automatically.
    Please let it start patiantly:
    • it first Scans all of your Plugins.
    • then loads the Starter session, so the default Kadabra sounds are ready on channels 1–15 (K-Sampler drums, percussion, handpan and pianos, Surge XT basses and pads).
  3. Go back to the Kadabra OS window.
    The first Lesson page should open
    This page guides you through the first use of Kadabra OS and K-Player.
    • if you want to have an Audio Voice to guide your lessons, you can press the big Speaker icon on the top right.
    • Connect the K-Box or the Kadabra to your Computer to jump right into the 1st Lesson on how to play your Kadabra
    or you can follow the Connectivity Lesson instructions if you wish to connect to other DAWs, or have multiple Virtual Midi ports.
  4. Follow Kadabra's Interactive Lessons patiantly.
    • there is short but important information for your Kadabra experiance to flow.
    • Each and every word and color counts! colors are very important and shows exactly what and where the lesson reffers to.
The Software Bundle Kadabra OS, K-Player, Samplers, Plugins
Inside the User Area
you'll have many different options to download, but most of them are bundled and installed inside the Kadabra OS Full Installation.
OS Kadabra OS (Operating System)
Kadabra OS is the main software for Kadabra's functionality
• Kadabra OS is what makes the Kadabra work and connects it (or the K-Box) to the computer.
• Kadabra OS holds all the special powers of Kadabra and transfers playing the Kadabra into actual Midi messages and other API communications.
it opens the virtual port "Kadabra" for other DAWs to use.
KP Kadabra K-Player
The K-Player is Kadabra's dedicated DAW (Digital Audio Workstation)
• Kadabra K-Player is what makes Kadabra SOUND on all channels.
Without the K-Player or a different DAW (like Ableton, Cubase, Logic, FL-Studio, Bitwig, etc.) Kadabra has no sound!

• Up to 24 channels, each a MIDI channel (one Instrument plus 3 insert plug-ins) or an Audio channel (a deck or a live input through the same inserts), plus two effect buses (delay, reverb) and a MASTER strip with its own inserts.

• Four pages: PLAYER (channel strips), DJ-DECK (two decks with key / tempo detection and a mixer), ARRANGEMENT (a timeline on a bar grid) and PRODUCTION (the MIX & MASTER page).

• Channels can be Armed and recorded straight from the Kadabra into separate audio and MIDI files that all start at the same instant, to be played back in the K-Player or in your favorite DAW.

• Kadabra super powers: program changes and CCs that reach every plug-in, LINK-KADABRA (a record's key and scale sent back to the Kadabra), MIDI learn on any parameter, live plug-in bypass, one MASTER BPM for every synced plug-in, a native low-latency engine, and a PERFORM mode that never interrupts the music.
Full chapter:
KS K-Sampler (Mac) and its Factory Banks
The K-Sampler is Kadabra's pad sampler instrument (VST3, macOS)
• One instrument replaces the former separate Kadabra sampler plug-ins: 11 groups × 12 pads, up to 5 round-robin takes and 8 velocity layers per pad, a beat repeat, an envelope, delay and reverb sends and a guitar amp.

• It installs to /Library/Audio/Plug-Ins/VST3/K-Sampler, and its Factory Banks (an optional item in the installer) to /Library/Application Support/Tribal-Tools/K-Sampler/Factory:
• Electronic Drumkit – electronic kicks, snares, hi-hats and digital drums.
• Acoustic Drums – a drum set with kicks, snares, rims, hi-hats, crashes and rides.
• Percussion – clicks, rims, hits, shakers, congas and more.
• Grand Piano and Electric Piano – every key with its velocity layers and round robins.
• Guitar – short plucks, long fingerstyle and octaves.
• Handpan – every pad its own note, 5 takes × 4 velocity layers.
• The K-Player loads K-Sampler into each deck's K-SAMPLER box by itself, and the Starter session uses it for the drum, percussion, handpan and piano channels.
Full chapter:
EQ K-Plugin: K-Channel
The K-Channel - Channel Strip (EQ, Gate, Compressor)
The K-Channel is a dedicated Channel Strip that has low latency, high quality sound and low CPU footprint.
it has a few bundled effect:
• A 5 band EQ with a frequency analizer.
• A Gate effect for noise removal and artistic effects.
• A Compressor effect for higher gain and punch.
Full chapter:
Not bundled into the installation
you'll find the Kadabra Upgrade (which is better to use directly from inside the Kadabra OS).
some ready made Kadabra Projects and controllers made for other DAWs, to use already assigned MIDI CC messages.
and your private Kadabra and K-Box Lisence files that lets you use special features like Cloud Backup and KAI.
The Kadabra Virtual MIDI port
the internal virtual cable between music-studio software:
K The "Kadabra" Port
Choosing Kadabra as your MIDI input
The Kadabra MIDI port is a dedicated Virtual MIDI cable inside your computer.
it comes from the Kadabra OS, and allows every DAW to read the information that Kadabra is sending.
in the K-Player (for example), the "Kadabra" MIDI port is connecting the note making Kadabra OS, to the sound making K-Player.
• the K-Player picks the "Kadabra" port automatically the moment it appears (MIDI Settings ▸ Auto-Select ▸ KADABRA PORT: ON), so Kadabra OS can be started before or after the K-Player.
• to choose it by hand: open the MIDI PORT drop-list in the K-Player's top bar (RESCAN PORTS if it is missing) and pick "Kadabra"; then each channel's MIDI IN box selects which Kadabra Sound (MIDI channel) it plays.
same goes for other DAWs, the "Kadabra" MIDI port is connecting the note making Kadabra OS, to the sound making DAW.
• Make sure that the "Kadabra" MIDI port is open in your DAW's settings.
• then just choose Kadabra as the MIDI input channel.
Troubleshoot Hardware, cable, software-launch and support checks
USB K-Box cable is wrong

Use a USB Type-C to Type-C cable, or connect through a hub that has a Type-A USB connector.

PWR Kadabra shows no lights when the Power button is pressed

Charge Kadabra using any USB Type-C phone charger, and then try powering it on again.

BOX K-Box shows no light when connected

Disconnect the K-Box and change the USB cable.

OS Kadabra OS does not start

On Windows, right-click Kadabra OS and choose Run as administrator, then try opening it again.

K K-Player does not start
  1. On Mac, open K-Player directly from Applications.
  2. On Windows, open K-Player from Program Files/Kadabra OS/data.
  3. If it still does not start, enter your Kadabra My Account Area.
  4. Open Software & License.
  5. Download and install the latest K-Player.
  6. Try opening Kadabra OS again.
Help I could not make it work

Contact Tribal-Tools support:

Shape 1 · Deep-Teal color

Performer

Performer logo

Load and save complete Kadabra States.

For saving the Kadabra State into a song, performance, or set. Kadabra can save Keyboard Sounds, Loops, Arpeggios, Scale, Key, and other features into State spots, and then load these States for the next piece of a performance.
Each Thumb is a Bank of 12 States: hold a Thumb and press a Combi, and that is one State. So a Set holds 36 States (3 Banks of 12). With no Thumb held, Combis 5–12 choose one of the 8 User Sets, and Combi 4 the Factory Set: 324 State spots in all.
Back to top
FAQ, Tips & Shape infoOpen quick Performer workflows
BPMHow do I keep BPM when loading a State?
  1. Go to Performer.
  2. Hold Combi 2 (Save Mode).
  3. While holding it, press Combi 6 (BPM — Keep BPM / Load BPM).
  4. Choose whether the State loads its saved BPM or keeps the current BPM.
↓How do I save a State?
  1. Choose a User Set: press one of Combis 5–12 (Sets 1–8) with no Thumb held.
  2. Hold Combi 2 (Save Mode).
  3. Choose options for what should save or load.
  4. Hold a Bank Thumb (1–3) to select a Bank.
  5. Press a destination Combi (1–12) to save.
↑How do I load a State?
  1. Go to Performer.
  2. Choose the User Set the State is in: press one of Combis 5–12 (Sets 1–8) with no Thumb held.
  3. Press Combi 1 (Load Mode).
  4. Hold the Bank Thumb (1–3) the State is in.
  5. Hold the State's Combi (1–12), then let go: the State loads.
NameHow do I give a State a name?
  1. Go to Performer.
  2. Hold Combi 2 (Save Mode).
  3. While holding it, press Combi 5 (Set Name): a box opens on the screen.
  4. Type the State's name in the box.
  5. Hold a Bank Thumb (1–3) and press the destination Combi (1–12) to save the State with its name.
●●●Thumb Banks

Thumb Buttons select the State Banks to use.

  • hold Thumb 1 = Bank 1 (different 12 combis)
  • hold Thumb 2 = Bank 2 (different 12 combis)
  • hold Thumb 3 = Bank 3 (different 12 combis)
💡Tips
  • You can load Levels or a K-Project automatically when loading a State.
  • Use BPM — Keep BPM / Load BPM to match tempo or stay in sync.
  • Favorite States can be backed up via K-Project.
Main SectionNo Thumb is held

In the Performer Main Section, When no Thumb button is held, you can configure the Save and Load options and location (where the State is saved or loads from).

  • A SET has differrent 3 Banks of 12 spots in each bank (36 Kadabra states).
  • A SET name can be changed by right clicking its number.
  • Combi 4 till 12 are options to choose in which Set (1-8 or the Factory Set) the States will be saved to, or load from.
  • Load Mode or Save Mode is highlighted.
  • There are saving/loading options when holding the "Load Mode" button or the "Save Mode" button
Combi 1 L Load Mode

SELECT: Change the Performer mode to Loading, not Saving. Thumb Banks functionality changes accordingly.

HOLD:

While holding Load Mode, the following options appear:

Combi 5 Mix Load Levels

PRESS: Load the selected State including its saved levels.

Combi 6 K Load K-Project

PRESS: Load the K-Player project that is connected to the State.

Combi 2 S Save Mode

SELECT: Change the Performer mode to Saving, not Loading. Thumb Banks functionality changes accordingly.

HOLD:

While holding Save Mode, the following options appear:

Combi 1 SET Other Shape

Beta only.

Combi 5 S Set Name

PRESS: Opens a box to enter the State name before choosing the State spot to save into.

Combi 6 BPM Keep BPM / Load BPM

PRESS: Chooses the BPM behavior of the saved State.

  • Keep BPM keeps the current BPM when loading this State.
  • Load BPM saves the BPM inside the State and loads that BPM again when the State is loaded.
Combi 7 TONE Load Tonic / Keep Tonic

PRESS: Chooses whether the State loads its saved tonic key or keeps the current tonic key.

Combi 8 MAIN Not Master / In Master

PRESS: Chooses whether the Main Shape becomes the Master Shape when the State is loaded.

Combi 10 Loop NOT Stopping

PRESS: Saves the chosen State spot instead of loading it.

RELEASE:

Releasing Save Mode closes the Save options.

Combi 3 3 Set Bank

Not available yet. Set Bank changes the Bank of Sets: the 8 User Sets (36 States each) together are one Bank of Sets.

Combi 4 T Factory Trax

PRESS: Selects the Factory Set: the States made by Tribal-Tools. It is overwritten at every Kadabra OS update, so save your own States in Sets 1–8 (Combis 5–12).

Combi 5 1 Set 1

PRESS: Selects User Set 1. The States of this Set are not deleted when updating Kadabra OS software.

Combi 6 2 Set 2

PRESS: Selects User Set 2. The States of this Set are not deleted when updating Kadabra OS software.

Combi 7 3 Set 3

PRESS: Selects User Set 3. The States of this Set are not deleted when updating Kadabra OS software.

Combi 8 4 Set 4

PRESS: Selects User Set 4. The States of this Set are not deleted when updating Kadabra OS software.

Combi 9 5 Set 5

PRESS: Selects User Set 5. The States of this Set are not deleted when updating Kadabra OS software.

Combi 10 6 Set 6

PRESS: Selects User Set 6. The States of this Set are not deleted when updating Kadabra OS software.

Combi 11 7 Set 7

PRESS: Selects User Set 7. The States of this Set are not deleted when updating Kadabra OS software.

Combi 12 8 Set 8

PRESS: Selects User Set 8. The States of this Set are not deleted when updating Kadabra OS software.

Thumb BanksBank 1 · Bank 2 · Bank 3

In Performer, hold Thumb 1, Thumb 2, or Thumb 3 to choose a State Bank. The Combi spots inside each Bank share the same load/save behavior.

The three OS screens below illustrate the three Banks side by side.

Combis 1–121–12State spots inside the selected Bank
In Load Mode
  • Empty spot: nothing to load.
  • Named spot:
    • HOLD: to prepare loading the State. (can be assigned to Master)
    • RELEASE: loads the Kadabra State into Kadabra.
In Save Mode
  • Empty spot: save without replacing an older State.
  • Named spot:
    • HOLD: to prepare replacing that State.
    • RELEASE: saves the Kadabra State into that Combi spot, or opens the "Enter State Name" window.
Shape 2 · Cyan-Blue color

Sampler

Sampler logo

Trigger samples using a chromatic scale.

USED MOSTLY FOR PLAYING SAMPLES, The SAMPLER has banks and is used for playing static Samples and playing in a chromatic way using the full-spectrum of an octave including all the 12 available tones.
Back to top
Main SectionNo Thumb is held

In the Sampler Main Section, you can use the first 10 Combis to move the Chromatic (Sampler) keyboard to a specific octave

Combi 1 -2 Octave
“-2” – “Octave” (Samples 0 till 24 (C-2 till C0) are assigned to the Keyboard)
Combi 2 -1 Octave
“-1” – “Octave” (Samples 12 till 36 (C-1 till C1) are assigned to the Keyboard)
Combi 3 0 Octave
“0” – “Octave” (Samples 24 till 48 (C0 till C2) are assigned to the Keyboard)
Combi 4 1 Octave
“1” – “Octave” (Samples 36 till 60 (C1 till C3) are assigned to the Keyboard)
Combi 5 2 Octave
“2” – “Octave” (Samples 48 till 72 (C2 till C4) are assigned to the Keyboard)
Combi 6 3 Octave
“3” – “Octave” (Samples 60 till 84 (C3 till C5) are assigned to the Keyboard)
Combi 7 4 Octave
“4” – “Octave” (Samples 72 till 96 (C4 till C6) are assigned to the Keyboard)
Combi 8 5 Octave
“5” – “Octave” (Samples 84 till 108 (C5 till C7) are assigned to the Keyboard)
Combi 9 6 Octave
“6” – “Octave” (Samples 96 till 120 (C6 till C8) are assigned to the Keyboard)
Combi 10 7 Octave
“7” – “Octave” (Samples 108 till 127 (C7 till G8) are assigned to the Keyboard)
Thumb 1: SAMPLE - BANKS (Beta Only)Thumb 1: SAMPLE - BANKS (Beta Only)

The Sampler Thumb 1 Section, is in Beta testing.

No Combi details listed yet for this section.

Thumb 2: Set Key / TonalitySet Scale Key / Tonality

In the Sampler Shape, hold Thumb 2 to change the Tonality Key of the Kadabra. just like in Scaler and Harmoner shapes

Combi 1 C Do
“C” – “Do” (Sample bank now starts at the Tone C)
Combi 2 C# Re♭
“C#” – “Re♭” (Sample bank now starts at the Tone C#)
Combi 3 D Re
“D” – “Re” (Sample bank now starts at the Tone D)
Combi 4 D# Mi♭
“D#” – “Mi♭” (Sample bank now starts at the Tone D#)
Combi 5 E Mi
“E” – “Mi” (Sample bank now starts at the Tone E)
Combi 6 F Fa
“F” – “Fa” (Sample bank now starts at the Tone F)
Combi 7 F# Sol♭
“F#” – “Sol♭” (Sample bank now starts at the Tone F#)
Combi 8 G Sol
“G” – “Sol” (Sample bank now starts at the Tone G)
Combi 9 G# La♭
“G#” – “La♭” (Sample bank now starts at the Tone G#)
Combi 10 A La
“A” – “La” (Sample bank now starts at the Tone A)
Combi 11 A# Ti♭
“A#” – “Ti♭” (Sample bank now starts at the Tone A#)
Combi 12 B Ti
“B” – “Ti” (Sample bank now starts at the Tone B)
Thumb 3: -----Thumb 3: -----

Sampler Thumb 3 Section is empty.

No Combi details listed yet for this section.

Shape 3 · Light-Green color

Scaler

Scaler logo

Play melodies and solos on a scale.

The Scaler is for playing solos, tunes, and melodies inside a chosen Scale. It lets you set the Tonic, choose a known Scale, create a User-Scale, change Bass, and modify important tones while staying musically organized.
Back to top
FAQ, Tips & Shape infoOpen quick Scaler workflows
KeyHow do I change the Key / Tonic?
  1. Go to Scaler.
  2. Hold Thumb 2 (SET — KEY/TONIC).
  3. Press the Combi of the tone you want, for example Combi 1 (C / Do).
  4. Release Thumb 2 to continue playing with the new Tonic.
MajorHow do I set C Major?
  1. Go to Scaler.
  2. Hold Thumb 2 (SET — KEY/TONIC) and press Combi 1 (C / Do).
  3. Hold Thumb 3 (SET — SCALE).
  4. Hold or open Combi 1 (Major / Open Diatonics), then choose Combi 1 (Major).
UserHow do I create a User-Scale?
  1. Go to Scaler.
  2. Hold Thumb 3 (SET — SCALE).
  3. Press Combi 10 (Your Scale / Pick Tones).
  4. Press the tone Combis you want in the Scale.
  5. Release Thumb 3 to set the User-Scale.
ScaleHow do I change the Scale?
  1. Go to Scaler.
  2. Hold Thumb 3 (SET — SCALE).
  3. Press the Combi of the Scale you want, for example Combi 2 (Minor) or Combi 9 (Persian).
  4. For a mode of a Scale family, hold or open its Combi (Combi 1 Major, Combi 3 Harmonic, Combi 4 Melodic) and choose the mode.
  5. Release Thumb 3.
InfoWhat the Scaler is for

Scaler helps you play melodies and solos inside a selected Scale. The Keyboard follows the chosen Tonic and Scale, so the available tones stay musically related.

  • Thumb 1 changes the Bass / 1st Tone.
  • Thumb 2 changes the Tonic / Key.
  • Thumb 3 changes the Scale family, mode, or User-Scale.
TipTips
  • Set the Tonic first, then set the Scale.
  • Use Chromatic when you want all 12 half-tones available.
  • Use User-Scale when the song needs a custom tone selection.
  • Use Bass separately when the harmonic root should differ from the Tonic.
Interactive Scale explanation12 tones · C Major · Custom Scale

12-tone Scale builder

C Major (Diatonic)

Click the 12 chromatic tones to show how Kadabra keeps only the chosen tones active in a Scale. This example uses C as the Tonic.

What this means in Kadabra

A Scale is a chosen set of tones inside the 12 possible tones of an octave. In C Major, the active tones are C, D, E, F, G, A and B.

  • Thumb 2 (SET — KEY/TONIC) changes the Tonic, for example from C to D.
  • Thumb 3 (SET — SCALE) changes which tones are active in the Scale.
  • Chromatic means all 12 half-tones are available.
  • User-Scale lets you pick the active tones yourself.
Main SectionNo Thumb is held

In the Scaler Main Section, you can control how the Keyboard follows harmony, transpose the current Scale, change the Keyboard arrangement, and modify important Scale degrees.

  • Follow Harmony can make Scaler follow recorded harmonic changes from the Looper.
  • Key Arrangement changes how Scale tones are spread across the Keyboard.
  • ½ Tone Up / Down moves the Keyboard tones by half-tones.
  • Big / Small tone controls change the character of the Scale.
Combi 1 OFF Follow Harmony
Combi 2 SET Key Arrangement
Combi 3 ↓½ ½ Tone Down

PRESS: Move every tone in the Scaler Keyboard a half-tone down.

Combi 4 ↑½ ½ Tone Up

PRESS: Move every tone in the Scaler Keyboard a half-tone up.

Combi 5 KB KB Arrangement
Combi 6 ↕ Adjust Held Tone

PRESS: While holding a Keyboard Key, change the held Keyboard tone up or down. If no Keyboard Key is held, nothing happens.

Combi 7 5th 5th Decrease / Increase

PRESS: Decrease or increase the Scale 5th according to the current optimized direction.

Combi 8 3 Big / Small 3rd

PRESS: Change the 3rd between Major and minor when available.

Combi 9 7 Big / Small 7th

PRESS: Change the 7th between small 7 and big 7 when available.

Combi 10 9 Big / Small 9th

PRESS: Change the 9th between small 9 and big 9 when available.

Combi 11 11 Big / Small 11th

PRESS: Change the 11th between small 11 and big 11 when available.

Combi 12 13 Big / Small 13th

PRESS: Change the 13th between small 13 and big 13 when available.

Thumb 1: BASSSet the Bass / 1st Tone

The 12 Combis represent the 12 tones of an octave.

Hold Thumb 1 to set the Harmony's Bass / 1st Tone.

The Bass is the actual Tone of the chord, so changing that tone changes the chord a lot.

Combi 1 C Do

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Bass / 1st Tone to C.

Combi 2 C# Re♭

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Bass / 1st Tone to C#.

Combi 3 D Re

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Bass / 1st Tone to D.

Combi 4 D# Mi♭

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Bass / 1st Tone to D#.

Combi 5 E Mi

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Bass / 1st Tone to E.

Combi 6 F Fa

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Bass / 1st Tone to F.

Combi 7 F# Sol♭

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Bass / 1st Tone to F#.

Combi 8 G Sol

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Bass / 1st Tone to G.

Combi 9 G# La♭

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Bass / 1st Tone to G#.

Combi 10 A La

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Bass / 1st Tone to A.

Combi 11 A# Ti♭

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Bass / 1st Tone to A#.

Combi 12 B Ti

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Bass / 1st Tone to B.

Thumb 2: Set Key (Base Tone)set the Scale Key / Tonic

Hold Thumb 2 to choose the Key / Tonic. This changes the tone where the Scale starts.

Combi 1 C Do

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Key / Tonic so the Scale starts at C.

Combi 2 C# Re♭

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Key / Tonic so the Scale starts at C#.

Combi 3 D Re

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Key / Tonic so the Scale starts at D.

Combi 4 D# Mi♭

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Key / Tonic so the Scale starts at D#.

Combi 5 E Mi

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Key / Tonic so the Scale starts at E.

Combi 6 F Fa

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Key / Tonic so the Scale starts at F.

Combi 7 F# Sol♭

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Key / Tonic so the Scale starts at F#.

Combi 8 G Sol

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Key / Tonic so the Scale starts at G.

Combi 9 G# La♭

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Key / Tonic so the Scale starts at G#.

Combi 10 A La

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Key / Tonic so the Scale starts at A.

Combi 11 A# Ti♭

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Key / Tonic so the Scale starts at A#.

Combi 12 B Ti

PRESS: Sets the Scaler Key / Tonic so the Scale starts at B.

Thumb 3: Set Scalechoose Scale family, mode, or User-Scale

Just like holding the 3rd Thumb in the Harmoner shape:

Hold Thumb 3 to choose the active Scale, or a special scale (from the Pentatonic and Sextatonic scales) for a Keyboard Split (a scale in one keyboard row and a harmony in the other).

Some Combis directly set a Scale, and some open a deeper option menu with Scale families, modes/degrees, Chromatic behavior, or User-Scale tone picking.

Combi 1 SET Major / Open Diatonics
Combi 2 SET Minor

PRESS: Set Minor as the new Scale.

Combi 3 SET Harmonic / Open Diatonics
Combi 4 SET Melodic / Open Diatonics
Combi 5 5 Pentatonic Minor
Combi 6 6 Blues / Open Sextatonics
Combi 7 7 Specials / Open Scales
Combi 8 8 Half-Whole / Open 8 & More

PRESS: Beta only. Opens more 8-note Scale options when available.

Combi 9 SET Persian

PRESS: Set Persian as the new Scale.

Combi 10 SET Your Scale / Pick Tones

RELEASE: Release the Thumb button to set the User-Scale as the new Scale.

Combi 11 SET Degree
Combi 12 ON Chromatic

PRESS: Switch between Chromatic Scale on the Keyboard and the active Kadabra Scale.

Shape 4 · Dark-Green color

Harmoner

Harmoner logo

Play chords and harmonies of the whole song.

Harmoner is used mostly for playing chords and harmonies. It lets you explore Scale harmonies through their Harmonic Modes. Each chord change starts from a basic 1, 3, 5 chord and can be modified with 7, 9, 11, and 13 colors.
Harmoner can also change the Key, Scale, and Harmony of Relative Loops and Relative Sounds.
Back to top
FAQ, Tips & Shape infoOpen quick Harmoner workflows
C#mHow do I change the Harmony?
  1. Go to Harmoner.
  2. Use the Main Section.
  3. Press one of Combis 1–7 to choose the Harmonic Mode.
  4. The Keyboard and Relative sounds follow the new harmony.
7+How do I add 7, 9, 11, or 13?
  1. Go to Harmoner > Main Section.
  2. Choose the current Harmonic Mode.
  3. Press Combi 9 for 7, Combi 10 for 9, Combi 11 for 11, or Combi 12 for 13.
  4. Press again to remove that color when available.
LoopHow do I make Harmoner follow a recorded channel?
  1. Go to Harmoner.
  2. Hold Thumb 1 (Scale — Modify).
  3. Press Combi 1 (Follow Harmony).
  4. Choose the channel to follow.
InfoWhat Harmoner is for

Harmoner is the Shape for controlling song harmony. It turns Scale degrees into playable chords and lets Relative Sounds follow your harmonic story.

  • Main Combis 1–7 choose Harmonic Modes.
  • Combis 8–12 modify the present chord.
  • Thumb 2 changes Key / Tonic.
  • Thumb 3 changes the Scale.
TipTips
  • Start with 1,3,5 for a clear basic chord.
  • Add 7 for stronger harmonic direction.
  • Use 9, 11, and 13 for wider color and tension.
  • Change Key or Scale first if the harmonic colors feel wrong for the song.
Interactive Chord explanation1 · 3 · 5 · 7 · 9 · 11 · 13

Chord builder in C Major

C Major triad

The 12-tone octave contains all half-tones. The C Major Scale uses 7 of them: C, D, E, F, G, A, B. A basic chord uses 1, 3, and 5. Extensions reuse Scale degrees higher up: 9 = 2, 11 = 4, and 13 = 6.

C1 root
C#out
D2 / 9
D#out
E3
F4 / 11
F#out
G5
G#out
A6 / 13
A#out
B7

How Harmoner thinks about chords

A 1,3,5 chord is the basic triad. In C Major, that is C, E, and G.

  • 7 adds the 7th Scale degree: B.
  • 9 adds the 2nd Scale degree as a higher color: D.
  • 11 adds the 4th Scale degree as a higher color: F.
  • 13 adds the 6th Scale degree as a higher color: A.

Harmoner uses these relationships inside the active Scale, so the actual notes change when the Scale or Harmonic Mode changes.

Main SectionNo Thumb is held

In the Harmoner Main Section, the first 7 Combis choose the Harmonic Mode of the current Scale. The later Combis modify the present chord by changing the 3rd or adding/removing 7, 9, 11, and 13.

  • Press Combis 1–7 to move between Harmonic Modes.
  • Hold Combis 1–7 to open Combi-combination chord options.
  • Use Combis 8–12 to shape the present chord color.
Combi 1 1 1st Harmonic Mode

PRESS: Sets the 1st Harmonic Mode of the current Scale. This is usually the chord of the Scale Key.

Combi 2 2 2nd Harmonic Mode

PRESS: Sets the 2nd Harmonic Mode of the current Scale.

Combi 3 3 3rd Harmonic Mode

PRESS: Sets the 3rd Harmonic Mode of the current Scale.

Combi 4 4 4th Harmonic Mode

PRESS: Sets the 4th Harmonic Mode of the current Scale.

Combi 5 5 5th Harmonic Mode

PRESS: Sets the 5th Harmonic Mode of the current Scale.

Combi 6 6 6th Harmonic Mode

PRESS: Sets the 6th Harmonic Mode of the current Scale.

Combi 7 7 7th Harmonic Mode

PRESS: Sets the 7th Harmonic Mode of the current Scale.

Combi 8 3rd Major / Minor

PRESS: Changes the 3rd note of the present chord between Major and minor.

Combi 9 7 Add / Remove 7

PRESS: Adds or removes the 7th note of the present chord.

Combi 10 9 Add / Remove 9

PRESS: Adds or removes the 9th color of the present chord. The 9 is the 2nd Scale degree heard as an upper extension.

Combi 11 11 Add / Remove 11

PRESS: Adds or removes the 11th color of the present chord. The 11 is the 4th Scale degree heard as an upper extension.

Combi 12 13 Add / Remove 13

PRESS: Adds or removes the 13th color of the present chord. The 13 is the 6th Scale degree heard as an upper extension.

Thumb 1: Scale - ModifyModify Main Scale and harmony controls

Hold Thumb 1 to modify how Harmoner follows harmony, arranges notes, and places chord/scale material on Keyboard rows.

Combi 1LiveFollow Harmony
Combi 2SETKey Arrangement
Combi 3 ½↓ Half Tone Down

PRESS: sets every tone in the Keyboard a half tone down.

Combi 4 ½↑ Half Tone Up

PRESS: sets every tone in the Keyboard a half tone up.

Combi 5KBKB Arrangement
Combi 6 ↕ Held Tone Up/Down

PRESS: Adjusts the held tone up/down behavior of the present harmony or held Keyboard tone.

Combi 7 5th Decrease / Increase

PRESS: Adjusts the decrease / increase behavior of the present harmony or held Keyboard tone.

Combi 8 3 Major / Minor

PRESS: Adjusts the major / minor behavior of the present harmony or held Keyboard tone.

Combi 9 7 Small / Big 7

PRESS: Adjusts the small / big 7 behavior of the present harmony or held Keyboard tone.

Combi 10 9 Small / Big 9

PRESS: Adjusts the small / big 9 behavior of the present harmony or held Keyboard tone.

Combi 11 11 Small / Big 11

PRESS: Adjusts the small / big 11 behavior of the present harmony or held Keyboard tone.

Combi 12 13 Small / Big 13

PRESS: Adjusts the small / big 13 behavior of the present harmony or held Keyboard tone.

Thumb 2: Set Key (Base Tone)set the Scale Key / Tonic

Just like in the Sampler and Scaler shapes:

Hold Thumb 2 and press one of the 12 Combis to set the Scale Key / Tonic.

Changing the root of the scale changes the tonality feel and can make the Kadabra sync to other musical instruments' tones

Combi 1CDo

PRESS: Set the Harmoner Key / Tonic to C.

Combi 2C#Re♭

PRESS: Set the Harmoner Key / Tonic to C#.

Combi 3DRe

PRESS: Set the Harmoner Key / Tonic to D.

Combi 4D#Mi♭

PRESS: Set the Harmoner Key / Tonic to D#.

Combi 5EMi

PRESS: Set the Harmoner Key / Tonic to E.

Combi 6FFa

PRESS: Set the Harmoner Key / Tonic to F.

Combi 7F#Sol♭

PRESS: Set the Harmoner Key / Tonic to F#.

Combi 8GSol

PRESS: Set the Harmoner Key / Tonic to G.

Combi 9G#La♭

PRESS: Set the Harmoner Key / Tonic to G#.

Combi 10ALa

PRESS: Set the Harmoner Key / Tonic to A.

Combi 11A#Ti♭

PRESS: Set the Harmoner Key / Tonic to A#.

Combi 12BTi

PRESS: Set the Harmoner Key / Tonic to B.

Thumb 3: Set ScaleHold Thumb 3

Just like holding the 3rd Thumb in the Scaler shape:

Hold Thumb 3 to choose the active Scale, or a special scale (from the Pentatonic and Sextatonic scales) for a Keyboard Split (a scale in one keyboard row and a harmony in the other).

Some Combis directly set a Scale, and some open a deeper option menu with Scale families, modes/degrees, Chromatic behavior, or User-Scale tone picking.

Combi 1SETMajor / Diatonics
Combi 2 SET Minor

PRESS: Set Minor as the new Scale.

Combi 3SETHarmonic / Diatonics
Combi 4SETMelodic / Diatonics
Combi 5 5 Pentatonic Minor
Combi 66Blues / Sextatonics
Combi 77Specials
Combi 8 8 Half-Whole

Beta only — opens 8-note and more advanced options.

Combi 9 SET Persian

PRESS: Set Persian as the new Scale.

Combi 10SETYour Scale / Pick Tones
Combi 11SETDegree
Combi 12 ON Chromatic

PRESS: Switch between Chromatic Scale and the active Kadabra Scale.

Shape 5

Looper

Looper logo
Create rhythm, harmony and melodic material with two connected layers: a quantized Sequence and a repeating free-form recorded Loop.
The Sequence is beat-accurate and rhythm-aware: when you change its structure, the notes follow the new Pattern / Bar / Beat / Step structure automatically.
The Recorded Loop is a repeating capture that can be recorded freely without rhythm dependency. It can later be quantized into the Sequencer if you want tighter rhythmic control.
Back to top
FAQ, Tips & Shape infoOpen quick Looper workflows
QHow do I quantize a recorded Loop?
  1. Go to Looper.
  2. Record a free Loop with Combi 2 (Rec Loop).
  3. Target the Sequence / Loop behavior with Combi 3 if needed.
  4. Press Combi 7 (Quantize) to snap the notes to the active rhythmic structure.
SaveHow do I save a Sequence Pattern?
  1. Go to Looper.
  2. Prepare the Active Sound and Pattern.
  3. Press Combi 12 (Save Seq Pattern).
  4. Choose the destination as your workflow requires.
InfoWhat the Looper is for

The Looper lets you build music in two parallel ways: a tightly structured Sequencer and a free-form repeating Loop. Together they let you create beats, chord beds, melodic figures and live rhythmic edits.

  • Use Sequence when rhythm accuracy matters.
  • Use Recorded Loop when you want natural free capture.
  • Quantize the Loop later if you want it to behave like the Sequence.
TipTips
  • Choose the Pattern and Bar length before building a Sequence.
  • Use the Sample Container way for fast live results.
  • Use the Step Sequencer way for exact rhythmic control.
  • Keep Sequence and Loop conceptually separate: one is grid-based, the other is free capture.
Looper structure4 Patterns · Bars · Beats · Steps · Loop Length · Sequence Length · Static / Relative

Each sound (1-16) has 4 different Sequence Patterns, and 4 different Loop Patterns in the Looper

For the Sequences:
• A Pattern is made out of upto 4 Bars
• A Bar is made out of upto 4 Beats
• A Beat is made out of upto 4 Steps (set Beat structure in the Temper shape)
• A Step is made out of 24 frames
For the Loops:
• A Pattern is a free canvas where events are recorded in milliseconds
• notes, motion, harmonic changes and other events can be recorded
• Up to 4 Patterns can be recorded in a single recording

Lets visualize the structure

Pattern 1 · Loop Length 2 Bars · Sequence Length 2 Bars · Relative
Active Pattern
Loop Length
Sequence Length
Bar 1Bar 2Bar 3Bar 4

Free Recorded Loop layer

Extra melodic notes/events recorded freely in milliseconds. They are not forced into the Sequence Step order.

Loop length: 2 Bars
0 ms free timing, not Step grid 4-Bar canvas
selected Loop length
C E G B♭ A D F
Loop repeats here

Loop Length affects only the Loop layer. Changing it does not move, quantize, shorten, or remove Sequence notes.

Pattern line

Each horizontal line is one Pattern. The full line is divided into 4 Bars, each Bar is divided into 4 Beats, and each Beat is divided into 4 Steps.

Quantized Sequence

The Sequence is rhythm-aware and beat-accurate. If you change the rhythmic structure or Sequence Length, the notes follow the new structure automatically.

Recorded Loop

The recorded Loop is free-form inside the repeating Loop. It can later be quantized into the Sequencer, but it does not depend on the grid while being recorded.

Extra FeaturesLooper Extras
IImport a MIDI file into the Looper's sequence
  1. in your favorite DAW: create a MIDI part.
  2. Save that MIDI file in an easy to find location.
  3. In the Kadabra OS: go to Looper shape.
  4. Press the "I" Button (for Importing a MIDI file).
  5. Find the MIDI file and choose it.
  6. That's it, the file should become a part of your Looper's sequence in the chosen Pattern
EExport a MIDI file from the Looper's sequence
  1. in the Kadabra OS: go to the Looper: shape
  2. Create a MIDI Pattern in your Looper's sequence.
  3. Press the "E" button (for Exporting into a MIDI file) on the top right side of the Looper section
  4. Save that MIDI file in an easy to find location.
  5. In your chosen DAW: import the MIDI file.
Main SectionNo Thumb is held

In the Looper Main Section, you control the Active Sound’s Loop and Sequence behavior, play or stop the full Looper, record free Loops, quantize them, and save or load Sequence Patterns.

Combi 1 ■/▶ Play / Stop

PRESS: Start the Looper if it is stopped, or stop it if it is already running. All unmuted Loop and Sequence material follows together in sync.

Combi 2 🔴 Rec Loop

PRESS: Start or stop recording the repeating free-form Loop layer of the Active Sound.

Combi 3 SEQ Sequence / Loop / Both

PRESS: Choose whether Thumb 1 actions affect the Sequence, the recorded Loop, or both together.

Combi 4 / Reset

PRESS: Reset the Active Sound's current Loop / Sequence material according to the selected focus.

Combi 5 ■/▶ Sequence Aloud

PRESS: Enable hearing the quantized Sequence result while you create or edit it.

Combi 6 ■/▶ Loop Aloud

PRESS: Enable hearing the recorded Loop layer while editing it.

Combi 7 Q Quantize

PRESS: Quantize the targeted notes to the selected rhythmic structure.

HOLD: Use this when you want a free recorded Loop to snap tightly into the Sequencer structure.

Combi 8 Load Load Seq Pattern

PRESS: Load a previously saved Sequence Pattern into the Active Sound.

Combi 9 Notes Static Loop

PRESS: Toggle whether recorded Loop notes stay Static or remain musically Relative to Scale and Harmony.

Combi 10 Over Add To

PRESS: Choose whether new material overwrites or adds to the existing content.

Combi 11 F Loop-Fix

PRESS: Open repair / adjustment behavior for the recorded Loop.

HOLD: While holding, move the Wheel to shift the Loop start or end for rhythmic correction.

Combi 12 Save Save Seq Pattern

PRESS: Save the current Sequence Pattern of the Active Sound.

Thumb 1: Actions (to Seq/Loop/Both)Looping length and Patterns

In the Looper Thumb 1 Section, you can change the loop length of the loop, of the sequence or of both the loop and the sequence pattern. you can also choose a different pattern to work on and play, or choose multiple patterns that will loop after another by holding them in the desired order.

Combi 1 1/32 BAR Loop
“1/32” – “BAR” – “Loop”.
• Press: changes the Effected Inner Shape’s Looping Length to a 1/32 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 2 for 1/64 (Loop bar).
Combi 2 1/16 BAR Loop
“1/16” – “BAR” – “Loop”.
• Press: changes the Effected Inner Shape’s Looping Length to a 1/16 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 3 for 1/12 (Loop bar).
Combi 3 1/8 BAR Loop
“1/8” – “BAR” – “Loop”.
• Press: changes the Effected Inner Shape’s Looping Length to a 1/8 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 2 for 1/12, or Combi 4 for 3/16 (Loop bar).
Combi 4 1/4 BAR Loop
“1/4” – “BAR” – “Loop”.
• Press: changes the Effected Inner Shape’s Looping Length to a 1/4 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 3 for 3/16, or Combi 5 for 3/8 (Loop bar).
Combi 5 1/2 BAR Loop
“1/2” – “BAR” – “Loop”.
• Press: changes the Effected Inner Shape’s Looping Length to a 1/2 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 4 for 3/8, or Combi 6 for 3/4 (Loop bar).
Combi 6 1 BAR Loop
“1” – “BAR” – “Loop”.
• Press: changes the Effected Inner Shape’s Looping Length to 1 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 5 for 3/4, or Combi 7 for 3/2 (Loop bar).
Combi 7 2 BARs Loop
“2” – “BARs” – “Loop”.
• Press: changes the Effected Inner Shape’s Looping Length to 2 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 5 for 3/2, or Combi 7 for 3 (Loop bar).
Combi 8 4 BARs Loop
“4” – “BARs” – “Loop”.
• Press: changes the Effected Inner Shape’s Looping Length to 4 Bars
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 7 for 3 (Loop bars).
Combi 9 1 Pattern Seq & Loop
PATTERN 1.
• Press: changes the played Looper Pattern (Loop/Seq/both) to Pattern 1
• Hold: allows adding more patterns to follow Pattern 1 - for looping multiple patterns.
Combi 10 2 Pattern Seq & Loop
PATTERN 2.
• Press: changes the played Looper Pattern (Loop/Seq/both) to Pattern 2
• Hold: allows adding more patterns to follow Pattern 2 - for looping multiple patterns.
Combi 11 3 Pattern Seq & Loop
PATTERN 3.
• Press: changes the played Looper Pattern (Loop/Seq/both) to Pattern 3
• Hold: allows adding more patterns to follow Pattern 3 - for looping multiple patterns.
Combi 12 4 Pattern Seq & Loop
PATTERN 4.
• Press: changes the played Looper Pattern (Loop/Seq/both) to Pattern 4
• Hold: allows adding more patterns to follow Pattern 4 - for looping multiple patterns.
Thumb 2: Sequence creationTwo ways to build Sequences

There are two ways to create a sequence in the Looper by holding Thumb 2

• 8 Sample Containers - to write WHERE each sample/note happens in the Loop pattern.
• A Step Sequencer - each added sample/note is moving the marker to the next Step.
SC

Sample Container way

Build the Sequence using prepared tone / sound containers. This is quick for grooves, rhythmic riffs and repeated patterns where each press launches prepared content.

Combis 1–8 1–8 Sample Container buttons first eight containers
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Each Combi represents the Container for the note or sample.
• A Container holds the Static Note and its Relative-To-Harmony note.
• Hold a Combi and chose a note from the Keyboard to set the note into the Container.
• Note Velocity is added by the keyboard touch intensity for each added note/sample.
• Note Length is added by the keyboard touch length for each added note/sample.
Combi 9 (Note) Showing
Visualize the whole sequence.
• HOLD: to show all the notes in the Sequence.
Combi 10 🎧 Silent/Loud Keyboard
There are 2 options when Creating the Sequence.
• PRESS: to toggle between Silent and Loud Keyboard while creating the sequence.
• Silent Keyboard: notes/samples are added silently (good for creating a sequence live).
• Loud Keyboard: notes/samples are sounding when added (easier when creating a sequence).
Combi 11 Copy Hold to Copy
A Whole Pattern or a Bar can be duplicated into another Pattern or a different Bar.
• HOLD: Copies the Active Pattern and Active Bar, now press one of the Keyboard Keys:
• Key 17 - Duplicate the Copied Bar to Bar 1.
• Key 18 - Duplicate the Copied Bar to Bar 2.
• Key 19 - Duplicate the Copied Bar to Bar 3.
• Key 20 - Duplicate the Copied Bar to Bar 4.
• Key 21 - Duplicate the Copied Pattern to Pattern 1.
• Key 22 - Duplicate the Copied Pattern to Pattern 2.
• Key 23 - Duplicate the Copied Pattern to Pattern 3.
• Key 24 - Duplicate the Copied Pattern to Pattern 4.
Combi 12 1 Next Pack Beta Only
This is a Beta feature that adds another 8 Containers.
Step

Step Sequencer way

Program the Sequence step by step. Just like singing it. This is precise for creating Bass lines, melodic riffs and new rhythms. where a lot of keyboard is needed

The first 8 Combis are moving the Step position.
• Use Combi 1 to create a rhythmical tapping with step pauses.
• Use the other Combis to create Beat related patterns or jump Bars.
Combis 1–8 1–8 Step Sequencer buttons first eight edit positions
Combi 1 > Next Step move 1 step
just like a 1 step pause.
• PRESS: The Step position is going to the next step.
Combi 2 > Next Beat move 1 beat
go to the next beat.
• PRESS: The Step position is going to the next beat.
Combi 3 > Next Bar move 1 bar
go to the next bar.
• PRESS: The Step position is going to the next bar.
Combi 4 / Clear Step reset
clean the step.
• PRESS: The Step position is completely reset and empty.
Combi 5 < Prev Step 1 step back
go back and change that step.
• PRESS: The Step position is going to the previous step.
Combi 6 < Prev Beat 1 beat back
go to the next beat.
• PRESS: The Step position is going to the next beat.
Combi 7 < Prev Bar 1 bar back
go to the previous bar.
• PRESS: The Step position is going to the previous bar.
Combi 9 (Note) Showing
Visualize the whole sequence.
• HOLD: to show all the notes in the Sequence.
Combi 10 🎧 Silent/Loud Keyboard
There are 2 options when Creating the Sequence.
• PRESS: to toggle between Silent and Loud Keyboard while creating the sequence.
• Silent Keyboard: notes/samples are added silently (good for creating a sequence live).
• Loud Keyboard: notes/samples are sounding when added (easier when creating a sequence).
Combi 11 Copy Hold to Copy
A Whole Pattern or a Bar can be duplicated into another Pattern or a different Bar.
• HOLD: Copies the Active Pattern and Active Bar, now press one of the Keyboard Keys:
• Key 17 - Duplicate the Copied Bar to Bar 1.
• Key 18 - Duplicate the Copied Bar to Bar 2.
• Key 19 - Duplicate the Copied Bar to Bar 3.
• Key 20 - Duplicate the Copied Bar to Bar 4.
• Key 21 - Duplicate the Copied Pattern to Pattern 1.
• Key 22 - Duplicate the Copied Pattern to Pattern 2.
• Key 23 - Duplicate the Copied Pattern to Pattern 3.
• Key 24 - Duplicate the Copied Pattern to Pattern 4.
Combi 12 1 Next Pack Beta Only
This is a Beta feature that adds another 8 Containers.
Thumb 3: Mix - ChannelsThe Mixing Console

In the Looper Thumb 3 Section, hold Thumb 3 to change the Main Looper state (Mute) of other channels, not only the Active Sound. Flicking the 3rd Thumb changes the Active Sound's On/Off Mute state.

In Looper’s Thumb 3 Section, pressing the PRS force sensor will set the Channels Volume Fader (in the Kadabra-Player) by sending Midi CC 7 (can be assigned to any DAW’s Volume Fader).
Combis 1–12 ■/▶ (Sound Name) Sequence ■/▶ loop: ■/▶
A lit (when the Looper is not playing) or a flashing green (when the Looper is playing) Play sign (if the channel is in the Mix (not Midi-Muted)), or a red Stop sign (if that channel is Midi-Muted) – Sound Name (Default is “Sound ” and its Midi channel number) “ “ a play or stop sign for the Sequence only and play or stop sign for the Loop only – “sequence: ” a play or stop sign for the Sequence only “loop: “ a play or stop sign for the Loop only, or “SILENT” if the Looper of that sound is Muted.
• Holding one of the first 8 Combis and pressing one of the PRS buttons will send Fader Volume change (cc 7) (Beta only)
• Release: (without any changes made while held) inverts the selection between Muted and Playing the whole Looper of the selected sound (both Sequence and Loop can still be locally muted).
Shape 6

Arper

Arper logo
Trigger quantized phrases from the Keyboard: rhythm patterns, melodic riffs and harmonic note lines that stay synchronized to BPM, Scale and Harmony.
The Arper uses ready-made relative sequences. When you play a note, the Arper launches a quantized phrase from that note and aligns it musically to the current Scale and Harmony.
Like the Looper Sequencer, the Arper phrase structure is organized by Patterns → Bars → Beats → Steps. The phrase is rhythm-dependent and beat-synced.
Back to top
FAQ, Tips & Shape infoOpen quick Arper workflows
LoadHow do I load an Arper Pattern?
  1. Go to Arper.
  2. Choose the Active Sound.
  3. Press Combi 8 (Load Arp Pattern).
  4. Select the pattern you want to load.
SaveHow do I save an Arper Pattern?
  1. Go to Arper.
  2. Prepare the phrase and Pattern.
  3. Press Combi 12 (Save Arp Pattern).
  4. Confirm the destination according to your workflow.
InfoWhat the Arper is for

The Arper is a smart phrase launcher. It plays ready-made note sequences from touched Keyboard notes while keeping them aligned to BPM, Scale and Harmony.

  • Use it for rhythmic motifs.
  • Use it for melodic riffs and flowing phrases.
  • It can be Static or Relative depending on your needs.
TipTips
  • Use the Sample Container way when performing live and you want quick phrase packets.
  • Use the Step Sequencer way when building exact phrases.
  • Set the Scale / Harmony first so the Arper phrase lands musically.
  • Silent Keyboard mode helps you hear only the Arper result.
Arper Phrase structure4 Patterns · Bars · Beats · Steps · Loop Length · Full Sequence

Arper phrase structure

Pattern 1 · Loop Length 1 Bar · Full Sequence 4 Bars
Active Pattern
Loop Length
Bar 1Bar 2Bar 3Bar 4

Pattern line

Each horizontal line is one Pattern. The full line is divided into 4 Bars, each Bar is divided into 4 Beats, and each Beat is divided into 4 Steps.

Loop Length

Loop Length decides how much of the active Pattern repeats. It can be chosen in Beats or Bars, including 1 Beat, 2 Beats, 3 Beats and 4 Beats.

Full Sequence

The Arper phrase always keeps the full 4-Bar sequence active, as if Sequence Length is set to 4 Bars.

Main SectionNo Thumb is held

In the Arper Main Section, you launch, edit, reset, save and load Arper phrases. These phrases are quantized and stay tied to BPM, Scale and Harmony.

Combi 1 ■/▶ Arpeggiate

PRESS: Trigger the ready-made quantized Arper phrase from the played keyboard note.

Combi 3 Mode Step Sequencer / Sample Container

PRESS: switch between the two creation tools for the Arper's Sequence.

Use the Sample Container approach for creating a rhythmic Arper pattern from prepared note containers.

Use the Step Sequencer approach for programming the Arper one step at a time, advancing a step (16th) on each keyboard release.

Combi 4 / Reset

PRESS: Reset the current Arper phrase or clear the selected working layer.

Combi 6 Gate Gate Shape (beta)

PRESS: Edit the note-gate behavior of the Arper phrase.

Combi 7 Var Variation (beta)

PRESS: Change the phrase variation while keeping the same sequence structure.

Combi 8 Load Load Arp Pattern

PRESS: Load a saved Arper pattern for the Active Sound.

Combi 9 Notes Static Arp

PRESS: Toggle whether the Arper phrase behaves Static or Relative to the active Scale and Harmony.

Combi 10 OFF Silent Keyboard

PRESS: Choose whether the played keyboard note is heard directly or only the Arper result is heard.

Combi 11 Act Actions To

PRESS: Choose what the current edit action applies to in the Arper.

Combi 12 Save Save Arp Pattern

PRESS: Save the current Arper pattern of the Active Sound.

Thumb 1: ActionsLooping length and Patterns

In the Arper Thumb 1 Section, you can change the Arper sequence pattern. you can also choose a different pattern to work on and play, or choose multiple patterns that will loop after another by holding them in the desired order.

Combi 1 1/32 BAR Loop
“1/32” – “BAR” – “Loop”.
• Press: changes the Effected Inner Shape’s Looping Length to a 1/32 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 2 for 1/64 (Loop bar).
Combi 2 1/16 BAR Loop
“1/16” – “BAR” – “Loop”.
• Press: changes the Effected Inner Shape’s Looping Length to a 1/16 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 3 for 1/12 (Loop bar).
Combi 3 1/8 BAR Loop
“1/8” – “BAR” – “Loop”.
• Press: changes the Effected Inner Shape’s Looping Length to a 1/8 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 2 for 1/12, or Combi 4 for 3/16 (Loop bar).
Combi 4 1/4 BAR Loop
“1/4” – “BAR” – “Loop”.
• Press: changes the Effected Inner Shape’s Looping Length to a 1/4 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 3 for 3/16, or Combi 5 for 3/8 (Loop bar).
Combi 5 1/2 BAR Loop
“1/2” – “BAR” – “Loop”.
• Press: changes the Effected Inner Shape’s Looping Length to a 1/2 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 4 for 3/8, or Combi 6 for 3/4 (Loop bar).
Combi 6 1 BAR Loop
“1” – “BAR” – “Loop”.
• Press: changes the Effected Inner Shape’s Looping Length to 1 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 5 for 3/4, or Combi 7 for 3/2 (Loop bar).
Combi 7 2 BARs Loop
“2” – “BARs” – “Loop”.
• Press: changes the Effected Inner Shape’s Looping Length to 2 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 5 for 3/2, or Combi 7 for 3 (Loop bar).
Combi 8 4 BARs Loop
“4” – “BARs” – “Loop”.
• Press: changes the Effected Inner Shape’s Looping Length to 4 Bars
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 7 for 3 (Loop bars).
Combi 9 1 Pattern Seq & Loop
PATTERN 1.
• Press: changes the played Looper Pattern (Loop/Seq/both) to Pattern 1
• Hold: allows adding more patterns to follow Pattern 1 - for looping multiple patterns.
Combi 10 2 Pattern Seq & Loop
PATTERN 2.
• Press: changes the played Looper Pattern (Loop/Seq/both) to Pattern 2
• Hold: allows adding more patterns to follow Pattern 2 - for looping multiple patterns.
Combi 11 3 Pattern Seq & Loop
PATTERN 3.
• Press: changes the played Looper Pattern (Loop/Seq/both) to Pattern 3
• Hold: allows adding more patterns to follow Pattern 3 - for looping multiple patterns.
Combi 12 4 Pattern Seq & Loop
PATTERN 4.
• Press: changes the played Looper Pattern (Loop/Seq/both) to Pattern 4
• Hold: allows adding more patterns to follow Pattern 4 - for looping multiple patterns.
Thumb 2: Arper Sequence creationTwo ways to build Sequences

Holding Thumb 2 in the Arper exposes the two core creation approaches, similar to the Looper Sequence workflow.

SCSample Container way

Build the Sequence using prepared tone / sound containers. This is quick for grooves, rhythmic riffs and repeated patterns where each press launches prepared content.

  • Fast for live creation.
  • Good for drum hits, sliced material or any sample structure.
  • Useful when you want prepared content to be placed on the Sequence grid.
StepStep Sequencer way

Program the Arper Sequence step by step. This is handy and fast when you want to melodic riffs built in Steps, by playing the riff on your keyboard and jumping a Step, a Beat or a Bar when needed.

  • Excellent for musical riffs and sequences built by playing.
  • Easy to understand visually from the Pattern / Bar / Beat / Step structure.
  • Useful when changing the rhythmic structure later.
Thumb 3: On/Off - Arper ChannelsArper Console

In the Arper Thumb 3 Section, hold Thumb 3 to change Arper state of other channels, not only the Active Sound. Flicking the 3rd Thumb changes the Active Sound's On/Off Arper state.

Combis 1–12 ■/▶ (Sound Name)) ch: (#)
A lit (when the Arper is not playing) or a flashing green (when the Arper is playing) Play sign (if the channel is in the Mix (not Midi-Muted)), or a red Stop sign (if that channel is Midi-Muted) – Sound Name (Default is “Sound ” and its Midi channel number).
• Release: (without any changes made while held) inverts the selection between Muted and Playing the whole Looper of the selected sound (both Sequence and Loop can still be locally muted).
Shape 7 · Purple-Magenta color

Viber

Viber logo

Advanced dynamic looping for unique sounds.

VIBER can be activated from the SOUNDS shape for each sound, but when the Kadabra is in VIBER shape, and you hold one of its syncing Combis, and temporarily sync into different tempo beats, when the Combi is released, it will be controlled by Kadabra’s assigned Motion sensor.
The Viber’s Gate Length can be controlled by a Motion Sensor too, or tuned using Combis 11 and 12 in the Main Section. The Gate Length is the length of the notes inside each Viber loop, 100% means that the note will be played up till the next loop starts (this is why it is limited to 96%), 2% is the shortest note length possible.
The Viber also holds the Quantizer Shape. The Quantizer changes the played note (on the Keyboard) to play inside the tempo and rhythm of the Kadabra, and can be synced to many beat resolutions.
Back to top
FAQ, Tips & Shape InfoQuick Viber overview
InfoWhat does Viber control?

Viber controls synced rhythmic movement for a Sound. Its Speed and Gate Length can be controlled by Combis and by assigned Motion sensors.

TipGate length shortcut

Use Main Section Combis 11 and 12 to make the Viber Gate longer or shorter.

Dynamic loop lengthHow Viber stretches repeating notes

Viber repeats a loop. In this example there are 3 repeating notes. When the overall loop length becomes shorter, those notes become tighter and shorter. When the loop length becomes longer, the same notes spread out and widen — like stretching a picture to one side.

The loop length can be controlled dynamically, so the timing feel changes continuously. The Kadabra movement below illustrates that motion relationship: as the loop stretches, the Kadabra turns.

Short loopFast repetition, tighter note spacing, shorter note lengths.
Long loopSlower repetition, wider spacing, longer note lengths.
Same 3 notesThe notes stay the same, but the loop container stretches around them.

Interactive Viber loop illustration

Medium loop
ShortLong62%
Kadabra Sensors illustration
Turning the Kadabra changes the loop feel. The illustration rotates as the loop is stretched.
1
2
3
3-note Viber loopChanging the loop length stretches both the spacing and the note durations.
Main SectionNo Thumb is held

In the Viber Main Section, you can use the first 8 Combis to align the Viber loop rhythmically to the beat, combine those to reach in beat structures.

Combi 1 1/32 BAR Quantized Viber
“1/32” – “BAR” – “Quantized Viber”.
• Press: syncs the Viber’s loop length to a 1/32 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 2 for 1/64 (bar).
Combi 2 1/16 BAR Quantized Viber
“1/16” – “BAR” – “Quantized Viber”.
• Press: syncs the Viber’s loop length to a 1/16 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 3 for 1/12 (bar).
Combi 3 1/8 BAR Quantized Viber
“1/8” – “BAR” – “Quantized Viber”.
• Press: syncs the Viber’s loop length to a 1/8 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 2 for 1/12, or Combi 4 for 3/16 (bar).
Combi 4 1/4 BAR Quantized Viber
“1/4” – “BAR” – “Quantized Viber”.
• Press: syncs the Viber’s loop length to a 1/4 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 3 for 3/16, or Combi 5 for 3/8 (bar).
Combi 5 1/2 BAR Quantized Viber
“1/2” – “BAR” – “Quantized Viber”.
• Press: syncs the Viber’s loop length to a 1/2 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 4 for 3/8, or Combi 6 for 3/4 (bar).
Combi 6 1 BAR Quantized Viber
“1” – “BAR” – “Quantized Viber”.
• Press: syncs the Viber’s loop length to 1 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 5 for 3/4, or Combi 7 for 3/2 (bar).
Combi 7 2 BARs Quantized Viber
“2” – “BARs” – “Quantized Viber”.
• Press: syncs the Viber’s loop length to 2 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 5 for 3/2, or Combi 7 for 3 (bar).
Combi 8 4 BARs Quantized Viber
“4” – “BARs” – “Quantized Viber”.
• Press: syncs the Viber’s loop length to 4 Bars
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 7 for 3 (Loop bars).
Combi 9 SPEED Increase
An Arrow Up sign – “SPEED” – “Increase”.
• Press: increases the speed of the Viber’s loop (decreases its length)
Combi 10 SPEED Decrease
An Arrow Down sign – “SPEED” – “Decrease”.
• Press: decreases the speed of the Viber’s loop (increases its length)
Combi 11 GATE % Longer
An Arrow Up sign – “GATE ” Gate Percentage “%” – “Longer”.
• Press: increases the Gate Length.
Combi 12 GATE % Shorter
An Arrow Down sign – “GATE ” Gate Percentage “%” – “Shorter”.
• Press: decreases the Gate Length.
Thumb 1: Viber – ActionsControl your Vibers

In the Viber Thumb 1 Section, hold Thumb 1 to access these Combi functions:

Combi 1 ■/▶ Viber On/Off ch: (Active Sound)
• Press: Starts the Viber on the Active Sound.
Combi 2 🔒/🔓 Viber Flow free flow - no sync
• Press: Viber Motion switch between Synced Rhythm timing (🔒) and free flow (🔓)of the Viber.
Combi 3 ■/▶ SOLO ch: (Active Sound)
• Press: sets Viber On and all Vibers of other channels Off.
Combi 10 Q NO Quantize Keyboard Notes
• Press: Turns Quantizer On or Off on the Active Sound.
Thumb 2: Quantizer controlsQuantize your playing

In the Viber Thumb 2 Section, hold Thumb 2 to access Quantizer options for rhythmic structures.

Combi 1 1/32 BAR Quantized Keyboard
“1/32” – “BAR” – “Quantized Keyboard”.
• Press: syncs the Viber’s loop length to a 1/32 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 2 for 1/64 (bar).
Combi 2 1/16 BAR Quantized Keyboard
“1/16” – “BAR” – “Quantized Keyboard”.
• Press: syncs the Viber’s loop length to a 1/16 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 3 for 1/12 (bar).
Combi 3 1/8 BAR Quantized Keyboard
“1/8” – “BAR” – “Quantized Keyboard”.
• Press: syncs the Viber’s loop length to a 1/8 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 2 for 1/12, or Combi 4 for 3/16 (bar).
Combi 4 1/4 BAR Quantized Keyboard
“1/4” – “BAR” – “Quantized Keyboard”.
• Press: syncs the Viber’s loop length to a 1/4 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 3 for 3/16, or Combi 5 for 3/8 (bar).
Combi 5 1/2 BAR Quantized Keyboard
“1/2” – “BAR” – “Quantized Keyboard”.
• Press: syncs the Viber’s loop length to a 1/2 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 4 for 3/8, or Combi 6 for 3/4 (bar).
Combi 6 1 BAR Quantized Keyboard
“1” – “BAR” – “Quantized Keyboard”.
• Press: syncs the Viber’s loop length to 1 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 5 for 3/4, or Combi 7 for 3/2 (bar).
Combi 7 2 BARs Quantized Keyboard
“2” – “BARs” – “Quantized Keyboard”.
• Press: syncs the Viber’s loop length to 2 Bar
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 5 for 3/2, or Combi 7 for 3 (bar).
Combi 8 4 BARs Quantized Keyboard
“4” – “BARs” – “Quantized Keyboard”.
• Press: syncs the Viber’s loop length to 4 Bars
• Combine: hold it and press Combi 7 for 3 (Loop bars).
Combi 10 Q NO Quantize Keyboard Notes
• Press: Turns Quantizer On or Off on the Active Sound.
Thumb 3: On/Off other ChannelsViber Console

In the Viber Thumb 3 Section, hold Thumb 3 to change Viber state of other channels, not only the Active Sound. Flicking the 3rd Thumb changes the Active Sound's On/Off Viber state..

Combis 1–12 ■/▶ Sound Name Quantizer: On/Off
Each Combi is a different sound.
• Press: inverts the selection between Viber On (▶) and Viber Off (■) for the selected sound.
Shape 8 · Deep-Red color

FXer

FXer logo

Control knobs and faders of DAWs, VST instruments, and plugins.

The FXER is used to control the effects of the sound channels, open and set the exact amount of a knob of each Plugin in that Midi channel (REVERB, DELAY, EQ or whatever is on that channel). It controls AUDIO channels and INPUT channels, for levels, pan, AUX sends, etc, or any type of Instrument or plugin that needs a lot of tweaking...
In the OS, it is possible to right click on any FXer’s Combi effect to change how it is called (FX Name), pressing ESC will leave the name unchanged.
The Combi FX is the Control Change (CC) number that will be sent in the Midi Message to determine which knob to move in the DAW/V-Instrument/Plugin, the whole message will also have the Midi Channel and FX Amount.
Each Combi in the FXER shape’s Thumb Sections, holds a Combi FX and an FX Amount
Back to top
FAQ, Tips & Shape InfoQuick FXer overview
48How are FX controls organized?

FXer uses Main, Thumb 1, Thumb 2, and Thumb 3 as four banks of 12 Combis, reaching 48 plugin knobs, faders, and switches.

KBHow do I set an FX amount?

Hold the FX Combi you want to set, then touch a Keyboard amount button to choose one of the available 48 amount steps.

Combis as plugin knobs and faders4 banks × 12 Combis · 48 Keyboard steps · MIDI CC 0–127

In FXer, there are 4 Combi banks: Main, Thumb 1, Thumb 2, and Thumb 3. Each bank gives the 12 Combis a different set of controls, so the same 12 physical Combis can reach 48 plugin knobs, faders, sends, or MIDI CC targets.

Choose a bank in the illustration below: the 12 Combis stay in one horizontal line, but they change to that bank’s 12 targets. When a Combi is held, touching one of the Keyboard buttons sets that held control’s FX amount.

The Keyboard is shown as 24 vertical buttons in one column plus another 24 buttons staggered between them slightly to the right. Together they give 48 amount steps. These 48 performance steps are spread over the MIDI CC range of 0–127, so each touch moves the CC value by about 2–3 MIDI steps.

4 BanksMain + Thumb 1 + Thumb 2 + Thumb 3.
12 CombisOne horizontal Combi line per selected bank.
48 controls4 banks × 12 knobs/faders.
48 Keyboard steps128 MIDI CC values ÷ 48 ≈ 2.7 values per step.

Interactive FXer bank, Combi, and Keyboard amount illustration

Main · Combi 1 · Control 1/48
Keyboard amount buttons: 48 stepsHold a Combi, then touch a Keyboard button. The left column has 24 buttons; the right column adds 24 staggered buttons between them, giving 48 possible positions for the held knob/fader.
Kadabra Keyboard keys
Held Combi valueKeyboard Step 24/48 · CC 62Touch a Keyboard button to set the selected FXer control amount.
MIDI CC has 128 possible values: 0–127. FXer’s 48 Keyboard positions give fast performance control: 128 ÷ 48 ≈ 2.7 MIDI CC values per position.
Main SectionNo Thumb is held

In the FXer Main Section, you can use the first 8 Combis to control KPlayer's Plugins (On/Off) and the last 4 combis to fix specific amounts

Each Combi in the FXER shape’s Main Section holds a Combi FX and an FX Amount
Combi 1 ■/▶ Instrument (AU/VSTi) Turn it On/Off (cc #)
Play Sign (if the Instrument is ON) or Stop Sign (if the Instrument is OFF) – FX Name (Main Bank) “ - On” (if the Instrument is ON) or “ - Off” (if the Instrument is OFF) – “Turn it OFF (cc ” Combi FX “)" or “Turn it ON (cc ” Combi FX “)”.
• Pressing will switch the Instrument On or Off by sending Midi CC 84 (by default to control the K-Player’s Instrument) and the value 127 (on) or 0 (off).
• Hold: changes the Keyboard to the KB FX Configuration:
i. Touching a Keyboard Key will set that Held FX Amount to the amount of the Key.
• Hold: opens the option to assign a new Control Change (CC) message number to the Combi FX (by turning the Wheel up or down, adding or subtracting 1 from the CC Number).
Combi 2 ■/▶ Ch EQ (EQ on/Off) Turn it On/Off (cc#)
Play Sign (if EQ is ON) or Stop Sign (if EQ is OFF) – FX Name (Main Bank) “ - On” (if EQ is ON) or “ - Off” (if EQ is OFF) – “Turn it OFF (cc ” Combi FX “)" or “Turn it ON (cc ” Combi FX “)”.
• Pressing will switch the Plugin On or Off by sending Midi CC 87 (by default to control the K-Player’s Embedded EQ of the channel) and the value 127 (on) or 0 (off).
• Hold: changes the Keyboard to the KB FX Configuration:
i. Touching a Keyboard Key will set that Held FX Amount to the amount of the Key.
• Hold: opens the option to assign a new Control Change (CC) message number to the Combi FX (by turning the Wheel up or down, adding or subtracting 1 from the CC Number).
Combi 3 ■/▶ Pan Turn it On/Off (cc#)
Play Sign (if PAN is on Maximum Right) or Stop Sign (if PAN is on Maximum Left) – FX Name (Main Bank) “ - On” (if PAN is on Maximum Right) or “ - Off” (if PAN is on Maximum Left) – “Turn it OFF (cc ” Combi FX “)" or “Turn it ON (cc ” Combi FX “)”.
• Pressing will switch the Panning Left or Right by sending Midi CC 7 (by default to control the K-Player’s PAN of the channel) and the value 127 (Right) or 0 (Left).
• Hold: changes the Keyboard to the KB FX Configuration:
i. Touching a Keyboard Key will set that Held FX Amount to the amount of the Key.
• Hold: opens the option to assign a new Control Change (CC) message number to the Combi FX (by turning the Wheel up or down, adding or subtracting 1 from the CC Number).
Combi 4 ■/▶ Volume Turn it On/Off (cc#)
Play Sign (if Channel Volume is on maximum) or Stop Sign (if Channel Volume is OFF) – FX Name (Main Bank) “ - On” (if Channel Volume is on maximum) or “ - Off” (if Channel Volume is OFF) – “Turn it OFF (cc ” Combi FX “)" or “Turn it ON (cc ” Combi FX “)”.
• Pressing will switch the Channel Volume to maximum or minimum by sending Midi CC 10 (by default to control the K-Player’s Level of the channel) and the value 127 (maximum) or 0 (minimum).
• Hold: changes the Keyboard to the KB FX Configuration:
i. Touching a Keyboard Key will set that Held FX Amount to the amount of the Key.
• Hold: opens the option to assign a new Control Change (CC) message number to the Combi FX (by turning the Wheel up or down, adding or subtracting 1 from the CC Number).
Combi 5 ■/▶ Plugin 1 (AU/VST) Turn it On/Off (cc#)
Play Sign (if effect Plugin 1 is ON) or Stop Sign (if effect Plugin 1 is OFF) – FX Name (Main Bank) “ - On” (if effect Plugin 1 is ON) or “ - Off” (if effect Plugin 1 is OFF) – “Turn it OFF (cc ” Combi FX “)" or “Turn it ON (cc ” Combi FX “)”.
• Pressing will switch the Plugin On or Off by sending Midi CC 85 (by default to control the K-Player’s 1st Plugin of the channel) and the value 127 (on) or 0 (off).
• Hold: changes the Keyboard to the KB FX Configuration:
i. Touching a Keyboard Key will set that Held FX Amount to the amount of the Key.
• Hold: opens the option to assign a new Control Change (CC) message number to the Combi FX (by turning the Wheel up or down, adding or subtracting 1 from the CC Number).
Combi 6 ■/▶ Plugin 2 (AU/VST) Turn it On/Off (cc#)
Play Sign (if effect Plugin 2 is ON) or Stop Sign (if effect Plugin 2 is OFF) – FX Name (Main Bank) “ - On” (if effect Plugin 2 is ON) or “ - Off” (if effect Plugin 2 is OFF) – “Turn it OFF (cc ” Combi FX “)" or “Turn it ON (cc ” Combi FX “)”.
• Pressing will switch the Plugin On or Off by sending Midi CC 86 (by default to control the K-Player’s 2nd Plugin of the channel) and the value 127 (on) or 0 (off).
• Hold: changes the Keyboard to the KB FX Configuration:
i. Touching a Keyboard Key will set that Held FX Amount to the amount of the Key.
• Hold: opens the option to assign a new Control Change (CC) message number to the Combi FX (by turning the Wheel up or down, adding or subtracting 1 from the CC Number).
Combi 7 ■/▶ Plugin 3 (AU/VST) Turn it On/Off (cc#)
Play Sign (if effect Plugin 3 is ON) or Stop Sign (if effect Plugin 3 is OFF) – FX Name (Main Bank) “ - On” (if effect Plugin 3 is ON) or “ - Off” (if effect Plugin 3 is OFF) – “Turn it OFF (cc ” Combi FX “)" or “Turn it ON (cc ” Combi FX “)”.
• Pressing will switch the Plugin On or Off by sending Midi CC 88 (by default to control the K-Player’s 3rd Plugin of the channel) and the value 127 (on) or 0 (off).
• Hold: changes the Keyboard to the KB FX Configuration:
i. Touching a Keyboard Key will set that Held FX Amount to the amount of the Key.
• Hold: opens the option to assign a new Control Change (CC) message number to the Combi FX (by turning the Wheel up or down, adding or subtracting 1 from the CC Number).
Combi 8 ■/▶ Plugin 4 (AU/VST) Turn it On/Off (cc#)
Play Sign (if effect Plugin 4 is ON) or Stop Sign (if effect Plugin 4 is OFF) – FX Name (Main Bank) “ - On” (if effect Plugin 4 is ON) or “ - Off” (if effect Plugin 4 is OFF) – “Turn it OFF (cc ” Combi FX “)" or “Turn it ON (cc ” Combi FX “)”.
• Pressing will switch the Plugin On or Off by sending Midi CC 89 (by default to control the K-Player’s 4th Plugin of the channel) and the value 127 (on) or 0 (off).
• Hold: changes the Keyboard to the KB FX Configuration:
i. Touching a Keyboard Key will set that Held FX Amount to the amount of the Key.
• Hold: opens the option to assign a new Control Change (CC) message number to the Combi FX (by turning the Wheel up or down, adding or subtracting 1 from the CC Number).
Combi 9 # (FX Name) Hold to set (cc #)
FX Amount (for the Combi) – FX Name (Main Bank) – “Hold to Set (cc ” Combi FX “)”.
• Pressing will switch the Plugin On or Off by sending Midi CC 89 (by default to control the K-Player’s 4th Plugin of the channel) and the value 127 (on) or 0 (off).
• Hold: changes the Keyboard to the KB FX Configuration:
i. Touching a Keyboard Key will set that Held FX Amount to the amount of the Key.
• Hold: opens the option to assign a new Control Change (CC) message number to the Combi FX (by turning the Wheel up or down, adding or subtracting 1 from the CC Number).
Combi 10 # (FX Name) Hold to set (cc #)
FX Amount (for the Combi) – FX Name (Main Bank) – “Hold to Set (cc ” Combi FX “)”.
• Pressing will switch the Plugin On or Off by sending Midi CC 89 (by default to control the K-Player’s 4th Plugin of the channel) and the value 127 (on) or 0 (off).
• Hold: changes the Keyboard to the KB FX Configuration:
i. Touching a Keyboard Key will set that Held FX Amount to the amount of the Key.
• Hold: opens the option to assign a new Control Change (CC) message number to the Combi FX (by turning the Wheel up or down, adding or subtracting 1 from the CC Number).
Combi 11 # (FX Name) Hold to set (cc #)
FX Amount (for the Combi) – FX Name (Main Bank) – “Hold to Set (cc ” Combi FX “)”.
• Pressing will switch the Plugin On or Off by sending Midi CC 89 (by default to control the K-Player’s 4th Plugin of the channel) and the value 127 (on) or 0 (off).
• Hold: changes the Keyboard to the KB FX Configuration:
i. Touching a Keyboard Key will set that Held FX Amount to the amount of the Key.
• Hold: opens the option to assign a new Control Change (CC) message number to the Combi FX (by turning the Wheel up or down, adding or subtracting 1 from the CC Number).
Combi 12 # (FX Name) Hold to set (cc #)
FX Amount (for the Combi) – FX Name (Main Bank) – “Hold to Set (cc ” Combi FX “)”.
• Pressing will switch the Plugin On or Off by sending Midi CC 89 (by default to control the K-Player’s 4th Plugin of the channel) and the value 127 (on) or 0 (off).
• Hold: changes the Keyboard to the KB FX Configuration:
i. Touching a Keyboard Key will set that Held FX Amount to the amount of the Key.
• Hold: opens the option to assign a new Control Change (CC) message number to the Combi FX (by turning the Wheel up or down, adding or subtracting 1 from the CC Number).
Any Combi NAME Change the FX Name
Change the FX name using Right Click on the Combi and write the FX Name you want.
Thumb Effect BanksThumb 1 · Thumb 2 · Thumb 3

In FXer, Thumb 1, Thumb 2, and Thumb 3 are Effect Banks. Holding a Thumb changes the same 12 physical Combis to that bank’s 12 FX targets.

  • Thumb 1 = Effect Bank 1.
  • Thumb 2 = Effect Bank 2.
  • Thumb 3 = Effect Bank 3.
  • Together with Main, FXer reaches 48 plugin knobs, faders, and switches.
Combis 1–12FXFX targets inside the selected Effect Bank
Each Combi can hold an ON/OFF to disable and enable instruments, plugins, or other on/off switches inside instruments or plugins.
Showing the Midi amount in the circle and the given name in the main Combi text (can be set by right clicking the circle).
• Hold: changes the Keyboard to the KB FX Configuration, Touching a Keyboard Key will set that Held FX Amount to the amount of the Key.
• Hold: opens the option to assign a new Control Change (CC) message number to the Combi FX of Bank 3 (by turning the Wheel up or down, adding or subtracting 1 from the CC Number).
Effect Bank 1

Hold Thumb 1 to use Bank 1’s 12 FX Combi targets.

Effect Bank 2

Hold Thumb 2 to use Bank 2’s 12 FX Combi targets.

Effect Bank 3

Hold Thumb 3 to use Bank 3’s 12 FX Combi targets.

Shape 9 · Dark-Red color

Sounder

Sounder logo

Control and assign sounds to a Keyboard row.

For changing sounds, operate their features and assigning them to the Keyboard, to be played.
When Kadabra is in SOUNDS shape, you can pick a few sounds, and assign them to one of the Keyboard Rows, choose a main Active Sound for manipulation, and activate features like the Arper and Viber to it, you can change specific sounds from being STATIC (for samples) to being RELATIVE (for harmonic instruments), and many other Sound related actions.
In the OS, it is possible to right click on any Combi to change how it is called (Sound Name), pressing ESC will leave the name unchanged.
In Sounder’s Main Section, pressing the PRS force sensor will set the Channels Volume Fader (in the K-Player) by sending Midi CC 7 (can be assigned to any DAW’s Volume Fader).
Changing sounds can be interpreted as assigning a different sound to the Keyboard (used in Sounder’s Main section), but sometimes is used for actually changing the sound in the Kadabra-Player or the users DAW software.
Back to top
FAQ, Tips & Shape InfoQuick Sounder overview
1stWhat should I set first?

Choose the Active Sound before using Sounder actions. The Active Sound is the Sound that editing and Shape actions target

  1. Don’t hold a Thumb button.
  2. Choose the Active Sound (flick a Combi).
PRSHow do PRS controls affect volume?

PRS-1 changes the Active Sound Volume in a sticky way. PRS-2 changes the Active Sound Volume in a dynamic way.

  • Use it for rhythmic motifs.
  • Use it for melodic riffs and flowing phrases.
  • It can be Static or Relative depending on your needs.
KPTips for working with the KPlayer
  • Make sure you use the same Virtual Instrument in your KPlayer channel as chosen in Sounder -> Thumb 1 -> Combi 4.
  • Use Sounder -> Thumb 1 -> Combi 8, to select the relevant preset styles when loading.
  • Set a melodic sound to "Relative Loop" and "Relative Arp" by Holding to Thumb 1.
  • Start the Viber or Arper directly from Thumb 1 -> Combi 6 and 7
PRS volume controlPRS-1 sticky · PRS-2 dynamic · Active Sound volume

PRS controls the Active Sound channel volume. In Sounder, the PRS force sensor sends Volume control to the Active Sound’s channel, aligned with MIDI CC 7 / Channel Volume.

PRS-1 Sticky Volume

PRS-1 changes the Volume of the Active Sound in a sticky way: the last pressure value becomes the Active Sound volume and stays there after the touch is released.

PRS-1set & keep
Active Sound Volumestays
pressreleasevolume remains

PRS-2 Dynamic Volume

PRS-2 changes the Volume of the Active Sound in a dynamic way: the volume follows the live pressure movement while you play, instead of becoming the sticky stored level.

PRS-2live move
Active Sound Volumefollows
pressmove pressurelive volume
Active Sound target: PRS volume control is aimed at the currently Active Sound, so choosing another Active Sound changes which channel volume the PRS action controls.
Main SectionPick a few sounds to each keyboard row

In the Sounder Main Section, you can use the 12 Combis to select which sounds will be playable in the Keyboard and in which Keyboard Row

In Sounder’s Main Section, the Combi’s shown on the OS have an extra Volume part on their top with a Volume amount that can be aligned with the Channel’s Volume Fader.
Combis 1–12 Ch. Each Combi is a different sound channel any group of channels can be Used In any Keyboard row
the Combi Circle says: Midi Channel number.
the Combi Title says: Sound Name (Default is just Sound 1 / Sound 2 / Sound 3... and so on, depending on the Midi channel number)
The Combi Extra text says: “Play Sound” or “Used In Keyboard” (for sounds that are used in both rows of the Keyboard) or “In Keyboard Row“ and then the row number (for sounds that are only used in that row).
• Hold: allows adding more Combi Sounds to the Keyboard, the first Combi that was held will become the Active Sound.
• Hold: lets the player touch one of the Keyboard rows (any Key of the row):
i. Touching a Keyboard Key will insert that sound (and any Sound that its Combi was held together) to that Keyboard Row.
• Release: adds the Held Combis to the Keyboard, or if a Keyboard Row was touched when the Combis were held, adds the Held Combis to that Keyboard row.
Thumb 1: Set ActionsActive Sound's Main Controls

for your chosen Active Sound, this is the section to control it. From selecting the VST/AU instrument type and deciding if its a rhythmic or melodic instrument, to controling if it is playing in the looper, has a Viber or Arper on and many more.

The Follow Harmony Combi Menu is similar to the Harmoner’s Thumb 1 Follow Harmony Combi Menu
Combi 1 / Follow Harmony Recorded in the Loop
The Followed Sound Channel (if the Active sound is in Static-Mode in the Looper there will be a “/” on the number) – “Follow Harmony” – “Recorded in the Loop” or “Don’t”.
• Press: opens a new Combi option:
i. Combis 1-8: Channel Number – Sound Name – “channel ” Channel Number.
• Press: Makes the Active Sound follow the Selected Sound’s Harmonies that were recorded in its Loop (if playing).
• Press: Makes the Active Sound follow its own Harmonies that were recorded in its Loop (if playing).
• Press: in Static mode: Disables any following of Harmonies, Looped or played Live. In Relative Mode: Makes the Active Sound follow any Harmonic changes made live, while playing.
• Stays in the present Harmonic Mode
• changes Combis 1 till 8 (channels 1 to 8), to channels 9-16 for Combis 1 to 8 respectively
Opened option menu This image and the options are shown only because this Combi opens a deeper option set.
Option Combi 9 Follow Own Harmony
Option Combi 10 / Don’t Follow Harmonies
Option Combi 11 Keep Harmony
Option Combi 12 Sounds 1-8 Sounds 9-16
Combi 2 On To Balls Row To Balls Row
Set chosen sounds to the Balls row only
Combi 3 On to Bars Row To Bars Row
Set chosen sounds to the Bars row only
Combi 4 🎹 AU / VST Used Integrated features
Connect to integrate an AU or VST to the specific Active Sound, for Program Change and other functionality
Combi 5 ■/▶ Looper
A Play Sign or a Stop Sign – “Looper “ a play or stop sign for the Sequence only and play or stop sign for the Loop only – “ch: “ Active Sound’s Channel Number “ seq:” a play or stop sign for the Sequence only “ loop:” a play or stop sign for the Loop only.
• Press: Mutes or Unmutes the Midi notes of the Active Sound for the whole Looper, seq and loop can still be muted locally for that Sound inside the Looper.
Combi 6 ■/▶ Arper
A Play Sign or a Stop Sign – “Arper“ - “ch: “ Active Sound’s Channel Number.
• Press: Enables or Disables the Arper of the Active Sound.
Combi 7 ■/▶ Viber
A Play Sign or a Stop Sign – “Viber“ - “ch: “ Active Sound’s Channel Number.
• Press: Enables or Disables the Viber of the Active Sound.
Combi 8 🎹 Instrument
The Initials of the Companion Instrument of the sound – “Instrument” – The name of the Companion Instrument selected for the Active Sound.
• Press: opens a new Combi option:
• Press: Picks Melodic Instrument as the Companion Instrument for the Active Sound.
• Press: Picks Kadabra’s dedicated Electronic Drumkit Virtual Instrument as the Companion Instrument for the Active Sound.
• Press: Picks Kadabra’s dedicated Percussion Virtual Instrument as the Companion Instrument for the Active Sound.
• Press: Picks Kadabra’s dedicated Acoustic Drums Virtual Instrument as the Companion Instrument for the Active Sound.
• Press: Picks the 1st User Instrument as the Companion Instrument for the Active Sound.
• Press: Picks the 2nd User Instrument as the Companion Instrument for the Active Sound.
• Press: Picks the 3rd User Instrument as the Companion Instrument for the Active Sound.
• Press: Picks the 4th User Instrument as the Companion Instrument for the Active Sound.
Opened option menu This image and the options are shown only because this Combi opens a deeper option set.
Option Combi 1 M Melodic Instrument Any Melodic Instrument
Option Combi 2 ED Electronic Drums KDBR-Sampler
Option Combi 3 P Percussion KDBR-Sampler
Option Combi 4 AD Acoustic Drums KDBR-Sampler
Option Combi 9 U1 User Bank 1 User Sequences
Option Combi 10 U2 User Bank 2 User Sequences
Option Combi 11 U3 User Bank 3 User Sequences
Option Combi 12 U4 User Bank 4 User Sequences
Combi 9 🔒/🔓 Static / Relative Looper Relative Loop
“Notes” – “Static Loop” or “Relative Loop” – “set to Relative” or “set to Static”.
• Press: switches between Static-Mode and Relative-Mode for the Active Sound in the Looper.
Combi 10 🔒/🔓 Static / Relative Arper Relative Arp
“Notes” – “Static Arp” or “Relative Arp” – “set to Relative” or “set to Static”.
• Press: switches between Static-Mode and Relative-Mode for the Active Sound in the Arper.
Combi 11 OFF Quantizer Quantizer
“OFF” or “ON” – “Quantizer” – “set to ON” or “set to OFF”.
• Press: switches between using the Quantizer and not using the Quantizer for the Active Sound.
Combi 12 → Sounds 4-16 go to 4-16
An Arrow Right Sign or an Arrow Left Sign – “Sounds 1-12” or “Sounds 4-16” – “go to 4-16” or “go to 1-8”.
• Press: switches between showing the first 12 Sounds and the other 12 sounds 4 to 16, mostly used for picking the sounds in the Sounder shape, and in “Mix Channels” (Thumb 3) of the Looper, the Arper, Viber and some other feature that need to reach sounds 13, 14, 15, and 16.
Thumb 2: Change SoundProgram Change and other Synth controls

In the Sounder Thumb 2 Section, hold Thumb 2 to access Preset change inside a Sound (a Midi channel that uses a Synth or a Sampler).

You can set a few sounds in the same synth and save each sound in one of the first 8 different combis, then jump between those sounds easily

Combi 1 12 To Sound (Program change number)
Change the preset of the synth to that sound exactly.
• Press: picks that sound preset number and sends a program change midi message to switch to that sound.
Combi 2 15 To Sound (Program change number)
Change the preset of the synth to that sound exactly.
• Press: picks that sound preset number and sends a program change midi message to switch to that sound.
Combi 3 16 To Sound (Program change number)
Change the preset of the synth to that sound exactly.
• Press: picks that sound preset number and sends a program change midi message to switch to that sound.
Combi 4 17 To Sound (Program change number)
Change the preset of the synth to that sound exactly.
• Press: picks that sound preset number and sends a program change midi message to switch to that sound.
Combi 5 18 To Sound (Program change number)
Change the preset of the synth to that sound exactly.
• Press: picks that sound preset number and sends a program change midi message to switch to that sound.
Combi 6 19 To Sound (Program change number)
Change the preset of the synth to that sound exactly.
• Press: picks that sound preset number and sends a program change midi message to switch to that sound.
Combi 7 20 To Sound (Program change number)
Change the preset of the synth to that sound exactly.
• Press: picks that sound preset number and sends a program change midi message to switch to that sound.
Combi 8 21 To Sound (Program change number)
Change the preset of the synth to that sound exactly.
• Press: picks that sound preset number and sends a program change midi message to switch to that sound.
Combi 9 ↑ Program (the Sound Preset number that will be when jumping a preset up)
Load the Next Program (Preset) in the Bank.
• Press: picks the next preset above the sound preset in the chosen Bank - it sends a program change midi message to switch to that sound.
Combi 10 ↓ Program (the Sound Preset number that will be when jumping a preset down)
Load the Previous Program (Preset) in the Bank.
• Press: picks the previous preset above the sound preset in the chosen Bank - it sends a program change midi message to switch to that sound.
Combi 11 ↑ Bank (the Sound Preset number that will be when jumping a preset Bank Up)
Load the Next Program Bank of the AU/VST.
• Press: picks 1 Preset below the Sound Preset and sends a Program Change Midi message to switch to that sound.
Combi 12 ↓ Bank (the Sound Preset number that will be when jumping a preset Bank Down)
Load the Previous Program Bank of the AU/VST.
• Press: picks the previous Preset Bank under the chosen sound's Preset Bank - it sends a Bank change midi message to switch to that Bank.
Thumb 3: Set ActiveChoose a different Active Sound

In the Sounder Thumb 3 Section, hold Thumb 3 to choose an Active Sound. an Active Sound is the sound that is being changed when setting any sound setting like:

Changing a Preset in the synth
Switching Looper between Relative to Static Mode
Changing Loop/Seq Length
Changing Loop/Seq Pattern
Switching Arper between Relative to Static Mode
Switching Viber On / Off
Changing the Pitchbend axis in the Motion
These are all channel related, and works only on the Active Sound
Combis 1–12 # (Sound Name) Set as Active
Midi Channel number – Sound Name (Default is “Sound ” and its Midi channel number) – “Set as Active”.
• Press: Selects the Sound (Midi channel) stated in the Combi as the Active Sound. An Active Sound is the sound that is being changed when setting any sound setting like:
Changing a Preset in the synth
Switching Looper between Relative to Static Mode
Changing Loop/Seq Length
Changing Loop/Seq Pattern
Switching Arper between Relative to Static Mode
Switching Viber On / Off
Changing the Pitchbend axis in the Motion
These are all channel related, and works only on the Active Sound
Shape 10 · Lime-Green color

Arranger

Record and arrange MIDI and Kadabra actions.

(Beta Only)
Shape 11 · Dark-Grey color

Shaper

Shaper logo

Set your most-used Shapes into your Shifters.

For Assigning Shapes into Shifters and choosing a Main Shape.
Shifter buttons can be assigned to other Shapes using the SHAPER Shape, Shifters are used to quickly turn your Kadabra into a different instrument (shape) for a moment and use the shape's special features while playing.
The “Assigned Shifter” is the Shifter that has the mentioned Shape assigned to it.
A Held Thumb will act exactly as a Held Shifter and will assist in assigning a Shape to a Shifter, Thumb 1 for Shifter 1, Thumb 2 for Shifter 2 and Thumb 3 for Shifter 3.
To reach the Shaper: hold all 3 Shifters together. The Shaper opens, and you can let go of them: you stay in the Shaper.
Back to top
FAQ, Tips & Shape InfoQuick Shaper overview
QHow do I get to the Shaper?
  1. Hold Shifter 1, Shifter 2 and Shifter 3 together.
  2. The Shaper appears on the Kadabra OS screen.
  3. Let go of the Shifters: you stay in the Shaper.
QHow do I put a Shape into a Shifter?
  1. Hold all 3 Shifters together to get to the Shaper, then let go of them.
  2. Hold the Shifter you want it in (or its Thumb: Thumb 1 for Shifter 1, Thumb 2 for Shifter 2, Thumb 3 for Shifter 3).
  3. Keep holding it and press the Shape's Combi, for example Combi 4 for the Harmoner.
  4. Let go. The screen shows “IN SHIFTER” and the Shifter's number over that Shape; you stay in the Shaper.
QHow do I choose my Main Shape?
  1. Hold all 3 Shifters together to get to the Shaper, then let go of them.
  2. Hold no Shifter and no Thumb.
  3. Press the Shape's Combi: it becomes your Main Shape (“MAIN SHAPE” over it), and the Kadabra shifts into it.
MAPWhich Combi is which Shape in the Shaper?

The Shaper's 12 Combis are the Shapes, in this order (down the columns of its screen):

CombiShapeCombiShapeCombiShape
1Performer5Looper9Sounder
2Sampler6Arper10Shaper
3Scaler7Viber11Master
4Harmoner8FXer12Setuper (“SETUP”)

The Temper and the Senser are not in the Shaper: they have their own buttons, Util 1 (Temper) and Util 3 (Senser). The Master has its own button too: Util 2.

ShiftWhat does Shaper assign?

Shaper assigns Shapes into Shifter buttons and chooses the Main Shape. Shifters let Kadabra temporarily act as another Shape while playing.

ThumbWhy one Thumb block?

Thumbs in Shaper do not open separate option sets. They are used in the Main Section to target Shifter 1, Shifter 2, or Shifter 3.

Main SectionNo Thumb is held

In the Shaper Main Section, you can choose your MAIN shape (the one that is Active if no other Shifter was chosen), or to assign a Shape to a Shifter in the Kadabra by holding that Shifter before chosing a Shape

Combis 1–12 M (Shape Name) As Main / In Shifter
“” or “MAIN” or the Assigned Shifter Number – Shape Name – “as MAIN shape” or if a Thumb or Shifter is held then “to Shifter ” Shifter number.
• Press: when no Shifter or Thumb is held: will set the selected Shape as the Main Shape and shift into it immediately.
• Press: when a Shifter or a Thumb is held: will assign the selected Shape to that Held Shifter and stays in the Shaper Shape.
Thumb ShiftersThumb 1 · Thumb 2 · Thumb 3

In Shaper, the three Thumbs do not open separate option banks. They are used in the Main Section to target Shifter 1, Shifter 2, or Shifter 3.

  • Thumb 1 = Into Shifter 1.
  • Thumb 2 = Into Shifter 2.
  • Thumb 3 = Into Shifter 3.
Thumbs in the Shaper Shape are not opening any options, they are only used in the Main Section.

No separate Thumb Combi details are listed because Shaper Thumbs work together with the Main Section.

Shape 12 · Brown color

Setuper

Setuper logo

Calibrate and set up system behavior.

Set your Kadabra’s Lights level, Thread speed and other features that can help in calibrating usage to your needs and supporting equipment.
Back to top
FAQ, Tips & Shape InfoQuick Setuper overview
InfoWhat is Setuper for?

Setuper is for Kadabra setup features such as Lights level, Thread speed, calibration, usage needs, and supporting equipment.

TipCalibrate your system

If you are experiancing any slow keyboard response, it might be because the OS is guarding your computer's performance where it shouldn't, just hold thumb 1 and try calibrating your system to the fastest options for each thread.

Main SectionNo Thumb is held

In the Setuper Main Section, you can change basic Kadabra settings like visuals, Auto-Save, and safety frames.

Combi 1 1 GUI Design Type small touches
Design Type – “GUI Design Type” – “small touches”
Combi 2 5 AUTO-SAVE pause between
Time in Minutes Seconds - for every Auto-Save
• Hold: changes the Keyboard to something like the KB FX Configuration to choose the amount of pause between each Auto-Save.
• Holding the Combi and Touching the Keyboard sets the Auto-Save Pause Amount.
Combi 5 0 KB Damaged touch KB sensor
Set a Keyboard key that is damaged and it is better be disabled
• Hold: lets the player remove Keyboard Keys that are malfunctioning, if a Keyboard Key is switching on and off without relevance to playing, the Keyboard Key can be removed from the OS not to disturb the rest of the functionality. Please make sure to contact your Kadabra Vendor to appoint a lab-fix in that case.
Combi 6 40 Button Damage On/Off Minimum Speed
Set a button (like a Combi or a Shifter) not to retrigger on release by mistake”
• Press: opens a Combi option to change the minimum time for pressing a Combi:
i. Combi 1-12: Milliseconds – “Milliseconds” – “On/Off Min. Speed”
ii. Pressing a different speed will change the protection buffer for damaged buttons, buttons that are sending 2 triggers per press can be avoided this way, but that protection delays any press by those buttons. Please make sure to contact your Kadabra Vendor to appoint a lab-fix in that case.
Opened option menu This image and the options are shown only because this Combi opens a deeper option set.
Combi 7 30 Viber Minimum Speed (in milliseconds)
Milliseconds and “Millis” – “Viber Minimum” – “Speed”
• Holding changes title to: Milliseconds – “ Viber Min. Speed” – “touch KB for length”
• Hold: changes the Keyboard to something like the KB FX Configuration to choose the minimum length of the Viber’s Loop (to low can cause missing note-off Midi messages).
• Holding the Combi and Touching the Keyboard sets the minimum Viber Loop length to the Kadabra.
Combi 8 100 Lights Level Change
Your Kadabra’s Lights Levels – “Lights Level” – “Change”
• Press: opens a Combi option to change the Lights intensity of your Kadabra:
i. Combi 1-12: Your Kadabra’s Lights Levels – “Lights Level” – “for Kadabra’s Lights”
ii. Pressing will change the Lights level to a connected Kadabra. That Kadabra will always start with those light’s levels until changed here again.
Opened option menu This image and the options are shown only because this Combi opens a deeper option set.
Combi 9 BG Background Type
“NO BG” or “SPACE BG” – “Background” – “Type”
• Hold: opens a Combi option to change the background of your Kadabra OS:
• Pressing will change the background to a clear color of the shapes.
•
• Pressing will change the background to space images in the shapes color.
Opened option menu This image and the options are shown only because this Combi opens a deeper option set.
Option Combi 1 NO BG Background Set Color Only
Option Combi 2 SPACE BG Background Set Space Images
Combi 10 Keys LOUD in creating sequences
“LOUD” - “KEYS” – “in creating sequences” (Beta Only)
Combi 11 # All Sounds Is effected
“” – “Active Sound” or “All Sounds” – “Is effected” or “are effected” (Beta Only)
Combi 12 0 GUI Angle touch KB for angle
0 till 4.00 – “GUI Angle” – “touch KB for angle”.
• Hold: changes the Keyboard to something like the KB FX Configuration to choose the angle of the Combi area of the Kadabra OS, 0 is square, 4 is the maximum angle.
Thumb 1: System PerformanceCalibrate Kadabra OS for your computer's performance

In the Setuper Thumb 1 Section, hold Thumb 1 to access System Performance Combi functions. Different threads are controlling different actions, they can be calibrated for your specific usage

Combi 1 16 Main Thread Low = Max Performance
Main Software Thread – Effecting All system Performance
• Action HOLD: changes the Keyboard's lighting. touching the keyboard - lets you select the speed of the Main Thread/Core of the Kadabra OS software. the change can effect the Kadabra's response VERY much! the lowest the value (top of the keyboard), the faster the thread is.
Combi 2 0.2 Play Thread Low = Max Performance
Playing Thread – Effecting touch to Midi response speed
• Action HOLD: changes the Keyboard's lighting. touching the keyboard - lets you select the speed of the Playing communication thread of the Kadabra OS software. this changes Kadabra's playing response! the lowest the value (top of the keyboard), the faster the thread is.
Combi 3 0.2 BPM Thread Low = Max Performance
Beat Thread – Effecting Beat accuracy (jitter)
• Action HOLD: changes the Keyboard's lighting. touching the keyboard - lets you select the speed of the BPM thread of the Kadabra OS software. this changes Kadabra's beat accuracy! the lowest the value (top of the keyboard), the faster the thread is.
Combi 4 0.2 Midi Thread Low = Max Performance
Midi Thread – Effecting Smart Midi Effects accuracy (Looper, Sequencer, Arper, Viber, Quantizer)
• Action HOLD: changes the Keyboard's lighting. touching the keyboard - lets you select the speed of the Midi thread of the Kadabra OS software. this changes Kadabra's Beat accuracy for any Midi effect used (Looper, Arper, Viber, Quantizer)! the lowest the value (top of the keyboard), the faster the thread is.
Thumb 2: Kadabra CalibrationCalibrate internal features inside the Kadabra

In the Setuper Thumb 2 Section, hold Thumb 2 to access Kadabra Calibration Combi functions.

The functions you choose here to perform, are BURNING your Kadabra's brain to be more accurate for your usual environment, your specific needs and the delicate chip placing that every electronic equipment has, but can be important to calibrate in a musical instrument.

Combi 1 6 Keyboard Pulse Keyboard vs. Battery
“6” – “Keyboard Pulse” – “Keyboard vs. Battery”.
• Action HOLD: changes the Keyboard to something like the KB FX Configuration to choose the speed of the Keyboard scanning inside the Kadabra (not in the Kadabra OS software). the change can effect the Kadabra's keyboard response VERY much! but can also make it too unstable in areas of intence communication frequencies. the lowest the value (top of the keyboard), the faster the scan is. faster scans are taking more battery.
Combi 2 7 Keyboard Touch Hold and move Wheel
“7” – “Keyboard Touch” – “Hold and move Wheel”.
• Action HOLD: by holding this Combi and moving the Wheel, you can change the response for Keyboard touch sensitivity. extreme enviroments (like high humidity) can change the touching response and even create a phantom touch, this is the placed to calibrate the Keyboard touch response! dont change it too far away so it can respond to your playing without missing notes or triggering notes from finger proximity. the lower the value (1), the more sensitive the Keyboard is.
Combi 3 8 Keyboard Release Hold and move Wheel
“8” – “Keyboard Release” – “Hold and move Wheel”.
• Action HOLD: by holding this Combi and moving the Wheel, you can change the response for Keyboard release sensitivity. extreme enviroments (like high humidity) can change the touching response and even create a missing release for a keyboard touch, this is the placed to calibrate the Keyboard release response! dont change it too far away so it can respond to your note release without missing a note off signal. the lower the value (1), the more sensitive the Keyboard release is.
Combi 5 A Accelerometer getting values
“A” – Accelerometer – “getting values”.
• Action PRESS: by pressing this Combi the Accelerometer scaning and communication can be disabled and the system can have more resources to deal with communication issues and system performance issues. a last resort for an old system.
Combi 6 20 Motion Pulse Default is 80
“20” – “Motion Pulse” – “Default is 80”.
• Action HOLD: much like the keyboard pulse, it changes the Keyboard to something like the KB FX Configuration to choose the speed of the motion scanning inside the Kadabra (not in the Kadabra OS software). the change can effect the Kadabra's motion smoothness VERY much! but can also make it too unstable in areas of intence communication frequencies and send too many Midi messages and block the system. the lowest the value (top of the keyboard), the faster the scan is. faster scans are taking more battery.
Combi 7 C Gyroscope press to calibrate
“C” – “Gyroscope” – “press to calibrate”.
• Action PRESS: by pressing this Combi, the Gyro (Motion lines 4, 5 and 6) is sending Calibration data to fix Gyro-drift in case you feel that the Motion is drifting away slowly. after pressing this Combi, go to the Motion section (bottom left) while still in the Setuper shape in the Kadabra OS, and micro change the drift by using the arrows of each Gyro axis. tap your kadabra's body several times to see where the drift goes and press the arrow TO THE DIRECTION OF THE DRIFT! continue this action untill there is no drift. video tutorial available in Tribal-Tools.com
Combi 8 M Magnetometer disable/enable
“M” – “Magnetometer” – “disable/enable”.
• Action PRESS: by pressing this Combi the Magnetometer will be disables and there will be no scanning and no communication. We recommend disabling the Magnetometer if you are not using it, the system can have more resources to deal with communication issues and system performance issues. a first action for an older system.
Combi 10 SL Shape Lights Hold to Inc/Decrease
“SL” – “Shape Lights” – “Hold to Inc/Decrease”.
• Action HOLD: changes the Keyboard to something like the KB FX Configuration to choose the light intencity (brightness) of the Logo LED and the 3 color LEDs of the shifters. the change is happening inside the Kadabra (not in the Kadabra OS software), and will be saved for future brightness every time you power that Kadabra ON.
Thumb 3: ----–Empty

a placeholder for future features.

No Combi details listed yet for this section.

Shape 13 · Indigo-Purple color

Senser

Senser logo

Motion control, PRS, and other sensor features.

The Senser Shape is a shape to calibrate and assign all your sensors to functionalities of the Kadabra.
To reach the Senser Shape: press and release the Senser button (Util button 3)
The Motion Sensors has 9 different Motion Axis, each one of them has a different Midi cc number that will be sent with its value if the Motion Axis is ON.
Each Motion Axis has a Base Starting Point marked by a red line on its Motion Axis bar, the Base Starting Point is where the Motion Axis starts each time the Motion is reactivated.
Holding the Senser button (Util 3) and pressing the top PRS force sensor will change the Minimum Velocity of the Keyboard, so whenever the sensitive Keyboard keys are pressed, the outcome for the velocity will be between that Minimum Velocity to the actual force pressed on the Keyboard Key.
Back to top
FAQ, Tips & Shape InfoQuick Senser overview
?What is Senser for?

Senser calibrates and assigns Kadabra sensors. The Motion sensor has 6 Axis directions, each with its own MIDI CC value when active.

TipStart from the base point

Each Motion Axis has a base starting point. Use Senser to decide what each active Axis controls.

Main SectionNo Thumb is held

In the Senser Main Section, you can use Combis 1, 2 and 3, or 5, 6, and 7 to send a Midi Control Change (cc message) of a Motion Axis for MIDI Learn Plugins connection.

Combi 8, can create a base position snap to calibrate a specific wanted starting Motion position for the Active Sound

Combis 9, 10 and 11 are there to assign the Pitchbend to an axis and Combi 12 removes it from any axis

Combi 1 X Accelerometer MIDI cc
“X” – “Accelerometer” – “MIDI cc ” Midi cc number for Motion Axis 1
• Press: sends a Midi cc message of the Midi cc number for Motion Axis 1 with 120 value.
Combi 2 Y Accelerometer MIDI cc
“Y” – “Accelerometer” – “MIDI cc ” Midi cc number for Motion Axis 2
• Press: sends a Midi cc message of the Midi cc number for Motion Axis 2 with 120 value.
Combi 3 Z Accelerometer MIDI cc
“Z” – “Accelerometer” – “MIDI cc ” Midi cc number for Motion Axis 3
• Press: sends a Midi cc message of the Midi cc number for Motion Axis 3 with 120 value.
Combi 5 X Gyroscope MIDI cc
“X” – “Gyroscope” – “MIDI cc ” Midi cc number for Motion Axis 4
• Press: sends a Midi cc message of the Midi cc number for Motion Axis 4 with 120 value.
Combi 6 Y Gyroscope MIDI cc
“Y” – “Gyroscope” – “MIDI cc ” Midi cc number for Motion Axis 5
• Press: sends a Midi cc message of the Midi cc number for Motion Axis 5 with 120 value.
Combi 7 Z Gyroscope MIDI cc
“Z” – “Gyroscope” – “MIDI cc ” Midi cc number for Motion Axis 6
• Press: sends a Midi cc message of the Midi cc number for Motion Axis 6 with 120 value.
Combi 8 SET Gyro Base Start Defaults
“SET” – “Gyro Base” – “Start Defaults”
• Press: Keeps the current Motion position of the Gyro, as the Gyro starting point of each Gyro Axis (Motion Axis 4, 5 and 6).
Combi 9 PB Pitchbend on axis X
“PB” – “Pitchbend” – “on axis X”
• Press: sets the Pitchbend controls to the Accelerometer Axis X (Motion Axis 1), if the Pitchbend control was already assigned to Accelerometer Axis X, then pressing this Combi will remove any Pitchbend Controls from the Motion.
Combi 10 PB Pitchbend on axis Y
“PB” – “Pitchbend” – “on axis Y”
• Press: sets the Pitchbend controls to the Accelerometer Axis Y (Motion Axis 2), if the Pitchbend control was already assigned to Accelerometer Axis Y, then pressing this Combi will remove any Pitchbend Controls from the Motion.
Combi 11 PB Pitchbend on axis Z
“PB” – “Pitchbend” – “on axis Z”
• Press: sets the Pitchbend controls to the Accelerometer Axis Z (Motion Axis 3), if the Pitchbend control was already assigned to Accelerometer Axis Z, then pressing this Combi will remove any Pitchbend Controls from the Motion.
Combi 12 OFF Pitchbend Turn OFF
“PB OFF” – “Pitchbend” – “Turn OFF”
• Press: removes any Pitchbend Controls from the Motion.
Thumb 1: Set VIBER SPEEDchoose the axis that handles Viber's speed

Holding Thumb 1 in the Senser Shape, lets you assign a specific Motion Axis to control the Viber speed

Combi 1 X Viber Speed X Accelerometer
“X” – “Viber Speed” – “X Accelerometer”.
• Press: Assigns the control of the Viber’s Speed to Motion Axis 1.
Combi 2 Y Viber Speed Y Accelerometer
“Y” – “Viber Speed” – “Y Accelerometer”.
• Press: Assigns the control of the Viber’s Speed to Motion Axis 2.
Combi 3 Z Viber Speed Z Accelerometer
“Z” – “Viber Speed” – “Z Accelerometer”.
• Press: Assigns the control of the Viber’s Speed to Motion Axis 3.
Combi 5 X Viber Speed X Gyroscope
“X” – “Viber Speed” – “X Gyroscope”.
• Press: Assigns the control of the Viber’s Speed to Motion Axis 4.
Combi 6 Y Viber Speed Y Gyroscope
“Y” – “Viber Speed” – “Y Gyroscope”.
• Press: Assigns the control of the Viber’s Speed to Motion Axis 5.
Combi 7 Z Viber Speed Z Gyroscope
“Z” – “Viber Speed” – “Z Gyroscope”.
• Press: Assigns the control of the Viber’s Speed to Motion Axis 6.
Combi 12 V.S Viber Speed Turn OFF
“V.S OFF” – “Viber Speed” – “Turn OFF”
• Press: removes any Viber Speed Controls from the Motion.
Thumb 2: Set VIBER GATEchoose the axis that handles Viber's gate

Holding Thumb 2 in the Senser Shape, lets you assign a specific Motion Axis to control the Viber Gate

Combi 1 X Viber Gate X Accelerometer
“X” – “Viber Gate” – “X Accelerometer”.
• Press: Assigns the control of the Viber’s Gate to Motion Axis 1.
Combi 2 Y Viber Gate Y Accelerometer
“Y” – “Viber Gate” – “Y Accelerometer”.
• Press: Assigns the control of the Viber’s Gate to Motion Axis 2.
Combi 3 Z Viber Gate Z Accelerometer
“Z” – “Viber Gate” – “Z Accelerometer”.
• Press: Assigns the control of the Viber’s Gate to Motion Axis 3.
Combi 5 X Viber Gate X Gyroscope
“X” – “Viber Gate” – “X Gyroscope”.
• Press: Assigns the control of the Viber’s Gate to Motion Axis 4.
Combi 6 Y Viber Gate Y Gyroscope
“Y” – “Viber Gate” – “Y Gyroscope”.
• Press: Assigns the control of the Viber’s Gate to Motion Axis 5.
Combi 7 Z Viber Gate Z Gyroscope
“Z” – “Viber Gate” – “Z Gyroscope”.
• Press: Assigns the control of the Viber’s Gate to Motion Axis 6.
Combi 12 V.G Gate Speed Turn OFF
“V.G OFF” – “Gate Speed” – “Turn OFF”
• Press: removes any Viber Gate Controls from the Motion.
Thumb 3: Motion PerformancePitchbend (PB) and Motion Types

Holding Thumb 3 in the Senser Shape, lets you assign a PB to Motion Axis

Combi 1 PB PITCHBEND on Accelerometer Axis X
PB On Accelerometer Axis X.
• Press: assigns the Pitchbend to motion axis 1 - Accelerometer Axis X.
Combi 2 PB PITCHBEND on Accelerometer Axis Y
PB On Accelerometer Axis Y.
• Press: assigns the Pitchbend to motion axis 2 - Accelerometer Axis Y.
Combi 3 PB PITCHBEND on Accelerometer Axis Z
PB On Accelerometer Axis X.
• Press: assigns the Pitchbend to motion axis 3 - Accelerometer Axis Z.
Combi 4 C Smart Pitchbend mode
Toggles the Pitchbend mode between Smart and Normal.

• Smart: each full-release of ALL the Keyboard keys, resets the PB in the next Key play (default)

• Normal: PB is always active and dynamic when PB is assigned to a Motion axis

Combi 5 PB PITCHBEND on Gyroscope Axis X
PB On Gyroscope Axis X.
• Press: assigns the Pitchbend to motion axis 4 - Gyroscope Axis X.
Combi 6 PB PITCHBEND on Gyroscope Axis Y
PB On Gyroscope Axis Y.
• Press: assigns the Pitchbend to motion axis 5 - Gyroscope Axis Y.
Combi 7 PB PITCHBEND on Gyroscope Axis Z
PB On Gyroscope Axis X.
• Press: assigns the Pitchbend to motion axis 6 - Gyroscope Axis Z.
Combi 8 M Magnetometer disabled / anabled
Toggles the Magnetometer activity.

• Enabled: Kadabra is scanning the Magnetometer sensor, sends its data to the OS and sends its Midi values

• Disabled: Kadabra's Motion is more quick and data is thinner, good in case of Midi over-data (default)

Shape 14 · Blue color

Master

Master logo

Make your own Shape from all Shapes.

The Master Shape is your own preset pallet Shape, for achieving the most accurate functionality for your Performance, Studio Controls or Jam, the Combi buttons of the Master shape are unique to the function assigned to them by the Player (48 optional Master Combis accessible through the 4 Banks – Main, and 3 Thumbs).
There are 2 ways to assign a Combi from any other shape into a Combi in the Master Shape:
for a Combi’s direct functionality: go to any Shape, Hold the desired Thumb and add a specific Combi, hold Util2 button (the Master Shape button) and the Master Shape will appear on the OS screen, release the Thumb and Combi that was held before the Master button was held, and choose where to put that Combi’s functionality by choosing a Bank (holding No Thumb or holding one of the 3 Thumbs) and pressing on the Combi that you want to have that functionality in.
for Bulk Function functionalities (like the On/Off mix of all Looper’s channels, or a change to Pattern + Loop Length of a specific Sound): go to any Shape, , Hold the desired Thumb that has that bulk feature, hold Util2 button (the Master Shape button) and the Master Shape will appear on the OS screen, release the Thumb that was held before the Master button was held, and choose where to put that bulk functionality by choosing a Bank (holding No Thumb or holding one of the 3 Thumbs) and pressing on the Combi that you want to have that functionality in.\
Each Combi in the Master shape has also a top title stating the Shape it was assigned from, written inside a background color of that shape.
Bulk Function’s Explanation in the Main Combi Text has “!” for OFF and “i” for ON if a group of switches are displayed, for example: !!!i!!!!!!!!!i!! means all 16 are OFF except 4 and 14.
To reach the Master Shape: press and release the Master button (Util button 2).
Back to top
FAQ, Tips & Shape InfoQuick Master overview
48What is Master for?

Master is your own preset palette Shape. Its Combis can launch functions assigned from other Shapes, giving up to 48 optional Master Combis across Main, Thumb 1, Thumb 2, and Thumb 3.

+How do I assign a direct Combi into Master?
  1. Go to the Shape that has the Combi function you want.
  2. Hold the desired Thumb and Combi.
  3. While still holding them, hold the Master button / Util 2 until Master appears on the OS screen.
  4. Release the Thumb and Combi that were held before the Master button.
  5. Choose the destination Bank: no Thumb for Main, or Thumb 1 / Thumb 2 / Thumb 3.
  6. Press the destination Master Combi where you want to place that function.
BulkHow do I assign a Bulk Function?
  1. Go to the Shape that has the Bulk Function.
  2. Hold the Thumb that contains that Bulk Function.
  3. Hold the Master button / Util 2 until Master appears on the OS screen.
  4. Release the Thumb that was held before the Master button.
  5. Choose the destination Bank: no Thumb for Main, or Thumb 1 / Thumb 2 / Thumb 3.
  6. Press the destination Master Combi where you want to place that Bulk Function.
BankHow do Master Thumb Banks work?

Master has four Combi banks: Main, Thumb 1, Thumb 2, and Thumb 3. Each Thumb Bank works exactly like Master’s Main Section, but gives a different set of 12 assigned Combis.

  • No Thumb = Master Main Bank.
  • Thumb 1 = Preset Bank 1.
  • Thumb 2 = Preset Bank 2.
  • Thumb 3 = Preset Bank 3.
Main SectionNo Thumb is held

The Master Shape's Main Section is just like the Thumbs sections, you can use the 12 Combis (without holding any Thumb), to launch a Shape-Specific function from any of Kadabra's shapes and functions.

Combi 1-12 Depend on the Assigned
Each Combi of the Master can do any function that was assigned to it – The Shape That the Combi was taken from, will be written on the top of each Combi
• Press: can vary according to the assigned functionality.
• Hold: can vary according to the assigned functionality.
• Release: can vary according to the assigned functionality.
Thumb Preset BanksBank 1 · Bank 2 · Bank 3

In Master, Thumb 1, Thumb 2, and Thumb 3 are Preset Banks. Each Thumb Bank works exactly as in Master Shape’s Main Section.

  • Thumb 1 = Preset Bank 1.
  • Thumb 2 = Preset Bank 2.
  • Thumb 3 = Preset Bank 3.
Exactly as in Master Shape’s Main section

No separate Combi details are listed because each Master Thumb Bank follows the Main Section behavior.

Shape 15 · Light-Grey color

Temper

Temper logo

Control Tempo and rhythmic structure.

The Temper Shape is where you manage Rhythm, Tempo and Beat structure, its dedicated Kadabra switch can work as a Tap-Tempo, a Play/Stop for the Looper or the Record switch for a faster Live Performance.
Holding the Temper Button (Util 1) and moving the Wheel will add or subtract 1 from the BPM number, slowing or speeding the Tempo.
Back to top
FAQ, Tips & Shape InfoQuick Temper overview
InfoWhat is Temper for?

Temper manages Rhythm, Tempo and Beat structure. Its dedicated Kadabra switch can work as Tap Tempo, Play / Stop for the Looper, Record for the Looper, Open Temper, or Motion Swing control.

BPMHow do I change BPM?
  1. Hold the Temper button / Util 1 and move the Wheel to add or subtract 1 BPM.
  2. Hold Thumb 2: BPM for more tempo controls.
  3. Use Thumb 2 options to change BPM by 1, by 0.1, by 0.01, cut it in half, double it, or use Tap Tempo.
BtnWhat can the Temper button do?
  1. Hold Thumb 1: Set to Temper.
  2. Choose what the Temper button should do.
  3. Available assignments include Play / Stop Looper, Rec Loop, Tap Tempo, Open Temper only, or Motion Swing.
TAPHow do I use Tap Tempo?
  1. Use Thumb 1 → Combi 3 to assign Tap Tempo to the Temper button.
  2. Or use Main Section → Combi 3 for Tap Tempo behavior.
  3. Flick twice to count the time between the two flicks and set a new BPM.
  4. Flick again to recalculate from the last flick to the new one.
4/4What happens when changing Beat Structure?

Temper Main Section can change rhythmic Beat Structure. When the structure changes, Looper lines change immediately to the new structure and the Arp structure changes too.

Main SectionNo Thumb is held

The Temper Main Section, has many tempo related switches to spice up or solidify a rhythm structure, a rhythmic swing, fast Looper actions or control the Sequence's note inversion.

Combi 1 ■/▶ Stop/Play Loop all unmuted ch.
A Dimmed or a flashing green Play sign – “Play Loop” or “Stop Loop” – “all unmuted ch.”.
• Press: Starts the Looper (play the Loops and Sequences of all unmuted channels).
Combi 2 🔴 Stop/Rec Loop press 🔴 to start
A red Record (circle) or a Stop (Square) sign – “Rec Loop” or “Stop Rec” – “press {record sign} to start” (if the Looper is not playing) or “at next punch” (if the Looper is playing).
• Release: Starts the loop
Combi 3 TAP Tempo flick 3 times
Tap this Combi in the desired beat to sync Kadabra's BPM to it
• FLICK: 2 times: Counts the time between the 2 switch flicks to set a new BPM tempo.
• FLICK: again will always calculate the time between the last switch flick and the new flick to set a new BPM tempo.
Combi 4 Order 1, 2, 3, 4 Steps being Played
there are different ways to play a 4/4 loop in a 4/3 structure
• there are no order options for 4/4
• 3/4:
• 1, 2, 3, -: play the first 3 notes, do not play the last note of each beat
• 1, 2, -, 4: play the first 2 notes, and the last note of each beat
• 1, -, 3, 4: play the first notes, and the last 2 notes of each beat
Combi 5 +0.01 Swing Up Each Beat
Hold Swing Down to slowly change the swing of the rhythm down
Combi 6 -0.01 Swing Down Tempo
Hold Swing Down to slowly change the swing of the rhythm down
Combi 7 0 Swing Motion Tempo
change the Swing of the rhythm using a Motion axis
• HOLD and move the Kadabra: to change the Swing of the rhythm.
Combi 8 2 BPM by 2 Tempo
“2” – “BPM by 2” – “Tempo” (Beta Only)
Combi 9 1/4 Structure Re-Set Tempo
“1/4” – “Structure” – “Re-Set Tempo” (Beta Only)
Combi 10 2/4 Structure Re-Set Tempo
“2/4” – “Structure” – “Re-Set Tempo” (Beta Only)
Combi 11 3/4 Structure Re-Set Tempo
“3/4” – “Structure” – “Re-Set Tempo”
• Press: Changes the Beat Structure to 3 Clicks pre Beat, with 4 Beats per Bar:
i. Looper’s Lines will change immediately to that structure, temporarily muting notes that were written out of the newly selected structure.
ii. Arp structure changes too
Combi 12 4/4 Structure Re-Set Tempo
“4/4” – “Structure” – “Re-Set Tempo”
• Press: Changes the Beat Structure to 4 Clicks pre Beat, with 4 Beats per Bar:
i. Looper’s Lines will change immediately to that structure, temporarily muting notes that were written out of the newly selected structure.
ii. Arp structure changes too
Thumb 1: Set to TemperAssign the Action of pressing the Temper button

Holding Temper's Thumb 1, lets you assign a different fast action to the Temper button:

Play or Stop the Looper
Start Recording a Loop in the sounds that are being played
Tap Tempo (Default)
Open the Temper (Do nothing) - lets you change rhythm structures and BPM without thinking
Use Motion to Change Swing - only while holding the Temper
These are options to use when holding or pressing the Temper
Combi 1 ■/▶ Stop/Play Loop Assign to Button
Assign the Play/Stop button to the Temper button.
• Press: Assigns the Looper Start/Stop functionality directly to the Temper button.
Combi 2 🔴 Stop/Rec Loop Assign to Button
A red Record (circle) or a Stop (Square) sign – Start the Looper's Recording or Stop the Looper's Recording.
• Press: Assigns the Looper Record functionality directly to the Temper button.
Combi 3 TAP Tempo assign to Button
“TAP” – “TEMPO” – “assign to Button”.
• Press: Assigns the Tap Tempo functionality to the Temper button
Combi 4 / Open Temper no other action
Make Temper just open Temper and not do anything else.
• Press: Assigns nothing to the Temper button, the Temper Shape opens when held.
Combi 7 0 Swing Motion Hold and Move
Assign the Motion Swing to the Temper button.
• Press: assigns the Motion Swing to the Temper button, the Temper Shape still opens when held.
• Motion Swing: Hold and move to change the Swing of the rhythm.
Thumb 2: BPMcontrol Beat Speed (BPM is Beat-Per-Minute)

Holding Temper's Thumb 2, lets you change the BPM (Beat-Per-Minute), meaning the speed of the Tempo:

By 1, by 0.1 or by 0.01 BPM
Cut it in half (make it slower by half)
multiply it (make it faster - double time)
Use Tap Tempo
These are options to change the tempo speed
Combi 1 +1 1 BPM Up Re-set tempo
• Action SELECT: Add 1 BPM to the overall BPM.
Combi 2 -1 1 BPM Down Re-set tempo
• Action SELECT: subtract 1 BPM from the overall BPM.
Combi 4 TAP TEMPO into whole numbers
• Action SELECT: Tap Tempo into a whole BPM number, no decimals.
Combi 5 +0.1 0.1 BPM Up Re-set tempo
• Action SELECT: Add 0.1 BPM to the overall BPM.
Combi 6 -0.1 0.1 BPM Down Re-set tempo
• Action SELECT: subtract 0.1 BPM from the overall BPM.
Combi 7 1/2 BPM by Half Re-set tempo
• Action SELECT: cut the BPM by Half (for example from 120 to 60)
Combi 8 x2 BPM by 2 Re-set tempo
• Action SELECT: multiply the BPM by 2 (for example from 120 to 240)
Combi 9 +0.01 0.01 BPM Up Re-set tempo
• Action SELECT: Add 0.01 BPM to the overall BPM.
Combi 10 -0.01 0.01 BPM Down Re-set tempo
• Action SELECT: subtract 0.01 BPM from the overall BPM.
Thumb 3: -----Thumb 3: -----

Temper Thumb 3 Section is empty.

No Combi details listed yet for this section.

Kadabra Ecosystem · K-Player · Overview

K-Player

The sound of Kadabra: up to 24 channels of VST3 instruments and effects, two DJ decks, a timeline, a production mix and a recorder, all on one master tempo.

K-Player is Kadabra's own DAW (a program that plays, mixes and records music). Kadabra OS turns your playing into MIDI on a port called Kadabra. K-Player listens to that port, plays the instruments on its channels and sends the mix to your speakers. Without K-Player (or another DAW) the Kadabra makes no sound.
It has four pages under one top bar: PLAYER, DJ-DECK, ARRANGER and PRODUCER. Each page has a chapter of its own. This overview covers everything around them: the top bar, the top section, the BUS and MASTER strips, recording, the windows, settings, MIDI and the link with Kadabra OS.
• One switch matters most: PERFORM | EDIT. PERFORM keeps the music safe from slips. EDIT unlocks the studio work.
• Version described: K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48), on macOS and Windows (the same program). Its data lives in ~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Player.
Back to top
At a glanceThe window, how it works with Kadabra OS, PERFORM vs EDIT, the rules every control follows
MAPThe window, top to bottom
BandWhat is there
Top barThe Tribal Tools and Kadabra logos, K-Player and its version · LINK-KADABRA · SAVE · LOAD · PERFORM | EDIT · MIDI PORT: box · MIDI button · Audio button.
Top section, leftTONE / SCALE of what is playing, and under it the four page tabs: PLAYER · DJ-DECK · ARRANGER · PRODUCER, each with its ON / OFF chip.
Top section, middleMASTER BPM with its + / - arrows, then the TRANSPORT: TRACKS · RECORD · PLAY · the sync button (NO SYNC / SYNC IN / SYNC OUT) · TAP.
Top section, rightSYSTEM: DSP load, drawing time, MIDI time, the MIDI IN / MIDI OUT lamps.
The pageWhichever tab is lit. One page at a time.
Right edge, every pageBUS 1 (DELAY), BUS 2 (REVERB) and the MASTER strip. Above the buses: the - + n channels control (PLAYER and ARRANGER) or the SHOW box with DJ-EQ and STEMIX under it (DJ-DECK).
BottomThe hint line, under every page: what the thing under the pointer does. Just above it, a toast that says what just happened (about 6 seconds), and sometimes an amber notice box: click anywhere to dismiss it.
LINKK-Player and Kadabra OS
  • Kadabra OS sends notes and controls on a MIDI port whose name contains kadabra. K-Player opens it by itself (Auto-Select), whenever it appears.
  • Each of the 16 MIDI channels is its own. A K-Player channel plays the notes of the MIDI channel set in its MIDI IN box (PLAYER page).
  • K-Player can tell the Kadabra the key, scale and harmony of the record that is playing (LINK-KADABRA), and the Kadabra can set K-Player's key, start a recording or save a session by SysEx.

Everything about this is in The Kadabra OS link below.

MODEPERFORM vs EDIT
PERFORMEDIT
A track is analysed by itself when loadedneveryes, with AUTO on (DJ-DECK)
DETECT (asking for an analysis)worksworks
MIDI and B buttons on PLAYER and BUS insert boxeshiddenshown
Remove, bypass from the menu, or change a plug-in; remove a channelrefused: a toast says to switch to EDITright-click menu
Drag a channel to a new place, drag a plug-in onto another boxlockedyes
CC badges (bus parameters, sends, stems)hiddenshown
Load or new session with unsaved changesnever asksasks to save first
Autosaveneveryes
Quitting with unsaved changesasks in both modes: Save / Don't Save / Cancel

Leaving EDIT saves every marker and autosaves the session. A session remembers the mode it was saved in. Markers save themselves about a second after any change, in both modes.

RULESRules every control follows
  • Right-click a fader or a pan puts it back to its default (0 dB, centre). On the decks' mixer a double-click does it too.
  • Faders: 0 dB at 80 % of the travel (a line marks it), +6 dB at the top, -inf at the bottom. The level is printed on the cap.
  • Meters: −60 dB at the bottom to +6 dB at the top; green below −6 dB, yellow up to 0 dB, red above.
  • A drop-list or menu closes with a click outside it, or with ESC. ESC never closes a window or the program.
  • A lit button is on. Plug-in boxes: green = loaded, red-brown = bypassed.
STARTWhat happens when K-Player starts
  1. It finds its data folder and reads its settings and its list of plug-ins. The list is made the first time you open the plug-in browser (or with SCAN there).
  2. It opens the MIDI port with kadabra in its name, if Auto-Select is on (the default). Kadabra OS may start before or after.
  3. The first start ever opens the factory session, a ready-made, read-only session so the Kadabra plays at once, if one is installed (see What comes with K-Player); without one it starts a new session. Later starts open the last session you loaded or saved.
  4. If you have no stems model of your own, the Pool Engine that comes with K-Player is installed as yours.
  5. If K-Sampler is installed, it goes into each deck's empty K-SAMPLER box by itself.
  6. It shows the page set in Settings ▸ General (PLAYER unless you chose another).
HINTThe hint line

The line along the bottom of the window says what the thing under the pointer does, how to use it, and what a right-click does there. With nothing under the pointer it reads Point at anything to see what it does.

  • It works on every page: the top bar and the top section, the strips, the decks and their mixer, the BUS and MASTER strips, the ARRANGER and the PRODUCER, and in every list and menu while it is open.
  • Some hints say what is there: a loaded box names its plug-in, a strip's NOTE FILTER says which notes play.
  • The other windows have a line of their own at the bottom: TRACKS, the STEM TRAINER, Audio, MIDI and General settings, the plug-in browser and the sample editor. In the MIDI editor it is the status line.
  • It grows with Settings ▸ General ▸ Text size.
KITWhat comes with K-Player

What a K-Player build puts in the app (Mac) and in the installer (Windows):

PartWhat it is
K-PlayerThe program, with its own audio engine.
Helper programsThe plug-in tester, which tries each plug-in in a program of its own so a plug-in that crashes cannot take K-Player down, and the STEM TRAINER's tools (they measure instruments, build datasets and grade stems models).
The Pool EngineA trained stems model: MEDIUM size, 182 epochs, about 16 MB. At the first start, if you have no model of your own, it is installed as yours (stemtrain/model/stems.kmodel in the data folder). The NEURAL stems engine then works from the first day, and the STEM TRAINER trains on from it. A model you already have is never replaced.
The MIDI mapAs a PDF beside the program (K-Player-Manual.pdf, inside the app on a Mac).
Licence noticesFor K-Player and the parts it is built on.

Not included: no tracks and no stems, no plug-ins (K-Sampler, K-Synth, K-Kick and Surge XT are installed on their own), and no factory session. The factory session is a file another installer may put at /Library/Application Support/Tribal-Tools/K-Player/starter.kplayer (Windows: %ProgramData%\Tribal-Tools\K-Player\starter.kplayer). Without it, the first start is a new session with DECK A and DECK B only.

The stems engine is K-Player DSP - Electronic at first. To use the Pool Engine, choose K-Player NEURAL - your trained model in Audio Settings ▸ Stems.

The four pagesPLAYER, DJ-DECK, ARRANGER, PRODUCER, and the tabs that switch them
PLAYPLAYER

The mixer of your sounds: one channel strip per channel, up to 24. Each strip has its MIDI IN, side-chain, an instrument (on MIDI channels), three effect inserts, sends to the two buses, fader, pan, MUTE / SOLO, ARM and CUE. The first two strips are DECK A and DECK B.

The PLAYER page in EDIT: eight of the session's 15 strips in view. K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
DJDJ-DECK

Two decks, DECK A and DECK B, with a mixer between them: waveforms, cue, stretch, the key and tempo DETECTION with its markers, LOOP (beat repeat), each deck's K-SAMPLER box, STEMS, the crossfader and the MIX RUNNER.

The DJ-DECK page: a track on DECK A, the thin mixer, DECK B empty. K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
ARRARRANGER

The performance timeline: one lane per channel, with audio clips and MIDI pieces (edited in the MIDI editor), the bar grid, PATTERNS for the Kadabra LOOPER, BEAT-MIX, stem automation, AUDIO TO MIDI and EXPORT TO PRODUCER. Lane n here is channel n on the PLAYER.

The ARRANGER: the lanes of a 15-channel session and a MIDI piece on lane 01. K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
PRODPRODUCER

The production timeline: every recorded audio take lands here, on 16 audio lanes with their own faders and inserts, summed through a MASTERING chain. Mark an area on the ruler and EXPORT it to a 24-bit WAV.

The PRODUCER with one take: the MASTER muted on lane 01, its four parts under it. K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
TABSPage tabs and their ON / OFF chips

The tabs sit at the bottom-left of the top section, left to right: PLAYER · DJ-DECK · ARRANGER · PRODUCER. Click a tab to show its page, or press TAB for the next page and SHIFT+TAB for the one before. The lit tab is the page on screen; a page that is OFF has its name greyed.

  • The small ON / OFF chip at the right of each tab switches that page's audio work: a page that is OFF costs almost nothing.
  • All pages are ON when K-Player starts. Looking at a page never switches it on or off; only the chip does. A deck keeps feeding the channels while you look at another page.
  • With the ARRANGER OFF, PLAY refuses and says to switch it ON. The PRODUCER's chip only marks the tab: its player is not stopped by it.
How do I …?Quick answers for the things people ask most
QHow do I connect K-Player to Kadabra OS?
  1. Start Kadabra OS and K-Player, in either order.
  2. Look at the MIDI PORT: box in the top bar: it should say Kadabra, with a green frame.
  3. If it does not, click the box and choose RESCAN PORTS, then Kadabra.
  4. Play the Kadabra: MIDI IN under SYSTEM lights up.
QHow do I find out what a control does?
  1. Point at the control with the mouse.
  2. Read the line along the bottom of the window: it says what the control does and what a right-click does there.
  3. In another window (TRACKS, the settings, the MIDI editor …), read the line at the bottom of that window.
QHow do I switch between PERFORM and EDIT?
  1. Find PERFORM | EDIT in the top bar.
  2. Click PERFORM for a show (it lights green) or EDIT to change things (it lights amber).
  3. In a narrow window it is one button that shows the mode: click it to change.
QHow do I save my session?
  1. Press SAVE in the top bar, or ⌘S.
  2. The first time, choose a folder and a name. After that SAVE writes to the same file without asking.
  3. To keep a copy under another name, use File ▸ Save As… (⇧⌘S).
QHow do I open a session I saved?
  1. Press LOAD (or ⌘O), or pick it in File ▸ Open Recent.
  2. Choose the .kplayer file.
  3. In EDIT, if the session on screen has unsaved changes, answer Save, Don't Save or Cancel.
QHow do I start a new, empty session?
  1. Choose File ▸ New (⌘N).
  2. In EDIT, answer the save question.
  3. K-Player empties the decks, the plug-ins, the lanes and the PRODUCER, goes back to two channels at 120 BPM and shows the PLAYER page. Pads and audio settings stay.
  4. To get the starting session back instead, choose File ▸ Factory Session.
QHow do I set the tempo by hand?
  1. Make sure the sync button reads NO SYNC or SYNC OUT.
  2. Click + or - beside MASTER BPM: 1 BPM per click, 20 to 400.
  3. With nothing playing the word under the number reads by hand. With a deck playing, the arrows nudge that deck instead and the tempo follows it.
QHow do I find a song's tempo by tapping?
  1. Click TAP on the beat, four times or more.
  2. Read the BPM in the TAP button (TAP n under it counts your taps).
  3. TAP never changes the tempo. To use the number, set MASTER BPM with + / -.
  4. Right-click TAP to clear it. A pause of 2.5 seconds starts a new count.
QHow do I sync K-Player with other gear by MIDI clock?
  1. To follow a clock: send it to K-Player's MIDI IN port, then click the sync button until it reads SYNC IN. MASTER BPM says MIDI CLOCK; START and STOP run the ARRANGER.
  2. To lead: choose the port in MIDI ▸ KADABRA ▸ Send to, then click the sync button until it reads SYNC OUT.
  3. The dot on the button is green while a clock is moving. Click to NO SYNC to stop; the tempo you had comes back.
QHow do I make the Kadabra follow the key of the record?
  1. Check MIDI ▸ KADABRA ▸ Send to: (auto: a port named Kadabra) is right when Kadabra OS is running.
  2. Click LINK-KADABRA in the top bar: it turns green and, if a deck is playing, sends the key in force at once.
  3. Play a track on a deck. Each new key point sends its tone, scale and harmony to the Kadabra.
  4. Click LINK-KADABRA again to stop sending.
QHow do I record everything I play?
  1. Make sure no ARM button is lit.
  2. Press RECORD in the top section. The first time, choose the folder K-Player records into.
  3. Play. RECORD turns red, reads STOP and shows the time and the number of tracks.
  4. Press STOP. The audio takes appear on the PRODUCER; a MIDI channel's notes appear on the ARRANGER.
QHow do I record only some channels?
  1. Click ARM on each channel you want (PLAYER strips, BUS 1, BUS 2, MASTER). Or select a channel and press R.
  2. Press RECORD.
  3. Arm another channel during the take: it joins it.
  4. Press STOP.
QHow do I start a recording from the Kadabra?
  1. Send CC 102 on MIDI channel 16: value 64 or more starts the take, below 64 stops it.
  2. To arm a channel, send CC 84 on that channel's own MIDI channel (64 and up arms, below disarms).
  3. To arm the MASTER, send CC 104 on channel 16.
QHow do I switch off a page I do not use?
  1. Find the page's tab in the top section.
  2. Click the small ON chip at its right: it reads OFF and the name turns grey.
  3. Click it again to switch the page back on.
QHow do I change K-Player's language?
  1. Choose Settings ▸ General… (on a Mac also K-Player ▸ Settings…, ⌘,).
  2. Click the Language box and choose one of the nine.
  3. To give K-Sampler and K-Synth the same language, click THE SAME LANGUAGE: OFF so it reads ON.
QHow do I make the text bigger?
  1. Choose Settings ▸ General….
  2. Click the Text size box.
  3. Choose Larger (110%), Large (125%), Very large (140%) or Huge (160%). Every window follows at once.
QHow do I choose my audio interface and the latency?
  1. Press Audio in the top bar.
  2. In MIX choose the main output (a device with many outputs is listed once per pair, like out 3-4). Press TEST TONE to check it.
  3. Choose the Sample rate and the Audio buffer size (smaller = less delay, more work).
  4. Press APPLY. The line at the bottom says the real latency.
QHow do I listen to one channel in my headphones?
  1. In Audio settings, set CUE to your headphones' output.
  2. Click CUE beside ARM on the channel, a bus or the MASTER. Or select a channel and press C.
  3. CUE is before the fader: you hear it even with the fader down, and the main mix does not change.
QHow do I add delay or reverb to a channel?
  1. Click DELAY on BUS 1 (or REVERB on BUS 2): it turns green and its settings appear under it.
  2. On the PLAYER page, drag the channel's DLY (or RVB) bar to send it to that bus.
  3. Shape the sound with the bus's rows; its fader sets how loud the effect comes back.
QHow do I put a delay or reverb setting on a Kadabra knob?
  1. Set the bus's MIDI IN box (under its name) to the MIDI channel your Kadabra knob sends on.
  2. Switch to EDIT.
  3. Click the small CC badge at the right of the parameter's bar.
  4. Click a CC number in the grid, or click LEARN and move the knob.
QHow do I control any plug-in knob from the Kadabra?
  1. Switch to EDIT (the MASTER and the deck boxes show the button in both modes).
  2. Point at the loaded plug-in box and click MIDI.
  3. In the panel, click the middle of the CC chip on the parameter's row (it then reads learn) and move the Kadabra control.
  4. Click close.
QHow do I add my music to the TRACKS list?
  1. Click TRACKS in the top section.
  2. Click ADD FOLDER… and choose a folder: every track in it and its sub-folders comes in.
  3. Or drag files and folders into the TRACKS window.
QHow do I teach the stem engine my own music?
  1. Press Audio, then TRAINING beside Stems: the STEM TRAINER opens.
  2. On SONGS, fill the four boxes with one song's separated channels and press ADD THIS SONG. Repeat for many songs.
  3. On DATASET, press BUILD.
  4. On TRAIN, press START.
  5. In Audio Settings ▸ Stems choose K-Player NEURAL - your trained model.
QHow do I use the stems model that comes with K-Player?
  1. Press Audio in the top bar.
  2. In Stems, choose K-Player NEURAL - your trained model.
  3. Load a track that has no stems yet on a deck and press MAKE STEMS under its waveform.
  4. The first start already installed the Pool Engine as your model, unless you had one of your own.
QHow do I see what MIDI is arriving?
  1. Press MIDI in the top bar.
  2. Look at WHAT IS COMING IN: the last messages, newest first, with where each one went.
  3. A program change that no channel is listening for says so there.
QHow do I move K-Player's data to another disk?
  1. Quit K-Player.
  2. Open ~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Player/datadir.txt in a text editor.
  3. Write the new folder's full path on one line under the comments, and save.
  4. Start K-Player: it uses that folder. Delete the line to come back.
Top bar & menusLINK-KADABRA, SAVE, LOAD, PERFORM | EDIT, MIDI PORT, MIDI, Audio, and the menu bar
VERThe name and the version

At the left: the Tribal Tools mark, the Kadabra logo, K-Player and its version, like 1.2.1 (n): the release, then the build number in brackets. The window's title shows the same. A * or an amber number means a test build. Quote this number when you report a problem. In a narrow window the logos go first.

LINKLINK-KADABRA

A switch, green when on (it reads LINK in a narrow window; older builds called it AUTO-ALIGN KADABRA). While it is on, every time the deck being heard plays into a new key point, K-Player sends that point's tone, scale and harmony to the Kadabra, so the Scaler and Harmoner follow the record. Turning it on sends the key in force at once, if a deck is playing. Off by default.

How it decides and what it sends: The Kadabra OS link below. See also

SAVESAVE and LOAD
  • SAVE writes straight to the session's own file, with no question. With no file yet it asks where (session.kplayer). On the factory session it writes your own copy, session.kplayer (then session 2, session 3 …) in the data folder, and works on that from then on.
  • LOAD opens a .kplayer session (older .kdj files open too). In EDIT it first asks about unsaved changes; in PERFORM it never asks. If an autosave.kplayer is in the folder, the dialog points at it.
  • Loading replaces everything: plug-ins are never mixed in from the session before. Each plug-in comes back in its exact state (K-Sampler's bank, Surge XT's patch).
  • If something could not come back (a plug-in not installed, a missing file), the rest loads and a notice lists what was missing.
P|EPERFORM | EDIT

Two halves: click the one you want. PERFORM lights green, EDIT lights amber. In a narrow window it is one button showing the mode now; a click changes it. What changes between the two: At a glance ▸ PERFORM vs EDIT.

PORTMIDI PORT

The box after MIDI PORT: shows the MIDI input K-Player listens to, with a green frame while it is open and a green dot while messages arrive. Click it for the list: RESCAN PORTS (reads the ports again; the list stays open), (none), then every MIDI input on the computer. Ports may come and go while K-Player runs.

The MIDI PORT list: RESCAN PORTS, (none), and the ports, Kadabra highlighted. K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
WINThe MIDI and Audio buttons

MIDI (with the five-pin socket) opens MIDI Settings; Audio (with the gear) opens Audio Settings. Each is lit green while its window is open. Both windows are described under Settings windows.

MENUThe menu bar
MenuItems
K-Player (Mac)About K-Player (version, build, commit, date, a tribal-tools.com button) · Settings… ⌘, (opens General settings) · Quit ⌘Q, which asks about unsaved changes in any mode.
FileNew ⌘N · Open… ⌘O · Open Recent ▸ (the last 20 sessions that still exist, and Clear Menu) · Factory Session (back to the read-only starting session) · Save ⌘S · Save As… ⇧⌘S.
SettingsGeneral… (language, start page, text size) · Audio Output ▸: only for the simple Java engine K-Player falls back on when its own engine is missing. Normally use the Audio button.
HelpDocumentation… opens this manual online. On Windows, About K-Player… is here too.

On Windows the shortcuts use CTRL where the Mac uses ⌘. Closing the main window is the same as Quit.

Top sectionTONE / SCALE, MASTER BPM, the TRANSPORT (TRACKS, RECORD, PLAY, SYNC, TAP) and SYSTEM
TONETONE / SCALE

Read-only, at the top-left. The big letter is the tone in its Kadabra colour, then the scale, then the harmony (H1, H2 …) and its chord. It shows -- when no key is known. It comes from the key point in force on the deck being heard, or from the Kadabra itself: then FROM THE KADABRA appears after it.

To the right runs the tone change line: every tone the loaded track passes through, in order, the one in force in gold.

BPMMASTER BPM

One tempo drives the whole program, and every VST3 plug-in on every channel follows it: a synced delay, an arpeggiator or K-Sampler's beat repeat all keep to it. The clock never stops; a tempo change is a change of speed, never a jump. The box flashes green on every beat, and the meter (4/4) of the playing track sits on its caption line. A new session starts at 120.

Word beside the numberWho sets the tempoWhat + / - do
MIDI CLOCKan incoming clock (SYNC IN)nothing: they go dim
deck A / deck Bthe playing deck (its BPM × its stretch)nudge that deck ±1 BPM
arrangementthe clip under the ARRANGER's playhead, while it playsno lasting effect: the clip's tempo rules (use BEAT-MIX to set it)
BEAT-MIXyou; the whole ARRANGER followsset it, 1 BPM a click
by handyou; nothing is playingset it, 20 to 400; it stays where you leave it

When a deck stops, the tempo stays where it was. When the clock stops or SYNC IN is switched off, the tempo you had before comes back.

TRANSTRACKS, RECORD and PLAY
  • TRACKS opens the TRACKS window (lit blue while open). There is one library: a track from it goes to either deck or onto an ARRANGER lane.
  • RECORD starts a take. While it runs it is red, pulses, reads STOP, and shows mm:ss n tracks under it. See Recording.
  • PLAY plays the song: on the PRODUCER page the recorded takes, on every other page the ARRANGER. Only one plays at a time. A second click stops; a right-click goes back to the start. Its clock under it ends in ARR or MIX. SHIFT+SPACE does the same from any page.

When the window is narrow these buttons get smaller, down to 70 %, so none disappears.

SYNCThe sync button and TAP
  • The sync button cycles NO SYNC → SYNC IN → SYNC OUT; a right-click goes backwards. SYNC IN: the tempo follows a MIDI clock arriving on the MIDI IN port, and START / CONTINUE / STOP run the ARRANGER. SYNC OUT: K-Player sends its clock on the port chosen in MIDI ▸ KADABRA ▸ Send to (choose it there once). The dot on the button is green while a clock is moving. The same choice is in MIDI Settings.
  • TAP: click on the beat. It averages up to the last 8 taps and shows the BPM with TAP n; after 2.5 s without a tap the next one starts a new count. It never changes the tempo: use the MASTER BPM arrows for that. Right-click clears it.

When there is little room the two stack in one column.

SYSSYSTEM

Read-only, at the top-right:

  • DSP nn% with a bar: how busy the audio engine is (amber above 50 %, red above 80 %).
  • UI n.n ms: how long a screen picture takes to draw.
  • MIDI n.nn ms worst: the longest the MIDI input ever took.
  • MIDI IN / MIDI OUT light for a quarter of a second after a message. If MIDI IN never lights while you play the Kadabra, check MIDI PORT.
BUS strips & MASTERThe DELAY and REVERB buses, TUNE, their CC badges, and the MASTER strip, on every page
BUSBUS 1 and BUS 2, top to bottom

Every channel's DLY and RVB sends feed these two buses. The sound goes: sends → the bus's plug-in insert → its built-in effect → its fader. A bus is a full channel: it can be recorded and cued. A bus cannot send to a bus.

RowWhat it does
BUS 1 / BUS 2The name.
MIDI IN boxThe MIDI channel the bus listens to: - (none), 1 … 16 or omni. Click for the list; right-click = none. A yellow dot flashes on notes. Notes reach the bus's plug-in, and on BUS 1 they tune the delay (see TUNE). Its CC badges answer on this channel only.
+ insert 1One plug-in box, before the effect: a saturator or filter shaping what goes in.
DELAY / REVERBThe built-in effect: click to switch it on (green) or off. Off at first.
Parameter rowsShown while the effect is on. Drag a row to set it; the value shows while the pointer is on it.
TUNEBUS 1 only, under its rows.
Fader + two metersThe return level. Right-click = 0 dB.
Pan barDrag; right-click = centre.
M · SMute and solo of the bus.
ARM · CUEARM records the bus (reads REC during a take). CUE puts the bus in the headphones, before its fader.
FXThe DELAY and REVERB settings

The DELAY is a frequency-shifting delay: each echo can come back shifted by SHIFT Hz, bending further from the original each time. At SHIFT 0 it is a plain delay.

DELAY rowRange · start valueREVERB rowRange · start value
SHIFT−1000 … +1000 Hz · 0SIZE0 … 1 · 0.72
TIME1 … 1000 ms · 80DAMP0 … 1 · 0.35
FDBK0 … 0.98 · 0.50WIDTH0 … 1 · 1.00
MOD RT0.01 … 10 HzPRE0 … 100 ms · 12
MOD DP0 … 1 · 0.20LOW CUT20 … 1000 Hz · 120
SPREAD0 … 1 · 0
TUNETUNE: the delay in the key

With TUNE on, the delay's shift becomes a musical interval above a root note, so the echoes stay in the key. It reads TUNE +7 (a fifth, the start value) and, at its right, the root.

  • Left part: click = TUNE on, then +1 semitone per click (up to +24). Right-click = −1 (down to −24); one more right-click at −24 switches TUNE off.
  • Right part: click to choose where the root comes from (the first click also switches TUNE on): det (the tonic of the key point in force on the deck being heard) or midi.
  • A note played on BUS 1's MIDI channel (any channel when the bus has none) always becomes the root, shown as midi and the note. Clicking the right part lets it go.
  • SHIFT still adds its Hz on top of the interval.
CCCC badges on the bus settings (EDIT)

In EDIT a small CC badge sits at the right end of each bus parameter row. Click it for a grid of all 128 CC numbers (BUS 1 FDBK on MIDI CC): click a number, or LEARN to take the next CC that arrives; NONE clears, CLOSE closes. Right-click the badge to clear it. CC 21 – 29 are tinted: they are the Kadabra's motion axes.

A binding answers only on that bus's own MIDI channel. A bus with no MIDI channel hears none, and the grid says so in orange.

MSTRThe MASTER strip

Everything leaves through here, on every page. Top to bottom, in the order the sound goes:

  1. insert 1 → 2 → 3: the mastering plug-ins (their MIDI and B buttons are there in both modes).
  2. PAN (PAN C, PAN L n, PAN R n): drag; right-click = centre.
  3. The long fader with its dB on the cap: right-click = 0 dB. L and R meters either side show what really leaves, with a 0 dB line.
  4. ARM: records the master mix. CUE: the whole mix in the headphones, before the master fader.

From MIDI: CC 31 on the mixer's MIDI channel moves the fader, CC 104 on channel 16 arms it, and SysEx can set its volume, pan, bypass, ARM and CUE (see MIDI control).

+ −Above the buses
  • On the PLAYER and the ARRANGER: - + n channels, one count for both pages, 2 to 24. A new channel is a MIDI channel and takes the next MIDI channel nobody uses. The count cannot go below the last channel that holds clips.
  • On the DJ-DECK: the SHOW box, DECKS ONLY or MIX RUNNER (click for the list, right-click to switch), and under it DJ-EQ and STEMIX, which take turns: the decks' EQ knobs or their stems as faders, beside the mixer's faders.
RecordingRECORD, ARM, the session folders, and where the takes land
RECHow RECORD works
  • Nothing armed: RECORD takes every channel that is in use (a deck with a track or an input, a channel with an instrument or an input, a lane with clips or MIDI pieces) and the MASTER. They are disarmed again when the take ends, and never saved as armed.
  • Something armed: only the channels you armed are taken, and they stay armed. Arm one during a take and it joins; disarm one and it stops.
  • The first RECORD asks for the folder K-Player records into. The choice is kept in the session.
  • Auto-Stop (Audio Settings) can end the take after everything armed has been silent together for 15 seconds to 10 minutes. Off (never) at first.
FILESWhat is recorded, and where it lands on STOP
ChannelFilesWhere it lands
AUDIO channel, deck, bus.wavthe PRODUCER
MIDI channel.wav (what its instrument made) and .mid (what was played)the sound on the PRODUCER; the notes as a MIDI piece on its ARRANGER lane
MASTER.wav and .midthe PRODUCER, first and muted when its parts are there too

Each new take goes after the last one, never over it: on the PRODUCER with a small gap, on the ARRANGER one empty bar later. A channel that stayed silent is left out. A toast says what went where. A channel's sound is taken before its fader, so a take is full level even with the fader down; the MASTER is taken after everything.

0:00Every file starts at the same instant

Each take makes its own folder in the recording folder: session 1, session 2 … one past the highest number already there, so a new take never writes over an old one.

All files of a take start and end together. A channel armed at 3:20 still gets a file that begins at 0:00, with 3:20 of exact silence in front. So the whole folder can be dropped on the ARRANGER at bar one and everything lines up. The files are kept playable while the take runs, so a crash does not lose it.

Windows & plug-insThe TRACKS window, plug-in boxes, the plug-in browser, plug-in windows and the parameter panel
TRACKSThe TRACKS window
The TRACKS window: a folder of nine tracks shown as a tree from its root, with LENGTH, BPM, TONE and SCALE (the last two tracks are not analysed yet). The first track has stems on the disk: its small triangle opens them. At the bottom, the hint line. K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
ControlWhat it does
ADD FOLDER…Adds every track in a folder and its sub-folders (the same folder twice adds nothing twice). Dragging files or folders into the window does the same.
REFRESH · SCAN data/Takes in what K-Player learned meanwhile · adds every audio file in K-Player's data folder.
REMOVE MISSING (n)Shown when files are gone: takes them off the list.
TRASH ORPHAN STEMS (n)Shown when there are stems whose track is not in the list: moves them to the Trash.
SEARCHJust start typing (name, tone or scale). BACKSPACE deletes, ESC clears, ENTER loads the first track shown into DECK A.
BPM · TONE · clearBPM: any → the master BPM ±3 → ±6 → ±12 → any. TONE: C … B, then any. clear resets search and both filters.
ColumnsSTAR · TRACK · LENGTH · BPM · TONE · SCALE: click a header to sort, again to reverse. Starred rows stay on top. Click at the left of a name to star it. A grey name is not analysed yet; missing in red means the file is gone.
The treeFolders are rows: click to fold or open. A track with stems on the disk opens its KICK / BASS / DRUMS / TONAL rows under it when clicked.
A track rowPoint at it for A / B (load that deck). Click it to select it (then a click on an empty ARRANGER lane places it). Drag it onto a deck or a lane.
Right-click a trackOpen Folder Location · Remove from list (the file stays) · Detect (analyses it, in PERFORM too) · More info (a line listing its markers) · Make stems / Remake stems.
Right-click a folderOpen Folder Location · Remove its missing files.

The list is kept in library.tsv and backed up before each use; an empty list is never written over a full one. Files dropped on the main window outside a deck or lane also join the list.

The line at the bottom is the window's hint line. With nothing under the pointer it reads Type to search - A / B loads a deck, or drag a row onto one - right-click a row for its menu.

BOXPlug-in boxes, everywhere

Every place a plug-in goes is a box: a channel's instrument box and three insert boxes, a deck's inserts and its K-SAMPLER box, a bus's insert, the MASTER's three inserts, the PRODUCER's lanes and its MASTERING chain. They all work the same:

  • Empty (+ insert n): click to open the plug-in browser for that box.
  • Loaded (green): click to open the plug-in's own window (it opens when you let go).
  • B: bypass (red when bypassed). MIDI (when you point at the box): the parameter panel. On PLAYER and BUS boxes these two show in EDIT only.
  • Right-click in EDIT: Remove Plugin, Bypass Plugin (or Un-bypass), Change Plugin… (the instrument box says Instrument). In PERFORM a toast says plug-ins are changed or removed in EDIT mode.
  • Drag a loaded box onto another box (EDIT) to move the plug-in there.
PLUGThe plug-in browser

The Plugins window opens from an empty box (or Change…) and says where the choice goes: insert into … · slot 2, … · INSTRUMENT, or replace X in ….

  • SCAN (with progress) and RESCAN BAD; n usable · m blacklisted. Each plug-in is tested in a helper program of its own, so a plug-in that crashes cannot take K-Player down.
  • Two choices: A-Z | VENDOR and ALL | FX ONLY | INST ONLY. An instrument box opens on INST ONLY.
  • Sections: STARRED (your favourites), RECENT, the full list, and BLACKLISTED (plug-ins that failed, with the reason and a RESCAN each).
  • A row shows the name, vendor, FX or INSTR, the number of parameters and GUI. Click the star to favourite it; click the row (INSERT) to put it in the box. A new instrument opens its window at once.
  • The hint line at the bottom says what the pointer is on: a row, a star, a filter, SCAN.

It scans /Library/Audio/Plug-Ins/VST3 and ~/Library/Audio/Plug-Ins/VST3 on a Mac, the Common Files VST3 folders on Windows.

GUIPlug-in windows

Every plug-in has its own window, titled for its place: K-Player - Channel 3 - Instrument, K-Player - Deck A - Insert 2, … - Sampler A - …, … - Bus 1 - …, … - Master - …, … - Producer lane 2 - …. Opening one that is already open brings that window to the front; closing one leaves the others open. A plug-in's window moves along when a CC or program change moves it, so you see what the Kadabra changes.

PARThe parameter panel (MIDI button)

Click MIDI on a loaded box. The panel lists channel slot n : plug-in with PLUGIN GUI (its window) and close, a BYPASS button with its own CC chip, then one row per parameter: the name, a bar you can drag, the value and a CC chip [-] CC nn [+].

  • Click the middle of a chip to learn: it reads learn, and the next CC that arrives is taken.
  • - / + pick a number directly; right-click clears it.
  • The wheel scrolls the rows. A click outside the panel closes it.

Bindings are saved in the session. A learned CC wins over K-Player's built-in meaning of that number. This is how a Kadabra combi or motion axis reaches any knob of any plug-in.

HIDEClosing a window

Closing TRACKS, Plugins, the settings windows or the STEM TRAINER only hides it: it comes back at once, as you left it, and costs nothing while hidden. ESC never closes a window. Closing the main window quits K-Player (it asks about unsaved changes).

Settings windowsGeneral, MIDI and Audio settings, row by row
GENGeneral settings

Open with Settings ▸ General… (on a Mac also ⌘,). Every choice is kept for the next start. Like every settings window, it has a hint line at its bottom.

General settings at their defaults: English, THE SAME LANGUAGE: OFF, PLAYER, DECKS ONLY, Normal. K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
RowWhat it sets
LANGUAGE ▸ LanguageThe screen's language: English, עברית, العربية, Français, Español, Português, हिन्दी, 中文, 한국어. Each is listed in its own script. Hebrew and Arabic read right-to-left inside their boxes; the layout stays. A word with no translation shows in English. The menus and window titles change too.
K-Sampler, K-SynthTHE SAME LANGUAGE: ON / OFF (OFF at first). ON writes the language into K-Sampler's and K-Synth's own settings each time you choose one. K-Sampler takes it the next time it starts (in K-Player: the next time K-Player starts).
K-PLAYER OPENS WITH ▸ PageThe page shown when K-Player starts (PLAYER at first).
K-PLAYER OPENS WITH ▸ DJ-DECKDECKS ONLY or MIX RUNNER, at start and in a new session. A session you open later shows what it was saved with.
TEXT ▸ Text sizeNormal, Larger (110%), Large (125%), Very large (140%), Huge (160%): the text of every window. The pages keep their layout, so the biggest sizes may not fit everywhere.
MIDIMIDI Settings
MIDI Settings: listening on the Kadabra port, Auto-Select ON, NO SYNC, ONCE, COPIED, nothing coming in yet, and the hint line at the bottom. K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
RowWhat it sets
MIDI IN ▸ Port · RESCANThe input port (the same as the top bar's MIDI PORT) and a rescan; n ports connected right now.
Auto-SelectKADABRA PORT: ON (the default): a port named Kadabra is taken the moment it appears, so Kadabra OS can start whenever you like. Choosing a port that is not a Kadabra port here turns it OFF; then K-Player stays on your port and takes it back if it comes and goes.
KADABRA ▸ Send to · CH nWhere K-Player talks to the Kadabra: the key, scale and harmony, the LOOPER doorbell and SYNC OUT's clock. (auto: a port named Kadabra) by default, channel 1 (click CH for the list).
CLOCK ▸ SyncNO SYNC / SYNC IN / SYNC OUT: the same as the top section's button.
DRAWING ▸ PanelsEACH FRAME or ONCE, COPIED (the default): the strips look the same either way; ONCE, COPIED draws less.
WHAT IS COMING INThe last six MIDI messages, newest on top: notes, CCs, program and bank changes, SysEx, where each went and how long ago. The best place to see whether a message reached anything.

The last line says MIDI: live when ports may come and go. If it says Java Sound, a port added later needs a restart.

AUDIOAudio Settings
Audio Settings at the top of its page: INPUT, OUTPUTS, the ENGINE rows, Kadabra, Degree, Auto-Stop, Stems and Focus. Detection, Markers and APPLY are further down: the window scrolls. K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
RowWhat it sets
INPUT ▸ INPUT · LevelThe audio input device (microphones and instruments for AUDIO IN, the INPUT strip, MIC-REC), with a live level gauge.
OUTPUTS ▸ MIX · CUEThe main output and the headphone output. A device with more than two outputs is listed once per pair (… : out 3-4). Each has a TEST TONE (it reads TONE ON while sounding).
Sample rate44100 … 192000 Hz.
Audio buffer size16 … 4096 samples, each shown in ms (256 samples at 48 kHz = 5.3 ms). Smaller = less delay, more work.
Pitch engineSignalsmith Stretch (the default: tempo and key move separately, about 60 ms of delay while in use) or Tribal Stretch (vari-speed: changing tempo changes pitch, no added delay).
Pad voices8 … 64 (16 at first): the old sample pads that may sound at once over both decks.
Kadabra · CH · TESTThe same out port as MIDI Settings; CH steps with a click (right-click back); TEST sends the selected key now.
DegreeON / OFF and what to listen to: MASTER, DECK A, DECK B or INPUT. With LINK-KADABRA on, a confident chord change is sent as HARMONY.
Auto-StopAuto-Stop Recording in Silence of: 15 seconds … 10 minutes, or never.
Stems · TRAININGThe stem engine: OFF (no stem row on the decks), K-Player DSP (Electronic, Band / Live, Acoustic (no kick), Fast draft) or K-Player NEURAL - your trained model. TRAINING opens the STEM TRAINER.
FocusFor the NEURAL engine: 1 (as the model gives them) to 3 (tightest). Stems already made stay as they are.
DetectionThe DETECTION LEVEL, 1 (BPM and key only) to 10 (everything heard); 6 at first. How many of a track's markers are in force.
MarkersAS DETECTED (the default) or APPROVED ONLY.
APPLYRestarts the audio at the rate and buffer above; dim when nothing changed. The last line reports the engine's real latency.

The window scrolls (wheel, or the bar at its right edge) when the screen is shorter than it. Detection and markers:

STEM TRAINERTeach K-Player's stem engine your own music: SONGS, DATASET, TRAIN
WHATWhat the STEM TRAINER is

K-Player can split a track into four stems: KICK, BASS, DRUMS and TONAL (everything else). The STEM TRAINER teaches its NEURAL stem engine on songs you have as separate channels. It is a studio tool, not for a show.

  • Open it with Audio ▸ Stems ▸ TRAINING.
  • Three tabs: SONGS (collect), DATASET (prepare), TRAIN (learn).
  • The four bars across the top show how many hours you have of each class, against 20 hours a class.
  • Your tracks never leave the computer: training makes a small file of numbers (about 16 MB) that holds no sound.

The small beta code... box at the top right is for invited testers.

SONGSSONGS: adding a song

Left: the list of SONGS (name, channels, minutes; a problem shows in amber) under + ADD A SONG. Right: four big boxes, one per part.

BoxWhat may be in it
1 KICKOnly the kick drum: no bass, snare, hats, or shared reverb.
2 BASSOnly the bass line and its sub (low toms that play the bass line belong here).
3 DRUMSEvery drum and percussion except the kick.
4 TONALEverything else: synths, pads, leads, keys, guitars, vocals, effects.
  1. Click a box (Select or drag here the KICK channel) to choose files, or drag files onto it. A box takes several files; × empties it. Leave a part the song lacks empty.
  2. The song's name comes from the files' folder; RENAME changes it.
  3. Press ADD THIS SONG (two boxes at least). CLEAR empties all four.

It refuses, and says why: a file in two boxes, files of different lengths or sample rates, a single box, or a song already in the set. Every file must be exported from the very start of the song (WAV, AIFF, FLAC or MP3). Your files stay where they are.

Click a song to see its CHANNELS, each with a class chip: click to cycle KICK → BASS → DRUMS → TONAL → -- out --, right-click back. At the bottom: RE-CHECK reads every file again; REMOVE takes the selected song out of the set (the files are not touched).

DATADATASET: BUILD

Cuts the songs into four pools of short pieces, one per class. Left (BUILD): click a value to step it, right-click to go back: piece length, a piece every, channels (MONO / STEREO), sample rate, held back (songs kept out, to score with), silence floor, stop at (a disk limit). It shows the size it may take, then BUILD (or BUILD MORE, which adds only new songs; STOP while it runs).

Right (THE POOL): what is built, with LISTEN TO 8 and OPEN FOLDER. Everything here is made from your files and can be built again.

TRAINTRAIN: making the model
ControlWhat it does
model sizeSMALL (an evening's first look), MEDIUM (a night, the start value), LARGE (a week-end). Click to step, right-click back.
epochs · stop after5 … 200 passes over the pool (20 at first) · 1 … 24 hours or no limit (8 h at first); whichever comes first.
START / STOPTrains in the background with a progress bar. STOP keeps what it has; START carries on from it. It needs a pool (DATASET ▸ BUILD first).
THE RUNEpoch, step, time left, and how much better than no model it is.
THE MODEL K-PLAYER USESIts size, epochs and date. It is used when Audio Settings ▸ Stems is K-Player NEURAL.
MERGE MODELS FROM A FOLDER... · SHOW THE MODEL FILEAverage in models trained further on other computers · show the file to send to someone.
MEASUREScores the model on songs it never learned from, stem by stem, and keeps each result to compare.
REVERT TO PREVIOUSBrings back the model from before the last START, MERGE or download; press again to undo. Not while training runs.
POOLThe community's Pool Engine

On the TRAIN tab, under YOUR TRACKS STAY YOURS: SERVER... and YOUR NAME..., then SEND MY MODEL (numbers only, no sound). CHECK shows its grade; an accepted model gets a key, and GET THE POOL ENGINE installs the community's model (yours is kept aside). With no server set, SAVE IT AS A FILE... saves the model to send by hand.

Each K-Player release also comes with a Pool Engine of its own: a computer with no model starts from it at the first start, and trains on from there (see What comes with K-Player).

The Kadabra OS linkWhat goes from Kadabra OS to K-Player, and back
INFrom Kadabra OS to K-Player
  • Notes and controls arrive on K-Player's MIDI IN port (the one named Kadabra). A channel plays the notes of its MIDI IN channel; control and program changes on that channel reach all its plug-ins.
  • K-Player's own controls answer fixed CC numbers by scope: the decks on their channels, the mixer on its channel, and channel 16, the Kadabra's control channel, for RECORD and the MASTER's ARM.
  • SysEx (F0 7D 4B 50 …) sets the MASTER, starts and stops recording, saves and loads sessions, names channels, sets the key, the PATTERN length and the sync, and can quit K-Player. The table is under MIDI control.
OUTLINK-KADABRA: K-Player tells the Kadabra the key
  • The deck being heard decides: the louder side of the crossfader with its fader, not muted; A wins a tie.
  • When that deck plays into a new key point, K-Player sends ROOT TONE, SCALE and the point's HARMONY. The points used are the ones in force: up to the DETECTION LEVEL with AS DETECTED, or only approved ones with APPROVED ONLY (Audio Settings).
  • With Degree ON, a confident live chord change is also sent as HARMONY.
  • They go on MIDI ▸ KADABRA ▸ Send to, on its channel, as the Kadabra's own framed run of notes (four Note On 127 at velocity 1, the payload, a Note Off 127). You never build these yourself.
KEYThe Kadabra sets K-Player's key

The Kadabra can always set K-Player's tone, scale and harmony by SysEx (40 TONE, 41 SCALE, 42 HARMONY), whether LINK-KADABRA is on or off. 43 switches LINK-KADABRA itself (0 off, 1 on, 2 toggle).

  • The newest word wins. What the Kadabra said last is K-Player's key (TONE / SCALE reads FROM THE KADABRA) until a deck plays into a new key point.
  • K-Player never sends back what it received, so the two cannot echo each other.
  • A typical use: send 43 0 and your own TONE and SCALE to take over; later 43 1 gives the key back to the decks.
LOOPPatterns to the Kadabra LOOPER

A pattern of a MIDI piece (N bars of the song, 4 by default) goes to the Kadabra's LOOPER in one click: TO LOOPER n in the MIDI editor, LOOPER n on a piece on the ARRANGER, or the piece's menu Send pattern n to the Kadabra LOOPER.

K-Player writes the pattern as ~/Music/Tribal-Tools/Kadabra-Link/looper.mid, then rings the Kadabra with one FILE READY frame on the Kadabra port. The Kadabra sets the pattern length with SysEx 60 (1 … 64 bars).

SETSSessions by BANK SET, SET and STATE

SysEx 30 SAVE SESSION and 31 LOAD SESSION take a BANK SET (1 … 12), a SET (1 … 8) and a STATE name, the way the Kadabra counts them. BANK SET 3, SET 6, Rocking is the file sessions/03/User 6/Rocking.kplayer in K-Player's data folder. Saving the same name replaces it. LOAD in EDIT with unsaved changes asks on the screen first.

MIDI controlWhat reaches the plug-ins, the five scopes, every built-in CC, learning, SysEx
→VSTWhat reaches a channel's plug-ins

Apart from K-Player's own map, a channel's plug-ins hear the MIDI sent to that channel's MIDI channel:

  • notes: every box that takes notes (only the notes the channel's NOTE FILTER lets through, see the PLAYER page);
  • control changes: every box, instrument and effects alike;
  • program changes (with bank select): every box with a patch list;
  • pitch bend and pressure: as the plug-in maps them.

A CC moves whatever parameter the plug-in itself gives that CC. For a plug-in that gives none, use the parameter panel's learn. A message on MIDI channel 1 never reaches channel 2's plug-ins.

SCOPEThe five scopes
ScopeMIDI channelDrives
deckthe deck's own (CH 1 / CH 2 at first)its transport, EQ, fader, sends, pads
mixerthe INPUT strip's CH (3 at first)the INPUT strip, the MASTER fader, the FX controls
channela channel's own MIDI INthat channel's ARM
CH 16always 16RECORD, and ARM for the MASTER
anyany channelthe crossfader and the headphone level

So one CC number means different things on different channels. A button acts at 64 and up; a fader uses 0 – 127; a switch is on at 64 and up and off below, so the screen and the controller always agree.

CCEvery built-in control change
CCTypeScopeControl
3faderanyCrossfader, 0 = deck A, 127 = deck B
7faderdeckFader of the deck listening on that MIDI channel
9faderanyHeadphone (PFL) level
14 / 15faderdeckBend slower / faster, by pressure
20fadermixerINPUT channel fader
30buttonmixerMute the INPUT channel
31button · faderdeck · mixerdeck: this deck's pads through the INPUT inserts · mixer: MASTER fader
40 – 51buttondeckBeat repeat: 4, 2, 1, 1/2 bars; 1/4, 3/16, 1/8, 1/12, 1/16, 1/24, 1/32, 1/64 of a bar
70buttondeckPlay / pause
71buttondeckCUE: hold to preview from the cue point
72buttondeckHeadphone cue on / off
73buttondeckMute
74faderdeckFader
75faderdeckPan, 64 = centre
76 / 77 / 78faderdeckEQ high / mid / low, 64 = 0 dB
79faderdeckVari-speed, 64 = 1.00×
80buttondeckMatch this deck to the master BPM
81 / 82buttondeckNudge this deck +1 / −1 BPM
83 / 85buttondeckTranspose this deck +1 / −1 semitone
84switchchannelARM the channel listening on that MIDI channel
86 / 87buttondeckAuto-Fill on / off · MIC-REC arm on / off (the old pads)
88buttonmixerShow / hide the EQ knobs
89buttondeckCancel beat repeat
90faderdeck · mixerSend to the DELAY (this deck · the INPUT)
102switch · faderCH 16 · mixerCH 16: RECORD (64 and up starts, below stops) · mixer: FX control
103buttonmixerDucker: compressor or gate
104switch · buttonCH 16 · mixerCH 16: ARM the MASTER · mixer: what the ducker turns down
105fadermixerThe INPUT's send to the ducker's key
110faderdeckThis deck's pad group, 1 … 11
111faderdeck · mixerSend to the REVERB (this deck · the INPUT)
112 / 113fader · buttondeck · mixerdeck: its pads to the DELAY / REVERB · mixer: FX select / on-off
114 / 115faderdeck · mixerdeck: its ARRANGER lane to the DELAY / REVERB · mixer: FX controls
116 – 119faderdeck · mixer116 deck: this deck to the ducker's key · mixer: FX controls
LEARNPutting things on your own CC numbers
  • Any plug-in parameter: the parameter panel (MIDI button), learn or pick a number.
  • Bus settings: the CC badges on BUS 1 and BUS 2 (EDIT), on the bus's MIDI channel.
  • A channel's sends, a stem's level, a stem's M, a deck's headphone button (PFL): these have no fixed number; a badge (EDIT) opens the same grid with LEARN. They answer on their owner's MIDI channel.

Anything you assign wins over the built-in table for that number until you clear it. Assignments are saved in the session.

SYSEXSysEx K-Player understands

Every message is F0 7D 4B 50 <command> <data…> F7 on the MIDI IN port. A switch is 0 off, 1 on, 2 toggle. A channel number is its place on the PLAYER page (1 = DECK A, 2 = DECK B, 3 = the first channel). Every SysEx shows in WHAT IS COMING IN, with what K-Player did.

CommandNameData · meaning
01MASTER ARMswitch
02MASTER VOLUMEtwo bytes, 0 … 16383; 13107 is 0 dB
03MASTER PANtwo bytes; 8192 is centre
04MASTER VST BYPASSslot 1 … 3, then 0 plays, 1 bypassed, 2 toggle
05MASTER CUEswitch: the whole mix in the headphones
10MIDI SYNC0 NO SYNC, 1 SYNC IN, 2 SYNC OUT
20 / 21RECORD START / STOP(none)
30 / 31SAVE / LOAD SESSIONbank set, set, state name (see Sessions by BANK SET)
40 / 41 / 42TONE / SCALE / HARMONYtonic 0 … 11 · the Kadabra's scale number · degree from 0
43LINK-KADABRAswitch
50 / 51CHANNEL NAME / ALL CHANNEL NAMESa channel and its name · every name, each ended by 00 (any language)
60PATTERN LENGTHbars, 1 … 64
70QUIT0 (or nothing): as ⌘Q, asking first · 1 saves first · 2 quits without saving
Keyboard & mouseThe keys and gestures that work across the program
KEYSKeys and gestures
Key / gestureDoes
TAB / SHIFT+TABNext / previous page, in tab order: PLAYER → DJ-DECK → ARRANGER → PRODUCER.
SHIFT+SPACEThe transport's PLAY / STOP, from any page (plain SPACE does nothing).
↑ ↓ (and ← → on the PLAYER)Step the selected channel, on the PLAYER and the ARRANGER (one selection for both).
M · S · C · RMute · solo · CUE · ARM the selected channel (PLAYER and ARRANGER).
ESCCloses an open list, menu, CC grid or the NOTE FILTER's keys. Never closes a window or the program.
⌘N · ⌘O · ⌘S · ⇧⌘S · ⌘, · ⌘QNew · Open · Save · Save As · General settings · Quit (CTRL on Windows).
TRACKS window: type · ENTER · ESCSearch · load the first track into DECK A · clear the search.
Right-clickResets a fader or pan, clears a drop-list box, steps a cycling button backwards, or opens a menu.
WheelScrolls lists, panels and the DJ-DECK's rows; zooms waveforms and timelines (see each page).
DragFaders, bars and pans; plug-in boxes onto other boxes (EDIT); TRACKS rows onto decks and lanes; files from the Finder or Explorer onto a deck, a lane, or the window (they join TRACKS).
Sessions, files & foldersWhat a session keeps, autosave, and where K-Player keeps its things
FILEWhat a session keeps

A session is one text file, .kplayer. It keeps the decks and their tracks, the mixer (DJ-EQ or STEMIX too), every channel (name, kind, order, MIDI IN and its NOTE FILTER, inputs, side-chain source, ARM you set, CUE), the buses and the MASTER, every plug-in with its full state, the CC assignments, the ARRANGER (clips, MIDI pieces, PATTERN, stem automation), the PRODUCER's takes, the mode, the audio devices, the Kadabra out port and channel, and the recording folder.

It does not keep which MIDI input was open: that belongs to the computer it is played on.

AUTOAutosave, unsaved changes, start-up session
  • Autosave runs in EDIT only: 2.5 s after you stop changing things, at most every 20 s, into the session's own file (or autosave.kplayer in the data folder when it has none). It writes a temporary file first, so a crash never leaves half a file.
  • Unsaved changes are judged by content: a deck that played on is not a change; a moved fader is.
  • The factory session is never written to. The last session you loaded or saved opens at the next start; if it is gone, the factory session opens.
DIRSThe data folder

Everything lives in ~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Player (Windows: %USERPROFILE%\Music\Tribal-Tools\K-Player). Data from older versions (~/Music/K-Player, ~/Music/K-DJer) is moved in by itself. One line in datadir.txt there moves it all to another disk.

InsideWhat
markers/Each analysed track's markers, approved and edited ones too.
peaks/ · stems/Waveform overviews · the stems made of each track.
stemtrain/The STEM TRAINER's set, pools and model (stemtrain/model/stems.kmodel).
library.tsv (+ .bak)The TRACKS list.
plugins.tsvThe plug-in list, favourites and blacklist. Delete it (K-Player closed) to force a full rescan.
kplayer-prefs.txtSettings that are not in a session: language, text size, last and recent sessions, MIDI choices, detection level. Delete it to go back to the defaults.
autosave.kplayer · session.kplayer …The autosave of a session with no file · your copies of the factory session.
sessions/Sessions saved by SysEx (03/User 6/Rocking.kplayer).
padsA/ · padsB/The old sample pads of each deck.
WHEREOther places
  • Factory session: /Library/Application Support/Tribal-Tools/K-Player/starter.kplayer (Windows: %ProgramData%\Tribal-Tools\K-Player\starter.kplayer), put there by the installer.
  • Recordings: the folder you chose at the first RECORD, one session n folder per take. The PRODUCER's EXPORT writes into its exports folder.
  • The LOOPER file: ~/Music/Tribal-Tools/Kadabra-Link/looper.mid.
  • An error inside K-Player is written to /tmp/kdj-faults.log (Windows: %TEMP%\kdj-faults.log): useful in a bug report.
TroubleshootingCommon problems and what to check
FIXThe Kadabra makes no sound
  1. Play: does MIDI IN under SYSTEM light? If not, click MIDI PORT ▸ RESCAN PORTS and choose Kadabra (Kadabra OS must be running).
  2. Open MIDI ▸ WHAT IS COMING IN: it says on which MIDI channel the notes arrive and how many channels took them.
  3. On the PLAYER, check that a channel's MIDI IN matches that channel, its instrument box is loaded and not bypassed (B), its fader is up, and the PLAYER tab is ON. A red triangle on the MIDI IN box means its NOTE FILTER holds some notes back.
  4. Press Audio and use TEST TONE on MIX to check the speakers.
FIXThe Kadabra does not follow the key
  • LINK-KADABRA must be green, and a deck must be playing and heard (crossfader and fader up, not muted).
  • Check MIDI ▸ KADABRA ▸ Send to, then press TEST in Audio Settings: it sends the selected key.
  • With APPROVED ONLY, nothing is in force until you approve markers on the DJ-DECK.
  • If the Kadabra sent its own TONE or SCALE last, it stays in force until the deck reaches a new key point.
FIXPlug-ins and sessions
  • A plug-in is missing from the list: look under BLACKLISTED in the plug-in browser for the reason, then RESCAN it or RESCAN BAD. K-Player keeps running.
  • A session says it could not load something: the rest is loaded; the notice lists the plug-ins or files that were not there. Install the plug-in or put the file back and load again.
  • A session from an older K-Player: everything it has is loaded and a notice lists what it could not carry. Save it once and it is current.
  • Remove or Change does nothing: you are in PERFORM; switch to EDIT.
FIXOther things
  • PLAY does nothing: on the PRODUCER, record a take first (a toast says so); elsewhere, switch the ARRANGER tab ON.
  • Text too small: Settings ▸ General ▸ Text size.
  • Audio Settings taller than the screen: it scrolls with the wheel or the bar at its right edge.
  • K-Player does not start: open it from Applications; if it still fails, install the latest version (see ).
Kadabra Ecosystem · K-Player · Page

PLAYER

One channel strip per channel, up to 24: what each channel listens to, what plays it, its effects, its sends and its fader.

The PLAYER is K-Player's mixing desk, and the page where the Kadabra's sounds turn into sound. Each strip listens on a MIDI channel and plays those notes through its instrument plug-in (K-Sampler, Surge XT or any VST3 instrument). The sound then goes through up to three insert effects, two sends, a fader and a pan control.
Two strips are always there: DECK A and DECK B. They are the DJ-DECK's two decks, shown as channels. Every other strip is a channel of its own, and strip n here is lane n on the ARRANGER: one channel, seen from two pages.
• A new session has only the two deck strips. Add channels with + above the buses, or right-click the empty page.
• PERFORM keeps the strips safe during a set. EDIT lets you move channels, remove or change plug-ins, bypass them and use MIDI learn.
• The BUS 1 and BUS 2 strips and the MASTER strip at the right are on every page. They are described on the K-Player page.
• Version documented: K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
Back to top
At a glanceThe page, a strip from top to bottom, the three kinds of channel, PERFORM vs EDIT, the deck strips
MAPThe page, left to right
AreaWhat is there
The stripsOne strip per channel, starting with 01 at the left. All the strips that fit are shown. When there are more, a scroll bar appears under them (channels 1-8 of 15): drag it, click it, or turn the mouse wheel anywhere on the page.
The empty pageThe room to the right of the last strip. Right-click it to add a channel: Add a MIDI channel, Add an Audio channel, Add a Special channel.
- + n channelsAbove the two bus strips. It shows or hides channels, from 2 to 24. It is the same count as the ARRANGER's lanes.
BUS 1 · BUS 2 · MASTERAlways at the right, on every page. See
Lists and panelsThe MIDI IN, SIDE-CHAIN and AUDIO INPUT lists, and the NOTE FILTER's keys, open over the strips. The SIDE-CHAIN panel opens at the right of its strip. ESC or a click outside closes a list.
The hint lineAlong the bottom of the window. Point at any part of a strip and it says what it does and what a right-click does there.
STRIPA strip, top to bottom
RowWhat it shows
Number and name01 is the strip's position: it changes when strips move. The name belongs to the channel (Electro-Drums). A channel with no name shows ch and a number. The number is also the strip's select button.
Kind chipMIDI (violet), AUDIO (blue) or SPECIAL (amber): what kind of channel it is.
MIDI IN · SCLeft box: the MIDI channel the strip listens to (5, omni, or - for none). A yellow dot flashes when a note or a control arrives. A red triangle means its NOTE FILTER holds some notes back. Right box: the SIDE-CHAIN, the channel that turns this one down (SC means none).
Source rowWhat makes the sound: + Instrument on a MIDI channel, AUDIO IN on an AUDIO channel and on the deck strips, nothing on a SPECIAL channel.
insert 1 · 2 · 3Three effect boxes, used in that order. An empty one reads + insert 1.
DLY · RVBThe sends to BUS 1 (the delay) and BUS 2 (the reverb).
Fader and meterThe level in dB on the fader's cap, and a meter with its scale (+6 to −60). Above the meter: mono, or L R when the sound is stereo.
PANC in the centre, L35, R100 …
MUTE · SOLOShown as M and S on a narrow strip.
ARM · CUEARM for recording, CUE for the headphones.
KINDMIDI, AUDIO and SPECIAL channels
KindWhere its sound comes from
MIDIIts instrument. The instrument plays the notes on the strip's MIDI IN channel and the MIDI pieces on its ARRANGER lane. A new channel is MIDI.
AUDIOIts AUDIO IN (a deck, or an input of your audio interface), plus the clips on its ARRANGER lane while the ARRANGER plays. A channel that gets an audio file on its lane becomes AUDIO.
SPECIALKept for the Kadabra's own data (states, scale and key changes, motion). For now it has no instrument and no input.

Click the chip to step AUDIO → MIDI → SPECIAL. Right-click steps back. If a MIDI channel becomes AUDIO or SPECIAL, its instrument is kept but bypassed. Make it MIDI again and the instrument comes back on (an instrument you had bypassed yourself stays bypassed).

MODEPERFORM vs EDIT on this page
PERFORMEDIT
Loaded plug-in boxesA click opens the plug-in's window. No MIDI or B buttons.B (bypass) on every loaded box, MIDI on the box under the pointer
Right-click a loaded boxA toast: plug-ins are changed or removed in EDIT modeRemove / Bypass / Change menu
Drag a plug-in onto another boxLockedMoves it
Drag a strip's headA toast: channels are rearranged in EDIT modeMoves the channel
Right-click the strip itselfA toast: channels are removed in EDIT modeRemove channel n
Click the nameNothingRenames it (a right-click renames in both modes)
CC badges on DLY / RVBHiddenShown

Everything else works in both modes: MIDI IN, SC, the inputs, loading a plug-in into an empty box, the sends, the fader, PAN, MUTE, SOLO, ARM, CUE and adding channels. Switch modes with PERFORM | EDIT in the top bar.

DECKThe two deck strips

DECK A and DECK B are the DJ-DECK's decks as channels. They are the same controls seen from two pages: their fader, PAN, MUTE, three inserts, MIDI channel and CUE (the deck's headphone button) belong to the deck. A new session puts them at 01 and 02. You can drag them like any strip (the factory session has them at 13 and 14).

  • MIDI IN is the deck's own MIDI channel: 1 to 16 only, never the other deck's channel or the mixer's (a toast says why). Notes on it that no other strip takes go to the deck's K-SAMPLER box on the DJ-DECK page.
  • The source row is the deck's AUDIO IN. It takes an input of the audio interface, never a deck. The deck's K-SAMPLER hears the same input, and its MIC-REC records it.
  • A deck strip has no Instrument box, and it cannot be removed (the decks are always there).
VIEWA new session, in PERFORM
PERFORM lit green: only DECK A and DECK B, each with its AUDIO IN box, and the boxes show no MIDI or B buttons. K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
QHow do I play a Kadabra sound on a new channel?
  1. Check that the top bar's MIDI PORT shows Kadabra.
  2. Right-click the empty page to the right of the last strip and choose Add a MIDI channel (or press + above the buses).
  3. Click the new strip's MIDI IN box (the left box under the name) and choose the CH that the Kadabra sound plays on.
  4. Click + Instrument. The Plugins window opens on INST ONLY. Click an instrument (K-Sampler, Surge XT …). Its window opens.
  5. Play the Kadabra. The yellow dot in MIDI IN flashes and the meter moves.
ChannelsAdding, removing, moving, naming and selecting channels; strip width and scrolling
COUNT- + n channels

Above BUS 1 and BUS 2, on the PLAYER and on the ARRANGER (one count for both pages).

  • + shows the next channel. An unused one becomes a MIDI channel and takes the lowest MIDI channel that no strip uses (none when all sixteen are taken).
  • - hides the last strip. Its plug-ins stay, and + brings it back as it was. To clear a channel for good, use Remove channel.
  • The count goes from 2 to 24. It never goes below the last strip that has clips on its ARRANGER lane.
ADDThe add menu

Right-click the empty page to the right of the last strip: Add a MIDI channel, Add an Audio channel, Add a Special channel, each with a dot in its kind's colour. The new strip appears at the end and the page scrolls to it. A toast says what was added (added MIDI channel 9, listening on CH 7).

  • An Audio or Special channel gives back the MIDI channel it would have taken.
  • A channel that still has clips or a plug-in on it comes back as it was. If that is not the kind you asked for, the toast says so.
  • With all 24 in use the menu is grey: all 24 channels are in use.
  • The ARRANGER opens the same menu from the room under its last lane.
DELRemoving a channel

In EDIT, right-click the strip itself, on a spot that is not a control (the meter is a good spot). The menu says Remove channel 5 "Bass 1". Everything on that channel goes: its plug-ins, its clips and MIDI pieces on the ARRANGER, its name, inputs, side-chain and ARM. The row gets one strip shorter. The next + brings the channel back empty.

In PERFORM a toast says channels are removed in EDIT mode. The deck strips cannot be removed.

MOVEMoving a channel (EDIT)

Press the strip's head (the row with the name) and slide sideways. The word drag appears in the head's corner when the pointer is over it in EDIT. The strips change places as you pass them, and the ARRANGER's lanes move with them.

Nothing is reloaded: the plug-ins, clips and settings stay with the channel, so you can move it while it plays. Moving changes the strip's number (its position), not the channel. In PERFORM the order is locked, and a toast says so.

NAMENaming a channel

Right-click the name (in either mode), or click it in EDIT. The old name is selected, so typing replaces it. BACKSPACE clears it. ← or → keeps it so you can add to its end. ENTER (or TAB) keeps the new name, ESC cancels, and a click anywhere else keeps it. Up to 24 characters.

The name also appears on the ARRANGER lane, in the SIDE-CHAIN lists and in the names of recorded takes. An empty name on a deck strip goes back to DECK A / DECK B. The Kadabra can name channels by SysEx (see MIDI learn and the Kadabra).

SELThe selected channel

Click a strip's number to select it: the number lights up and the strip gets a green frame. Click the number again to unselect it. It is the same selection as the ARRANGER's lane column.

  • ← → (and ↑ ↓) step through the channels in order, and the page scrolls to keep the selected one in view. With nothing selected, the first press selects the first or the last channel.
  • M mute, S solo, C CUE, R ARM: each one switches that setting of the selected channel. Plain keys only: ⌘+S is still SAVE.
  • These keys do nothing while a menu or a parameter panel is open.
WIDEStrip width and scrolling

Drag the right edge of any strip (a blue line shows when the pointer is on it). All strips change width together, from 74 to 260 pixels. Below 96 pixels, MUTE and SOLO read M and S.

When there are more strips than fit, a scroll bar appears under them with channels 1-8 of 15. Drag it, click it, or turn the mouse wheel anywhere on the page (one strip per notch).

QHow do I add an Audio channel?
  1. Right-click the empty page to the right of the last strip.
  2. Choose Add an Audio channel. A blue AUDIO strip appears at the end.
  3. Click its AUDIO IN box to give it an input, or drop audio files on its lane on the ARRANGER.
QHow do I remove a channel?
  1. Switch the top bar to EDIT.
  2. Right-click the strip's meter (any spot of the strip that is not a control).
  3. Choose Remove channel n. Its plug-ins, clips and settings go.
QHow do I move a channel to another place?
  1. Switch the top bar to EDIT.
  2. Press the strip's head (the name row, not the number) and slide it sideways.
  3. Let go where it should be. Its ARRANGER lane moves with it.
QHow do I rename a channel?
  1. Right-click the strip's name (in PERFORM or EDIT).
  2. Type the new name (up to 24 characters).
  3. Press ENTER. ESC cancels.
QHow do I see more channels at once?
  1. Point at the right edge of any strip until a blue line shows.
  2. Drag it to the left: all strips get narrower together (down to 74 pixels).
  3. To reach the rest, turn the mouse wheel over the page or drag the scroll bar under the strips.
QHow do I mute, solo, CUE or ARM from the keyboard?
  1. Click a strip's number to select it (or step to it with the arrow keys).
  2. Press M to mute, S to solo, C for CUE or R for ARM. Press the key again to switch it back.
MIDI IN, side-chain and the source rowWhat a strip listens to, what turns it down, and where its sound comes from
MIDIMIDI IN

The left box under the name. It shows the channel in large type (5), omni, or - (none), with a green frame when a channel is set. Click it for the MIDI IN list: omni, CH 1 … CH 16, none. If other strips already use a channel, the row says so (also 3,5: their strip numbers). Right-click the box to set none (a deck strip always keeps a channel).

  • Notes on that MIDI channel go to the strip's instrument. Two strips on one channel both play: a layer under one hand.
  • omni: the strip plays notes from every MIDI channel.
  • Changing the channel ends any note that is still held.
  • The yellow dot flashes for a quarter of a second when a note or a control arrives (on every strip except the two deck strips).
  • At the right of each row (omni and CH 1 … CH 16) is a >. It chooses which notes of that MIDI channel play on this strip: see The NOTE FILTER. A deck strip's list has none.
The MIDI IN list of strip 01: also 13 says strip 13 listens on CH 1 too. The pointer is on the > of CH 1, and the hint line says what it does.
NOTESThe NOTE FILTER: only some notes on this strip

Two strips can listen on the same MIDI channel and share out its notes: the kick (note 36) to a strip with K-Kick and its own EQ and compressor, every other note to the strip with the drum set. Each strip has a NOTE FILTER of its own.

WhereWhat it does
The > in the MIDI IN listAt the right of every row. A click chooses that MIDI channel for the strip and opens its keys.
The keysTitled CHANNEL 3 - NOTES FROM CH 1: all 128 notes, 0 … 127, one octave a row (C-2 … C8; note 36 is C1). A lit green key plays on this strip, a red one does not. A note arriving on that MIDI channel frames its key in yellow, so you can find the kick's note by playing it.
Click a keyTurns it off, or on again. Drag across keys to set them all the same way.
ALL ON · ALL OFFEvery note plays again · no note plays (then click the few that should).
The line at the footWhat the filter does, in words: Plays ONLY note 36 (C1) - the other 127 are off.
Closing itA click outside the keys, or ESC.
On the stripA red triangle on the MIDI IN box while any key is off. Point at it and the hint line says which notes play, and how to change it.
  • Only notes are held back. Control changes, program changes and pitch bend still reach the strip's plug-ins.
  • A note-off always goes through, so a note turned off while it is held still ends.
  • It filters what arrives on MIDI IN. The MIDI pieces on the strip's ARRANGER lane play all their notes.
  • A recorded take holds only the notes the strip played (and every controller).
  • The session keeps it, and Remove channel clears it. A deck strip has no NOTE FILTER.
The keys of strip 03 on CH 1: only 36 is lit, the rest are red, and the foot line says Plays ONLY note 36 (C1) - the other 127 are off.
Closed again: the red triangle on strip 03's MIDI IN box. The pointer is on it, so the hint line says what the filter does.
QHow do I send only the kick to a channel of its own?
  1. Keep the drum kit on its MIDI strip. Put the kick sound (K-Kick, for example) on a second MIDI strip.
  2. On the kick's strip, click the MIDI IN box, then the > at the right of the drums' MIDI channel. The keys open.
  3. Press ALL OFF, then click key 36 (or play the kick on the Kadabra: its key is framed in yellow, then click it).
  4. Click outside the keys. A red triangle on the MIDI IN box shows the filter is on.
  5. On the drum kit's strip, open the same > and click key 36 so it turns red: the kit no longer plays the kick.
QHow do I make a strip play every note again?
  1. Click the strip's MIDI IN box (the one with the red triangle).
  2. Click the > at the right of its MIDI channel.
  3. Press ALL ON, then click outside the keys. The red triangle is gone.
SCSIDE-CHAIN: what turns this channel down

The right box under the name. Click it: the SIDE-CHAIN input list opens at the right of the strip.

  • Parameters + opens or closes the SIDE-CHAIN panel (next card).
  • No Side-Chain.
  • from DECKS (A + B): both decks together. Not offered on a deck strip.
  • from CH n: every other strip, with its name at the right.

Right-click the box to set No Side-Chain. With a source chosen, the box reads from 4 (< 4 on a narrow strip) or from DECKS (< DK) and turns orange. An orange line along its bottom shows how far the channel is being turned down right now. Only this channel changes: the channel it listens to sounds exactly as before. A channel cannot key itself.

SCPThe SIDE-CHAIN panel

Open it with Parameters in the SC list. It opens at the right of its strip and stays open while you work. x closes it, and so does the Parameters row again. Its top line names the channel and its key (CH 5 < CH 1, or - no source). Under it: COMP | GATE | SPECTRAL, then the bars.

ModeWhat it does
COMPWhen the key goes above THRESH, this channel is turned down: classic ducking.
GATEWhile the key is below THRESH, this channel is turned down, so it is heard only while the key plays. HOLD keeps it open a little longer.
SPECTRALTurns down only the frequency bands the key is playing in. For example, a kick takes the bass's low end and leaves its top. The panel's foot says how many ms this delays the channel.
BarRange · defaultUsed byMeaning
THRESH−60 … 0 dB · −24COMP, GATEthe key level where it starts
RATIO1 … 20:1 · 4COMP, GATEhow hard it pushes
ATTACK0.5 … 100 ms · 8allhow fast it turns down
RELEASE5 … 1000 ms · 220allhow fast it comes back
RANGE0 … 100 % · 70COMP, GATEthe most it may turn down (100 % = 60 dB)
HOLD0 … 500 ms · 60GATEhow long it stays open after the key drops
SPEC DEPTH0 … 100 % · 80SPECTRALhow deep it cuts
SPEC THRESH−80 … −10 dB · −40SPECTRALthe band level where it starts

Drag a bar to set it. The value shows at its right. Right-click a bar to put back its default. Bars the chosen mode does not use are dimmed. The bar at the foot shows what is happening right now: open, or how many dB the channel is turned down.

SRCThe source row
StripThe row showsClick · right-click
MIDI channel+ Instrument (violet), or the instrument's nameEmpty: the Plugins window, on INST ONLY. Loaded: the instrument's window. Right-click in EDIT: its menu. See Instruments and effects.
MIDI channel whose instrument takes audio (K-Sampler, Surge XT …)The Instrument box plus an IN chip at its right: the REC ININ: the REC IN list · right-click: none
AUDIO channelAUDIO IN (blue), or the input it listens to (IN 1+2, DECK A)The AUDIO INPUT list · right-click: no input
Deck stripThe deck's AUDIO INThe list, with interface inputs only · right-click: no input
SPECIAL channelAn empty dark boxNothing to choose
INPUTThe AUDIO INPUT list

The list starts with no input, DECK A and DECK B (the decks are not offered on a deck strip). Then come the inputs of the device chosen under INPUT in Audio settings: each stereo pair with its two single inputs under it (IN 1+2, IN 1, IN 2, IN 3+4 …). On a large interface the list scrolls (mouse wheel, or the bar at its right) and opens at the current choice. With no device open it says no input device open -- Audio.

  • An input (a microphone, a guitar) goes through the channel's inserts, sends and fader, and can be recorded with ARM.
  • DECK A / DECK B: the channel takes what that deck plays after the deck's own strip. The deck is still heard on its own way to the MASTER, so this is a second, parallel copy that can have effects of its own.
RECINREC IN: audio into a MIDI channel's instrument

Some instruments take audio as well as notes: K-Sampler does, for its MIC-REC. When one is in the Instrument box, an IN chip appears at the box's right. Click it for the REC IN (into the instrument) list (the same choices as AUDIO INPUT). Right-click it for none. The chip then shows the input (IN 1).

The REC IN goes into the instrument only. It is never heard through the strip, so K-Sampler can record it without it sounding twice. It is kept in the session. On the DJ-DECK, the deck's K-SAMPLER takes the deck strip's AUDIO IN instead.

QHow do I set which MIDI channel a strip listens to?
  1. Click the strip's MIDI IN box (the left box under the name).
  2. Choose CH 1 to CH 16, omni (every channel) or none. also n means strip n uses that channel already.
  3. Play: the yellow dot in the box flashes when notes arrive.
QHow do I layer two instruments under one hand?
  1. Load an instrument on each of two MIDI strips.
  2. Set both strips' MIDI IN to the same channel (the list shows also n for the other strip).
  3. Play that channel: both instruments sound. Balance them with the two faders.
QHow do I duck one channel under another (side-chain)?
  1. On the channel that should get quieter (a bass, a pad), click its SC box.
  2. Choose from CH n for the drums channel (or from DECKS).
  3. Click the SC box again and choose Parameters. Choose COMP.
  4. Drag THRESH, RATIO and RANGE until it pumps the way you want. The orange line under the SC box shows it working.
QHow do I play a microphone or a guitar through a channel?
  1. Press Audio in the top bar and choose your interface under INPUT.
  2. Add an Audio channel (right-click the empty page ▸ Add an Audio channel).
  3. Click its AUDIO IN box and choose the input: IN 1 for one microphone, IN 1+2 for a stereo pair.
  4. Add effects in its insert boxes and set the fader. ARM it to record it.
QHow do I let K-Sampler on a MIDI channel record the microphone?
  1. Put K-Sampler in the strip's Instrument box. An IN chip appears at the box's right.
  2. Click IN and choose the microphone's input (IN 1).
  3. Use K-Sampler's MIC-REC as usual. The input goes into K-Sampler only and is not heard through the strip.
Instruments and effectsThe Instrument box and the three inserts, the Plugins window, plug-in windows, the right-click menu, moving plug-ins, and what MIDI reaches them
BOXThe Instrument box and the insert boxes
BoxLooks likeA click
Empty Instrument+ Instrument, violet frameOpens the Plugins window on INST ONLY
Empty insert+ insert 1, greyOpens the Plugins window
LoadedThe plug-in's name. Instrument violet, insert green.Opens the plug-in's own window
BypassedRed-brown, name dimmed, B lit red (EDIT)Opens the plug-in's own window
  • The sound goes Instrument → insert 1 → insert 2 → insert 3, then the sends, the fader and PAN.
  • A box opens when the mouse button comes back up on it. The press itself is free for picking a plug-in up and carrying it (EDIT).
  • In EDIT every loaded box has a B button (bypass), and the box under the pointer also shows MIDI (the parameter panel). In PERFORM neither is shown, so a brushed box cannot knock a sound out mid-set.
  • The deck strips' three boxes are the deck's own inserts, the same boxes as on the DJ-DECK mixer.
PLUGThe Plugins window, from a strip

A click on an empty box opens the Plugins window, which already knows the box it is for. Its header says insert into ch 5 · INSTRUMENT, or replace Surge XT in … when you chose Change.

  • SCAN (with progress) and RESCAN BAD; under them n usable · m blacklisted. close hides the window and inserts nothing.
  • Two separate choices: A-Z | VENDOR, and ALL | FX ONLY | INST ONLY. The Instrument box opens it on INST ONLY. An insert box never opens it on INST ONLY.
  • Sections: STARRED (your favourites), RECENT, the list itself (ALL, INSTRUMENTS or EFFECTS, then A-Z or BY VENDOR), and BLACKLISTED: plug-ins that crashed the scan, each with its reason and a RESCAN.
  • A row shows a star (click it to make a favourite), the name, the vendor, FX or INSTR, the number of parameters, and GUI when the plug-in has a window. Click the row (INSERT shows on hover) to put that plug-in in the box.
  • A new instrument opens its own window at once. A new effect does not.

Any VST3 plug-in on the computer can go in a box. Tribal Tools' K-Sampler, K-Synth and K-Kick are instruments, Surge XT is a free synthesizer, and K-Channel is a channel-strip effect.

GUIA plug-in's own window

Click a loaded box: the plug-in's own window opens, named after where it sits: K-Player - Channel 5 - Instrument, K-Player - Channel 5 - Insert 2, K-Player - Deck A - Insert 1. The channel number is the strip's number.

Every plug-in has a window of its own. Clicking a box whose window is already open brings that window to the front, and closing one leaves the others open. The window follows the MIDI the plug-in gets, so you can watch what the Kadabra is moving.

MENURight-click a loaded box (EDIT)
  • Remove Plugin: the plug-in goes, together with its MIDI-learned CCs.
  • Bypass Plugin (Un-bypass Plugin when it is bypassed): the same as the B button.
  • Change Plugin…: opens the Plugins window on that box (replace …). The old plug-in keeps playing until the new one is ready. Its learned CCs go, unless you pick the same plug-in again. Close the window without choosing and nothing changes.

On the Instrument box the rows say Instrument instead of Plugin. In PERFORM a right-click on a loaded box changes nothing, and a toast says plug-ins are changed or removed in EDIT mode. A right-click on an empty box does nothing.

CARRYCarrying a plug-in to another box (EDIT)

Press a loaded box and move the mouse: the plug-in's name follows the pointer, and the box it would land on is outlined. Let go on any other box on the screen: another strip's insert or Instrument box, a bus insert, a MASTER insert. The plug-in moves with all its settings and its open window. Whatever was in that box goes the other way: the two swap.

Let go on nothing and the plug-in stays where it was. In PERFORM nothing can be carried.

VSTWhat MIDI reaches a strip's plug-ins

A strip's plug-ins hear the MIDI on the strip's MIDI IN channel (every channel with omni), and nothing else:

MessageGoes to
NotesEvery box that takes notes: the instrument, and any effect that plays from notes. Only the notes the strip's NOTE FILTER lets through.
Control change (CC)Every box, instrument and effects alike. It moves the parameter the plug-in itself names for that CC.
Program changeEvery box with a patch list, after the bank select that comes before it.
Pitch bend, pressureEvery box, the way VST3 maps them.

Some plug-ins name no CC at all. Reach their knobs with MIDI learn (next section). Every plug-in also follows the MASTER BPM in the top section, so synced delays and arpeggiators keep time.

QHow do I load an instrument?
  1. Use a MIDI strip (click the kind chip until it reads MIDI, or add a MIDI channel).
  2. Click + Instrument. The Plugins window opens on INST ONLY.
  3. Click the instrument's row (K-Sampler, K-Synth, K-Kick, Surge XT …). Its window opens.
QHow do I add an effect to a channel?
  1. Click an empty insert box on the strip (+ insert 1).
  2. In the Plugins window, choose FX ONLY if you like, then click the effect's row.
  3. Click the box to open the effect's window and set it.
QHow do I open a plug-in's window?
  1. Click the loaded box (Instrument or insert) and let go on it.
  2. The plug-in's window opens, named K-Player - Channel n - …. If it is open already, it comes to the front.
QHow do I bypass a plug-in?
  1. Switch the top bar to EDIT.
  2. Click the B at the right of the box: it lights red and the box turns red-brown. Click again to switch the plug-in back on.
  3. Or right-click the box and choose Bypass Plugin.
QHow do I remove or change a plug-in?
  1. Switch the top bar to EDIT.
  2. Right-click the plug-in's box.
  3. Choose Remove Plugin, or Change Plugin… and click the new one in the Plugins window.
QHow do I move a plug-in to another box or channel?
  1. Switch the top bar to EDIT.
  2. Press the loaded box and drag. Its name follows the pointer.
  3. Let go on the outlined target box. If that box held a plug-in, the two swap.
MIDI learn and the KadabraThe parameter panel, learned CCs, the send badges, and what the Kadabra can do to a strip
PANELThe parameter panel (MIDI button, EDIT)

In EDIT, point at a loaded box and press its MIDI button. A panel opens in the middle of the window and the rest goes dark. Its title names the channel, the box and the plug-in.

PartWhat it does
PLUGIN GUI · closeOpen the plug-in's own window · close the panel
BYPASSBypass the plug-in. Beside it is its own CC chip, so a Kadabra control can bypass it (64 and up = bypassed).
A parameter rowThe parameter's name, a bar you can drag, its value (0.00 to 1.00), and a CC chip
CC chip [-] CC nn [+]Click the middle to learn: it reads learn, the panel says move a MIDI control now to bind it..., and the next CC that arrives is taken. - / + dial a number directly. Right-click clears it (CC --).

A click outside the panel closes it.

LEARNHow a learned CC behaves
  • The CC's value 0 to 127 moves the parameter across its whole range.
  • A learned CC wins over K-Player's own fixed meaning of that number.
  • It answers whatever MIDI channel it arrives on, so choose a CC number that nothing else sends.
  • It is kept in the session, and it stays with the channel when strips are moved. Removing or changing the plug-in clears its learned CCs.

This is how a Kadabra FX combi (FXer) or a motion axis can turn any knob of any plug-in.

BADGEThe CC badges on the sends (EDIT)

In EDIT a small badge sits at the right end of each DLY and RVB bar. It reads CC, the number it has, or ... while learning. Click it for the grid of all 128 numbers, titled Bass 1 DLY send on MIDI CC.

  • Click a number, or LEARN to take the next CC that arrives. NONE clears it, CLOSE closes the grid.
  • The grid tells you where it listens: answers on CH 5 only (the strip's MIDI channel), or on any channel when the strip has none.
  • CC 21 – 29 are tinted: they are the Kadabra's motion axes.
  • Right-click the badge to clear it. The sends have no fixed CC numbers. You choose them, and they are kept in the session.
KOSWhat the Kadabra can do to a strip
From the KadabraWhat happens
Notes on the strip's channelIts instrument plays them.
CC, program changeIts plug-ins get them (see What MIDI reaches a strip's plug-ins).
CC 84 on the strip's channelARM: 64 and up arms, below disarms. It acts on every strip on that channel (not the deck strips). One Kadabra can arm channels one by one this way.
SysEx CHANNEL NAME (50)Names the strip with that number.
SysEx ALL CHANNEL NAMES (51)Names the strips in order.

The full MIDI map is on the K-Player page.

QHow do I control a plug-in knob from the Kadabra (MIDI learn)?
  1. Switch the top bar to EDIT.
  2. Point at the plug-in's box and press MIDI. The parameter panel opens.
  3. Click the middle of the CC chip on the parameter's row. It reads learn.
  4. Move the Kadabra control (a combi, a motion axis). The chip shows CC nn.
  5. Click outside the panel to close it.
QHow do I change an instrument's preset from the Kadabra?
  1. Set the strip's MIDI IN to the channel the Kadabra sends on.
  2. Send a program change on that channel from the Kadabra (with a bank select before it if the plug-in uses banks).
  3. Every box on the strip that has a patch list moves to that program, and its window follows. To see where a message went, open MIDI in the top bar ▸ WHAT IS COMING IN.
QHow do I put a send on a Kadabra control?
  1. Switch the top bar to EDIT.
  2. Click the CC badge at the end of the strip's DLY or RVB bar.
  3. Click a CC number, or press LEARN and move the Kadabra control.
Sends, fader, pan, MUTE, SOLO, CUE and ARMThe lower half of a strip
SENDDLY and RVB

Two short bars above the fader: DLY sends to BUS 1 (the delay), RVB to BUS 2 (the reverb). Drag a bar sideways from nothing to full. Right-click it for zero.

The send is taken after the fader, so pulling the fader down lowers the send too. A send is only heard while the bus's DELAY or REVERB button is on (on the bus strip). In EDIT each bar has a CC badge at its end.

FADERFader and meter
  • Drag the fader. Its cap shows the level in dB. 0 dB is at 80 % of the travel (a line marks it), +6 dB is at the top, and the bottom is off (-inf). The fader snaps to 0 dB when it gets close. Right-click it to go back to 0 dB.
  • The meter runs from −60 to +6 dB, with a scale beside it (0 in red). It is green below −6 dB, yellow up to 0 and red above.
  • mono or L R above the meter: the meter splits in two when the two sides really carry different sound.
  • A deck strip's fader is the deck's fader on the DJ-DECK page.
PANPAN

Under the fader. Drag the handle left or right. It reads C, L35, R100 and snaps to the centre when close. Right-click it for the centre. A deck strip's PAN is the deck's pan.

MUTEMUTE and SOLO
  • MUTE (red when on) silences the channel. A deck strip's MUTE is the deck's MUTE.
  • SOLO (gold when on): while any strip is soloed, the channels that are not soloed go quiet. A solo does not silence the two deck strips.
  • A strip that is muted, or left out by a solo, shows its name and fader cap dimmed.
  • Keys: M and S for the selected channel.
CUECUE: the headphones

CUE sits beside ARM and lights blue. It puts the channel in the headphones (the CUE output chosen in Audio settings), taken before the fader. The main mix does not change. With the fader down or MUTE on, you still hear the channel in the headphones. It works in PERFORM too.

A deck strip's CUE is the deck's headphone button on the DJ-DECK page: one setting. Key: C.

ARMARM and recording

ARM (red frame when armed) means "this channel takes part in the next recording". During a take it reads REC with a lit dot. Switch it by clicking, with the R key, or by CC 84 from the Kadabra.

  • RECORD in the top section records every armed strip. Arming a strip during a take adds it to that take; disarming ends its file.
  • RECORD with nothing armed takes every channel in use, and the MASTER, by itself. It disarms them again when the take ends.
  • When the take stops, the sound goes to the PRODUCER, on the lane of the channel it came from. A MIDI channel's notes also go onto its own ARRANGER lane as a MIDI piece you can edit.
QHow do I add reverb or delay to a channel?
  1. On the bus strip at the right, switch on REVERB (BUS 2) or DELAY (BUS 1). It turns green.
  2. On the channel's strip, drag the RVB (or DLY) bar to the right.
  3. Set the overall amount with the bus strip's fader. Right-click the send bar to take it off again.
QHow do I hear one channel in the headphones?
  1. Press Audio in the top bar and choose the headphone output under CUE.
  2. Click the strip's CUE (beside ARM). It lights blue.
  3. The channel is in the headphones even with its fader down. Click CUE again to take it out.
QHow do I record some channels?
  1. Click ARM on each strip you want (or select it and press R).
  2. Press RECORD in the top section. The first time, choose the folder K-Player records into.
  3. Play, then press STOP. The takes appear on the PRODUCER; a MIDI channel's notes also appear on its ARRANGER lane.
Keyboard & mouse on the PLAYEREvery key and every gesture on this page
KEYSKeys
KeyDoes
← → ↑ ↓Select the previous / next channel (the ARRANGER's selection too).
M · S · C · RMUTE · SOLO · CUE · ARM of the selected channel, on and off.
ESCCloses an open list, menu or the NOTE FILTER's keys. While you type a name: cancels it. It never quits K-Player.
ENTER / TAB · BACKSPACEWhile you type a name: keep it · delete.
EverywhereTAB / SHIFT+TAB change page, SHIFT+SPACE is the transport's PLAY, ⌘+S saves: see the K-Player page.
MOUSEMouse
WhereClickRight-clickDrag
Strip numberSelect / unselect the channel——
NameRename (EDIT)Rename (both modes)Move the channel (EDIT)
Rest of the head——Move the channel (EDIT); a toast in PERFORM
Kind chipNext kindPrevious kind—
MIDI INThe MIDI IN list (its > opens the NOTE FILTER)None—
A key of the NOTE FILTEROff / on—Sets every key you pass the same way
SCThe SIDE-CHAIN listNo Side-Chain—
Instrument / insert boxEmpty: Plugins window · loaded: its window (on release)EDIT: Remove / Bypass / ChangeCarry the plug-in to another box (EDIT)
B · MIDI on a box (EDIT)Bypass · parameter panel——
AUDIO IN · IN chipThe input listNo input—
DLY · RVBSet the sendZeroSet the send
CC badge (EDIT)The CC gridClear—
Fader—0 dBLevel
PAN—CentrePan
MUTE · SOLO · ARM · CUEOn / off——
The strip itself (the meter)—EDIT: Remove channel n—
A strip's right edge——Width of all strips
The empty page—The add menu—
Scroll bar · mouse wheelJump—Scroll the strips (the wheel: one strip per notch; over an open AUDIO INPUT list it scrolls the list)
SIDE-CHAIN panel bar—DefaultValue

An audio file dropped on the PLAYER page is added to the TRACKS library. To put one on a channel, drop it on that channel's lane on the ARRANGER.

The PLAYER and the other pagesDJ-DECK, ARRANGER, PRODUCER, the page's ON chip, and the parts that are on every page
DECKDJ-DECK

The deck strips are the decks. A fader, PAN, MUTE, insert, MIDI channel or CUE changed on either page changes on both. The deck's AUDIO IN is set only here on the PLAYER, and the deck's K-SAMPLER hears it too.

ARRARRANGER

Every strip is a lane of the ARRANGER, in the same order. Moving a strip moves its lane. The kind, MUTE, SOLO, the name and the selected channel are the same on both pages.

  • MIDI pieces on a lane play that strip's instrument. Audio clips on a lane play through that strip.
  • AUDIO TO MIDI on the ARRANGER creates a new MIDI channel named after the track. It appears here as a new strip, waiting for its instrument.
  • EXPORT TO PRODUCER renders each MIDI channel's notes through that strip's instrument and inserts. A channel with no instrument is left out.
PRODPRODUCER

What you record from armed strips lands on the PRODUCER, on the lane of the channel it came from, one take after another.

ONThe PLAYER tab's ON chip

The ON chip on the PLAYER tab switches the page's sound processing. The channels other than the decks belong to both the PLAYER and the ARRANGER, so they keep running while either page's chip is on. Switching between pages never turns a page on or off: only the chip does.

ALLWhat is on every page

The top bar (SAVE, LOAD, PERFORM | EDIT, MIDI PORT, MIDI, Audio), the top section (MASTER BPM, TRACKS, RECORD …), the page tabs, the BUS 1 and BUS 2 strips and the MASTER strip are described on the K-Player page.

Kadabra Ecosystem · K-Player · Page

DJ-DECK

Two decks and a DJ mixer: play two records, match their tempo, loop them, and let the Kadabra follow their key.

DJ-DECK is K-Player's DJ page. DECK A is on the left, DECK B on the right, and the mixer sits between them. Each deck plays one track, shows its waveform and its markers (the tempo and key K-Player found in the track), and has a K-Sampler of its own in the K-SAMPLER box.
While a deck plays, LINK-KADABRA in the top bar can send the record's key, scale and harmony to the Kadabra, so whatever you play on the Kadabra fits the record.
• The decks are K-Player's first two channels: strips 1 and 2 on the PLAYER page are DECK A and DECK B.
• Open it with the DJ-DECK tab at the bottom-left of the top section, or press TAB until it shows.
• Version documented: K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
Back to top
At a glanceThe page, PERFORM vs EDIT here, and the rules every control follows
VIEWThe DJ-DECK page
DECK A with an analysed track, its markers along the bottom of the waveform, DETECTION and LOOP open. In the middle the thin mixer: CH 1 and CH 2 above the faders, the EQ knobs at its sides, and PAN, the inserts, DLY and RVB in a column under each fader. DECK B is empty. DJ-EQ and STEMIX sit under the DECKS ONLY box. The pointer is on DECK A's headphone button, so the hint line at the bottom says what it does. K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
MAPWhat is where on the page
AreaWhat lives there
A deck (DECK A left, DECK B right)Top to bottom: DECK A, the track's name and Load... · the waveform, with the marker lane along its bottom and the STRETCH fader on its inner edge · the thin zoom bar · the STEMS row · the transport: two jog pads, PLAY, CUE, SYNC · the row DETECTION · LOOP · K-SAMPLER · the sampler's three inserts, SC, DLY and RVB · then the DETECTION and LOOP sections when they are open. Everything under the DETECTION · LOOP · K-SAMPLER row scrolls when it does not fit.
The mixer (middle)Mirrored, A on the left and B on the right. From the outside in: the HI / MID / LO knobs (or four stem faders, with STEMIX), the dB scale, the meter and the fader, with CH 1 / CH 2 just above it. Under each fader: the headphone button and MUTE, the CUE level while the headphones are on, then a column with the PAN bar, three inserts, DLY and RVB. Then the CROSSFADER, and the INPUT strip with its SIDECHAIN. Everything under the faders scrolls when it does not fit.
SHOW boxAbove the two BUS strips, on this page only: DECKS ONLY or MIX RUNNER. Under it, side by side, DJ-EQ and STEMIX.
MIX RUNNER bandWhen chosen: both decks' waveforms running past one red line, above the decks.
Around the pageThe top section (TONE / SCALE, MASTER BPM, TRACKS, RECORD, SYNC, the page tabs), the BUS strips and the MASTER strip are on every page.
The hint lineAlong the bottom of the window. Point at any control and it says what that control does and what a right-click does there.

MODEPERFORM vs EDIT on this page

The PERFORM | EDIT switch is in the top bar. On the DJ-DECK page it changes this:

PERFORMEDIT
AnalysisNever by itself. DETECT still works when you press it.With AUTO lit, a track with no saved markers is analysed when it loads. DETECT any time.
MarkersClick to select. The marker editor row (edit, APPROVE, DEL, +) works.The same, plus right-click on the marker lane: delete a marker, or add a new one.
Insert boxes and the K-SAMPLER boxA click opens the plug-in; MIDI and B work. A right-click only says to switch to EDIT.Right-click for Remove / Bypass / Change. Drag a box onto another box to move it.
Stem fadersPlay.A small CC badge at the right end of each, to put it on a MIDI CC.
Headphone buttonA click switches it. A right-click only says PFL gets its MIDI CC in EDIT.A click switches it. A right-click opens the CC grid, to give it a MIDI CC of your own.
SavingMarkers save themselves 1.2 s after a change.Markers too, and the session saves itself. Leaving EDIT writes everything.
RULESRules every control follows here
  • Right-click or double-click resets: a deck fader goes to 0 dB, an EQ knob to 0, PAN and the CROSSFADER to the middle, the INPUT fader to 0 dB, STRETCH to 1.00, a STEMIX fader to full.
  • Right-click a send bar (DLY, RVB) sets it to 0; on the BPM or KEY arrows it puts the offset back to 0; on a CH button it steps back one channel.
  • An insert box opens when you let go of the mouse on it, not when you press.
  • A drop-list closes with a click outside it; ESC closes the SHOW and SIDECHAIN lists and right-click menus.
  • Everything on a deck is that deck's own: DECK A's controls never move DECK B.
TABThe DJ-DECK tab and its ON chip

Click DJ-DECK at the bottom-left of the top section to show this page. Looking at another page does not stop the decks: they play on.

The small ON chip on the tab switches the page's sound in the engine. With it OFF, the decks and their K-SAMPLER boxes are switched off and cost nothing.

SETTINGS > General > K-PLAYER OPENS WITH can make K-Player start on this page, and choose its view (DECKS ONLY or MIX RUNNER).

SCROLLRows that scroll

Two parts of this page scroll when the window is too short for them:

  • A deck's rows: everything under its DETECTION · LOOP · K-SAMPLER row: the sampler's three inserts, SC, DLY, RVB, and the open sections. Each deck scrolls on its own.
  • The mixer's rows: everything under the two faders: the headphone buttons and MUTE, the CUE level, PAN, the inserts, DLY and RVB, the CROSSFADER and the whole INPUT strip. The faders, CH and the EQ knobs stay where they are.
  • Turn the mouse wheel, or swipe with two fingers, over the rows. A trackpad moves them at once; a wheel glides a little with each notch.
  • A slim bar shows where you are: at the deck's right edge, or at the mixer's right edge.
  • A row scrolled out of sight takes no click, and a plug-in cannot be dropped on it.
  • Closing a section gives its room back.
Loading tracksLoad..., dropping files, the TRACKS window, and what happens when a track arrives
LOADFour ways to put a track on a deck
WayHow
Load...The button at the deck's top right opens a file dialog (Load DECK A), starting in K-Player's data folder.
Drop a fileDrag a file from the Finder anywhere on the deck's panel: the panel lights up and says drop on DECK A. With several files, the first loads and the rest go into the TRACKS list.
The TRACKS windowPress TRACKS in the top section. Point at a track's row: A and B appear at its right end; click one to load that deck. Or drag the row out of the window onto a deck. ENTER loads the first track of the list into DECK A; typing searches.
The MIX RUNNERDrop a file on a deck's lane in the MIX RUNNER band.

A deck plays WAV, AIFF, FLAC and MP3.

NEWWhat happens when a track arrives
  • The waveform reads decoding... for a moment.
  • A track K-Player has analysed before brings its saved markers at once (markers loaded).
  • A track never analysed: in EDIT with AUTO lit it is analysed now. Otherwise the status says press DETECT (in PERFORM: PERFORM - no saved markers, press DETECT).
  • The new track starts at its beginning: the cue point at the start, no END point, the whole track in view, and its stems not loaded.
FILEWhere a track's markers and stems are kept

In K-Player's data folder (normally ~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Player): the markers in markers/, the stems in stems/. They belong to the track, not to a session, so the same track brings its markers and stems into every session you use it in.

QHow do I load a track onto a deck?
  1. Click Load... at the top right of the deck (DECK A on the left, DECK B on the right).
  2. Choose the file (WAV, AIFF, FLAC or MP3) and open it.
  3. The track's name appears beside DECK A and its waveform fills the deck.
  4. Or simply drag the file from the Finder onto the deck's panel.
QHow do I load a track from the TRACKS window?
  1. Press TRACKS in the top section: the K-Player Tracks window opens.
  2. Type a few letters of the track's name to find it.
  3. Point at its row: A and B appear at the right end.
  4. Click A for DECK A or B for DECK B. (Or drag the row onto the deck.)
Waveform & markersReading the waveform, the mouse on it, the END point and the marker lane
WAVEWhat the waveform shows
You seeIt means
Light blue / grey-blueThe part already played / the part still to come.
Red lineThe playhead.
Gold lineThe cue point.
Orange line with an EThe END point: the deck stops there.
Orange letters A B A …The parts of the track. The same letter again means that part comes back. They are only a reading aid.
The line of small textTime played and length (2:04 / 7:54), how far you are zoomed in (4.0x), and [native] when K-Player's own engine plays it.
The bottom stripThe marker lane (see below).
The number over the STRETCH faderThe deck's speed, 1.00 at its own speed.
MOUSEThe mouse on the waveform
Do thisWhat happens
ClickThe playhead jumps there when you let go.
Drag sidewaysScroll through the track.
Drag down / upZoom in / out around the point you grabbed. A yellow line shows where the playhead will land: when you let go, it moves there, after a drag too.
Mouse wheelZoom in and out around the pointer, smoothly, down to single samples (100 000 ×).
SHIFT + wheel, or a sideways swipeScroll.
SHIFT + click / SHIFT + right-clickSet / remove the END point.
The zoom bar under the waveformDrag left or right to zoom around the middle of the view.
The bottom strip (marker lane)A click selects a marker and never moves the playhead.
ENDThe END point

SHIFT + click on the waveform puts an END point there: an orange line marked E. The deck stops when it reaches it and will not play past it until you remove it with SHIFT + right-click. A new track has none, and a session does not keep it.

MARKThe marker lane

Markers are what K-Player knows about how a track changes over time. They sit along the bottom of the waveform, on the waveform's own time line, so they zoom with it. Two kinds:

KindLooks likeCarries
TEMPOGoldThe BPM, the word BPM, and a structure word (Intro, Build, Drop, Break, Groove, Bridge, Outro) or a meter (4/4).
TONALITYIn the colour of its toneThe tone (D#), the scale (Harmonic) and the harmony (H1, the scale's first harmonic mode; H4 its fourth …).
  • A solid line is an approved marker; a dashed one was found by the analysis and not approved yet.
  • A faint line with no words is not in force: above the DETECTION LEVEL, or not approved while MARKERS is APPROVED ONLY (both in Audio Settings).
  • While the deck plays, a small yellow dot at a marker's foot shows the one in force now.
  • When markers crowd, each shows what fits; the selected one and the one under the pointer show in full.
  • Click a marker to select it: the marker editor row in DETECTION shows it.
  • In EDIT: right-click a marker to delete it. Right-click an empty spot for NEW MARKER at 12.3 s with Tonality and Tempo.
  • A new marker starts approved and takes the values in force at that point (or the track's own key and tempo).
QHow do I zoom in on the waveform to line up a beat?
  1. Point at the beat on the deck's waveform.
  2. Turn the mouse wheel to zoom in around it (or drag down on the waveform).
  3. Hold SHIFT and turn the wheel, or drag sideways, to move along.
  4. Zoom out the same way; the zoom bar under the waveform shows how far in you are.
QHow do I make a deck stop at a certain point?
  1. Find the point on the deck's waveform.
  2. Hold SHIFT and click there: an orange END line marked E appears.
  3. Play: the deck stops when it gets there.
  4. To remove it, hold SHIFT and right-click the waveform.
QHow do I add a marker?
  1. Open the deck's DETECTION section (click the DETECTION tab so it is lit).
  2. Click the waveform where the marker should go, so the playhead is there.
  3. Press + at the right end of the marker editor row, under the chroma.
  4. Choose Tonality or Tempo.
  5. Set its values with the < and > buttons of the row. (In EDIT you can also right-click an empty spot of the marker lane.)
Transport, speed & SYNCJog pads, PLAY, CUE, SYNC, the STRETCH fader and the MASTER BPM
PLAYThe transport row
ControlWhat it doesMIDI (deck's channel)
Left jog pad (the ribs)Hold it to bend the deck slower. Press nearer its outer (left) edge to bend harder: at full pressure the deck runs 12 % slower. It shows how hard it pulls (-40%). Let go and the deck is back at its tempo.CC 14, by pressure
PLAY / STOPPlays, or stops where it is (red while playing). Reads - with no track.CC 70
Right jog padThe same, faster, harder toward its right edge (+40%).CC 15, by pressure
CUEDJ-style cue (see the next card). Lit gold while it previews.CC 71 (held)
SYNCMatches this deck to the MASTER BPM. Green when it can; grey with no track, or when this deck is itself the MASTER BPM's source. When the track has no tempo yet it reads DETECT (blue): press it to analyse the track (... while it works).CC 80

With the default pitch engine (Signalsmith Stretch) the jog pads bend the tempo only; with Tribal Stretch the pitch bends with it.

CUEHow CUE works
  • Stopped: press and hold CUE. The cue point is set where the playhead is (the gold line) and you hear the track from there while you hold it. Let go and it jumps back to the cue point.
  • Playing: press CUE. The deck stops and goes back to the cue point.
  • PLAY then starts from the cue point.
  • A session does not keep the cue point.
STRThe STRETCH fader
  • The tall thin fader on the deck's inner edge (the right edge of DECK A, the left edge of DECK B), as tall as the waveform.
  • It sets the deck's speed from 0.25 × to 4 ×. The middle is 1.00: its line is green while the deck is at 1.00, and the handle turns red away from it. The value is shown above the fader.
  • It sticks at 1.00 as you pass. Right- or double-click: back to 1.00.
  • With the pitch engine Signalsmith Stretch (Audio Settings > Pitch engine, the default) the pitch stays; with Tribal Stretch it is classic vari-speed: faster is higher.
  • MIDI: CC 79 on the deck's channel (64 = 1.00).
BPMThe MASTER BPM, SYNC and the decks
  • The MASTER BPM in the top section follows the decks: the deck that plays and has a tempo (DECK A first), or else a deck that has one. It says deck A beside the number. Its value is that deck's BPM with its offset and its STRETCH.
  • Its + / - arrows then nudge that deck's BPM by 1.
  • SYNC on the other deck sets its BPM offset so it matches, to the nearest whole BPM. It does this once: press it again if the tempo changes. It leaves STRETCH alone, so keep STRETCH at 1.00 for an exact match.
  • The BPM and KEY offsets are made by Signalsmith Stretch, the default pitch engine, which moves tempo and key apart from each other (it adds a little delay while in use; Audio Settings shows how much).
  • With the top section's SYNC on SYNC IN and a MIDI clock arriving, the MASTER BPM is the clock's (MIDI CLOCK): SYNC then matches a deck to the clock.
  • Every plug-in in K-Player and the LOOP lengths follow the MASTER BPM.
QHow do I set and preview a cue point?
  1. Press STOP if the deck is playing.
  2. Click the waveform where the cue should be.
  3. Press and hold CUE: the gold cue line is set there and you hear the track from it.
  4. Let go: the deck jumps back to the cue.
  5. Press PLAY to start from the cue.
QHow do I match deck B to deck A's tempo?
  1. Make sure both tracks have a tempo: the BPM row in DETECTION shows a number, not --. (If SYNC reads DETECT, press it first.)
  2. Play DECK A: the MASTER BPM follows it.
  3. Press SYNC on DECK B: its BPM row shows +n (was …).
  4. Keep DECK B's STRETCH fader at 1.00 for an exact match.
QHow do I nudge a deck to line up the beats?
  1. Play both decks at the same tempo.
  2. If a deck's beats come late, hold its right jog pad; if they come early, hold its left one.
  3. Press nearer the pad's outer edge to bend harder (up to 12 %).
  4. Let go when the beats line up: the deck goes back to its tempo.
QHow do I put a deck back to its own speed and key?
  1. Right-click (or double-click) the deck's STRETCH fader: it goes back to 1.00.
  2. Open DETECTION and right-click either arrow of the BPM row: the BPM offset is 0 again.
  3. Right-click either arrow of the KEY row: the track is back in its own key.
DETECTIONBPM, KEY and SCALE, AUTO / DETECT, the chroma and the marker editor
TABSThe row under the transport

DETECTION and LOOP are tabs: click one to open or close its section. A lit tab is an open section. Open sections stack under the sampler's rows in the order you opened them, the first one on top, so the one you use most stays where your hand is. DETECTION is open when K-Player starts. The third, widest cell is the K-SAMPLER box. Each deck has its own. When the open sections do not fit, everything under this row scrolls (see Rows that scroll).

ROWSDETECTION, top to bottom
RowWhat it shows and does
AUTO · DETECTAt the section's top right (next card).
BPMThe ▲ ▼ arrows on the left nudge the deck ±1 BPM (up to 60 each way; right-click = 0). Then the BPM with its offset, the meter (4/4), in orange +2 (was 148.0) when nudged, and under it the track's tempo markers in order, the one in force in gold.
KEY and SCALEThe ▲ ▼ arrows transpose the deck ±1 semitone (up to 12 each way; right-click = 0). Then the key, +2 (was Am) when transposed, the tonality markers in order (gold = in force), and the scale's name.
Status lineAt the right, above the chroma: what the analysis is doing (key / scale..., tempo..., structure..., tempo over time..., harmony... with its %), why it is not running (press DETECT), or how many markers are in force (7 of 12 markers at level 6).
ChromaTwelve bars, one per tone in its colour: how much of each note the track has. It shows right after an analysis; a track that loaded saved markers shows an empty strip.
Marker editorThe last row: see The marker editor row.
AUTOAUTO and DETECT
  • DETECT analyses this deck's track now, in PERFORM too (... while it works). Analysing again keeps every marker you approved and replaces the others.
  • AUTO (EDIT only; greyed in PERFORM): when lit, a track loaded in EDIT with no saved markers is analysed by itself. It is one setting for both decks.
  • The analysis finds the tempo, the key and scale (among the Kadabra's own scales), the meter, the parts, tempo changes and the harmony bar by bar. The result is saved with the track straight away, so it happens once per track.
  • With DETECTION closed, AUTO and DETECT are hidden; SYNC still offers DETECT on a track with no tempo.
EDITThe marker editor row

It edits the selected marker (click one on the marker lane). Its title says which: TONALITY 2 / 12 at 31.5 s or TEMPO …; a tonality marker also shows its chord (= F#m). Then three < value > groups:

GroupTONALITY markerTEMPO marker
FirstThe tone, C … B, in its colour.The BPM, ±1 (40 … 300).
SecondThe scale: steps through the scales the Kadabra can use as its main scale.0.1: the BPM ±0.1.
ThirdThe harmony, H1 … Hn.The structure word: Intro, Build, Drop, Break, Groove, Bridge, Outro, a meter (4/4, 3/4, 6/8, 2/4) or none.
  • < / > step down / up. A click on the value itself steps up, a right-click steps down.
  • Any edit approves the marker.
  • APPROVE approves it; it then reads APPROVED (click again to take it back).
  • DEL deletes the selected marker (not the last one).
  • + adds a marker at the playhead: choose Tonality or Tempo. With no markers at all, only + shows.
  • It works in PERFORM and EDIT. Markers save themselves 1.2 s after the last change.
LEVELHow many markers are in force

Two settings in Audio Settings decide it, for every track at once, with no new DETECT needed:

  • Detection, the DETECTION LEVEL 1 … 10 (6 at first): 1 = the BPM and the key only; 2 adds tempo and key changes; 3 to 8 add chords that held 16, 8, 4 and 2 bars; 9 and 10 every bar, up to 100 markers.
  • Markers: AS DETECTED puts the analysis's markers in force at that level; APPROVED ONLY only the ones you approved.
  • An approved marker is always in force. Markers in force are the ones LINK-KADABRA sends to the Kadabra.
QHow do I analyse a track?
  1. Load the track on a deck.
  2. Open DETECTION (click its tab so it is lit).
  3. Press DETECT at the section's top right (or the deck's SYNC button when it reads DETECT).
  4. Wait while the status line counts up; the markers then appear on the waveform and the BPM and KEY rows fill in.
QHow do I transpose a deck?
  1. Open DETECTION on the deck.
  2. Press ▲ in the KEY row to go up a semitone, ▼ to go down (up to 12 each way).
  3. The row shows +n (was …) in orange.
  4. Right-click an arrow to go back to the track's own key.
QHow do I correct a detected key?
  1. Open DETECTION on the deck.
  2. Click the tonality marker on the waveform's bottom strip (the first one holds the track's key).
  3. In the marker editor row, step the tone with the first < >, the scale with the second, the harmony with the third.
  4. The edit approves the marker; it saves itself a moment later.
QHow do I approve a marker?
  1. Open DETECTION on the deck.
  2. Click the marker on the waveform's bottom strip.
  3. Press APPROVE in the marker editor row: it reads APPROVED and the marker's line turns solid.
LOOPBeat repeat on the deck's track, from four bars down to 1/64
LOOPThe LOOP section

Its top line reads beat repeat at 148.0 BPM (the MASTER BPM), or beat repeat needs a tempo. Twelve big buttons, longest first:

RowLengths
14 · 2 · 1 · 1/2 bar
21/4 · 3/16 · 1/8 · 1/12 of a bar (1/4 = one beat)
31/16 · 1/24 · 1/32 · 1/64 of a bar
  • Click a length to loop the deck's track over that many bars or beats. The button lights gold.
  • Click it again to let the track run on; click another length to change it.
  • The length follows the MASTER BPM.
  • From MIDI, on the deck's channel: CC 40 … 51 are the twelve lengths, held (64 and up starts, below 64 ends); CC 89 cancels.
  • The buttons get smaller when DETECTION and LOOP are open together in a short window.
  • K-Sampler has a beat repeat of its own for its pads.
QHow do I loop a beat on a deck?
  1. Make sure there is a tempo: the LOOP line reads beat repeat at … BPM.
  2. Click the deck's LOOP tab so it is lit.
  3. While the deck plays, click a length: 1 for one bar, 1/4 for one beat.
  4. Click the lit button again to let the track run on.
K-SAMPLER boxEach deck's own K-Sampler, its inserts, side-chain and sends
KSMPThe K-SAMPLER box
  • The widest cell of the row under the transport. It is the instrument box of the deck's sampler channel (Sampler A, Sampler B). Empty, it reads K-SAMPLER + and a click opens the K-Player Plugins window. Holding a plug-in, it shows the plug-in's name in capitals, lit green.
  • An installed K-Sampler goes into an empty box by itself: at start, after a session loads, and in a new session.
  • A click opens K-Sampler's window (K-Player - Sampler A - Instrument).
  • MIDI and B are always there, PERFORM too: MIDI opens the parameter panel (to put a parameter on a CC), B bypasses it (red).
  • Right-click in EDIT: Remove Instrument, Bypass Instrument (Un-bypass), Change Instrument….
  • MIDI: notes on the deck's MIDI channel (the CH button in the mixer) play it, unless a PLAYER channel listens on that same MIDI channel: that channel takes the notes. Program changes and CCs on the deck's channel reach it too.
  • With the box empty, the deck's notes play K-Player's older built-in pads, if a session has samples on them.
  • What K-Sampler hears from outside (what its MIC-REC records) is the deck's AUDIO IN, chosen on the deck's strip on the PLAYER page.
  • The CROSSFADER moves the decks' tracks only, never the K-SAMPLER boxes.

ROWSThe sampler's inserts, SC and sends
  • + insert 1 · 2 · 3: three effect boxes after K-Sampler. They never touch the deck's track.
  • SC: the sampler's side-chain. Click for the SIDE-CHAIN input list: No Side-Chain, from CH 1, from CH 2 … The box then reads from 3, and an orange line shows how far the sampler is being turned down. Right-click = no side-chain.
  • DLY and RVB: how much of the sampler goes to BUS 1 (DELAY) and BUS 2 (REVERB). Drag; right-click = 0. MIDI: CC 112 / 113 on the deck's channel.
  • These rows scroll with the open sections when the deck is too short for them.
QHow do I put K-Sampler in the K-SAMPLER box?
  1. If K-Sampler is installed, it is usually there already: it fills an empty box by itself at start.
  2. Otherwise click the empty box (it reads K-SAMPLER +): the K-Player Plugins window opens.
  3. Choose K-Sampler: it goes into the box and its window opens.
  4. Choose a bank in K-Sampler.
QHow do I play a deck's K-Sampler from the Kadabra?
  1. Read the deck's CH button at the top of the mixer: CH 1 for DECK A, CH 2 for DECK B, unless you changed it.
  2. Send the Kadabra's notes on that MIDI channel, on the MIDI PORT K-Player listens to.
  3. Make sure no PLAYER channel listens on the same MIDI channel, or it takes the notes.
  4. A program change on that channel picks a K-Sampler bank.
STEMSA track taken apart into KICK, BASS, DRUMS and TONAL, with a fader each
STEMThe STEMS row

A row under the zoom bar. It is hidden when Audio Settings > Stems is OFF.

It readsWhat it does
STEMSNo track on the deck.
MAKE STEMSTakes the track apart into KICK, BASS, DRUMS and TONAL, once per track. The button fills up as it works, and the stems load into the deck when they are ready. One track at a time in all of K-Player (STEMS - busy with …).
LOAD STEMSThe track has stems already: loads them.
Four fadersKICK · BASS · DRUMS · TONAL in their colours. Drag across: 0 … 100 % (point at a fader to read its %). All four up is the track exactly as it was; a fader at 0 is not heard.
  • Right-click a stem fader: back to the whole track.
  • An M on a fader: that stem is muted. It is switched with the M beside the stem's name on the ARRANGER.
  • In EDIT a CC badge sits at the right end of each fader: click it for the grid of CC numbers (or LEARN), right-click to clear it. The CC answers on the deck's MIDI channel.
  • A stem level drawn on the ARRANGER moves these faders while the arrangement plays, and while the deck plays inside a clip of that track.
  • STEMIX (above the BUS strips) shows the same four levels as faders in the mixer, beside the deck's fader (see The mixer).
  • Which engine makes the stems: Audio Settings > Stems (the K-Player DSP engines, or NEURAL, your trained model).
QHow do I make stems of a track?
  1. Check that Audio Settings > Stems is not OFF.
  2. Load the track on a deck.
  3. Press MAKE STEMS under the waveform and watch the button fill up.
  4. When it is done, the four stem faders appear. Next time the button reads LOAD STEMS.
QHow do I take the kick out of a track?
  1. Make or load the deck's stems (MAKE STEMS or LOAD STEMS).
  2. Drag the KICK fader all the way left, to 0.
  3. Drag it back to bring the kick back. Right-click any stem fader to go back to the whole track.
The mixerA | B mirrored: the faders with CH above them, DJ-EQ or STEMIX, headphones, MUTE, PAN, inserts, sends and the CROSSFADER
MIXEvery control of the mixer

Each deck has a strip, A on the left and B on the right, mirrored. From the outside in: the EQ knobs (DJ-EQ) or four stem faders (STEMIX), the dB scale, the meter and the fader, with the deck's CH button just above the fader. Under the fader: the headphone button beside it and MUTE, then a column as wide as the TRACKS button with PAN, three inserts, DLY and RVB. The CROSSFADER comes after both, then the INPUT strip.

ControlWhat it doesMIDI
CH 1 / CH 2The deck's MIDI channel, just above its fader. Click = next, right-click = previous; it skips the other deck's and the mixer's channel. The same setting as the deck's MIDI box on the PLAYER page.
DJ-EQUnder the SHOW box, above the BUS strips. Shows or hides both decks' EQ knobs; switching it on switches STEMIX off. Hidden, the EQ keeps working as set.CC 88, mixer's channel
STEMIXBeside DJ-EQ. Puts each deck's four stems as faders where the EQ knobs are (see STEMIX); switching it on switches DJ-EQ off.
Headphone buttonBeside the fader, on its outer side, level with MUTE. Sends the deck to the headphones (Audio Settings > CUE), before its fader: with the fader down only you hear it. Lit blue when on. It is the deck's CUE on the PLAYER page too. In EDIT a right-click gives it a MIDI CC of your own.CC 72, or your own CC
CUE levelA short sideways bar under the headphone button and MUTE (CUE 80), there while that deck's headphone button is on: the headphone level, 0 … 100, one for both decks. Drag sideways.CC 9, any channel
HI · MID · LOEQ, beside the fader while DJ-EQ is on: HI shelf at 4.5 kHz, MID bell at 1 kHz, LO shelf at 110 Hz, each −12 … +12 dB. Drag up or down. Right- or double-click: 0.CC 76 / 77 / 78 (64 = 0 dB)
PAN barAt the top of the column under the fader. Drag. It snaps to the middle. Reads PAN C, PAN L40, PAN R40. Right- or double-click: centre.CC 75 (64 = centre)
+ insert 1 · 2 · 3The deck's three effects, in the column under the PAN bar (see Insert boxes on this page).
DLY · RVBHow much goes to BUS 1 (DELAY) and BUS 2 (REVERB), after the fader. Drag; right-click = 0.CC 90 / 111
Fader−60 … +6 dB, 0 dB at the line near the top. The level is written on the cap (-inf at the bottom). Right- or double-click: 0 dB. It is a little shorter in a short window or with the MIX RUNNER showing.CC 74, or CC 7
MeterGreen, yellow from −6 dB, red from 0 dB. A white line holds the peak for 3 s; a red bar at the top means it clipped.
MUTEUnder the meter and the fader. Silences the deck (lit red).CC 73
CROSSFADERA … B. In the middle both decks play at full level. From A to the middle, B comes in; from the middle to B, A goes out. It snaps to the middle; right- or double-click: centre.CC 3, any channel (0 = A, 127 = B)

"MIDI" is the deck's own MIDI channel unless the row says otherwise.

FXInsert boxes on this page

The deck's, the sampler's and the INPUT's insert boxes all work the same way:

  • Empty (+ insert 1): a click opens the K-Player Plugins window to choose an effect.
  • Loaded: a click opens the plug-in's own window. B bypasses it (red when bypassed); MIDI, shown when you point at the box, opens its parameter panel.
  • Right-click in EDIT: Remove Plugin, Bypass Plugin (Un-bypass Plugin), Change Plugin…. In PERFORM a right-click only says to switch to EDIT.
  • In EDIT, drag a box onto another box to move the plug-in there; the two swap.
  • The deck's three boxes here are the same boxes as on its PLAYER strip.
SIZEHow wide the mixer is

The mixer is as wide as its parts need, and the two decks share the rest of the width. It is thinnest with neither DJ-EQ nor STEMIX on. The column under each fader is as wide as the TRACKS button in the top section (narrower in a narrow window).

The faders get a little shorter when there is less room under them: a shorter window, or the MIX RUNNER. There is nothing to drag: the thin lines either side of the mixer only mark its edges.

STEMSTEMIX: the stems in the mixer
  • Press STEMIX under the SHOW box (above the BUS strips). Each deck's four stems appear as thin faders beside its fader, where the EQ knobs were: K, B, D, T (KICK, BASS, DRUMS, TONAL), in their colours.
  • They are the same levels as the deck's STEMS row under its waveform: move one and the other follows. Drag up or down. Right- or double-click: back to full.
  • A deck without stems shows no stems. A click on it says to press STEMS under its waveform first.
  • A stem that is muted (its M) shows dimmed. While a stem level drawn on the ARRANGER plays, its fader follows it.
  • DJ-EQ and STEMIX take turns: switching one on switches the other off. Press STEMIX again and both are off: the mixer is at its thinnest, and the EQ keeps working as set.
  • The session keeps it.
STEMIX on: DECK A's four stems as faders beside its fader, DECK B with no stems. DECK A's headphone button is on, so its CUE level (CUE 80) shows under it. The hint line describes the KICK fader under the pointer.
QHow do I hear deck B in the headphones before the crowd does?
  1. Once: choose your headphones as the CUE output in Audio Settings.
  2. Keep DECK B's fader down (or the CROSSFADER at A).
  3. Press DECK B's headphone button, right beside its fader, level with its MUTE: it lights blue.
  4. Set the headphone level with the CUE bar that opens under it: drag it sideways.
  5. Press the headphone button again when you are done.
QHow do I crossfade from deck A to deck B?
  1. Play DECK A with the CROSSFADER at the A end.
  2. Start DECK B (match it first with SYNC).
  3. Drag the CROSSFADER toward B: B comes in up to the middle, then A goes out.
  4. Right-click the CROSSFADER to put it back in the middle.
QHow do I add an effect to a deck?
  1. Click an empty + insert box in the column under the deck's fader in the mixer.
  2. Choose the effect in the K-Player Plugins window: its name appears in the box.
  3. Click the box to open the effect's window.
  4. Use B on the box to bypass it.
QHow do I cut the bass of a deck?
  1. Make sure the EQ knobs show: DJ-EQ, above the BUS strips, is lit.
  2. Drag the deck's LO knob down, as far as −12 dB.
  3. Right-click (or double-click) it to bring it back to 0.
  4. To take the bass out completely, use the deck's stems: drag BASS to 0.
QHow do I mix a deck's stems from the mixer (STEMIX)?
  1. Make or load the deck's stems (MAKE STEMS or LOAD STEMS under its waveform).
  2. Press STEMIX under the SHOW box, above the BUS strips: it lights green.
  3. Four thin faders, K B D T, appear beside the deck's fader. Drag one down to take that stem out.
  4. Right-click a stem fader to bring it back to full. Press DJ-EQ to get the EQ knobs back.
QHow do I put a deck's headphone button on a Kadabra button?
  1. Switch the top bar to EDIT.
  2. Right-click the deck's headphone button, beside its fader: the grid of CC numbers opens.
  3. Click a CC number, or press LEARN and press the Kadabra button.
  4. The button now switches the deck's headphones on and off. It answers on the deck's MIDI channel (the CH above its fader).
QHow do I reach the rows below the bottom of the window?
  1. Point at the deck's rows under its DETECTION · LOOP · K-SAMPLER line, or at the mixer under its faders.
  2. Turn the mouse wheel, or swipe with two fingers: the rows move up.
  3. The slim bar at the right edge shows how far you are. Scroll back the same way.
INPUT & SIDECHAINThe live input under the mixer, and the ducker that turns the music down
INPUTThe INPUT strip

The live input of your audio interface (a microphone, an instrument), chosen in Audio Settings. It sits under the CROSSFADER and scrolls with the mixer's rows: its fader at the left, the rest one under the other at its right.

ControlWhat it does
Fader and meterThe input's level, the dB under it. It sticks at 0 dB; right- or double-click: 0 dB. CC 20 on the mixer's channel.
INPUTWith the device's name under it, or no device.
CH 3The mixer's own MIDI channel (3 at first): the channel the INPUT's and the mixer's CCs answer on. Click = next, right-click = previous; it skips the decks' channels.
MIC MUTELit red = muted. The input always starts muted, so a microphone can never feed back by surprise. CC 30 on the mixer's channel.
AUTO-FILL A · MIC-REC AFor K-Player's older built-in pads, which play only while a K-SAMPLER box is empty (A = the deck whose pads were used last). With K-Sampler, use K-Sampler's own AUTO-FILL and MIC-REC.
+ insert 1 · 2 · 3The input's effects.
SIDECHAIN · ParametersThe ducker (next card), under the inserts; Parameters sits under the SIDECHAIN box.
DUCKSIDECHAIN: the ducker

The ducker turns something down while its KEY has sound: the classic use is a voice on the INPUT that makes the decks get out of the way.

  • Click the SIDECHAIN box for its list: No Side-Chain, ducks MASTER, ducks DECKS, ducks DECK A, ducks DECK B, ducks PADS. The box then says what it ducks; an orange line under it shows how far it is turning down. Right-click = off.
  • Parameters opens COMP / GATE (click to switch) and six bars. Drag a bar; right-click = its lowest value.
BarRangeAt first
THRESH−60 … 0 dB−24 dB
RATIO1 … 20 : 14 : 1
ATTACK0.1 … 200 ms8 ms
RELEASE1 … 2000 ms220 ms
RANGE0 … 10.7
HOLD0 … 500 ms60 ms

The KEY is what is sent to the ducker, and it has no fader on this page: the INPUT sends to it with CC 105 on the mixer's MIDI channel, a deck with CC 116 on its own channel. On the mixer's channel CC 103 switches COMP / GATE and CC 104 steps what it ducks.

This is one ducker for the whole mix. Each channel also has a side-chain of its own: the sampler's is the SC box on the deck, a deck's own is on its PLAYER strip.

MIX RUNNERBoth decks running past one NOW line, so a transition can be seen coming
SHOWSHOW: DECKS ONLY or MIX RUNNER
  • The SHOW box sits above the two BUS strips, on this page only. It reads DECKS ONLY or MIX RUNNER: click for the list, right-click to switch.
  • MIX RUNNER adds a band above the decks with one lane per deck (DECK A blue, DECK B purple). The waveforms run to the left past a red line in the middle, NOW: left of it has played, right of it is coming.
  • Both lanes show the same number of seconds at the same scale, so you can see whether the two beat grids agree: bright lines for bars, dim lines for beats, from the deck's tempo, counted from its first tempo marker.
  • Each lane shows its clock (2:04) and stopped when it is not playing; an empty deck reads DECK B - no track.
  • The chip beside the NOW line says how many seconds the band shows (16.0s at first). Turn the mouse wheel over the band to change it, from 2 to 120 seconds.
  • Drag the band's bottom edge to make it taller. It takes the free space under the decks first, and only then shortens the deck waveforms.
  • Drop a file on a lane to load that deck.
  • The session keeps the view, the seconds and the height. SETTINGS > General > K-PLAYER OPENS WITH > DJ-DECK chooses the view a new session starts with.
MIX RUNNER: DECK A's waveform at the red NOW line, the 16.0s chip under it, DECK B with no track. The pointer is on the band, so the hint line describes it. K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
QHow do I show the MIX RUNNER?
  1. On the DJ-DECK page, click the box above the BUS strips (it reads DECKS ONLY).
  2. Choose MIX RUNNER: the band appears above the decks.
  3. Turn the mouse wheel over the band to show more or fewer seconds.
  4. Drag its bottom edge to make it taller.
With Kadabra OSA record's key to the Kadabra, the Kadabra's key to K-Player, tempo, and the decks by MIDI
LINKA record's key → Scaler and Harmoner
  • LINK-KADABRA in the top bar (LINK on a narrow window): when lit, the deck being heard tells the Kadabra its key.
  • Each time that deck's playhead crosses into a new tonality marker in force, K-Player sends the marker's tone and scale: the Kadabra takes them as its key, the key the Scaler and Harmoner Shapes play in. Then it sends the marker's harmony (H1, H2 …), which sets the Harmoner's chords.
  • Switching LINK-KADABRA on sends the key in force at once.
  • The markers in force are set by DETECTION LEVEL and MARKERS in Audio Settings. With AS DETECTED nothing has to be approved first.
  • The key goes as the marker has it: a transposition with the KEY arrows is not added.
  • The port: Audio Settings > Kadabra ((auto: a port named Kadabra)).
  • With Audio Settings > Degree ON, K-Player also listens for the chord that sounds and sends a new harmony when it changes and it is sure.

HEARDWhich deck the Kadabra follows

The deck that is heard most: playing, not muted, and louder by its side of the CROSSFADER times its fader. A tie goes to DECK A. So when you crossfade from A to B, the Kadabra moves to B's key once B is the louder one.

FROMWhen the Kadabra sets the key
  • The Kadabra can always set K-Player's key (SysEx TONE, SCALE and HARMONY), LINK-KADABRA on or off. The TONE / SCALE line in the top section then shows it with FROM THE KADABRA.
  • The newest word wins: when a deck crosses into a new key point, the deck's key is in force again (and with LINK-KADABRA on, it goes to the Kadabra).
  • It changes what K-Player shows and uses as its key; it never transposes a deck or changes its tempo.
  • SysEx 43 switches LINK-KADABRA: 0 off, 1 on, 2 toggle.
CLOCKTempo and a MIDI clock
  • The decks never change their tempo by themselves.
  • SYNC IN (the SYNC button in the top section): when a MIDI clock arrives, the MASTER BPM follows it and reads MIDI CLOCK. Press a deck's SYNC to match the deck to it.
  • SYNC OUT: K-Player sends its own MIDI clock, at the MASTER BPM, to the Kadabra port. The MASTER BPM follows the deck being played, so the clock does too.
CCA deck by MIDI

Every deck control has a CC on the deck's own MIDI channel (CH 1 / CH 2 in the mixer), so one set of controllers drives DECK A or DECK B depending only on the channel. A message on one deck's channel never moves the other deck. Buttons act from value 64 up.

CCControl
14 / 15Jog slower / faster, the value is the pressure (0 lets go)
70 · 71PLAY / STOP · CUE (held)
72 · 73Headphones · MUTE
74 (and 7)Fader
75PAN (64 = centre)
76 / 77 / 78HI / MID / LO (64 = 0 dB)
79STRETCH (64 = 1.00)
80SYNC
81 / 82BPM +1 / −1
83 / 85KEY +1 / −1 semitone
40 … 51 · 89LOOP lengths 4 … 1/64, held · LOOP off
90 / 111The deck's DLY / RVB
112 / 113The sampler's DLY / RVB
3 (any channel)CROSSFADER, 0 = A, 127 = B
9 (any channel)Headphone level

The stem faders have no fixed CC: give each one with its badge in EDIT. The headphone button can have a CC of your own too (right-click it in EDIT), beside CC 72. Notes, program changes and the other CCs on the deck's channel go to its K-SAMPLER box. CC 21 … 29 are the Kadabra's motion axes and K-Player leaves them alone.

QHow do I make the Kadabra follow a record's key?
  1. In Audio Settings, check the Kadabra row: (auto: a port named Kadabra) or the Kadabra's port.
  2. Load the track on a deck. If it has no markers, open DETECTION and press DETECT.
  3. Check its tonality markers; correct any with the marker editor row.
  4. Press LINK-KADABRA in the top bar so it is lit.
  5. Play the deck: at each tonality marker in force, the Kadabra gets the key, the scale and the harmony.
QHow do I match a deck to a MIDI clock?
  1. Click the SYNC button in the top section until it reads SYNC IN.
  2. Send the MIDI clock to K-Player's MIDI PORT: the MASTER BPM shows its tempo and MIDI CLOCK.
  3. Make sure the deck's track has a tempo, then press the deck's SYNC.
  4. If the clock's tempo changes, press SYNC again.
With the PLAYER & the other pagesThe decks as PLAYER strips 1 and 2, the ARRANGER's deck lanes, and what a session keeps
STRIPDECK A and DECK B on the PLAYER page

On the PLAYER page the first two strips (their numbers in blue) are DECK A and DECK B. There is only one of each, so these are the very same settings on both pages:

On both pagesOnly on the PLAYER strip
The fader, PAN and MUTE · the headphone button (the strip's CUE) · the MIDI channel · the three inserts · DLY and RVBThe AUDIO IN box: an input of your interface played through the deck's strip (never the other deck), which the deck's K-Sampler hears too · the deck's own SIDE-CHAIN · ARM for recording

The transport, the waveform and markers, STRETCH, DETECTION, LOOP, STEMS, the EQ and the CROSSFADER are on the DJ-DECK page. A deck cannot be removed from the PLAYER: the decks are always there.

ARRThe ARRANGER's deck lanes

The ARRANGER's DECK A and DECK B lanes play their clips through these same deck channels: the EQ, the inserts, the fader and the CROSSFADER apply. A stem level drawn there moves the stem faders on this page.

SAVEWhat a session keeps of this page
  • The track on each deck, its fader, STRETCH, EQ, headphone button, MIDI channel, BPM and KEY offsets, PAN and MUTE.
  • Every plug-in in the inserts and the K-SAMPLER boxes, with its exact state (K-Sampler's samples and all).
  • The stems: loaded or not, their levels and their M.
  • The CROSSFADER, the headphone level, DJ-EQ or STEMIX, the mixer's MIDI channel, the SIDECHAIN, AUTO, the headphone button's own CC, and the SHOW view with the MIX RUNNER's seconds and height.
  • Not kept: the cue point, the END point, which sections are open, how far the rows are scrolled. The markers are kept with the track itself.
Keyboard & mouseEvery key and gesture on the DJ-DECK page in one place
KEYSKeys and gestures
Key or gestureWhereWhat it does
TAB / SHIFT+TABAnywhereNext / previous page: PLAYER → DJ-DECK → ARRANGER → PRODUCER.
SHIFT+SPACEAnywhereThe top section's PLAY: it plays the ARRANGER, not a deck. No key plays a deck.
ESCAnywhereCloses the SHOW list, the SIDECHAIN list, a right-click menu or the CC grid. It never quits.
Wheel or two-finger swipeA deck's rows under its DETECTION · LOOP · K-SAMPLER line · the mixer under its fadersScroll them.
Click / let goWaveformThe playhead jumps to the point.
Drag sideways / up-downWaveformScroll / zoom.
Wheel · SHIFT+wheelWaveformZoom · scroll.
SHIFT+click · SHIFT+right-clickWaveformSet · remove the END point.
Click · right-click (EDIT)Marker laneSelect a marker · delete it, or NEW MARKER on an empty spot.
HoldJog pads, CUEBend while held · preview from the cue while held.
Right-click or double-clickDeck fader, EQ knob, STEMIX fader, PAN, CROSSFADER, STRETCH, INPUT faderBack to the default.
Right-click (EDIT)A deck's headphone buttonThe CC grid: give it a MIDI CC of your own.
Right-clickBPM / KEY arrows · DLY / RVB · CH · SC / SIDECHAIN · SHOW · a stem fader · a ducker barOffset 0 · send 0 · previous channel · off · switch view · whole track · lowest value.
Click · right-click (EDIT)An insert or the K-SAMPLER boxOpen it · Remove / Bypass / Change. In EDIT, drag it onto another box to move it.
Wheel · drag the bottom edgeMIX RUNNER bandSeconds shown · height.
Drop a fileA deck's panel, a MIX RUNNER laneLoad that deck.

The arrow keys and M, S, C, R (the selected channel's mute, solo, CUE and ARM) work on the PLAYER and the ARRANGER, not on this page.

Kadabra Ecosystem · K-Player · Page

ARRANGER

K-Player's song timeline: one lane for every channel, with audio clips, MIDI pieces, stems and the bar grid.

The ARRANGER is where a song is laid out in time. Every lane is a channel: the first two are DECK A and DECK B, and the lanes after them are the PLAYER's other channels, in the same order and with the same names.
Audio files sit on the lanes as clips. MIDI sits on the PLAYER lanes as pieces, which play into that channel's instrument. What you record with RECORD comes back here as MIDI pieces, ready to fix in the MIDI editor and to export as audio to the PRODUCER.
• The page tab is ARRANGER (it used to be called ARRANGEMENT). Its ON / OFF chip switches the page's sound.
• PLAY in the TRANSPORT, or SHIFT+SPACE, plays the ARRANGER from any page except the PRODUCER.
• Everything on it is kept in the session file (.kplayer). Version documented: K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
Back to top
At a glanceThe page top to bottom, lanes = channels, what you hear, and what the session keeps
MAPThe page, top to bottom
AreaWhat is there
Top rowWAVE · BEAT-MIX · GRID · the time signature (4/4) and the BPM · PATTERN 4 BARS · EXPORT TO PRODUCER · 2:00 across · PLAY · |< START · - · +. PATTERN and EXPORT TO PRODUCER are drawn only when the window is wide enough for them.
PATTERN rowCyan bands, one per pattern, numbered P1, P2 … (shown while GRID is on).
BAR rowBar numbers from 1, with short ticks for the bars and beats in between (while GRID is on).
Time rulerThe clock, m:ss. Its marks follow the zoom.
Channel columnAt the left of every lane: its number, its KIND, M, S and its name. With a STEMS view on, the stems' names too.
LanesOne per channel. Audio clips, MIDI pieces, and (deck lanes) the stem bands. The bar and pattern lines run down through them.
Marker stripA thin strip under each lane, labelled markers — preset, scale, BPM, key, structure. It holds nothing yet; its lower edge is the grip for that lane's height.
Room under the last laneA narrow empty strip. Right-click it to add a channel (it says right-click: add a channel while the pointer is there).
Size lineThe short bar at the bottom. Drag it to make all lanes taller or shorter.
Right edgeBUS 1, BUS 2, the - + n channels control above them, and the MASTER strip, as on every page.
Under the pageThe hint line: point at anything on the page and it says what it does, and what a right-click or a double-click does there.
LANEA lane is a channel

There is no separate track list. Lane 01 is DECK A and lane 02 is DECK B (as long as you have not moved them on the PLAYER), and every lane is the PLAYER channel with the same number. Add a channel and a lane appears; drag a strip to a new place on the PLAYER (EDIT) and its lane moves with it.

The number is the channel's position; the name (DECK A, Keys …) is its identity and travels with it. Channels are renamed, moved and removed on the PLAYER page.

SOUNDWhat you hear, and through what
  • An audio clip plays through its lane's channel: on the DECK A and DECK B lanes through that deck's strip (EQ, inserts, fader), on the other lanes through that PLAYER strip.
  • A MIDI piece plays its notes into the channel's instrument (the INSTRUMENT box on the PLAYER). The engine places every note on its exact sample. The controller moves of a recorded piece (CC, bend, pressure, program change) are sent on the MIDI channel that strip listens to, so a learned plug-in knob moves as it did when you played it.
  • With the page tab's chip at OFF, the ARRANGER makes no sound. The TRANSPORT's PLAY then says the ARRANGER is OFF -- switch it ON to play it.
MODEPERFORM, EDIT and undo

Everything on this page works in both modes. EDIT adds two things: WAVE + (the waveform read from the file at the zoom you are at) and the right-click on a stem's M that gives it a CC.

This page has no undo. A right-click on an audio clip removes it at once, with no menu. The MIDI editor has its own UNDO / REDO for the notes.

SAVEWhat the session keeps

Saving the session keeps the whole page: how many lanes, the view (where it starts, how much it shows), every lane's height, WAVE, BEAT-MIX and its speed, GRID, the time signature, the PATTERN length, every audio clip (place, trim, fades, curves, file), every MIDI piece (notes, controller moves, the take it came from), which deck lanes show their STEMS and every stem curve.

A clip whose file is gone is left out when the session loads, and the note at the end of loading says so.

VIEWThe ARRANGER page
The ARRANGER with the 15 channels of a session at 120 BPM, 30 seconds across: each lane's column (number, KIND, M, S), the PATTERN row (P1 … P4) over the bar numbers, and a MIDI piece on lane 01. The pointer is on an empty MIDI lane, so the hint line says what a double-click or right-click does there. K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
How do I …?Step-by-step answers for the ARRANGER
QHow do I put an audio file on a lane?
  1. Open the ARRANGER tab.
  2. Drag the file from the Finder, or drag its row out of the TRACKS window, onto the lane you want.
  3. Let go where the clip should start: it lands at the time under the pointer.
  4. Or: click the row in TRACKS once, then click an empty part of the lane.
QHow do I bring a whole session folder in, lined up?
  1. Slide the view to the start, so 0:00 is on screen.
  2. Drag the folder from the Finder onto the first lane you want filled.
  3. Let go at 0:00. The files go one per lane, downward, in name order, all at the same time.
  4. K-Player adds lanes if there are more files than lanes (up to 24 channels).
QHow do I move a clip?
  1. Point at the middle of the clip (away from its edges and its top corners).
  2. Drag it left or right to a new time.
  3. Drag it up or down to put it on another lane. Its trim, fades and curves go with it.
QHow do I trim the start or end of a clip?
  1. Point at the lower part of the clip's left or right edge (a light grip shows there while the pointer is on the clip).
  2. Drag the left edge to the right to cut the start: the sound under it stays where it is.
  3. Drag the right edge to the left to cut the end. Drag back out to bring the sound back.
QHow do I fade a clip in or out?
  1. Point at the clip: yellow dots appear at its top corners.
  2. Drag the left dot to the right for a fade in, the right dot to the left for a fade out.
  3. To bend the fade, drag the dot in its middle up (fast start) or down (slow start).
QHow do I copy a clip?
  1. Hold SHIFT.
  2. Press on the clip and drag. A full copy (trim, fades, curves) comes off it and follows the pointer.
  3. Let go where the copy should be. The original stays put.
QHow do I remove a clip?
  1. Right-click the clip. It is gone at once.
  2. There is no undo on this page: to get it back, drop the file again (or reload the saved session).
QHow do I zoom in and out?
  1. Put the pointer on the place you want to look at.
  2. Hold CTRL (or CMD) and turn the wheel, or move two fingers up and down on the trackpad. The time under the pointer stays put.
  3. Or press + (closer) and - (farther) at the right of the top row: they zoom about the middle.
QHow do I scroll the lanes and slide along the song?
  1. Up and down: turn the wheel, or move two fingers on the trackpad (this works when there are more lanes than fit).
  2. Sideways: swipe two fingers left or right, or hold SHIFT and turn the wheel. Or right-drag either ruler.
  3. To go far: zoom out first, then slide.
QHow do I play from a certain bar?
  1. Make sure the ARRANGER tab's chip says ON.
  2. Click the bar's number in the BAR row: the playhead jumps to the nearest bar line. (Click the time ruler to put it on an exact time.)
  3. Press PLAY in the top row or in the TRANSPORT, or SHIFT+SPACE.
  4. Press it again to stop. |< START goes back to 0:00.
QHow do I make a lane taller?
  1. One lane: drag the lower edge of its marker strip (the thin strip under it) down. A blue line lights while you are on the grip.
  2. Right-click that edge to give the lane back its normal height.
  3. All lanes: drag the short size line at the bottom of the page.
QHow do I add a channel from the ARRANGER?
  1. Right-click the narrow empty strip under the last lane (it says right-click: add a channel).
  2. Choose Add a MIDI channel, Add an Audio channel or Add a Special channel.
  3. Or press + on the - + n channels control above the BUS strips.
QHow do I write a new MIDI part?
  1. Find an empty spot on a PLAYER lane (any lane but DECK A's and DECK B's: the deck lanes take no MIDI).
  2. Right-click it and choose Add a MIDI piece here (1 bar) or (4 bars). Or double-click the spot for a 4-bar piece.
  3. The piece starts at that bar and the MIDI editor opens on it.
  4. Click in the editor's grid to write notes. Give the channel an instrument on the PLAYER page to hear them.
QHow do I edit the notes of a piece?
  1. Double-click the piece, or right-click it and choose Edit notes….
  2. The MIDI editor opens; the piece gets a yellow outline on the lane while it is open.
  3. Drag notes to move them, drag a note's right end to lengthen it, right-click a note to erase it.
  4. The lane hears every change at once. CMD+Z undoes in the editor.
QHow do I quantize a recorded part?
  1. Double-click the piece to open it in the MIDI editor.
  2. Pick the grid in the GRID list (for example 1/16), and a strength (100% puts every note on the line).
  3. Select the notes to fix (CMD+A for all; with nothing selected, all notes are taken).
  4. Press QUANTIZE or the Q key. Turn + ENDS on to straighten the note ends too.
QHow do I record my playing into the ARRANGER?
  1. Make sure the channel you play is a MIDI channel with an instrument (PLAYER page).
  2. Press RECORD in the top section. With nothing armed, every channel in use is taken.
  3. Play. Press STOP (the same button) when you are done.
  4. Each MIDI channel's notes arrive on its lane as a MIDI piece named after the session; the audio goes to the PRODUCER.
QHow do I change the time signature?
  1. Click the signature button beside GRID (it shows 4/4 at first).
  2. Each click steps 4/4 → 3/4 → 6/8 → 2/4 → 5/4 → 7/8 → 12/8 → 6/4. Right-click steps back.
  3. The bar numbers, the grid lines and the PATTERN bands follow at once.
QHow do I make the whole song follow the BPM?
  1. Set the MASTER BPM to the tempo the song was laid out at.
  2. Press BEAT-MIX. It lights and shows 1.000x.
  3. Now change the MASTER BPM: every clip and piece moves together, the mix intact. The number beside BEAT-MIX shows the speed.
  4. Press BEAT-MIX again to go back to normal speed.
QHow do I send a pattern to the Kadabra LOOPER?
  1. Set the pattern length with the PATTERN button (for example PATTERN 4 BARS).
  2. Point at the MIDI piece: a LOOPER 1, LOOPER 2 … chip appears on each pattern's part of it.
  3. Click the chip of the pattern you want. One click sends it.
  4. Or right-click the piece and choose Send pattern N to the Kadabra LOOPER.
QHow do I draw a stem's level over time?
  1. Put the track on the DECK A or DECK B lane (a deck lane).
  2. Click the clip's + STEMS chip (bottom right of the clip) and wait for MAKING nn% to finish; then click STEMS.
  3. Four bands open: KICK, BASS, DRUMS, TONAL. Drag across a band to draw that stem's level; right-drag to erase.
  4. Press PLAY: the stem follows the line.
QHow do I turn a track's bass line into MIDI?
  1. On a deck lane, open the STEMS view (the clip's STEMS chip).
  2. In the channel column, click -> MIDI beside BASS (KICK and DRUMS have one too).
  3. A new MIDI channel appears, named after the track, with one piece under each clip.
  4. Choose its instrument on the PLAYER page, and quantize in the MIDI editor if you want.
QHow do I turn my MIDI parts into audio for the PRODUCER?
  1. Stop recording first (EXPORT does not run while RECORDING).
  2. Press EXPORT TO PRODUCER in the top row (or right-click a piece and choose it).
  3. Wait while it shows EXPORTING nn% and the channel's name. A click on it stops the export.
  4. Open the PRODUCER: each channel's sound is on a new lane under its recording, which is muted. Use M and S there to compare.
QHow do I loop one piece while I work on it?
  1. Open the piece in the MIDI editor (double-click it).
  2. Make sure LOOP is lit (it is at first).
  3. Press PLAY in the editor, or SPACE. The piece plays round and round while you edit.
  4. Press STOP or SPACE to stop.
QHow do I mute or solo a lane from the keyboard?
  1. Click the lane's channel column (not on a chip) to select it, or step to it with UP / DOWN.
  2. Press M to mute it, S to solo it. Press again to undo.
  3. C switches its CUE and R its ARM.
Top row & transportThe buttons over the rulers, and how PLAY, RECORD and SYNC work here
ROWThe controls above the lanes
ControlWhat it does
WAVE / WAVE + / no waveClick to show or hide the waveforms on the clips. In PERFORM it reads WAVE (a quick overview). In EDIT it reads WAVE +: the file itself is read for the part on screen, so zoomed right in you see the real wave. Off, it reads no wave.
BEAT-MIXLocks the whole arrangement to the MASTER BPM from the moment you switch it on. Change the tempo and everything follows together; the speed shows beside it (1.000x, 1.050x …). It needs a MASTER BPM to start. Click again to go back to normal speed.
GRIDShows or hides the PATTERN row, the BAR row and the grid lines through the lanes. While it is on, MIDI pieces snap to the beat when you drag them.
4/4The time signature. Click: 4/4 → 3/4 → 6/8 → 2/4 → 5/4 → 7/8 → 12/8 → 6/4. Right-click: backwards. Beside it, the BPM the grid is counted at (the MASTER BPM, or 120 when there is none).
PATTERN 4 BARSHow many bars one pattern is: 1, 2, 4, 8 or 16. Click for the next, right-click for the one before. Drawn only when the row has room.
EXPORT TO PRODUCERRenders every MIDI channel's pieces to audio on the PRODUCER (see EXPORT TO PRODUCER below). While it runs it reads EXPORTING nn% and the channel's name, with a bar under it; a click stops it. Drawn only when the row has room.
2:00 acrossHow much time the width of the lanes shows now.
PLAY / STOPStarts and stops the arrangement from where the playhead is.
|< STARTPuts the playhead back at 0:00.
- / +Zoom out / in by 1.6 times, about the middle of the view (from 5 seconds to 2 hours across).
PLAYThe TRANSPORT on this page
  • PLAY in the top section's TRANSPORT plays the ARRANGER on every page except the PRODUCER (there it plays the recorded takes). Only one of the two plays at a time. Its clock is under the button.
  • Right-click the TRANSPORT's PLAY: back to the start.
  • SHIFT+SPACE is the same PLAY / STOP, from any page. Plain SPACE does nothing on the main window.
  • With SYNC IN, a MIDI START or CONTINUE from outside starts the ARRANGER and a MIDI STOP stops it.
  • The ARRANGER tab's chip must be ON for it to sound.
BPMHow the tempo works here
  • The bars and beats come from the MASTER BPM and the time signature.
  • MIDI pieces live in musical time: change the BPM and their notes move with the grid.
  • Audio clips live in seconds: they stay where they are unless BEAT-MIX is on.
  • With no track on either deck, while the ARRANGER plays the MASTER BPM takes the BPM of the analysed clip under the playhead; the word beside the BPM then reads arrangement.
Rulers, grid & playheadThe PATTERN row, the BAR row, the clock, and putting the playhead where you want it
RULERThe three rulers
RulerWhat it showsClickRight-drag
PATTERN row (top)A cyan band per pattern, light and dark in turn, numbered P1, P2 … where the number fits. A pattern's start is a cyan mark down through both rows.Playhead to the start of that pattern.Slides the view.
BAR rowBar numbers from 1; short ticks for the bars between, and for the beats when there is room.Playhead to the nearest bar line.Slides the view.
Time rulerThe clock (0:00, 0:10 …). The step follows the zoom, from 1 second to 1 hour.Playhead to exactly that time.Slides the view.

The PATTERN and BAR rows show only while GRID is on. Zoomed out, the numbers thin out (every 2nd, 4th … bar; a band for 2, 4 … patterns) instead of running together.

GRIDGrid lines in the lanes

The numbered bars run down through the lanes as faint lines, and the beats as fainter ones when every bar is numbered. Pattern starts are cyan lines, drawn only where they are at least 60 pixels apart, so a zoomed-out lane is never hidden behind a fence.

HEADThe playhead

A red line, 2 pixels wide, with a small triangle at the top, from the top of the rulers down to the last lane. It shows where the arrangement plays, or will start from. The view does not follow it by itself: slide the view to find it.

SIGWhat a beat is

A beat is a note of the signature's lower number: 4/4 counts quarter notes, 6/8 counts eighths. The BPM always counts quarter notes. So at 120 BPM a bar of 4/4 lasts 2 seconds and a bar of 6/8 lasts 1.5 seconds.

Lanes & the channel columnNumber, KIND, M, S and name; selecting a channel; colours; heights; adding channels
COLUMNThe channel column

Every lane starts with its channel's head, 92 pixels wide; the timeline starts after it.

PartWhat it isMouse
Number (01, 02 …)The channel's position, the same number its PLAYER strip shows.—
KIND chipAUDIO, MIDI or SPECIAL.Click: the next kind. Right-click: the one before.
MMutes the channel (red when on). The same MUTE as on the PLAYER.Click.
SSolos the channel (gold when on).Click.
Name (second row)DECK A, DECK B or the channel's name. Shown when the lane is tall enough.—
Anywhere else in the headSelects the channel; the head lights. Click it again to select nothing.Click.

With a STEMS view on, the column also lists KICK, BASS, DRUMS, TONAL beside their bands (see STEMS below).

SELThe selected channel and its keys

There is one selected channel for the ARRANGER and the PLAYER. Select it on either page and the other shows it too.

  • UP / DOWN (and LEFT / RIGHT) step the selection through the channels; the lanes scroll to keep it in view.
  • M mute · S solo · C CUE · R ARM, for the selected channel. Plain keys only: CMD+S is still SAVE.
COLORLane colours

A lane's colour says its channel's kind: AUDIO blue, MIDI violet, SPECIAL amber. Lanes of the same kind walk through three shades so they still read apart. The DECK A and DECK B lanes keep the decks' colours from the mixer: DECK A light blue, DECK B warm amber. A clip's waveform is drawn in its lane's colour, so a clip moved to another lane changes colour.

SIZELane heights
  • The lanes share the page between them: few lanes are tall (up to a limit), many lanes are thinner and scroll.
  • All lanes: drag the short size line at the bottom of the page.
  • One lane: drag the lower edge of its marker strip. It can go from 0.4 to 6 times the others' height. Right-click the edge to put it back.
  • When the lanes do not fit, the bottom right says which are on screen, for example lanes 3-8 of 24.
ADDAdding and hiding channels
  • Right-click the strip under the last lane: Add a MIDI channel · Add an Audio channel · Add a Special channel, the same menu as on the PLAYER. When all 24 channels are in use it is dimmed and says all 24 channels are in use.
  • The - + n channels control above the BUS strips shows on this page too (2 to 24). A new channel arrives as MIDI on the next free MIDI channel.
  • Pressing - never deletes a clip: the count does not go below the last lane that holds an audio clip.
  • A file dropped on a MIDI channel that has no instrument makes it an AUDIO channel.
  • Renaming, moving and removing channels are done on the PLAYER page.
Zoom & scrollWheel, trackpad, CTRL / CMD, SHIFT, the rulers and the + / - buttons
WHEELEvery way to move the view
GestureDoes
Wheel, or two fingers up / downScrolls the lanes up and down (when there are more than fit). A wheel notch glides 30 pixels; a trackpad moves the lanes exactly as far as your fingers.
CTRL+wheel or CMD+wheelZooms the time about the pointer: the moment under it stays put. From 2 seconds to 2 hours across.
SHIFT+wheel, or a two-finger sideways swipeSlides along the song. It moves by pixels, smoothly; to reach far, zoom out first.
Right-drag on a rulerSlides the view; the moment you grabbed stays under the pointer.
- / +Zoom out / in by 1.6 times about the middle.

The wheel works while the pointer is over the rulers or the lanes. At first the lanes show 2:00 across.

Audio clipsPlacing, moving, trimming, fading, copying and removing
PLACEPutting audio on a lane
  • Drop a file from the Finder onto a lane: it starts at the time under the pointer.
  • Drag a row out of TRACKS onto a lane: the same.
  • Pick and click: click a row in TRACKS, then click an empty part of a lane. One click places one copy; pick again for another.
  • Several files, or a folder (and the folders inside it), go one per lane, downward from the lane you dropped on, sorted by name, all at the same time. That is exactly how a recorded session folder lines up again. Lanes are added if needed, up to 24.
  • Audio files: WAV, AIFF, FLAC and MP3.
CLIPEditing a clip with the mouse
Where you pressDrag does
The middle of the clipMoves it in time, and onto another lane if you go up or down. Clips move freely, they do not snap to the grid.
The lower part of the left / right edgeTrims the start / end. Trimming the start keeps the sound under it in place. A light grip shows on both edges while the pointer is on the clip.
A yellow dot at a top cornerFade in (left) / fade out (right). The ramp is drawn over the clip, and the waveform shrinks with it.
The dot in the middle of a fadeBends the fade: up for a fast start, down for a slow one.
SHIFT + press on the clipDuplicates it (trim, fades, curves and all) and you drag the copy.
Right-click the clipRemoves it, at once.
INFOWhat a clip shows
  • The file's name at the top.
  • At the bottom, the library's reading: 148.0 BPM · A · Minor, or (not analysed — click it in TRACKS). Clicking the row in TRACKS analyses it.
  • The waveform, in the lane's colour (see WAVE).
  • A STEMS chip at the bottom right, when the clip is wide and tall enough (see STEMS below).
MIDI piecesParts on the PLAYER lanes: making, moving, lengthening, and their menu
WHATWhat a MIDI piece is

A piece is a part of MIDI notes on a PLAYER lane (any lane but DECK A's and DECK B's: the deck lanes take no MIDI). It plays into that channel's instrument. Its start, length and notes are in musical time (quarter notes), so it follows the BPM. A lane can hold any number of pieces.

A new piece is called MIDI 1, MIDI 2 …; a recorded one takes the session's name (session 3).

NEWFive ways a piece is made
  1. Right-click an empty part of a PLAYER lane: Add a MIDI piece here (1 bar) or Add a MIDI piece here (4 bars). It starts at the beginning of the bar under the pointer and the MIDI editor opens.
  2. Double-click an empty part of a PLAYER lane: a 4-bar piece, and the editor opens.
  3. RECORD: each MIDI channel's playing arrives as a piece (see Recording).
  4. -> MIDI on a stem: a new channel with a piece under each clip (see STEMS).
  5. Duplicate in a piece's menu.
PIECEWorking with a piece on the lane
MouseDoes
Drag the pieceMoves it. While GRID is on it snaps to the beat. Drag up or down to move it to another PLAYER lane (never onto a deck lane).
Drag its right end (the last few pixels; a light grip shows there)Makes it longer or shorter, on the beat while GRID is on. Notes past the end are not played.
Double-clickOpens it in the MIDI editor.
Click a LOOPER n chip (shown while the pointer is on the piece)Sends that pattern to the Kadabra LOOPER. The click does not move the piece.
Right-clickThe piece menu (below).
MENUThe piece menu (right-click)
ItemDoes
Edit notes…Opens the MIDI editor on it.
DuplicateA copy right after it (a whole number of bars later), named … copy. The copy has no recorded take behind it.
DeleteRemoves it (and closes the MIDI editor if it was open on it).
Send pattern N to the Kadabra LOOPERN is the pattern under the pointer when you right-clicked.
EXPORT TO PRODUCER (every MIDI channel)The same as the top row's button: all MIDI channels, not just this piece.

Press ESC or click anywhere else to close a menu without choosing.

LOOKWhat a piece shows
  • A title strip with its name.
  • Its notes as a small piano roll, each in the Kadabra's colour for its tone.
  • Recorded controller moves as thin lines along the bottom: a CC green, the bend blue, pressure orange, program changes violet.
  • Cyan lines where a pattern starts inside it.
  • A yellow outline while it is open in the MIDI editor.

A session saved by an older K-Player may show a recorded take as a violet strip with a tick per note at the bottom of a lane. It still plays.

Recording into the ARRANGERWhere a take's MIDI lands, and what it remembers
RECWhere a recorded take goes

Press RECORD in the top section, play, and press STOP. Then:

  • Every MIDI channel's notes land on its own ARRANGER lane as a MIDI piece, named after the session (session 3).
  • All the take's pieces start together: at bar 1 when the ARRANGER is empty, otherwise one empty bar after the last thing already on it. Takes never replace each other.
  • Each piece is as long as the take, rounded up to whole bars.
  • The controller moves you played (knobs, the bend, pressure, program changes) are kept beside the notes and sent again as the playhead passes them.
  • The decks' lanes take no piece. The audio of every channel goes to the PRODUCER.
  • The screen says what went where, for example session 3: 4 takes on the PRODUCER, 2 MIDI parts on the ARRANGER -- PLAY it there.

With nothing armed, RECORD takes every channel in use; a PLAYER channel with clips or pieces on its lane counts as in use.

TAKEA recorded piece remembers its take

A recorded piece remembers the audio file its channel recorded at the same time, and the bar it arrived on. That is how EXPORT TO PRODUCER can put the fixed version exactly under the recording. A drawn piece, or a copy, has no take behind it.

STEMS on the deck lanesA track split into KICK, BASS, DRUMS and TONAL: levels over time, stem mutes, and AUDIO TO MIDI
STEMSThe STEMS chip

A clip carries a small chip at its bottom right (when the clip is wide and tall enough):

  • + STEMS: the stems of this track are not made yet. Click to make them.
  • MAKING nn%, with a bar: they are being made. Only one track is made at a time.
  • STEMS: they are made. Click to open or close the lane's STEMS view (lit while it is open).

A deck lane with no clip on screen keeps a STEMS chip at the right end of its marker strip; it opens the view and loads (or makes) the deck's own stems.

Once a deck lane's clip has its stems, the arrangement plays it through them, at the deck's stem levels and mutes.

LINEDrawing a stem's level

The STEMS view (on the DECK A and DECK B lanes) splits the lane into four bands, KICK, BASS, DRUMS, TONAL, and makes the lane taller. Each band has a line: that stem's level over time, from silent at the bottom to full at the top.

  • Drag across a band to draw the line. While the pointer is on a band it shows the level and time (75% 1:32).
  • Right-drag to erase it.
  • Before its first point the line holds the first level; after the last, the last.
  • With no line drawn, the band shows where the deck's stem fader is.

To move a clip while its lane shows the bands, grab it by its top strip, above the bands.

DECK A's lane with the STEMS view open: the four bands, their names with M and -> MIDI in the column (TONAL's reads later), and a level line drawn on KICK and on BASS. The pointer is on a band, so the hint line says how to draw. K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
WHENWhen the line is heard
  • While the ARRANGER plays.
  • While the DECK plays that track on its own, where its playhead falls inside the track's clip on its lane.
  • Everywhere else, the stem is at its fader again at once. Erase a line and the fader is back too.

The DJ-DECK's stem faders show the level the line gives.

MUTEA stem's M

In the channel column, each stem's name has an M beside it. Click it to mute that stem: its sound goes, its fader stays where it is. It is kept in the session.

In EDIT, right-click the M to give it a CC of its own (the CC grid, or LEARN). A small dot on the M shows it has one; it answers on the deck's MIDI channel.

A2MAUDIO TO MIDI: -> MIDI

With the STEMS view on, each stem's name in the column has a -> MIDI chip:

Stem-> MIDI makes
BASSThe bass line as notes (one note per stroke, the track's own tuning taken out). The kick and drums that bled into the bass stem are left out.
KICK, DRUMSTheir hits as notes.
TONALNot yet: its chip reads later (it plays many notes at once).

It takes that stem of every clip on the lane and puts the notes on a new MIDI channel named after the track (Groove Track BASS), with one piece exactly under each clip, holding only what the clip plays. Nothing is quantized. The chip shows … while it works (about a second a track). Then choose the new channel's instrument on the PLAYER page.

If a clip's stems are not made yet, it says so: make them with the clip's chip, then press -> MIDI again.

EXPORT TO PRODUCEREvery MIDI channel's sound, as audio, onto the PRODUCER under its recording
EXPORTWhat EXPORT TO PRODUCER does

The workflow it finishes: you record; the audio goes to the PRODUCER and each MIDI channel's notes come here as a piece; you fix the notes; then EXPORT TO PRODUCER plays each MIDI channel's pieces through its own instrument and inserts, faster than real time, and puts the sound on the PRODUCER, ready to mix and master.

  • One file per piece: its notes and controller moves, then the tail that rings after them (up to 6 seconds).
  • 24-bit, normalized: one gain per channel, so its loudest moment is at -1 dBFS and its pieces keep their levels against each other.
  • Saved in the recordings folder, under exports/ARRANGER/<session>/.
  • It stops the ARRANGER and the PRODUCER from playing first, and does not run while RECORDING.
  • A click on the button while it runs stops it. Changing a plug-in on the channel being exported stops it too.
WHEREWhere the sound lands
  • On a PRODUCER lane of its own, named 03 Keys (ARRANGER), shown right under the recorded lane it replaces. The recorded lane is muted: use M and S to compare and keep the one you like.
  • A recorded piece's sound starts exactly where its take starts. A piece you moved on its own keeps that move; a whole session moved together still lands on its takes.
  • A drawn piece lands at its ARRANGER time: bar 1 here is 0:00 there.
  • Export again and the same lane is refilled; the old files stay on the disk.
  • A channel with no instrument, or whose notes made no sound, is left out, and the message at the end says so.
PATTERN & the Kadabra LOOPERCutting the song into patterns, and sending one to the Kadabra in one click
PATTERNWhat a PATTERN is

A pattern is a number of bars of the song, counted from bar 1. With PATTERN 4 BARS, pattern 1 is bars 1-4, pattern 2 is bars 5-8, and so on. Patterns show as cyan bands on the PATTERN row, cyan lines in the lanes and pieces, and bands on the MIDI editor's ruler.

The length is set by the top row's PATTERN button (1, 2, 4, 8, 16 bars), by the MIDI editor's PATTERN list, or by the Kadabra itself when its structure changes (SysEx PATTERN LENGTH, 1 to 64 bars). It starts at 4 bars and is kept in the session.

LOOPSending a pattern to the LOOPER

Three places, one click each: a LOOPER n chip on a piece in the ARRANGER (it appears when the pointer is on the piece and that pattern's part is wide enough), TO LOOPER n on the MIDI editor's ruler, or Send pattern N to the Kadabra LOOPER in the piece menu.

K-Player writes the notes of that piece that start inside the pattern, with the tempo and time signature, to ~/Music/Tribal-Tools/Kadabra-Link/looper.mid, then tells the Kadabra on its port that the file is ready. The message says how many notes went, for example PATTERN 2 (4 bars, 31 notes) -> the Kadabra LOOPER. With no Kadabra port it still writes the file and says so.

The MIDI editorThe piano-roll window a piece opens in: buttons, mouse, velocity, controllers and keys
MAPThe editor's buttons

The window is titled K-Player — MIDI — piece name · channel 3 Keys, and can be resized. It plays through the lane's own channel, so its instrument is what you hear. It warns in the grid when it cannot be heard: this channel has no instrument: put one in its INSTRUMENT box on the PLAYER page, or the ARRANGER page is OFF: switch it ON to hear this.

ControlWhat it does
PLAY / STOPPlays the piece from its start (the ARRANGER's playhead moves too).
LOOPOn (at first): the piece plays round and round.
FOLLOWOn: the view follows the playhead.
Name lineThe piece, its channel, its length in bars and how many notes.
PATTERN 4 BARS (list)The same PATTERN length as the ARRANGER's button.
UNDO / REDOUndo and redo note edits (up to 200 steps).
- / + / FITZoom out / in; FIT shows the whole piece and all its notes.
SNAPOn: notes snap to the grid when written, moved or stretched.
GRID list1/1 · 1/2 · 1/4 · 1/8 · 1/16 (at first) · 1/32 · 1/4 T · 1/8 T · 1/16 T (T = triplet).
LEN listHow long a written note is: = GRID (at first) · 1/32 · 1/16 · 1/8 · 1/4 · 1/2 · 1 BAR.
QUANTIZEMoves the notes' starts toward the grid. Works on the selected notes, or all notes when none is selected.
Strength list100% (onto the line) · 75% · 50% · 25%.
Swing listno swing · swing 15% · swing 30% · swing 50%: every second grid line comes that much later.
+ ENDSQuantize the note ends too.
KEY listKEY OFF · KEY AUTO (the key the decks are in, or the Kadabra's if it spoke last) · a seven-note scale on a tonic. The list opens with the twelve tones in their colours: click one for the tonic, then pick the scale. The key's notes are lit in the grid.
< / >Move the key's tonic down / up a semitone.
IN KEYOn: a note you write lands on the nearest note of the key.
Chord listNOTE · TRIAD · 7TH: one click writes a note, or the key's chord on that note.
DRAW | SELECTWhat a drag on empty grid does: write a note, or draw a selection box.
The MIDI editor on a 4-bar piece of 57 notes: the buttons at the top, the grid with its keys, the VELOCITY lane with its tools, and the CONTROLLER lane on CC 74. The grid warns that this channel has no instrument yet. At the bottom, the hint line; at its right, 4 selected. K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
MOUSEMouse in the editor
WhereGestureDoes
Grid, emptyClick (drag right)Writes a note (or chord) at the snapped beat; drag right for its length.
Grid, a noteDragMoves the note (and the other selected notes) in time and pitch; you hear the new pitch.
Grid, a note's right endDragLengthens or shortens it (and the other selected notes).
Grid, a noteSHIFT+clickAdds it to the selection, or takes it out.
Grid, a noteOPTION+dragDrags a copy; the originals stay.
Grid, emptyCMD+drag (or drag with SELECT)Draws a box that selects; with SHIFT it adds to the selection.
GridRight-click / right-dragErases the notes it touches.
RulerClickPlays from there.
Ruler, the orange triangleDragMoves the piece's end (the orange line). The piece also grows by itself to hold its notes, to the next bar line, and never shrinks by itself.
Ruler, TO LOOPER nClickSends that pattern to the Kadabra LOOPER.
Keyboard (left)Click / dragPlays the key you press, so you can find a note.
AnywhereWheel · SHIFT+wheel · CMD+wheel · OPTION+wheelUp and down the keys · sideways · zoom time about the pointer · row height.

Notes wear the Kadabra's tone colours; the bright line across a note's top is its velocity. The line at the bottom is the editor's hint line: at its left, what the thing under the pointer does (with nothing there, how to write notes); at its right, the note under the pointer and its place (bar.beat.sixteenth), and how many notes are selected.

VELVelocity

The VELOCITY lane under the grid shows each note's velocity as a stem. Drag across it to paint; SHIFT+drag draws a straight line (a crescendo). With notes selected, only they change.

ButtonDoes
VEL 100 barClick along it: the velocity of new notes, and of the selected ones.
LOUDER / SOFTER+8 / -8.
ACCENTThe first beat of each bar stands out, the other beats hold, notes between beats step back.
HUMANIZEEach velocity a little different.
CRESC / DECRESCFrom soft to loud / loud to soft across the notes.
FIXEDEvery note at the VEL value.

The buttons work on the selection, or on every note when nothing is selected.

CCThe CONTROLLER lane

At the bottom: the controller moves of the piece, one kind at a time. Pick the kind from its list: the ones the take recorded, then CC 1 mod, CC 11 expr, CC 74 cutoff, BEND and PRESSURE to draw fresh (marked (new)).

  • Drag to paint values (0-127; the bend 0-16383).
  • SHIFT+drag: a straight line, a sweep.
  • Right-drag: erase.
  • CMD+Z brings them back.
KEYSKeys in the editor
KeyDoes
SPACEPlay / stop the piece.
QQuantize.
DELETE / BACKSPACEDelete the selected notes.
CMD+A · C · VSelect all · copy · paste (at the playhead while playing, otherwise at the pointer).
CMD+DDuplicate the selection right after itself.
CMD+Z / SHIFT+CMD+ZUndo / redo.
UP / DOWNUp / down a semitone; with SHIFT, an octave.
LEFT / RIGHTEarlier / later by a grid step; with SHIFT, a bar.
ESCCloses an open list and clears the selection. It never closes the window.

The arrows work on the selection, or on every note when nothing is selected.

Mouse & keys on this pageEvery gesture and shortcut of the ARRANGER, in one place
MOUSEEvery mouse action
WhereClickRight-clickDrag / double-click
Top row buttonsAs in the top-row table4/4 and PATTERN step back—
PATTERN rowPlayhead to that pattern's startRight-drag slides the view—
BAR rowPlayhead to the nearest barRight-drag slides the view—
Time rulerPlayhead to that timeRight-drag slides the view—
Channel columnKIND steps, M, S, or selects the channelKIND steps back; a stem's M (EDIT) assigns a CC—
Audio clip—Removes itMove · trim · fade · bend a fade; SHIFT+drag duplicates
MIDI pieceLOOPER n chip sends a patternPiece menuDrag moves; drag the end lengthens; double-click opens the MIDI editor
Empty PLAYER lanePlaces the track picked in TRACKSAdd a MIDI piece here (1 bar) / (4 bars)Double-click: a 4-bar piece and the editor
Empty deck lanePlaces the track picked in TRACKS——
Stem band (STEMS view)—Right-drag erasesDrag draws the level
STEMS / + STEMS chipOpens the view, or makes the stems——
Lower edge of a marker strip—That lane back to normal heightDrag: that lane's height
Strip under the last lane—The add-a-channel menu—
Size line (bottom)——Drag: all lanes' height
KEYSKeys on the ARRANGER
KeyDoes
SHIFT+SPACEPLAY / STOP (the TRANSPORT's).
TAB / SHIFT+TABNext / previous page.
UP / DOWN (LEFT / RIGHT)Step the selected channel.
M · S · C · RMute · solo · CUE · ARM of the selected channel.
SHIFT heldA clip drag duplicates; the wheel slides sideways.
CTRL / CMD heldThe wheel zooms.
ESCCloses an open menu. It never quits K-Player.
MENUThe three right-click menus
  • On a MIDI piece: Edit notes… · Duplicate · Delete · Send pattern N to the Kadabra LOOPER · EXPORT TO PRODUCER (every MIDI channel).
  • On an empty PLAYER lane: Add a MIDI piece here (1 bar) · Add a MIDI piece here (4 bars).
  • On the strip under the last lane: Add a MIDI channel · Add an Audio channel · Add a Special channel.

A right-click on an audio clip opens no menu: it removes the clip.

Kadabra Ecosystem · K-Player · Page

PRODUCER

The production page: your recorded takes on 16 audio lanes, mixed, mastered and exported to one WAV file.

PRODUCER is the last of K-Player's four page tabs. Each time you RECORD, the audio of every channel you played lands here by itself, on that channel's own lane, after the takes that are already there.
Every lane has M (mute), S (solo), three inserts and a fader. The lanes are added together and go through the MASTERING chain, three more plug-in boxes. EXPORT writes the whole page, or an area you mark on the ruler, to a 24-bit WAV file, faster than real time.
It used to be called MIX & MASTER, and its tab said PRODUCTION. It looks like the ARRANGER, but it is audio only: no MIDI, no instruments, and plug-ins of its own that no other page shares.
• 16 lanes · 3 inserts per lane · 3 MASTERING boxes · plays WAV, FLAC and MP3 · exports 24-bit stereo WAV.
• Documented: K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).
Back to top
At a glanceThe page top to bottom, what you hear, PERFORM and EDIT, PRODUCER vs ARRANGER
MAPThe page, top to bottom
BandWhat is there
Above the pageThe top section and the page tabs, the same on every page. While the PRODUCER is showing, the TRANSPORT's PLAY plays this page; RECORD is what fills it.
Controls rowPRODUCER · MASTERING and its three boxes · the area text (EXPORT: all or EXPORT AREA, with its start and end times) · the EXPORT button at the right.
RulerTen marks in minutes and seconds, from 0:00. Click it to move the music, drag across it to mark the EXPORT area, right-click it to clear the area.
LanesNumbered 01, 02 … Each lane's head is at the left (number, name, M, S, three inserts, the fader with its level in dB); its takes run along the timeline to the right.
Right edgeBUS 1, BUS 2 and the MASTER strip, as on every page. The PRODUCER does not go through the buses or the MASTER's inserts: only the MASTER fader sets how loud you hear it.
Under the pageThe hint line: point at a lane, a take, a box, the ruler or EXPORT and it says what it does.
One take (session 1) on the PRODUCER: the MASTER first and muted (MASTER -- the whole mix, muted: its parts are here), its parts on lanes 02 to 05, an EXPORT area from 1:00 to 4:00 marked on the ruler, and empty lanes under them. K-Player 1.2.1 (build 48).

The rest of K-Player (top bar, top section, BUS and MASTER strips, windows, files):

PATHWhat you hear, and what EXPORT writes

The sound goes through the page in this order, top to bottom:

StepWhat happens
1. The takeA file, read from the disk while it plays.
2. The lane's insertsinsert 1 → 2 → 3, on that lane only.
3. The lane's faderIts level. M and S decide whether the lane is heard at all.
4. The sumEvery lane that is heard, added together.
5. MASTERINGThe three boxes in the controls row, 1 → 2 → 3.
6. OutEXPORT writes exactly this to the file. To your speakers it goes through the MASTER fader, your listening level.

Not in the path: the BUS 1 / BUS 2 sends, and the MASTER strip's three inserts and its PAN. The MASTER fader changes how loud you hear the PRODUCER, never the exported file. The PRODUCER is heard on the MIX output, not in the CUE headphones.

MODEPERFORM and EDIT on this page

The PERFORM | EDIT switch is in the top bar.

PERFORMEDIT
WaveformsEach take's overviewThe overview, with the take read from its file in fine detail on top
Right-click a filled insert boxA message: plug-ins are changed in EDITThe menu: Remove Plugin · Bypass Plugin · Change Plugin…
Drag an insert box onto anotherNothingThe two plug-ins swap boxes

Everything else works in both: PLAY, M, S, the faders, the ruler, EXPORT, opening a plug-in's window, and putting a plug-in into an empty box.

WHYPRODUCER vs ARRANGER
ARRANGERPRODUCER
What it isA performance timeline: what you are going to playA production timeline: what you already played
LanesThe PLAYER's channels16 lanes of its own
HoldsAudio clips and MIDI piecesAudio takes only
Plug-insEach channel's instrument and insertsThree inserts per lane and the MASTERING chain, shared with no other page
Ends inEXPORT TO PRODUCER: its MIDI as audio, sent hereEXPORT: a WAV file
QHow do I open the PRODUCER?
  1. Click the PRODUCER tab, the last tab at the bottom-left of the top section.
  2. Or press TAB until PRODUCER is lit. SHIFT+TAB steps back.
Takes: how audio gets hereRECORD and STOP, which lane a take goes on, files and folders you drop, what it can play
RECWhat arrives when a take ends

When you press STOP (or Auto-Stop in Audio Settings ends the take), K-Player puts what it recorded on two pages:

What was recordedOn the PRODUCERElsewhere
An AUDIO channelIts sound, as a WAV, on its lane-
A MIDI channelIts instrument's sound, as a WAV, on its laneIts notes, as a MIDI piece on its ARRANGER lane
The MASTERThe whole mix, on a lane called MASTER, placed first. It starts muted when its parts are here too, because it is the same music-
A channel that stayed silentLeft out (quieter than -66 dB from start to end)-

The screen then says what went where, for example: session 4: 3 takes on the PRODUCER, 1 MIDI part on the ARRANGER -- PLAY it there. The page does not open by itself; the play position is set to the start of the new take, so PLAY on the PRODUCER plays it. If nothing was playing: nothing was recorded -- nothing was playing.

LANEWhich lane, and where on it
  • A take goes on the lane that already carries that channel's name (for example 03 Keys, or MASTER). A channel that has no lane yet takes the first empty one.
  • The name is the channel's position and name on the PLAYER. Move or rename a channel there, and its next take starts a new lane.
  • Each new session goes after the last take on the page, with a small gap: 2 seconds, or 1.5% of what is already there when that is more. The first session starts at 0:00.
  • Within one session every take starts at the same moment, so the takes line up to the sample.
  • Nothing is replaced: takes follow each other along their lanes.
  • There are 16 lanes. When all 16 are in use, a take for a channel with no lane is left out.
TAGThe small labels on a lane

At the start of a lane's timeline, on a dark strip, a label says what the lane is:

LabelMeaning
MASTER -- the whole mixThe MASTER take. , muted: its parts are here is added while it is muted and not soloed.
a MIDI channel's sound -- its notes are on the ARRANGERA MIDI channel's audio. Its notes went to the ARRANGER.
the ARRANGER's version: its notes played by its instrument -- 24-bit, normalizedMade by EXPORT TO PRODUCER. Its name is light blue and ends in (ARRANGER).
(no label)An AUDIO channel's take, or a file you dropped.
FILEWhat the PRODUCER can play
  • WAV (16-bit, 24-bit or 32-bit float, mono or stereo), FLAC and MP3.
  • Any sample rate: a take is converted to the engine's rate as it plays, so a 44.1 kHz take plays at the right speed at 48 kHz.
  • A mono take is heard on both sides.
  • Not AIFF, OGG or MIDI files: dropped on a lane, they are ignored.
  • A file the engine cannot read says the PRODUCER cannot play and its name, (WAV, FLAC or MP3).
  • Takes play straight from the disk, a few seconds ahead, so an hour-long take costs only a few seconds of memory.
DROPDropping files and folders
  • Drag audio files from Finder, or rows from the TRACKS window, and let go on a lane.
  • Several files go one per lane, downward from the lane you let go on, in name order.
  • Let go over the timeline: they start at the time under the pointer. Let go over the lane's head (its left part): each goes after the last take of its lane (0:00 on an empty lane).
  • A dropped folder brings the audio files inside it.
  • An empty lane takes the file's name.
  • Let go anywhere else on the page (not on a lane): the files only join the TRACKS library.
KDBRecording from the Kadabra

RECORD can be started and stopped by MIDI: CC 102 on MIDI channel 16 (64 and up starts the take, below 64 stops it), or K-Player's SysEx RECORD START / RECORD STOP. However the take is started, its audio lands here when it ends. The full MIDI map is on the K-Player page:

QHow do I get my playing onto the PRODUCER?
  1. Press RECORD in the top section. The first time, choose the folder K-Player records into.
  2. Play. With no channel ARMED, RECORD takes every channel that has something to play, and the MASTER.
  3. Press STOP (the same button).
  4. Click the PRODUCER tab: the new takes are there. Press PLAY to hear them.
QHow do I put audio files on the PRODUCER?
  1. Open the PRODUCER.
  2. Drag WAV, FLAC or MP3 files from Finder (or rows from the TRACKS window) onto a lane.
  3. Let go over the timeline at the time where they should start, or over the lane's head to put them after its last take.
  4. Several files fill the lanes downward from that lane, one per lane.
QHow do I line up a whole session folder?
  1. In Finder, find the session folder (for example session 3 in your record folder).
  2. Drag the folder onto the first of enough empty lanes.
  3. Let go over the timeline at the time where the session should start.
  4. Each file goes on its own lane, downward, all starting at that time. The files of one session all begin at the same moment, so they line up.
  5. A dropped MASTER file plays along with its parts (it is the whole mix again): press M on its lane.
QHow do I compare the MASTER take with its parts?
  1. Find the lane labelled MASTER -- the whole mix. It starts muted when its parts are on the page.
  2. Press S on the MASTER lane: now you hear only the MASTER.
  3. Press S again: you hear the parts again.
The lanesA lane's head, its takes, M, S and the fader
HEADA lane's head
ControlWhereWhat it does
NumberTop left01 to 16: the row the lane is shown on.
NameAfter the numberThe channel the takes came from (03 Keys, MASTER), or the dropped file's name. Light blue for the ARRANGER's version. - on an empty lane.
MTop, after the nameMUTE: the lane is not heard and not exported. Red while on.
SBeside MSOLO: while any lane is soloed, only the soloed lanes are heard and exported. Gold while on.
+ insert 1 · 2 · 3Second rowThe lane's own three plug-in boxes, in order.
FaderSecond row, after the insertsThe lane's level, with its value in dB above it.

An empty lane shows only its number, - and empty -- RECORD, and the audio arrives here. Its M, S, inserts and fader appear with its first take. A click on a lane selects it (a blue outline); nothing else depends on the selection.

TAKEThe takes on a lane
  • Each take is a block from where it starts to where it ends, with its waveform inside.
  • Green: the lane is heard. Grey-red: it is muted, or another lane is soloed.
  • When the block is wide enough it shows where it came from and its length, for example session 3 4:12.
  • In EDIT the take is also read from its file at exactly the zoom you see, and drawn in detail over the overview.
  • A click on a take moves the music there.
  • Takes cannot be moved, trimmed or deleted on this page.
FADERThe lane fader
Do thisResult
Press on it and dragThe handle jumps to the pointer and follows it
Wheel over it (or over its dB value)Half a dB a notch
Right-click or double-click itBack to 0 dB

The same law as every fader in K-Player: 0 dB at 0.8 of the way (the small tick), +6 dB at the right end, silence at the left end. The value reads like -3.5 dB, 0.0 dB, +2.0 dB or -inf. PLAY and EXPORT both follow it, and the session keeps it.

SOLOMUTE and SOLO
  • M silences its lane.
  • An S lit anywhere means: only the soloed lanes are heard, muted or not.
  • With no S lit: every lane that is not muted is heard.
  • EXPORT follows the same rule: what you hear is what is written.
VIEWHow many lanes you see

The lanes have a fixed height, and the page shows as many as fit in the window. The lanes do not scroll: make the K-Player window taller to see all 16. The wheel on this page zooms the time instead (see PLAY, the ruler and zoom).

QHow do I set a lane's level?
  1. Find the lane's fader: the second row of its head, right of the three inserts.
  2. Press on it and drag. The level in dB is shown above it.
  3. For fine steps, turn the wheel over it: half a dB a notch.
QHow do I put a lane fader back to 0 dB?
  1. Right-click the fader (or its dB value above it).
  2. Or double-click it. It reads 0.0 dB.
QHow do I listen to one lane alone?
  1. Press S on that lane. It turns gold, and only it is heard.
  2. Press S on other lanes to hear them with it.
  3. Press each lit S again to hear everything.
QHow do I silence a lane?
  1. Press M on the lane. It turns red and the lane's waveform turns grey-red.
  2. Press M again to hear it.
PLAY, the ruler and zoomThe TRANSPORT's PLAY on this page, moving the music, the playhead, the wheel
PLAYPLAY on this page
  • The TRANSPORT's PLAY, in the top section, plays the PRODUCER while the PRODUCER is the page you see. On the other pages it plays the ARRANGER. Only one plays at a time: starting one stops the other.
  • While it plays, the button says STOP. Under it a clock shows the position and MIX (on the other pages: ARR).
  • SHIFT+SPACE does the same as PLAY. Plain SPACE does nothing, so a brushed space bar cannot start the music.
  • Right-click PLAY: back to 0:00.
  • The PRODUCER keeps playing when you switch to another page. Come back to the PRODUCER and press STOP to stop it.
  • With nothing on the page, PLAY says nothing on the PRODUCER yet -- RECORD a take and it arrives here.
  • The ON / OFF switch on the PRODUCER tab only greys the tab's name: the PRODUCER plays either way.
RULERThe ruler
  • It starts at 0:00 on the left, with ten marks across in minutes:seconds.
  • When takes arrive, or a session loads, it fits itself to all the takes plus a little (30 seconds at least).
  • Click: the music moves there, also while it plays.
  • Drag across it: marks the EXPORT area.
  • Right-click: clears the EXPORT area.
LINEThe playhead

A green line over the ruler and the lanes shows where the music is: bright while it plays, dim when stopped. It is drawn only while that point is inside the view.

ZOOMZoom with the wheel
  • Turn the wheel anywhere on the page (except over a lane fader) to zoom the time in or out, 1.25 times a notch.
  • From 5 seconds across the page up to 2 hours.
  • The view always starts at 0:00: it does not scroll sideways. To see a later part, zoom out.
  • The zoom is not saved; it fits the takes again when a session loads.
QHow do I play the PRODUCER from a certain point?
  1. Open the PRODUCER.
  2. Click the ruler (or a take) at that point.
  3. Press PLAY in the top section, or SHIFT+SPACE.
  4. Press STOP (the same button) to stop.
QHow do I go back to the start?
  1. Open the PRODUCER.
  2. Right-click PLAY in the top section: the music goes back to 0:00.
QHow do I zoom the timeline?
  1. Put the pointer over the takes or the ruler (not over a lane fader).
  2. Turn the wheel one way to zoom in, the other way to zoom out.
  3. The left edge stays at 0:00; zoom out to reach a later part.
Inserts and the MASTERING chainPlug-ins on a lane, plug-ins on the whole mix, every mouse action on a box
BOXAn insert box
It looksIt means
Dark, + insert 1Empty
Green, with a nameThat plug-in is working
Dark red, grey nameThat plug-in is bypassed: the sound goes past it

A lane's three boxes are that lane's own. The three MASTERING boxes work on the sum. None of them is shared with another page.

CLICKWhat the mouse does on a box
Do thisModeWhat happens
Click an empty boxBothThe Plugins window opens for it, saying for example insert into PRODUCER 3 · slot 1 or insert into MASTERING · slot 2. Choose a plug-in there.
Click a filled boxBothThe plug-in's own window opens, titled for where it sits, for example K-Player - Producer lane 3 - Insert 2 or K-Player - Producer Mastering - Insert 1. A box opens when the button comes back up on it.
Right-click a filled boxEDITA menu: Remove Plugin · Bypass Plugin (Un-bypass Plugin when bypassed) · Change Plugin… (the Plugins window opens, saying what it replaces). ESC closes the menu.
Right-click a filled boxPERFORMA message: plug-ins are changed or removed in EDIT mode -- switch PERFORM | EDIT in the top bar.
Drag a filled box onto another boxEDITThe two plug-ins swap boxes, each with its settings and its window. While you drag, the box it would land on is outlined and the name follows the pointer. Let go on nothing: it stays where it was.
MASTERThe MASTERING chain
  • Three boxes in the controls row, after MASTERING. They work on the sum of all the lanes that are heard, in order 1 → 2 → 3, before the file is written.
  • A common order: an EQ or a compressor first, a limiter last.
  • The exported file cannot go above 0 dBFS: louder peaks are clipped. A limiter in the last box keeps them under it.
  • They are not the MASTER strip's three inserts at the right edge. Those belong to the live performance (and are already on the MASTER take).
QHow do I put a plug-in on a lane?
  1. Make sure the lane has a take: an empty lane shows no inserts.
  2. Click + insert 1 in the lane's head.
  3. In the Plugins window, choose the plug-in.
  4. Click the box (now green, with its name) to open the plug-in's own window.
QHow do I put a limiter on the whole mix?
  1. In the PRODUCER's controls row, find the three boxes after MASTERING.
  2. Click the last one, + insert 3.
  3. Choose your limiter in the Plugins window.
  4. Click the box to open the limiter's window and set its ceiling.
QHow do I bypass, remove or change a plug-in?
  1. Switch PERFORM | EDIT in the top bar to EDIT.
  2. Right-click the plug-in's box.
  3. Choose Bypass Plugin, Remove Plugin or Change Plugin….
  4. For Change, pick the new plug-in in the Plugins window. Close it without choosing to keep the old one.
QHow do I move a plug-in to another box?
  1. Switch the top bar to EDIT.
  2. Press on the plug-in's box and drag. Its name follows the pointer.
  3. Let go on the box you want (it is outlined). The two boxes swap, settings and all.
EXPORTWhat it writes, the EXPORT area, where the file goes
WAVWhat EXPORT writes
EXPORT
The fileA 24-bit stereo WAV, at the engine's sample rate (Audio Settings).
What is in itEvery lane that is heard, through its three inserts and its fader, added together, through the MASTERING chain.
Left outMuted lanes; and, while any S is lit, every lane that is not soloed.
Not in itThe MASTER fader, the MASTER strip's inserts and PAN, BUS 1 and BUS 2.
LevelsTaken when you press EXPORT: moving a fader during the export does not change the file. Nothing is normalized; peaks above 0 dBFS are clipped.
SpeedFaster than real time: as fast as the plug-ins allow.
While it runsThe button reads EXPORTING and the percentage, with a bar along its bottom. The PRODUCER stops playing and stays silent. Clicking EXPORT again does nothing. You may change pages meanwhile.
When it is doneA message: exported, the file's name and its folder. If it goes wrong: EXPORT FAILED: and the name.
AREAThe EXPORT area
  • Drag across the ruler: a blue band over the ruler and every lane marks the area. The text left of EXPORT reads EXPORT AREA and its times, for example 0:30 - 2:15.
  • With no area marked it reads EXPORT: all, from 0:00 to the end of the last take.
  • Right-click the ruler to clear the area.
  • A drag of only a few pixels counts as a click: the music moves, no area is made.
  • The session keeps the area.
DIRSWhere the file goes
  • Into a folder called exports inside the folder K-Player records into (the one you chose at your first RECORD). Before you have chosen one: exports inside K-Player's data folder.
  • The name is the area, in minutes-seconds: PRODUCER 0-00 to 4-12.wav.
  • A file of that name is never overwritten: (2), (3) … is added.
QHow do I export my mix?
  1. Set the lanes' levels, M and S, and the plug-ins the way you want to hear them.
  2. Check the text left of EXPORT says EXPORT: all. If it says EXPORT AREA, right-click the ruler.
  3. Press EXPORT at the top right of the page.
  4. Wait until EXPORTING reaches 100%: the message gives the file's name and folder.
QHow do I export only part of it?
  1. Zoom with the wheel until you can see the part.
  2. Drag across the ruler from where it should start to where it should end.
  3. Check the times after EXPORT AREA.
  4. Press EXPORT.
QHow do I export one lane on its own?
  1. Press S on that lane, and on no other.
  2. If you want it without the mastering, switch to EDIT and bypass the MASTERING boxes (right-click, Bypass Plugin).
  3. Press EXPORT and wait for the message.
  4. Press S again. Repeat for each lane. Each file gets the next number, (2), (3) …: rename them in Finder.
QWhere do I find my exported file?
  1. Read the message after the export: it names the file and the folder.
  2. In Finder, open the folder K-Player records into, then its exports folder.
  3. The file is called PRODUCER, then the area's times, for example PRODUCER 0-00 to 4-12.wav.
From the ARRANGER: EXPORT TO PRODUCERFixed MIDI notes back as audio, right under their recording
ARRWhat EXPORT TO PRODUCER brings

On the ARRANGER, EXPORT TO PRODUCER (its top row, or EXPORT TO PRODUCER (every MIDI channel) in a MIDI piece's right-click menu) plays every MIDI channel's notes through that channel's own instrument and inserts, offline, and sends the sound here.

  • Each channel gets a lane of its own, named like 03 Keys (ARRANGER) in light blue, shown right under the recorded lane it is the other version of (when that recording is on the page; otherwise on the first empty lane).
  • Each piece's sound lands exactly where its recorded take is, sample for sample. A piece you moved on its own keeps the move. A piece with no recording behind it lands at its ARRANGER time: bar 1 of the ARRANGER is 0:00 here.
  • The recorded lane is muted and the new one is heard: M and S to compare.
  • 24-bit files, normalized: one gain per channel, its loudest sample at -1 dBFS, so its pieces keep their levels against each other. They are kept in exports/ARRANGER/, in a folder named after the session.
  • Export again and the same lane is filled again with the new sound; the old files stay on disk.
  • A channel with no instrument, or whose notes make no sound, is left out, and the message says so. Not while RECORD is running.

The ARRANGER page:

QHow do I bring my fixed MIDI notes back to the PRODUCER?
  1. On the ARRANGER, fix the notes of the MIDI pieces.
  2. Press EXPORT TO PRODUCER in the ARRANGER's top row (or right-click a MIDI piece and choose EXPORT TO PRODUCER (every MIDI channel)).
  3. Wait while it shows EXPORTING, the percentage and the channel's name.
  4. Open the PRODUCER: each channel's new lane, ending in (ARRANGER), sits under its recording, which is now muted.
QHow do I choose between the recording and the ARRANGER's version?
  1. Press S on the (ARRANGER) lane to hear only it, then S on the recording's lane instead.
  2. Turn both S off when you have chosen.
  3. Press M on the one you do not want, and make sure the other is not muted.
  4. EXPORT now writes only the one you kept.
Saving, messages and limitsWhat the session keeps, what the messages mean, what this page does not do
SAVEWhat the session keeps
  • A saved session keeps every lane's level, M, S, name and row, what it is (MASTER, a MIDI channel's, the ARRANGER's version), every take (which file, and where it starts), the EXPORT area, and the plug-ins in every lane box and MASTERING box with their settings.
  • Takes are kept as links to their files: the files stay where they were recorded. Move or delete them and the next load says, for example, PRODUCER lane 3: …wav -- the file is not there, and loads the rest.
  • File > New empties the PRODUCER too: its takes and its plug-ins.
  • The zoom is not kept.
MSGWhat the messages mean
MessageWhy, and what to do
nothing on the PRODUCER yet -- RECORD a take and it arrives herePLAY with no takes. RECORD something, or drop files on a lane.
nothing on the PRODUCER to export yet -- RECORD a takeEXPORT with no takes.
the EXPORT area is emptyThe area has no length. Mark it again, or right-click the ruler to export everything.
EXPORT could not startThe audio engine did not take the export. Press EXPORT again.
exported … (folder)Done: the file's name and where it is.
EXPORT FAILED: …The file could not be written. Check that the record folder (and its drive) is there and can be written to.
the PRODUCER cannot play … (WAV, FLAC or MP3)The file is not one of those, or is damaged.
no audio engine: nothing can playK-Player is running without its audio engine: nothing on this page can play or export.
plug-ins are changed or removed in EDIT mode -- switch PERFORM | EDIT in the top barA right-click on a plug-in box in PERFORM. Switch to EDIT.
NOTWhat this page does not do
  • Takes cannot be moved, trimmed, cut or deleted here, and a single lane cannot be emptied (File > New empties the whole page).
  • A lane has no pan control.
  • The timeline does not scroll sideways, and the lanes do not scroll up and down.
  • No automation, no MIDI and no instruments.
  • No MIDI control of its faders, M or S.
  • It is not heard in the CUE headphones.
  • The ON / OFF switch on its tab does not silence it.
Mouse and keys on this pageEvery click, drag, wheel and key, in one table
KEYSEvery mouse action and key
WhereActionResult
RulerClickThe music moves there
RulerDragMarks the EXPORT area
RulerRight-clickClears the EXPORT area
A takeClickThe music moves there
A lane's headClickSelects the lane (blue outline)
M / SClickMUTE / SOLO on or off
Lane faderPress and dragSets the level
Lane faderWheelHalf a dB a notch
Lane faderRight-click or double-click0 dB
Anywhere else on the pageWheelZooms the time (5 seconds to 2 hours)
Insert or MASTERING boxClickEmpty: the Plugins window. Filled: the plug-in's window
Insert or MASTERING boxRight-click (EDIT)Remove / Bypass / Change menu
Insert or MASTERING boxDrag onto another box (EDIT)The two plug-ins swap
EXPORTClickWrites the area (or everything) to a WAV
PLAY (top section)Click / right-clickPlay or stop the PRODUCER / back to 0:00
A laneDrop files or a folderOne file per lane, downward
KeyboardSHIFT+SPACEPlay or stop the PRODUCER
KeyboardTAB / SHIFT+TABNext / previous page
KeyboardESCCloses an open menu or list (it never quits K-Player)

The keys M, S, C, R and the arrow keys work on the PLAYER and the ARRANGER, not on this page.

QHow do I make K-Player open on the PRODUCER?
  1. Open Settings > General… (or CMD+,).
  2. Under K-PLAYER OPENS WITH, open the Page list.
  3. Choose PRODUCER. It applies when K-Player starts and in a new session.
Kadabra Ecosystem · VST3 instrument

K-Sampler

Kadabra's pad sampler: 11 groups of 12 pads, round robins and velocity layers, beat repeat, an envelope, delay and reverb, a guitar amp, an EQ and the factory banks.

K-Sampler is the instrument that plays samples for Kadabra. Every MIDI note plays one pad: note 0 is group 1 pad 1, note 127 is group 11 pad 8. A pad holds up to 5 round-robin takes that take turns on each hit, and every take holds up to 8 velocity layers.
Everything is in one window: the pads on the left, the Sample Editor on the right, and panels for beat repeat, the envelope, delay and reverb, the amp and EQ, and recording.
It runs inside K-Player (the K-SAMPLER box of each DJ deck, or the instrument box of any MIDI channel) and in any VST3 host. Its banks are its presets, so a MIDI program change from Kadabra picks a bank without stopping the music.
• Version documented: K-Sampler 0.3.11, macOS and Windows. The window is 1190 × 720.
• Seven factory banks: Acoustic Drums, Electric Piano, Electronic Drumkit, Grand Piano, Guitar, Handpan and Percussion.
Back to top
At a glanceThe window, the words, the two modes, and the rules every control follows
MAPThe window, area by area
AreaWhat is there
Top lineThe TRIBAL TOOLS logo (version and Language) · K-SAMPLER · the BANK box with the bank's name · SAVE · the mode button (PERFORM MODE / EDIT MODE) · VOICES 16 · SELECT: PAD / SELECT: NOTE · the OUT meter · the host's tempo (122.0 BPM).
KADABRA column (far left)The Kadabra drawn as a laser outline, the master LEVEL fader and the thin VEL fader (velocity → level).
PADSGroup buttons 1–11 and the 12 pads of the group on screen.
PERFORM panelBEAT REPEAT with SYNC / FREE · POSITION with REVERSE · the ENVELOPE (GLOBAL / GROUP / PAD; ATTACK, DECAY, SUSTAIN, RELEASE).
Sends panelDELAY with TIME and FEEDBACK · REVERB with SIZE and DAMP.
AMP panelLeft: AMP, the model, the pickup, DRIVE, TONE. Right: EQ and its curve with three points.
Sample Editor (right)The cell you are editing: ROUND ROBIN 1–5, File... EXPORT PLAY RESET LOOP DETECT TONE, VELOCITY 1–8, the waveform and GAIN, the zoom bar, OUTPUT, FADE IN / FADE OUT, PITCH, the file line, and the pad's own row (LEVEL, DLY SEND, RVB SEND, DE-CLICK).
INPUT (under the editor)AUTO-FILL · AUTO-TONE · AUTO-CUT with GATE · MIC-REC.
Status line (bottom)Left: the latest message, or the MIDI LEARN prompt. Middle: the MIDI monitor (the last note or CC). Right: the bank's file, or unsaved bank.
WORDSThe words this page uses
  • Pad: one sound slot, played by one MIDI note. There are 132 pads.
  • Group: 12 pads, one octave of notes. There are 11 groups.
  • Take (round robin): one of up to 5 versions of a pad's sound. Each hit plays the next take, so repeated notes never sound identical.
  • Velocity layer: one of up to 8 versions inside a take, chosen by how hard you play.
  • Cell: one pad, one take, one velocity layer: one sample with its own edit. The Sample Editor always shows one cell.
  • Bank: all 132 pads and the settings around them, saved as one folder. The host sees banks as presets.
MODEPERFORM MODE and EDIT MODE

The button in the top line shows the mode you are in: blue PERFORM MODE, amber EDIT MODE. Click it to switch. A new K-Sampler starts in PERFORM MODE; the mode is saved with the host project.

PERFORM MODEEDIT MODE
An empty pad reads+ 10assign 10, or arm 10 while MIC-REC is armed
New Bank, a bank from the menu, Load Bank or Import with unsaved changesgoes ahead at once: the music carries onasks first: Save first / Discard the changes and ... / Cancel
The EQthe curve and its pointsalso the values of the points and the analyser behind the curve
Everything elsethe same in both: a click on a loaded pad plays it and shows it in the Sample Editor, every knob and drag works, MIC-REC and AUTO-FILL work, and a MIDI program change never asks.
PERFORM MODE: the mode button is blue and the empty pads read “+ 10”, “+ 11”, “+ 12”.
RULESRules every control follows
  • Knobs: drag up or down. Sliders: drag sideways. LEVEL, VEL and GAIN stand upright: drag up or down.
  • Double-click a knob, slider or fader: back to its default.
  • Right-click (or CTRL-click on a Mac) a control: Reset to default, MIDI Learn and Choose MIDI CC. A control that has a CC shows a small CC21 label; one waiting for MIDI Learn blinks a red LEARN.
  • Scroll over a knob: steps it. Scroll over the Sample Editor: zooms the waveform.
  • A drag starts after the mouse moves a few pixels; a press without movement is a click.
  • There are no keyboard shortcuts. SHIFT-click is used in the Sample Editor only, to pick several takes or layers.
  • On the Mac the window has a fixed size. On Windows you can drag the window to any size; the picture zooms and keeps its shape.
HOSTWhere K-Sampler runs
  • K-Player, DJ-DECK page: each deck's K-SAMPLER box. K-Player puts K-Sampler into an empty box by itself.
  • K-Player, PLAYER page: the instrument box of any MIDI channel.
  • Any VST3 host on macOS or Windows. The host lists the banks as K-Sampler's presets.

See the section With K-Player and Kadabra OS below, and

Top line & BANK menuLogo and language, BANK, SAVE, the mode, VOICES, SELECT, OUT and tempo
LOGOThe TRIBAL TOOLS logo: version and Language

Click the logo at the top left. The menu shows the version (K-Sampler 0.3.11 · Tribal Tools · Kadabra) and Language ▸ thirteen languages: English, עברית, العربية, Français, Español, Português, हिन्दी, 中文, 한국어, Українська, Slovenčina, Italiano, Ελληνικά.

Every label, button, menu and hint changes. The feature names (BEAT REPEAT, AUTO-FILL, MIC-REC ...), units, the parameter names your host shows and the status messages stay in English. Hebrew and Arabic read right to left inside each label; the layout stays where it is. The choice is for every K-Sampler on this computer.

BANKThe BANK box and its menu

The box shows the bank's name (it reads BANK only while the bank has no name). An orange dot means unsaved changes. When a MIDI program change brought the bank, a small line under the box says so: MIDI bank 0 · program 3. Click the box for the menu:

ItemWhat it does
Factory ▸The factory banks. The first line reads bank select 0 · program change:, then every bank with its program number, A to Z, counting from 0 (0 Acoustic Drums, 1 Electric Piano ...). The bank that is loaded is ticked.
User 1 ▸ (and each of your bank folders)Your banks, numbered the same way, under bank select 1 · program change: (User 2 is bank select 2, and so on). (empty) when the folder has none yet.
New User Bank FolderMakes the next folder (User 2 ...): a new MIDI bank. The status line says its bank select number.
New BankAn empty, unsaved bank called Untitled, every setting at its default.
Load Bank...Opens a .ksbank file, or a K-DJer .kdj session (its deck A pads).
Save · Save As... (copies the samples in) · Save As... (leaves the samples where they are)The same as SAVE and its right-click menu (next card).
Import K-DJer Session (deck A)... / (deck B)...Takes one deck's pads from a session of K-DJer (K-Player's earlier name) as a new, unsaved bank named <session> (deck A).
Show Bank in Finder (Show Bank in Explorer on Windows)Shows the bank's file. Greyed while the bank is unsaved.
Open My Banks Folder · Open Factory Banks Folder · Open Recordings FolderOpen those folders. The factory item appears only when factory banks are installed.

A bank change never stops the music: the new bank is read while the old one plays on, it is switched in all at once, notes that are sounding ring out with their own sound, and banks you used recently stay in memory, so going back to one takes only milliseconds.

SAVESAVE

SAVE turns amber when the bank has unsaved changes. What a click does depends on the bank:

The bank is ...Click SAVE
a factory bankMakes your own copy without asking, in User 1 (or the next bank folder with room: a folder holds 128 banks), under the bank's own name (a number is added if that name is taken). The status line says where it went and its bank select and program numbers. The samples stay in the factory folder. The factory bank itself is never changed.
one of your banksWrites it where it is.
new, or importedOpens Save as your own bank, as Save As... (copies the samples in).

Right-click SAVE: Save / Save As... (copies the samples in) / Save As... (leaves the samples where they are). Save As makes a folder <name>/<name>.ksbank with a samples folder. copies the samples in puts a copy of every sample there (instant on a Mac's APFS disk), so the folder works on its own; leaves keeps pointing at the original files. The dialog opens in your bank folder and suggests the bank's name (<name> - mine for a bank that is not yours).

POLYVOICES

How many sounds can play at once. Click VOICES 16 for the list: 4, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32, 48, 64 (default 16). When every voice is busy, a new note takes over a voice that is fading out, or else the oldest one, which fades away in 5 ms. A pad plays one sound at a time: hitting it again restarts it. Saved in the bank. Right-click: control menu.

SELSELECT: PAD / SELECT: NOTE

SELECT: PAD (default): the Sample Editor shows the pad you click. SELECT: NOTE (lit): it shows the pad you play from MIDI, and its group comes up. Click to switch; right-click for MIDI Learn.

In both settings, when the pad on screen sounds, the editor shows the take and the velocity layer that played.

OUTOUT meter and the tempo

OUT shows K-Sampler's output from −48 to +6 dB: green, yellow above −6 dB, red from 0 dB. At the far right is the host's tempo (122.0 BPM), which the beat repeat follows in SYNC. It reads no tempo when the host sends none. working... shows under it while a job runs in the background (loading, filling, detecting a tone, exporting).

QHow do I load a factory bank?
  1. Click the BANK box (the bank name at the top).
  2. Point to Factory.
  3. Click the bank, for example 3 Grand Piano.
  4. In EDIT MODE with unsaved changes, choose Save first, Discard the changes and load it or Cancel.
QHow do I keep my changes to a factory bank?
  1. Load the factory bank and change what you like.
  2. Press SAVE.
  3. Read the status line: it says the copy's name, its folder (User 1) and its bank select and program numbers.
  4. From now on SAVE writes your copy; it is listed under BANK ▸ User 1.
QHow do I save a bank I can move or share?
  1. Right-click SAVE.
  2. Choose Save As... (copies the samples in).
  3. Type a name and click Save: K-Sampler makes the folder <name> with the bank and a samples folder.
  4. Open BANK ▸ Show Bank in Finder and copy or zip that whole folder. It loads on a Mac or on Windows.
QHow do I change K-Sampler's language?
  1. Click the TRIBAL TOOLS logo at the top left.
  2. Point to Language.
  3. Click your language. The window changes at once.
  4. In K-Player, THE SAME LANGUAGE: ON (Settings, General) does this for you.
KADABRA column: LEVEL and VELThe master level and how much velocity changes the level
LEVELLEVEL

The wide upright fader with a grip: the level of the whole instrument, from -inf dB to +6 dB (default -0.9 dB), shown under it. Moving it never clicks. Saved in the bank. Double-click resets; right-click for MIDI Learn.

Above it is the Kadabra, drawn as a laser outline from a photograph.

VELVEL (velocity → level)

The thin fader beside LEVEL: how much the note's velocity changes its level. off (0 %, the default for a new bank) = every note at full level; 100 % = soft notes are much quieter than hard ones. Velocity always chooses the velocity layer, whatever VEL is set to. Saved in the bank; double-click resets; right-click for MIDI Learn.

QHow do I make soft notes play quieter?
  1. Find the thin VEL fader in the far-left column, beside LEVEL.
  2. Drag it up: the number under it reads from off to 100%.
  3. Play soft and hard: the level now follows how hard you play.
  4. Press SAVE to keep it in the bank.
PADS11 groups of 12 pads: the group buttons, what a pad shows, clicks and the pad menu
GRPGroup buttons 1–11

Two columns: 1–6 and 7–11. Click one to show its 12 pads; the header then reads group 2 · notes 12-23. A small dot on a button means that group has at least one loaded pad.

  • Drag a group button onto another to swap or copy whole groups (see Drag & drop).
  • A MIDI note brings its group up by itself.
  • Right-click: control menu. CC 110 chooses the group (its value runs from group 1 to 11).
GRIDThe pad grid and its notes

Pads are numbered down each column: 1–4, 5–8, 9–12. MIDI note n plays pad n: group 1 = notes 0–11, group 2 = 12–23 ... group 11 = 120–127. A group is one octave from C (pad 1) to B (pad 12). The last four pads of group 11 have no MIDI note and read no note; you can still click them.

LOOKWhat a pad shows
StateLook
EmptyDark grey: + 05 (PERFORM MODE), assign 05 (EDIT MODE), arm 05 (EDIT MODE with MIC-REC armed).
LoadedBlue-grey. A thin bar along the top: green for cells played at the pitch they were recorded at (within half a semitone), orange for transposed ones (the legend original / pitched is in the header). Then ▶, five dots (a lit dot = a loaded take), 4 vel when more than one velocity layer is used, the tone name at the right (D), and the file name at the bottom.
PlayingGreen, pulsing with the output, with a ■ square at the top right.
RecordingRed, reading RECORDING (MIC-REC).
SelectedA green outline: this pad is in the Sample Editor.
During a dragOrange outline = the drop will swap; blue outline = it will copy (→ 05 on an empty pad). The pad you drag is dimmed.
CLICKClicking a pad
  • A loaded pad plays when you press the mouse, at full velocity (its top velocity layer), in both modes. Letting go is the note-off: the pad stops, fades with its RELEASE, or rings on in 1-SHOT; under a beat repeat its last pass plays to the end.
  • The pad also goes into the Sample Editor (the same take and layer if it was already there, else take 1).
  • While a pad plays, a click on its ■ square stops it.
  • An empty pad: when you let go, the file panel opens to load a sample.
  • With MIC-REC armed, holding a pad records into it instead.
  • The last pad you touched is the group's AUTO-FILL source.
MENUThe pad's right-click menu
ItemWhat it does
Load Sample...A WAV, AIF, AIFF, FLAC or MP3 into take 1, layer 1.
Add Round-Robin Take...Into the next free take (greyed when all 5 are used).
Add Velocity Layer...Into the next layer number no take uses yet (greyed when all 8 are used).
Detect ToneFinds the note of the pad's first take.
Export Edited WAV...Writes that cell as it sounds to a WAV file.
Auto-Fill the Group with This PadFills the whole group from this pad now, whether AUTO-FILL is lit or not.
Clear PadEmpties every take and layer of the pad.

Every item except Load Sample... needs a loaded pad.

QHow do I load a sample into a pad?
  1. Click the group button where the pad should be.
  2. Click an empty pad (it reads assign 05 or + 05) and let go: the file panel opens. On a loaded pad, right-click it and choose Load Sample....
  3. Choose a WAV, AIF, AIFF, FLAC or MP3 file. Stereo files and any sample rate are fine.
  4. The sample goes into take 1, layer 1 and the pad shows its name.
QHow do I add a round-robin take or a velocity layer?
  1. Right-click the loaded pad.
  2. Choose Add Round-Robin Take... (another version for the next hit) or Add Velocity Layer... (another version for a different playing strength).
  3. Choose the file.
  4. Or click the pad, then click an empty box (+) under ROUND ROBIN or VELOCITY in the Sample Editor.
PERFORM panelBEAT REPEAT, SYNC / FREE, POSITION, REVERSE and the ENVELOPE
BEATBEAT REPEAT and SYNC / FREE

A beat repeat replays a pad you hold, again and again, in time. Every pass starts again from POSITION and gets the envelope again. One knob, one button under it:

  • SYNC (default): the knob chooses a division that follows the host's tempo: OFF and 25 divisions. It reads no tempo (dimmed) when the host sends none.
  • Press the button: it reads FREE and the same knob becomes a time: 2 s at the bottom, 5 ms at the top (turned up = faster), with OFF in the last bit at the bottom. Default 125 ms. FREE needs no tempo.
  • Drag the knob up or down; scroll steps it; double-click: OFF in SYNC, 125 ms in FREE. It glows deeper orange while a hold (below) is pressed.
  • Let go of a pad, or turn the repeat off, and the last pass plays to its end, so the rhythm is never chopped. Turning it back on repeats only pads that are still held.
SYNC divisions (of a 4/4 bar)In order, knob turned up
Bars4 · 3 · 2 · 1.5 · 1
Parts of a bar3/4 · 1/2 · 3/8 · 1/4 · 1/5 · 3/16 · 1/6 · 1/8 · 1/10 · 1/12 · 1/14 · 1/16 · 3/64 · 1/24 · 1/28 · 1/32 · 1/48 · 1/64 · 1/96 · 1/128

From MIDI: CC 40–51 are hold buttons: while one is held (value 64 or more) the repeat runs at its division: 40 = 4, 41 = 2, 42 = 1, 43 = 1/2, 44 = 1/4, 45 = 3/16, 46 = 1/8, 47 = 1/12, 48 = 1/16, 49 = 1/24, 50 = 1/32, 51 = 1/64. A hold wins over the knob. CC 89 turns the repeat off. The knob's right-click menu also learns the other mode's setting (TIME, when FREE or The division, when SYNC), Hold buttons: a CC per division (all 25) and the Beat repeat OFF button.

FREE is lit and the BEAT REPEAT knob reads a time, 125 ms, instead of a division.
POSPOSITION

Where every note, and every beat-repeat pass, starts: 0–100 % of the way from START to END (default 0 %). It shows as a POS line on the waveform. With REVERSE on it counts back from END. For all pads. Drag, scroll, double-click to reset, right-click for MIDI Learn.

REVREVERSE

All pads play backwards, from END towards START. The button reads ◀ REV when it is on. It works live: notes that are sounding turn round where they are, smoothly, and a beat repeat keeps its rhythm. The Sample Editor's PLAY always plays forwards. Click to switch; right-click for MIDI Learn.

ADSRENVELOPE: GLOBAL, GROUP or PAD
KnobRange · defaultWhat it does
ATTACK0 – 4 s · 0How long the sound takes to fade in.
DECAY0 – 10 s · 0How long it takes to fall to the SUSTAIN level.
SUSTAIN0 – 100 % · 100 %The level while the key is held.
RELEASE0 – 10 s · 0After the key is let go: at 0 the sound stops; in between it fades over that time; turned all the way up it reads 1-SHOT: the sound ignores the note-off and plays to its end.
  • GLOBAL / GROUP / PAD choose whose envelope the knobs show. The caption at the right says whose: every pad, group 2 or group 2 pad 05 (the group on screen, the pad in the Sample Editor).
  • A group or a pad starts as INHERITS (the knobs are dimmed): it uses its group's envelope, or the global one. Turn a knob, or click INHERITS, and it gets its OWN, starting from what it inherited. Click OWN to go back to inheriting.
  • The envelope shapes every note and every beat-repeat pass, and turning a knob is heard on notes already sounding.
  • Only the GLOBAL knobs can be MIDI-learned; in GROUP or PAD the right-click menu says MIDI controls the GLOBAL envelope.
  • All envelopes are saved in the bank. The global RELEASE at 1-SHOT also makes the bank a 1-SHOT bank.
QHow do I play a beat repeat?
  1. Check the top right shows a tempo (122.0 BPM). If it says no tempo, press SYNC so it reads FREE.
  2. Turn BEAT REPEAT up to a division, for example 1/16.
  3. Hold a pad (with the mouse or from the Kadabra): it repeats in time.
  4. Let go: the last pass plays to its end.
  5. Turn the knob fully down to OFF. From the Kadabra, CC 40–51 hold a division while pressed and CC 89 turns it off.
QHow do I give one pad its own envelope?
  1. Click the pad, so it is in the Sample Editor.
  2. In ENVELOPE, click PAD.
  3. Click INHERITS so it reads OWN (or just turn a knob).
  4. Set ATTACK, DECAY, SUSTAIN and RELEASE. The other pads keep theirs.
  5. To undo it, click OWN. GROUP works the same way for the group on screen.
QHow do I make pads ring to the end (1-SHOT)?
  1. In ENVELOPE, choose GLOBAL (all pads), GROUP or PAD.
  2. Turn RELEASE all the way up until it reads 1-SHOT.
  3. Now letting go of a key no longer stops those pads: they play to their end.
  4. Press SAVE to keep it in the bank.
DELAY and REVERBThe two built-in send effects, and the order of the sound
SENDThe sends panel

Two columns under the PERFORM panel. The thick slider at the top of each column is the send; the thin ones under it are its settings. Each label shows its value (DELAY 15%). Drag sideways; double-click resets; right-click for MIDI Learn.

ControlRange · defaultMIDI
DELAY0 – 100 % · 0 %CC 112
TIME1 – 1000 ms · 80 ms (a new time fades over, without a sweep)learn
FEEDBACK0 – 98 % · 50 %learn
REVERB0 – 100 % · 0 %CC 113
SIZE0 – 100 % · 72 %learn
DAMP0 – 100 % · 35 %learn

The effects add only their echo and reverb to the dry sound. Every pad has its own share of each send, DLY SEND and RVB SEND, in the Sample Editor (0–200 %, 100 % = the panel's value). All six are saved in the bank.

FLOWThe order of the sound
  1. Each pad: its cell's GAIN, its envelope, its own LEVEL, then the master LEVEL and VEL.
  2. The AMP, on the dry sound and on what goes to the effects, so the delay and reverb hear the amped sound.
  3. DELAY and REVERB, with each pad's share.
  4. The EQ, last of all, so reverb tails are filtered too.
  5. OUT.
QHow do I keep one pad dry while the others have reverb?
  1. Turn REVERB (and DELAY) up in the sends panel.
  2. Click the pad that should stay dry, for example the kick.
  3. In the Sample Editor's pad row, drag RVB SEND (and DLY SEND) down to 0 %.
  4. The other pads keep 100 %; drag one up to 200 % for more.
  5. Press SAVE.
AMP and EQGuitar amp and pedal models on one knob, and the EQ curve you drag
AMPAMP: model, pickup, DRIVE, TONE

The left half of the bottom panel. Turn the unnamed knob, or click the model's name (Off) for the list. Click the pickup (Direct ▾) for the pickups. DRIVE is how hard the model is pushed, TONE runs from dark to bright (both 0–100 %, default 50 %). Every model is matched to the level of the dry sound, so turning the knob changes the character, not the loudness. Changing model or pickup fades over in 30 ms, so you can do it while playing. Saved in the bank; every part can be MIDI-learned (right-click; the title blinks AMP LEARN while it waits).

ModelSound
OffNo amp.
Jazz Clean · Clean TwinA warm jazz clean · a glassy, scooped clean.
Chime · BluesA chiming British combo just breaking up · a warm tweed-style blues amp, mids forward.
Overdrive · CrunchAn overdrive pedal's mid boost into a clean amp · a classic rock crunch.
British Lead · Hi-Gain · MetalA hot British lead · thick, high-gain · tight with scooped mids.
Fuzz · Octave FuzzA woolly fuzz · a fuzz with an octave up.
Lo-FiBit-crushed and narrow, like a small radio.

Pickups: Direct · Single-coil · Humbucker · P-90 · Neck (warm) · Piezo. A pickup other than Direct colours the sound even with the model on Off. With Off and Direct the AMP does nothing and costs nothing.

EQEQ: a curve with three points

The right half of the bottom panel. EQ at its top switches it on and off (off by default). The curve shows what the EQ does from 30 Hz to 16 kHz; its three points are the settings:

PointRange · defaultHow to move it
HP (left)20 Hz – 2 kHz · 20 HzDrag sideways: everything below is cut (12 dB per octave).
LP (right)200 Hz – 20 kHz · 20 kHzDrag sideways: everything above is cut.
NOTCH (middle)40 Hz – 16 kHz · 1 kHz; Q 0.5 – 30 · 4; offClick it to switch it on (solid) or off (hollow). Drag sideways for its frequency, up for a narrower cut, down for a wider one.
  • Double-click a point: back to its default. Right-click a point: control menu (the notch's menu also learns its Q and its on / off).
  • In EDIT MODE each point shows its value (HP 20 Hz, LP 20.0 kHz, NOTCH 1.0 kHz Q 4.0), and the analyser draws the output's spectrum behind the curve, with the EQ on or off (next card).
  • The EQ works on the whole output, after the AMP and the effects. Switching it and moving points never clicks. Saved in the bank.
SPECThe analyser: the sound's spectrum behind the EQ

In EDIT MODE the EQ box shows the spectrum of K-Sampler's output: blue bars, the lows on the left (30 Hz) and the highs on the right (16 kHz); a taller bar is louder. It works with EQ on or off, so you can look at a sound before you decide what to cut.

  • The bars show what you hear: the output after the AMP, DELAY, REVERB and the EQ. A bar jumps up at once and sinks slowly.
  • With the EQ on, two thin lines also mark where HP and LP cut.
  • In PERFORM MODE the box shows only the curve and its points. The analyser runs only while you can see it (EDIT MODE, window open), so it takes nothing from the sound or from a show.
EDIT MODE with the EQ on: HP at 80 Hz, LP at 9.0 kHz and the notch at 1.2 kHz (Q 6.0), the spectrum behind the curve and a thin line at each cutoff.
QHow do I play a sound through the guitar amp?
  1. Load a bank, for example BANK ▸ Factory ▸ Guitar.
  2. In AMP, click the model name (Off) and choose Crunch.
  3. Click the pickup (Direct ▾) and choose Humbucker.
  4. Turn DRIVE and TONE to taste while you play.
  5. Press SAVE to keep it with the bank.
QHow do I cut low rumble or a ringing tone with the EQ?
  1. Click EQ (bottom panel, right half) so it lights.
  2. Switch to EDIT MODE to see the values and the spectrum.
  3. Drag the left point (HP) to the right, for example to 100 Hz: the lows are cut.
  4. For a ringing tone, click the hollow middle point (NOTCH) to switch it on, drag it sideways onto the tone and up to make the cut narrow.
  5. Double-click a point to reset it; press SAVE to keep it.
QHow do I see which frequencies are in my sound?
  1. Click the mode button in the top line so it reads EDIT MODE.
  2. Play some pads, with the mouse or from the Kadabra.
  3. Look at the EQ box (bottom panel, right half): the blue bars are the sound, the lows on the left and the highs on the right. The EQ does not have to be on.
  4. To cut what you see, click EQ so it lights and drag HP, LP or the NOTCH point onto it: thin lines show where HP and LP cut.
Sample EditorOne cell at a time: takes, layers, trim, fades, gain, pitch, and the pad's own row
CELLThe title: which cell you are editing

Note 4 · group 1 pad 05 · RR 2 VEL 3, then the file name (or (empty)). Everything below acts on that one cell (pad, take, velocity layer), except the pad's own row at the bottom, which is for the whole pad. With several cells picked (SHIFT-click), the title also says 3 selected.

RRROUND ROBIN 1–5

Five boxes at the top right: the pad's takes. Each hit plays the next loaded take. Click a box to edit that take; an empty box (+) opens the file panel when you let go. A bar along the bottom of a box is green (original pitch) or orange (pitched); a small green dot marks the take that is sounding.

Right-click: Load into this take... / Clear this take. SHIFT-click: pick the whole take as well (see below). Drag: move or copy the take (see Drag & drop).

BTNSFile..., EXPORT, PLAY, RESET, LOOP, DETECT TONE
ButtonWhat it does
File...Loads a WAV, AIF, AIFF, FLAC or MP3 into this cell. The cell's edit goes back to the raw sound.
EXPORTWrites the cell as it sounds (trim, pitch, fades, gain) to a 16-bit WAV at the file's own rate; the suggested name is <name>_edit.wav.
PLAY / STOPPlays exactly this cell, from START, forwards, never beat-repeated. It reads STOP (lit) while the pad sounds; click it to stop.
RESETSTART and END to the whole file, fades 0, PITCH 1×, GAIN 0 dB, LOOP off. The file and its tone stay.
LOOPLit: the cell starts again at START when it reaches END.
DETECT TONEFinds the note of the trimmed sound (tone: ... while it works, then tone: D), counting PITCH in. The status line adds how sure it is and the tuning in cents. (silent) when there is no clear note.
ORIGINAL / PITCHED (right edge)ORIGINAL in green: played at its recorded pitch; ORIGINAL (tuned +12 c) for a small correction; PITCHED +2.00 st in orange when transposed by half a semitone or more.
VELVELOCITY 1–8

The velocity layers of the take on screen. The note's velocity picks the layer: velocities 1–127 are split evenly over the layers the pad uses, and the text beside the boxes says which ones this layer answers (answers velocity 64-95). A take that lacks that layer plays its nearest one.

Layers usedVelocities each layer answers
21–63 · 64–127
31–41 · 42–84 · 85–127
41–31 · 32–63 · 64–95 · 96–127
816 velocities each: 1–15, 16–31 ... 112–127

A box with +: no take has this layer; with ·: another take has it. Click selects (an empty box opens the file panel when you let go); right-click: Load into this layer... / Clear this layer; SHIFT-click picks it too; drag moves it.

WAVEThe waveform and GAIN
  • The part that plays is tinted blue; the parts cut off are grey. The green S and red E flags at the bottom are START and END. The amber line with two round handles at the top shows the fades. A light-blue POS line marks POSITION; a white line runs while the cell plays.
  • Drag near a flag in the lower half: move START or END. Drag a handle in the upper half: the fade in or fade out (up to 5 s). Drag anywhere else: move along the sound.
  • Scroll: zoom in around the mouse, up to about 300×. The corner shows the file's length and zoom 4.0x.
  • GAIN (upright, at the right): this cell's level, −30 to +12 dB, -inf at the bottom, with a mark and a snap at 0 dB. It is heard while the note plays. Double-click: 0 dB. Right-click: Reset to 0 dB and Give every take and layer of this pad +2.0 dB (its current value).
ZOOMZoom bar, OUTPUT and the times

The thin zoom bar under the waveform: click along it to set the zoom (left = the whole sound). Under it, OUTPUT draws the sound exactly as it will play (trim, pitch, fades and gain) with its length and speed: OUTPUT 1.920s @ 1.00x. Then START 0.048s END 1.968s LENGTH 1.920s: LENGTH is the time you hear, after PITCH.

FADEFADE IN / FADE OUT

Two sliders, 0–2 s each (the handles on the waveform reach 5 s). A fade is measured in the time you hear, after PITCH. Drag; double-click or right-click sets 0.

PITCHPITCH, FREE / SNAP and the bend range

The cell's pitch from ¼× to 4× (two octaves down to two up), marked 1/4 1/2 1x 2x 4x; the readout says 1.000x +0.00 st. Drag it; double-click: back to 1×. A new pitch names each cell's tone again.

  • The small button under PITCH: FREE (any pitch) or SNAP (lit: whole semitones only, with a tick at each). Remembered for every K-Sampler on this computer.
  • An amber ghost on the fader shows where the pitch wheel is bending the sound right now.
  • Right-click: MIDI Learn / Choose MIDI CC for Sample Pitch (a CC then moves the pitch of whatever cell the editor shows), and Pitch bend range: 2 st ▸ 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 12 or 24 semitones (default 2), which can be learned too.
FILEFile line and hint

48000 Hz · stereo · 2.40s · /path/to/the/file.wav. Samples keep their own rate and channels; a stereo file plays in stereo. The grey line at the bottom repeats the gestures: drag START / END / fades · scroll = zoom · drag takes and velocity layers onto each other, or onto a pad · right-click for more.

PADThe pad's own row: LEVEL, DLY SEND, RVB SEND, DE-CLICK

The row under PITCH belongs to the whole pad, all its takes and layers. It travels with the pad when you swap or copy it, and is saved in the bank.

ControlRange · defaultWhat it does
LEVEL−30 to +6 dB · 0 dBThe pad's own level, with a snap at 0 dB.
DLY SEND0 – 200 % · 100 %The pad's share of the DELAY send (100 % = the panel's value). Snaps at 100 %.
RVB SEND0 – 200 % · 100 %The same for REVERB.
DE-CLICKon / off · onOn: this pad's sound is never cut hard. Stops, steals, restarts, END, loop turns and beat-repeat passes fade out in 5 ms, and starts in the middle of a sound fade in over 2 ms. Turn it off on a kick to get its hard edges back.

Double-click or right-click a slider: back to its default. These have no MIDI.

SHIFTSHIFT-click: edit several cells at once
  • SHIFT-click a ROUND ROBIN box: that whole take (every layer in it) is picked too. SHIFT-click it again to drop it.
  • SHIFT-click a VELOCITY box: that layer is picked in every take you have picked.
  • The boxes light to show what is picked; the title says how many (6 selected).
  • Now PITCH, FADE IN, FADE OUT, GAIN, LOOP, RESET and DETECT TONE set every picked cell to the same value. START and END stay each recording's own.
  • A plain click on a box goes back to one cell.
QHow do I trim a sample and fade it?
  1. Click the pad, then its ROUND ROBIN and VELOCITY box.
  2. Scroll on the waveform to zoom in.
  3. Drag the green S flag (bottom) to where the sound should start, and the red E flag to where it should end.
  4. Drag the amber handles at the top, or the FADE IN / FADE OUT sliders, for the fades.
  5. Press PLAY to hear it; RESET undoes it all. Press SAVE.
QHow do I change a sample's pitch by semitones?
  1. Select the cell in the Sample Editor.
  2. Press DETECT TONE to see its note (tone: D).
  3. Click the small FREE button under PITCH so it reads SNAP.
  4. Drag PITCH: it lands on whole semitones; the readout says +2.00 st and the right edge says PITCHED.
  5. Double-click PITCH to go back to 1×.
QHow do I change several takes or layers at once?
  1. Click the pad and click ROUND ROBIN 1.
  2. SHIFT-click ROUND ROBIN 2, 3 ... (or SHIFT-click VELOCITY boxes).
  3. Check the title: N selected.
  4. Move PITCH, GAIN or the fades, or press LOOP, RESET or DETECT TONE: every picked cell gets the same.
  5. Click a box without SHIFT to go back to one cell.
INPUT panelAUTO-FILL, AUTO-TONE, AUTO-CUT with its GATE, and MIC-REC
FILLAUTO-FILL

Turns one pad into a whole group, with all its takes and layers. Press it (it lights) and the group on screen is filled from its source pad: the last pad you touched there, or else the first loaded one. While it is lit, loading a new sample into any pad of the group on screen fills the group again, in either mode. It reads FILLING... while it works, and is dimmed when the group has nothing loaded. The filled pads share the source's audio, so a fill costs no memory. A source nobody has trimmed starts 2 ms before its sound, so the notes are tight. Default MIDI: CC 86.

The status line says what happened (Auto-Fill: group 2 is now C..B chromatic ...) or why not (Auto-Fill: load a sample into a pad of group 2 first).

TONEAUTO-TONE

On (the default): AUTO-FILL tunes every pad to its note, pad 1 = C up to pad 12 = B, so the group plays a real chromatic octave. Off: every pad plays the sound at its own pitch: twelve copies of the same hit, good for drums. Right-click for MIDI Learn.

CUTAUTO-CUT and GATE

For one recording that holds several separate sounds (hits with quiet between them). With AUTO-CUT on, AUTO-FILL (and a MIC-REC take with AUTO-FILL lit) cuts the recording where it rises above the GATE: pad 1 gets the first sound, pad 2 the second, and so on. Fewer than 12 sounds repeat around the group; more become further round-robin takes, up to 60.

  • GATE: −60 to −6 dB under the recording's loudest moment (default −30 dB). Lower finds quieter sounds too. It is greyed while AUTO-CUT is off; with AUTO-CUT on it shows how many sounds it finds now (7 cuts).
  • With AUTO-TONE on, each sound is measured and moved (a tritone at most) to its pad's note.
  • Nothing is written to disk: every pad is a START / END slice of the one recording, still editable. Change the GATE and fill again to cut again.
RECMIC-REC

Records K-Sampler's side-chain input, called Rec In (route a microphone or any track to it in the host), straight into a pad, in either mode. Press MIC-REC so it lights: the status line explains it.

  • Hold a pad with the mouse, or hold a key on the Kadabra: the pad turns red and reads RECORDING, the button shows REC 1.2s with a red dot and a level bar. Let go: the take ends.
  • A short tap (under 0.15 s), or any note in a 1-SHOT bank, lets the take run on until the input has been quiet for half a second. Hitting the pad again, switching MIC-REC off, or 30 seconds also end it.
  • The take is saved as a 24-bit WAV in the Recordings folder (g01_p05_<number>.wav), with the quiet at its end trimmed, and goes into take 1, layer 1 of that pad, starting where the sound begins.
  • With AUTO-FILL lit, the take fills its group at once; with AUTO-CUT too, it is cut into the group's pads.
  • While MIC-REC is armed, notes record instead of playing. Default MIDI: CC 87.

MIC-REC: nothing usable recorded (is the side-chain input connected?) means no sound reached Rec In: check the host's routing.

QHow do I turn one sample into a playable octave?
  1. Click the group button you want to fill.
  2. Load the sample into any pad of that group.
  3. Check AUTO-TONE is lit (it is by default) and AUTO-CUT is not.
  4. Press AUTO-FILL: the group is filled C to B, every pad tuned to its note.
  5. Press AUTO-FILL again to stop it refilling when you load a new sample. Press SAVE.
QHow do I cut one recording of many hits into pads?
  1. Load the recording (hits with quiet between them) into a pad of an empty group.
  2. Press AUTO-CUT: the GATE wakes up and shows how many cuts it finds.
  3. Drag GATE until the count matches your hits.
  4. Switch AUTO-TONE off for drums (each hit at its own pitch), on for notes.
  5. Press AUTO-FILL. To cut again with another GATE, right-click the pad and choose Auto-Fill the Group with This Pad.
QHow do I record a microphone into a pad?
  1. In the host, send the microphone to K-Sampler's side-chain input, Rec In (in K-Player, see the next section).
  2. Press MIC-REC so it lights.
  3. Hold a pad (mouse or Kadabra key) and make the sound: the pad reads RECORDING.
  4. Let go: the take is saved and goes into that pad. Or tap the pad once and play: it stops when the input goes quiet.
  5. Press MIC-REC again so notes play again.
Drag & dropMove sounds between pads, groups, takes and layers without losing one
RULEOne rule, and a label that tells you first

Where you drop decides. Onto something loaded: the two swap (orange). Onto something empty: the sound is copied there and also stays where it was (blue); a copy uses no extra memory. A cell whose file is missing counts as loaded, so it is swapped, never written over. A label follows the mouse: → copy ... into ... or ⇄ swap ... with .... Nothing is ever lost.

  • While dragging, hover a group button to bring that group up.
  • While dragging a take or a layer, hover a pad and its own boxes come up in the Sample Editor, so you can drop on one of them.
Drag ...... ontoResult
a padanother pad, in any groupthe whole pads swap, or copy into an empty one: takes, layers, edits, envelope and the pad's row
a group buttonanother group buttonall 12 pads and the group's envelope swap, or copy into an empty group
a ROUND ROBIN boxanother take box, of this pad or anotherthe whole take (every layer) swaps, or copies into a free take
a ROUND ROBIN boxa pad in the gridcopied into that pad's next free take; a full pad says so
a VELOCITY boxanother layer box, of any padthe layer moves with every take it has: swap when in use, copy when free
a VELOCITY boxa pad in the gridlands in that pad's layer of the same number
a take onto a layer box, or a layer onto a take boxthe other rowone cell moves across: RR 3 dropped on VEL 5 puts its sample in layer 5 of the same take
QHow do I copy or move a pad to another group?
  1. Press and hold the pad (it sounds; that is fine).
  2. Drag it onto the group button you want: that group comes up.
  3. Drop it on a pad. Onto an empty pad it is copied (blue); onto a loaded pad the two swap (orange).
  4. To move instead of copy, right-click the original pad and choose Clear Pad.
QHow do I give another pad one of this pad's takes?
  1. Click the pad that has the take.
  2. Press its ROUND ROBIN box and start dragging.
  3. Drop it on another pad in the grid (hover a group button on the way to reach another group).
  4. It becomes that pad's next free take and stays on the first pad too.
  5. To drop on a particular take, hover the pad, then drop on one of its ROUND ROBIN boxes.
MIDINotes, how a note picks its sound, pitch bend, program change, MIDI Learn and the CC map
NOTENotes and note-off

Note n plays pad n (0–127) and brings its group up. A note-off stops the pad (RELEASE 0), fades it (a RELEASE time), or does nothing (1-SHOT); under a beat repeat the last pass always plays out.

A note-on for a key that is still down, within 0.3 s of the last one, is ignored: some controllers keep sending note-ons while a pad is pressed, and the sound would restart every few milliseconds. The status line's monitor shows it: note 36 ON (x3 repeats dropped).

PICKHow a note picks its sound
  1. The pad takes its next loaded take (1, 2, 3 ... and round again), so repeated notes alternate.
  2. In that take, the note's velocity picks the layer (the zones are in the Sample Editor's VELOCITY card). If the take lacks that layer, its nearest one plays.
  3. The VEL fader then decides how much the velocity also changes the level.
BENDPitch bend

The pitch wheel bends everything that sounds, notes already ringing too, over the bend range: 2 semitones by default, set from the PITCH fader's right-click menu (Pitch bend range: 2 st ▸ 1 to 24 semitones). The PITCH fader shows where the wheel stands. At rest it changes nothing.

PCProgram change chooses the bank

A MIDI bank is a folder, a program is a bank in it. Bank select (CC 0 or CC 32, whichever is not zero) chooses the folder: 0 = Factory (also when no bank select was ever sent), 1 = User 1, 2 = your next bank folder, and so on, A to Z. The program number is the bank's place in that folder, A to Z, counting from 0: the BANK menu writes the number beside every bank, so you can read a set list off it before a show.

Bank select 0, programFactory bank (with the seven factory banks installed)
0Acoustic Drums
1Electric Piano
2Electronic Drumkit
3Grand Piano
4Guitar
5Handpan
6Percussion
  • The music carries on through the change, in either mode, and nothing asks about unsaved work.
  • The BANK box then shows MIDI bank 0 · program 3 under the name.
  • A number nothing answers to changes nothing and says why: program 9: the presets of Factory stop at 6, or bank 3: there is no such bank folder (you have 2).
HOSTBanks as the host's presets

K-Sampler tells the host its banks as one preset list called Banks: the factory banks A to Z, then each of your bank folders in order. A bank whose name already appears earlier is marked with its folder, for example Guitar (User 1). Picking a preset from the host's own menu loads that bank. The list is read again whenever the bank changes or a Save As adds one.

LEARNMIDI Learn and Choose MIDI CC
  • MIDI Learn: right-click a control and choose MIDI Learn. The status line reads MIDI LEARN: move a knob or fader on your controller for Reverb Send (click anywhere to cancel). The next CC that arrives takes it: MIDI CC 21 -> Reverb Send.
  • Choose MIDI CC: pick the number from a list in groups of 16 (CC 16 - 31 ▸ CC 21). Each number shows what it drives now (now: Level). Choosing one gives the control that CC only; None takes it away.
  • One CC moves one control. The menu shows the current one: MIDI Learn (now CC 21).
  • Learnable: VOICES, SELECT, LEVEL, VEL, the group buttons, BEAT REPEAT (with its other mode, a hold per division and an OFF button), SYNC / FREE, POSITION, REVERSE, the GLOBAL envelope, the six send sliders, the AMP model, pickup, DRIVE and TONE, the EQ switch and its points (and the notch's Q and switch), AUTO-FILL, AUTO-TONE, AUTO-CUT, GATE, MIC-REC, the PITCH fader (Sample Pitch) and the bend range.
  • The map is kept in midi-learn.txt for new K-Samplers, and inside each host project for that project.
  • For 2.5 s after a CC moves something, the status line shows it: CC 21 → Reverb Send.
CCThe CCs a new K-Sampler knows
CCControlNotes
40 – 51Beat repeat hold: 4, 2, 1, 1/2, 1/4, 3/16, 1/8, 1/12, 1/16, 1/24, 1/32, 1/64active while the value is 64 or more
86AUTO-FILL64 or more = on
87MIC-REC64 or more = armed
89Beat repeat OFF
110Groupthe value runs from group 1 to group 11
112DELAY send0 – 100 %
113REVERB send0 – 100 %
0 / 32Bank selectalways reaches the banks, whatever else is learned

These are the same numbers K-Player uses for its pads. Change any of them with MIDI Learn. Every control is also a host parameter (Level, Voices, Beat Repeat, Delay Send, Reverb Send, Attack, Amp, EQ High-pass ...), so you can automate it in a DAW.

QHow do I switch banks with a program change?
  1. Open the BANK menu and read the bank's number under Factory (bank select 0) or User 1 (bank select 1).
  2. Send bank select (CC 0 or CC 32) with the folder's number first: 0 for Factory, 1 for User 1. With no bank select ever sent, K-Sampler counts in Factory.
  3. Send the program change with that number on K-Sampler's MIDI channel (from the Kadabra: the Sounder's Thumb 2 combis).
  4. The bank loads while the music carries on, and the box shows MIDI bank 0 · program 3.
QHow do I control a K-Sampler knob from the Kadabra?
  1. Right-click the control in K-Sampler, for example REVERB.
  2. Choose MIDI Learn: the control blinks LEARN.
  3. On the Kadabra, use a control that sends a CC, for example an FXer combi and the Keyboard.
  4. The status line says MIDI CC 21 -> Reverb Send and the control shows CC21.
  5. Or choose Choose MIDI CC and pick the combi's CC number from the list.
With K-Player and Kadabra OSWhere it sits in K-Player, what it records there, and what each Shape sends it
DECKIn K-Player's DJ-DECK page
  • Each deck has a K-SAMPLER box. K-Player loads K-Sampler into an empty box by itself, at start, on load and on a new session. Click the box to open K-Sampler's window.
  • The notes and program changes on the deck's MIDI channel go to that K-Sampler.
  • MIC-REC there records the deck's audio input, the one chosen on the deck's strip on the PLAYER page.
  • K-Player's MASTER BPM is the tempo K-Sampler's beat repeat follows.
CHANOn a K-Player channel

On the PLAYER page, load K-Sampler into a MIDI channel's instrument box. Because K-Sampler takes audio, an IN chip appears beside the box: click it and choose an input in REC IN (into the instrument). That input goes into K-Sampler only (for MIC-REC) and is never heard through the channel. Right-click the chip to take it away.

K-Player's THE SAME LANGUAGE: ON setting keeps K-Sampler in K-Player's language.

SHAPEThe Sampler shape and K-Sampler's groups

In the Sampler shape (Shape 2), Combis 1–10 of the Main section move the Kadabra's keyboard to a range of notes. Since note n plays pad n, each range is two K-Sampler groups (its top C is pad 1 of the next group):

CombiNotesK-Sampler groups
1 (−2)0 – 241 and 2
2 (−1)12 – 362 and 3
3 (0)24 – 483 and 4
4 (1)36 – 604 and 5
5 (2)48 – 725 and 6
6 (3)60 – 846 and 7
7 (4)72 – 967 and 8
8 (5)84 – 1088 and 9
9 (6)96 – 1209 and 10
10 (7)108 – 12710 and 11

Thumb 2 (Set Key) of the Sampler shape moves the tone the keyboard starts on. Fill a group with AUTO-FILL and AUTO-TONE and it plays in tune with these octaves.

KOSWhat other Shapes do with it
  • Sounder (Shape 9), Thumb 2 Change Sound: each combi sends a program change on the Sound's MIDI channel, and K-Sampler loads that bank (with no bank select, a factory bank).
  • FXer (Shape 8): its combis send CCs, so any K-Sampler control you MIDI-learn can be played from it.
  • The Kadabra sends note-ons again while a pad is held; K-Sampler ignores those repeats, so the sound does not restart.
  • Turn on SELECT: NOTE and the Sample Editor shows whatever pad you play on the Kadabra.

QHow do I record into K-Sampler inside K-Player?
  1. On a deck: choose the audio input on that deck's strip on K-Player's PLAYER page. K-Sampler in the deck's K-SAMPLER box hears it.
  2. On a MIDI channel: click the IN chip beside the K-Sampler box and choose the input.
  3. Open K-Sampler (click its box) and press MIC-REC.
  4. Hold a pad, or a key on the Kadabra, while you play; let go to keep the take.
Factory banksThe seven banks that come with K-Sampler
BANKSThe factory set

Under BANK ▸ Factory, numbered 0–6 for program change. They are read-only: SAVE makes your own copy (see SAVE). Everything in them stays editable in the Sample Editor.

#BankWhat is in it
0Acoustic DrumsA drum kit (kicks, snares, rims, hi-hats, crashes, rides ...) on 128 pads, up to 8 velocity layers and 2 takes. 1-SHOT; VEL off (the layers carry the loudness); 32 voices.
1Electric Piano96 keys (groups 2–9), up to 4 velocity layers. A short release; VEL 98 %; 48 voices.
2Electronic DrumkitElectronic kicks, snares, hi-hats and digital drums on 132 pads. 1-SHOT; 32 voices.
3Grand Piano108 keys (groups 2–10), up to 4 velocity layers. A 333 ms release; VEL 98 %; 48 voices.
4GuitarSingle notes in three styles: groups 1–3 short plucks, groups 4–8 long fingerstyle, groups 9–11 octaves. 3 takes per pad (its own recording and the semitone below and above, retuned). A 1.65 s release; VEL 60 %; 32 voices. Try it through the AMP.
5HandpanEvery group a sound family, every pad its own note (pad 1 = C ... pad 12 = B), up to 5 takes × 4 velocity layers, tuned and levelled cell by cell. 1-SHOT; VEL 50 %; 32 voices.
6PercussionClicks, rims, hits, shakers, congas and more on 128 pads. 1-SHOT; 32 voices.

The Grand Piano, Electric Piano, Acoustic Drums, Electronic Drumkit and Percussion banks were recorded key by key from the earlier Kadabra sampler instruments.

The Grand Piano bank, group 5 (notes 48–59): every key shows “4 vel”, VOICES reads 48 and RELEASE 333 ms.
COUNTWhat each factory bank holds

Counted from the seven factory banks as they ship (takes = round-robin takes, layers = velocity layers per take):

#BankPads (MIDI notes)Takes · layersSample files
0Acoustic Drums128 (notes 0–127)1 take (2 on six pads of group 6) · 1 to 8 layers284 FLAC · 85 MB
1Electric Piano96 (notes 12–107, groups 2–9)1 take · 4 layers (one key has 3)359 FLAC · 177 MB
2Electronic Drumkitall 132 (notes 0–127, and the four pads with no note)1 take · 1 layer94 (78 FLAC, 16 WAV) · 3 MB
3Grand Piano108 (notes 12–119, groups 2–10)1 take · 4 layers (one key has 3)347 FLAC · 286 MB
4Guitarall 1323 takes (2 on three pads) · 1 layer123 WAV · 295 MB
5Handpanall 1325 takes · 1 to 4 layers292 WAV · 278 MB
6Percussion128 (notes 0–127)1 take · 1 layer97 FLAC · 11 MB

All seven: 1,596 sample files, about 1.1 GB. The last four pads of group 11 have no MIDI note: in the banks that fill them, play them with the mouse.

BankRELEASEVELVOICESSends
Acoustic Drums1-SHOToff32DELAY 1 % (TIME 239 ms, FEEDBACK 29 %)
Electric Piano67 ms98 %48none
Electronic Drumkit1-SHOT100 %32none
Grand Piano333 ms98 %48none
Guitar1.65 s60 %32none
Handpan1-SHOT50 %32none
Percussion1-SHOT100 %32DELAY 6 % (TIME 77 ms, FEEDBACK 5 %)

In every factory bank LEVEL reads -0.9 dB, REVERB is 0 %, the AMP is Off, the EQ is off, ATTACK and DECAY are 0 and SUSTAIN 100 %, and no group or pad has its own envelope. Change any of it and press SAVE to keep it in your own copy.

INSTWhere the factory banks install, and choosing them

Each bank is a folder of its own, its .ksbank file beside a samples folder:

Folder
Mac/Library/Application Support/Tribal-Tools/K-Sampler/Factory/<bank>/
WindowsC:\ProgramData\Tribal-Tools\K-Sampler\Factory\<bank>\
  • Mac installer: the plug-in, K-Sampler plug-in (VST3), is always installed; every bank is its own choice, <bank> (sample bank), and all are ticked. Click Customize to leave some out; each choice says how many samples and megabytes it has.
  • Windows setup: choose K-Sampler and every factory bank, K-Sampler only, or Choose the banks and tick the ones you want. Its last page offers Show the factory banks folder.
  • In K-Sampler, BANK ▸ Factory lists the banks that are installed, A to Z, and BANK ▸ Open Factory Banks Folder opens the folder. With no factory bank installed the menu shows a greyed Factory Banks: none installed.
  • The program numbers are each bank's place in that list: 0–6 with all seven. Leave one out and the ones after it move up (without Electric Piano, Electronic Drumkit is program 1), so read the numbers in the BANK menu of the computer you play on.
  • SAVE never changes a factory bank: it makes your own copy in User 1 (see SAVE).
QHow do I install only some of the factory banks?
  1. On a Mac, open the K-Sampler DMG and double-click the installer. On Windows, run K-Sampler's setup.
  2. Mac: at Installation Type, click Customize. Windows: choose Choose the banks.
  3. Untick the banks you do not want. The plug-in itself is always installed.
  4. Finish the installation. BANK ▸ Factory now lists only those banks, numbered from 0, A to Z.
  5. To add a bank later, run the installer again the same way and tick that bank.
QHow do I get a factory bank back the way it came?
  1. Click the BANK box and point to Factory.
  2. Click the same bank again (it is ticked).
  3. In EDIT MODE with unsaved changes, choose Discard the changes and load it. In PERFORM MODE it loads at once.
  4. The bank is back exactly as it shipped: the factory files are never changed. A copy you saved is still under BANK ▸ User 1.
Files, saving & troubleshootingWhere everything lives, what is saved where, and what the status line tells you
DIRSFolders
WhatMacWindows
The plug-in/Library/Audio/Plug-Ins/VST3/K-Sampler/K-Sampler.vst3C:\Program Files\Common Files\VST3\K-Sampler.vst3
Factory banks/Library/Application Support/Tribal-Tools/K-Sampler/FactoryC:\ProgramData\Tribal-Tools\K-Sampler\Factory
Everything of yours~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Sampler<your Music folder>\Tribal-Tools\K-Sampler

Inside your folder:

PathWhat
Banks/User 1/<name>/<name>.ksbank + samples/Your banks. Every folder in Banks is one MIDI bank (User 1 = bank select 1); User 1 is made for you.
Recordings/MIC-REC takes.
midi-learn.txtThe MIDI Learn map for new K-Samplers.
settings.txtThe language and PITCH FREE / SNAP.

K-Player's own folder, ~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Player, sits beside it.

SAVEDWhat is saved where
WhereWhat
The bank (.ksbank)Its name; every cell (file, START / END, fades, PITCH, GAIN, LOOP, tone); group and pad envelopes; every pad's row (LEVEL, DLY SEND, RVB SEND, DE-CLICK); LEVEL, VEL, VOICES, 1-SHOT; the global envelope; DELAY and REVERB with their settings; the AMP; the EQ.
The host project (K-Player session, DAW song)All of the bank above and its file name, plus the beat repeat setting, SYNC / FREE and its time, REVERSE, AUTO-TONE, AUTO-CUT, GATE, SELECT, the bend range, the group on screen, the cell in the editor, PERFORM / EDIT MODE and the MIDI Learn map. A project opens exactly as it was, even with an unsaved bank.
settings.txt, midi-learn.txtFor every K-Sampler on the computer: language, PITCH FREE / SNAP, and the MIDI map a new K-Sampler starts with.

A bank is a plain text file. Samples inside its folder are named relative to it, so a bank folder can be moved, zipped or copied between a Mac and Windows.

FIXTroubleshooting
You seeWhat to do
No soundCheck the pad is loaded (blue-grey), LEVEL is up, MIC-REC is not lit (armed, notes record instead of playing) and the OUT meter moves. In K-Player, check the channel's MIDI channel and that its bypass is off.
No bank loaded: BANK > Factory Banks has the banks that came with K-SamplerLoad one from BANK ▸ Factory.
BEAT REPEAT reads no tempoThe host sends no tempo. In K-Player the MASTER BPM is always there; elsewhere start the host's transport, or press SYNC for FREE.
bank "...": 120 layers loaded, 9 missing (first: ...)Sample files were moved or deleted. K-Sampler already looks for them in its bank folders. Next time save with Save As... (copies the samples in) so the bank keeps its own copies.
(read-only: SAVE makes your own copy), or a path in the Factory folder, on the right of the status lineIt is a factory bank. Press SAVE to make your copy.
MIC-REC: nothing usable recorded (is the side-chain input connected?)Nothing reached Rec In: route the microphone to K-Sampler's side-chain input (in K-Player: the deck's audio input, or the IN chip).
Auto-Fill: load a sample into a pad of group 2 firstThe group on screen is empty: load a sample first.
Auto-Cut: nothing in pad 1 rises above the -30 dB gateDrag GATE lower (towards −60 dB) and fill again.
program 9: the presets of Factory stop at 6That number does not exist in the bank folder chosen by bank select. Read the numbers in the BANK menu.
cannot make ... -- SAVE will ask where to saveK-Sampler could not create its User 1 folder; SAVE then asks you where to save.
A greyed Factory Banks: none installed in the BANK menu, or a factory bank is missingThose banks were not installed. Run the K-Sampler installer again and tick them (Mac: Customize; Windows: Choose the banks).
Kadabra Ecosystem · VST3 instrument

K-Synth

Kadabra's synthesizer: wavetables and the audio input as sound, a step sequencer inside the sound, and the Kadabra's nine motion sensors on every knob.

K-Synth is the synthesizer of the Kadabra Ecosystem, beside K-Sampler and with the same look. Its sound comes from wavetables (its 48 own tables, Serum and Surge files, any audio file) and from the audio input: a microphone, a deck or another instrument can be played by every voice, or speak through a vocoder.
It is made to be played from the Kadabra: the nine motion sensors arrive as the nine Micros (CC 21 – 29), every control can be learned to a MIDI CC, and a bank select plus a program change picks any of its 2072 factory presets in sixteen groups (K-Bass … K-Polysynths).
It ends in a fixed safety stage that no preset can switch off: a true-peak limiter at −0.3 dBTP, a guard against broken numbers and a load guard, so nothing it does can hurt a speaker. It adds only 0.5 ms of latency.
• Version documented: K-Synth 0.3.9. Window 1360 × 792. macOS VST3, installed in /Library/Audio/Plug-Ins/VST3.
• Three pages: SYNTH, FX and TABLE (a wavetable editor); TAB moves between them.
Back to top
At a glanceThe window, the three pages, the rules every control follows, and where K-Synth runs
MAPThe window, area by area (SYNTH page)

Everything sits on one screen, in four rows. Top to bottom, left to right:

AreaWhat lives there
Top barTRIBAL TOOLS logo (language menu) · K-SYNTH and its version · the set and group field (FACTORY K-Bass) · PRESET with the ◀ ▶ arrows · SAVE AS / SAVE · VOICES · POLY / MONO / LEGATO · the page tabs SYNTH, FX, TABLE · IN and OUT meters · the host tempo and how many voices sound.
Left columnThe KADABRA drawing, the master LEVEL fader and the thin VEL fader (the arrow between their titles: VEL feeds LEVEL).
Row 1OSC with its tabs A B C · SUB · NOISE · AUDIO IN.
Row 2FILTER · ENV 1 · ENV 2.
Row 3LFO 1 · LFO 2 · SHIMMER, a third of the row each.
Row 4MOD (its chips and the list of routes, four at a time) · MICROS (nine cells) · SAFETY.
Right edgeThe piano roll (A0 – C8): the notes playing light up, a click plays one.
Status lineLeft: what the control under the mouse does, a message, or the MIDI LEARN prompt. Right: the preset's file (or factory preset).
PAGESThe three pages

The tabs in the top bar switch the middle of the window; the top bar, the left column and the piano roll stay.

TabWhat it holds
SYNTHThe oscillators (OSC A, B and C), sub and noise, the audio input, filter, envelopes, LFOs, SHIMMER, MOD (the routes, four at a time), the nine Micros and SAFETY.
FXSTEP-SEQ (the step sequencer) and the EQ, the effects after the voices (STEREO, WARMTH, GLUE, PHASER, VOCODER), MOD with every source as a chip (eight routes at a time), DELAY, REVERB, CHORUS and the VOICE extras.
TABLEThe wavetable editor: draw, shape the harmonics, write a formula, process and morph the cycles, then USE ON OSC.
RULESRules every control follows
  • Drag a knob up or down (about 200 px for its whole range); drag a slider sideways.
  • Double-click any knob, slider or curve point = back to its default.
  • Right-click (or ctrl-click) a control = Reset to default, MIDI Learn and Choose MIDI CC (the 128 numbers in groups of sixteen, each showing what it drives now).
  • Scroll wheel over a knob steps it (one item for a list, 2 % otherwise); over the MOD list it scrolls the routes.
  • A small blue CCn beside a control = the CC that drives it; a blinking red LEARN = it waits for one.
  • The help line (the status line at the bottom) explains whatever is under the mouse, with its value.
  • Keys: TAB goes to the next page and SHIFT+TAB back; ESC lets the chosen mod source go. Click the window first so it has the keyboard; every other key goes on to the host.
HOSTWhere K-Synth runs
  • K-Player, PLAYER page: in the Instrument box of any MIDI channel. Its audio input is the channel's IN chip beside that box (see K-Synth with K-Player and Kadabra OS).
  • Any VST3 host on the Mac (Ableton Live, Bitwig, Cubase, Reaper …): it shows every preset in its preset list, and its audio input is a side-chain input called Audio In.

It listens on every MIDI channel; the host (K-Player's MIDI IN) decides which channel reaches it. See

PATHHow the sound flows
StageWhat happens
Each voiceOSC A and OSC B (wavetables with unison), OSC C (octaves of the note), SUB, NOISE and the audio input → FILTER (drive in front) → the voice's LOW CUT → ENV 1 (loudness) × velocity.
After the voicesVOCODER → WARMTH → PHASER → CHORUS → the delay and reverb sends → EQ → GLUE → STEREO.
Last, alwaysSAFETY: broken-number guard, DC blocker, load guard, true-peak limiter (−0.3 dBTP), clip guard, a 50 ms fade-in at start.

Every addition is off by default and costs nothing while off. Every knob glides, so a jump never clicks; changing preset under a held note morphs into the new sound in about 15 ms.

VIEWThe SYNTH page with OSC A chosen
The SYNTH page, OSC A chosen: the three oscillators' cycles drawn over each other at the left, A's controls at the right.
Top barSet and group, PRESET, the arrows, SAVE, VOICES, play mode, pages, meters, tempo, language
SETThe set and group field

Shows the set in small letters (FACTORY in blue, USER 1, USER 2 … in orange) and the group of the sound playing (K-Bass). Under it, MIDI: CC 0 = 0, CC 32 = 0: the two MIDI numbers that reach this group. Click it to open the PRESETS panel and browse every set and group.

PRESETPRESET and its menu

The name of the sound playing: blue for a Factory preset, orange for your own. An orange dot means it has changed since it was loaded or saved. Under it: program 3 of 152 · factory (or yours). Click for the menu:

ItemWhat it does
1 … n and the namesThe presets of this group in this set; the one playing is ticked. Click one to play it.
Save: replace …Only for your own preset: writes the sound over its file.
Save As… (choose the set, the group and the name)Opens the PRESETS panel to save.
Browse every set and group…Opens the PRESETS panel to load.
Init presetA plain starting sound: every control at its default, OSC A on the Basic Shapes table, the filter open, the rest off.
Open the Banks folderShows ~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Synth/Banks in the Finder.
STEPThe preset arrows

◀ plays the preset before this one and ▶ the next one, in the same set and group, going round at the ends. From a sound that is not in the list (Init, a file from elsewhere), ▶ plays the group's first preset and ◀ its last.

SAVESAVE AS / SAVE

The button turns orange when the sound has changed. It reads SAVE AS when the sound came from the Factory, from Init, or was never saved: a click opens the PRESETS panel to save it as your own. The Factory is never written over. On your own preset it reads SAVE, and a click offers Save: replace User 1 / K-Bass / My Bass or Save As….

VOICESVOICES

How many notes sound at once. Click for the list: 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32, 48 (default 16). One note more takes over the oldest, faded out in 3 ms, never cut. A preset can bring its own number.

MODEPOLY / MONO / LEGATO

Click for the list; it turns green when it is not POLY. Right-click = the control menu (MIDI learnable).

  • POLY: chords.
  • MONO: one note; each key restarts it.
  • LEGATO: one note; a key played while another is held moves it without a restart.

Glide (0 – 2000 ms, default 0) and Bend Range (0 – 24 semitones, default 2) have no knob in the window: they are host parameters, saved in the preset. In MONO and LEGATO a glide slides only between connected notes; in POLY it slides from the last note.

METERIN, OUT, tempo and voices

IN: the audio input's level. OUT: the output, green below −6 dB, yellow up to 0 dB, red above. A red FEEDBACK under IN means the input is feeding back and has been turned down. At the right: the host's tempo (122.0 BPM, or no tempo) and how many voices sound now (3 voices).

TABThe page tabs and the TAB key

The three tabs SYNTH, FX and TABLE choose the page; the one shown is lit. On the keyboard, TAB goes to the next page (SYNTH → FX → TABLE → SYNTH) and SHIFT+TAB to the one before. The window takes the keyboard when you click in it; keys other than TAB and ESC go on to the host. With a mod source chosen, a page change shows that source's lines on the new page.

QHow do I change pages from the keyboard?
  1. Click anywhere in the K-Synth window, so it has the keyboard.
  2. Press TAB for the next page: SYNTH, then FX, then TABLE, then SYNTH again.
  3. Press SHIFT+TAB to go back one page.
LOGOThe logo menu: version, language, folder

Click the TRIBAL TOOLS logo: the version line, Language ▸ and Open the K-Synth folder. Thirteen languages: English, עברית, العربية, Français, Español, Português, हिन्दी, 中文, 한국어, Українська, Slovenčina, Italiano, Ελληνικά. The choice is kept for every K-Synth on this computer. K-Synth's own names (STEP-SEQ, SHIMMER, WARP, OSC, LFO, ENV, MOD, the effects), the units and the preset names stay in English. Hebrew and Arabic read right to left inside each line; the layout stays as it is.

The same window in Hebrew: the words change, the feature names stay English.
QHow do I change K-Synth's language?
  1. Click the TRIBAL TOOLS logo at the top left.
  2. Open Language and pick your language.
  3. Every K-Synth window on this computer now speaks it.
QHow do I go through the presets one by one?
  1. Pick a group: click the set and group field, choose FACTORY and a group (say K-Pads), and click a preset.
  2. Press ▶ beside the preset name for the next one, ◀ for the one before.
  3. At the end of the group it goes round to the start.
Presets: the PRESETS panel and the K banksSets, groups and names; saving your own; the sixteen factory groups
PANELThe PRESETS panel

A preset lives in a SET, in a GROUP inside it, under its NAME. The panel opens over the dimmed window: titled PRESETS to load (from the set and group field, or Browse every set and group…), or SAVE AS to save.

ColumnWhat it shows
SETFACTORY (blue; read-only while saving), USER 1, USER 2 … (orange), each with how many presets it holds, and + NEW SET.
GROUPThe sixteen K groups, then your own groups in that set, each with its count and its CC 0 = n, and + NEW GROUP in a User set. The wheel scrolls it.
PRESETS (loading)The group's presets, numbered: click plays one and the panel stays open, double-click plays it and closes. The wheel scrolls.
NAME (saving)The name, typed in place (Return saves, Escape closes), above the presets already in that group: click one to take its name (the button then says REPLACE, in orange).
The footerLoading: Factory / K-Bass: 152 presets · MIDI: CC 32 = 0, CC 0 = 0. Saving: saves as ~/Music/… or REPLACES …. Buttons: FOLDER (the group's folder in the Finder), CANCEL and SAVE / REPLACE when saving, CLOSE when loading.

A click outside the panel, or on its ✕, closes it. A preset's name may hold any letters except / \ : (they become dashes), up to 64 characters.

QHow do I save my own version of a factory preset?
  1. Change the sound as you like (the button turns orange).
  2. Press SAVE AS.
  3. In SET click USER 1 (or another User set).
  4. In GROUP click the group it belongs to.
  5. Type the name in NAME.
  6. Press SAVE (or Return). It now plays in orange, as yours.
QHow do I update my own preset after changing it?
  1. Play your own preset (its name is orange) and change it.
  2. Press SAVE.
  3. Choose Save: replace User 1 / … / its name.
QHow do I make a new group (or a new set) for my presets?
  1. Open the PRESETS panel (click the set and group field, or press SAVE AS).
  2. For a new set: click + NEW SET (it becomes USER 2, USER 3 …).
  3. For a new group: click a User set, then + NEW GROUP and type its name.
  4. The status line says its MIDI number: group My Leads in User 1: CC 0 = 16.
OWNYour own groups

A group you make is a folder in that set. Your groups from every User set together, sorted A … Z, are numbered after the sixteen K groups: the first is CC 0 = 16, then 17 and on. So K-Player and the Kadabra reach them by bank select like any other group. A folder added in the Finder shows up the next time the panel opens.

BANKSThe sixteen K groups (the Factory)

2072 factory presets, 128 in each group (K-Bass 152). They are installed as files in /Library/Application Support/Tribal-Tools/K-Synth/Factory/<group>/, and a copy is inside the plug-in. Every one names its six Micros (1 – 6) and where they rest. In every group: CC 21 – 23 swing the sound around how it was designed, CC 24 brings STEP-SEQ in, CC 25 morphs it, CC 26 makes it bloom. Micros 7 – 9 (CC 27 – 29) are left free in every factory preset. Nothing in the Factory moves the pitch, so every sound stays in tune whatever the Micros do.

CC 0GroupPresetsGood to know
0K-Bass152Programs 129 – 152 are 24 dry EDM basses (no reverb or echo, tight, a resonant low end at 60 – 80 Hz), made for C1 – C2.
1K-Pads128
2K-Leads128
3K-Plucks128
4K-Keys128
5K-Bells128
6K-Ambients128
7K-Percussion128
8K-FX128
9K-Vocoder128The VOCODER is on: they need a voice on the audio input, and are silent without one.
10K-Winds128
11K-Intelligent128
12K-Heavy-Duty128
13K-Splits128Two sounds across the keyboard, by the SPLIT key.
14K-Audio FX128AUDIO IN is on FX: they are effects for the audio input, no note needed.
15K-Polysynths128

The Factory is read-only. CC 32 picks the set: 0 = Factory, 1 = User 1, 2 = User 2 … A program change 0 – 127 then plays preset 1 – 128 of the group; K-Bass's 129 – 152 are chosen in the window or the host's list.

QHow do I choose a preset?
  1. Click the set and group field in the top bar.
  2. Click FACTORY (or one of your User sets).
  3. Click a group (say K-Leads).
  4. Click presets to hear them; double-click the one you want to play it and close the panel.
LEVEL, VEL and the piano rollThe two faders at the left, the keyboard at the right, and the split
LEVELLEVEL

A console fader for the voices' level into the effects: +6 dB at the top, 0 dB (the brighter mark: the preset as it was made), −6, −24, −60 dB just above the bottom, and off (−∞) at the bottom. Every factory preset opens at 0 dB; its own loudness is kept apart (hover LEVEL and the help line says it). Drag it; double-click = −1.9 dB (Init's level); right-click = the control menu. The value is under the fader.

VELVEL

How much the key velocity sets the loudness: off = every note as loud, 100 % = soft keys quiet. Default 50 %. The arrow between the titles (LEVEL ← VEL) says that VEL feeds LEVEL. The same control sits as a small VEL knob inside ENV 1.

PIANOThe piano roll

A keyboard standing at the right edge, A0 at the bottom to C8 at the top (C keys labelled). Every note K-Synth plays lights up, whoever plays it. Click a key to play it while the mouse is down: its left edge is soft, its right edge loud. Drag up or down for a glissando. Right-click a key for the split menu.

SPLITThe split on the piano roll

The SPLIT key divides the keyboard for the SPLIT mod source (−1 below it, +1 from it up): that is how one preset plays two sounds. It is always on the piano roll as an orange line with a tag (SPLIT C4): bright when a route uses SPLIT, when KEEP SPLIT is on, or while you set it; faint otherwise, so it can always be found.

  • Drag the line up or down.
  • Right-click a key: Split here: C4 and up are the upper half · Split at the next key you play (the tag blinks PLAY A KEY) · Keep this split for every preset (the tag turns solid orange).
  • The same key is the SPLIT knob in VOICE on the FX page (default C4).
QHow do I set where the keyboard splits?
  1. Play a K-Splits preset (or any preset with a SPLIT route): the split line on the piano roll turns bright orange.
  2. Right-click any key and choose Split at the next key you play.
  3. Play the key where the upper half should start, on the Kadabra or with the mouse.
  4. Or drag the orange line to that key.
QHow do I keep my split when I change presets?
  1. Right-click a key on the piano roll.
  2. Choose Keep this split for every preset: the split tag turns solid orange.
  3. Change presets: the split stays. Choose it again to let each preset bring its own split.
OSC A · B · CTwo wavetable oscillators and STEP-SEQ's voice, in one section with a tab for each
TABSThe tabs and the cycles display

The tabs A (blue), B (violet) and C (coral) choose which oscillator the controls at the right show. The display at the left draws all three cycles over each other as they really play: the table at its POSITION, then both WARPs. The chosen one is bright, the others grey, one that is not heard fainter still. Its corner reads A cycle 4 / 32: the cycle POSITION is on, of how many.

TABLEThe wavetable and its menu

The box with the table's name (Rubber Bass). Click it for the list:

  • The 48 factory tables (below).
  • Load a wavetable file… (Serum .wav, Surge .wt, any .wav / .aiff / .flac): a Serum or Surge wavetable keeps its cycles; a plain file made of 2048-sample cycles is read as cycles; a short file is one cycle; a long recording gives its first 256 cycles.
  • Open the Wavetables folder (~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Synth/Wavetables).

A wavetable is a row of single cycles (up to 256); POSITION moves through them. A preset that uses a file remembers its path; if the file has gone, the status line says wavetable missing and OSC A plays Basic Shapes. OSC C's menu has the factory tables only.

OSCOSC A and OSC B controls
ControlRange · defaultWhat it does
SUPERon / off · offThe unison copies tuned unevenly, as in a supersaw (more motion); off: evenly.
WARP menu, WARP 2 menuten modes · BendHow each WARP reshapes the cycle (table below). WARP 2 works after WARP.
POSITION0 – 100 % · 0Where in the table it reads: 0 = the first cycle, 100 % = the last, blended between.
WARP, WARP 2−1.00 … +1.00 · 0How much each WARP reshapes the cycle; 0 = the cycle as it is.
UNISON1 – 8 · 1Copies of the oscillator for every note.
DETUNE0 – 100 ct · 12How far apart the copies are tuned: a few cents for chorus, many for a wide supersaw.
WIDTH0 – 100 % · 50 %How far the copies spread left and right.
BLEND0 – 100 % · 100 %The outer copies' level against the centre one.
OCT · SEMI · FINE−3 … +3 · −12 … +12 st · −100 … +100 ct · all 0Tuning in octaves, semitones and cents.
CRS−48 … +48 st · 0Coarse tuning, smooth (no steps): for sweeps, and as a mod target.
LEVEL0 – 100 % · A 100 %, B 0The oscillator's level in the mix.

UNISON, SUPER, the WARP modes, OSC B's mode, the sub's shape and octave, the noise colour, the drive type and the AUDIO IN mode are taken when a note starts: a change is heard from the next note. Everything else moves under a held note.

WARPThe ten WARP modes
ModeWhat it does to the cycle
BendBends the read through the cycle: it hurries through one part and lingers in the other (the sign of WARP picks which).
PWMTakes a shifted copy of the cycle away from itself: from a saw, a pulse whose width WARP sets.
MirrorReads the cycle forward, then back: its second half becomes a mirror image.
FoldWave-folding: the wave folds over when it grows, adding bright harmonics.
Input FMThe audio input bends the oscillator's phase (it listens even with AUDIO IN off).
EvenBlends in the octave-up read: even harmonics.
Phase DistA smooth phase curve, as the old CZ synths had.
SyncHard sync up to 8 times, its restart smoothed so it never steps.
WindowThe same read under a window: a moving formant.
DiodeAn uneven (asymmetric) saturating shape.

Modes that read faster use a darker copy of the table, so a warped high note does not alias.

OSC BOSC B: MIX, FM or RING

OSC B has everything A has, plus a mode list under its knobs and an FM knob (0 – 100 %, lit only in FM):

  • Mix (default): B is added to A.
  • FM B>A: B bends A's pitch; FM sets how strongly (bright, bell-like, then growling).
  • Ring: A multiplied by B (metallic).

In FM and RING, B shapes A even with B's LEVEL at 0.

OSC COSC C: STEP-SEQ's voice

A third wavetable oscillator that plays only whole octaves of the note, in STEP-SEQ's rhythm. All its controls are on the OSC section's C tab (its wavetable menu, and):

ControlRange · defaultWhat it does
PITCHStep-Seq / Fixed · Step-SeqStep-Seq: plays the octave cells of the STEP-SEQ steps. Fixed: stays on its own octave.
PLAYPulses / Legato · PulsesPulses: sounds in STEP-SEQ's steps. Legato: holds through them.
POSITION0 – 100 % · 0Where in its table it reads.
LEVEL0 – 100 % · 0Its level; with STEP-SEQ on it follows STEP-SEQ's AMOUNT (CC 24 usually brings it in).
OCT−2 … +3 · +1Its octave.
CRS−48 … +48 st · 0Coarse tuning.
PLACE0 – 100 % · 50 %Where it sits between left and right.
TABLESThe 48 factory wavetables
TablesNames
1 – 16Basic Shapes, Harmonic Stack, Pulse Width, Vowels, Drawbars, Bells, Octave Shimmer, Digital Steps, Phase Bend, Formant Sweep, Sync Sweep, Resonant Sweep, Hollow Reed, Crystal, Analog Saw, Grain
17 – 32Round Sine, Soft FM, FM Bells, Vowel Choir, Breath Pipe, Bowed, Glass Harmonics, Warm Body, Spectral Scan, Even Halo, Air Harmonics, Brass Formant, Clarinet, Plucked String, Sine Pairs, Additive Morph
33 – 48Saw Chain, Droop Pulse, Harmonic Comb, Ring Harmonics, Fold Sweep, Chebyshev, Spectral Glide, Vocal Window, Rubber Bass, Bit Shapes, Pluck Decay, Vowel Morph, FM Growl, Curved Saw, Hyper Pulse, Tape Organ

The last sixteen have features inside the cycle (a tooth, an edge, a formant, a fold) that move as POSITION scans through them.

QHow do I play my own wavetable file (Serum, Surge, a WAV)?
  1. On the SYNTH page, click the A (or B) tab of OSC.
  2. Click the wavetable box (its name).
  3. Choose Load a wavetable file… and pick the file.
  4. Turn POSITION to move through its cycles.
SUB · NOISE and AUDIO INWeight under the note, noise, drift, and the audio input as a sound
SUBSUB · NOISE
ControlRange · defaultWhat it does
Shape listSine, Triangle, Square · SineThe sub oscillator's wave: Sine is pure weight, Square hollow and buzzy.
OCT -1 / OCT -2click switches · −1The sub one or two octaves under the note.
SUB0 – 100 % · 0The sub's level.
NOISE0 – 100 % · 0The noise's level: breath, air, the chiff of an attack.
WHITE / PINKclick switches · WHITEWhite is bright hiss, pink softer and darker.
DRIFT0 – 100 % · 0A slow random wander of each note's pitch, like an old analog synth.
INPUTAUDIO IN: the input as the sound

K-Synth's audio input (a microphone, a deck, another instrument) can be played by every voice. Five buttons choose how:

ButtonWhat you hear
OFF (default)The oscillators alone (the WARP mode Input FM still listens).
THRUThe input, opened and filtered by each note: it sounds only while a key is held, through the note's filter and envelope.
PITCHEDThe input shifted to the note you play; ROOT is the input's own note (playing ROOT gives it unshifted).
RINGThe oscillators multiplied by the input.
FXThe input through the filter and STEP-SEQ as an effect, with no note needed (its octave layer: IN OCT and OCT MIX in VOICE on the FX page).

LEVEL 0 – 200 % (default 100 %): the input into the voices. ROOT C-1 … G9 (default C4). Under them: the IN meter and the feedback guard (feedback guard armed, tripped 0 times): when the input starts howling (a microphone hearing the speakers), it is turned down by 40 dB and the line turns red, FEEDBACK: the input is ducked, until it calms.

QHow do I play my voice (or any input) from the keys?
  1. Give K-Synth an input: in K-Player, click the IN chip beside the channel's Instrument box and choose the microphone's input (in another host: route it to the side-chain Audio In).
  2. In AUDIO IN, press PITCHED.
  3. Set ROOT to the note you sing.
  4. Sing and play keys: the input follows the notes. THRU instead gates it by the keys without shifting.
QHow do I use K-Synth as an effect on an input?
  1. Feed it the input (the IN chip in K-Player).
  2. Open the set and group field, choose FACTORY ▸ K-Audio FX and pick a preset, or press FX in AUDIO IN yourself.
  3. No key is needed: the input runs through the filter, STEP-SEQ and the effects.
FILTER, ENV 1 and ENV 2Nine filter kinds with drive in front; two envelopes you drag as curves
FILTThe nine filter kinds
ButtonWhat it does
LOW (default)Low-pass, 12 dB: the highs above the cutoff fall away.
BANDOnly a band around the cutoff.
HIGHHigh-pass: the lows below the cutoff fall away.
NOTCHA gap at the cutoff; the rest goes through.
LADDERA ladder filter, 24 dB, saturating; RESO up to self-oscillation.
VOWELTwo vowel formants: the cutoff knob (now called VOWEL) runs a-e-i-o-u, RESO is how narrow.
LOW 6One pole, 6 dB: round, never dull.
COMBPeaks on the cutoff's harmonics (with KEY at 100 %: on the note's own), a pitch, metallic.
HARMA band on the note's harmonic nearest the cutoff.

Switching kinds crossfades, never clicks. The line at the panel's bottom describes the kind chosen.

KNOBSCUTOFF, RESO, DRIVE, ENV 2, KEY
ControlRange · defaultWhat it does
CUTOFF20 Hz – 20 kHz · 20 kHzThe filter's frequency (CC 74 by default).
RESO0 – 100 % · 0A peak at the cutoff (CC 71 by default).
DRIVE0 – 100 % · 0Saturation in front of the filter: warmth, then grit. The small list above it picks how: Soft (default), Smooth, Tube (uneven, even harmonics).
ENV 2−96 … +96 st · 0How far ENV 2 moves the cutoff: up for a pluck or a swell, minus to close.
KEY0 – 100 % · 0How much the cutoff follows the key; 100 % = the same brightness on every note.
ENVENV 1 and ENV 2

ENV 1 is every note's loudness; ENV 2 is free: the filter's ENV 2 knob and any MOD slot use it.

  • VISUAL / KNOBS (in the title row): the curve itself, or four knobs ATTACK, DECAY, SUSTAIN, RELEASE. The choice is remembered.
  • In VISUAL, drag the points: A across (attack), D/S across and up (decay and sustain), R across (release). Double-click a point = its default. The times read along the top: A 42 ms D 760 ms S 82% R 228 ms.
  • ANALOG: the attack rises like a charging capacitor, fast then easing in; off: a straight line.
  • ENV 1 holds the small VEL knob (the same as the VEL fader).
  • A click on an empty spot of the panel (or of the curve) chooses the envelope as the mod source.
AttackDecaySustainRelease
Range0 – 10 s0 – 10 s0 – 100 %0 – 10 s
ENV 1 default5 ms200 ms100 %250 ms
ENV 2 default5 ms300 ms0300 ms
QHow do I make a sound pluck with the filter?
  1. In FILTER, press LOW (or LADDER) and turn CUTOFF down until the sound is dark.
  2. Turn the filter's ENV 2 knob up (say +36 st).
  3. In the ENV 2 panel, drag the D/S point left and down: a short decay, low sustain.
  4. Play: every note opens bright and closes.
LFO 1 · LFO 2, SHIMMER and MICROSTwo LFOs, octave steps inside the sound, and the Kadabra's nine motion sensors
LFOLFO 1 and LFO 2

Two repeating waves to move anything in MOD. Each panel has:

ControlRange · defaultWhat it does
Shape listSine, Triangle, Saw, Square, S&H, Smooth, Chaos, Rise · LFO 1 Sine, LFO 2 TriangleS&H: random steps. Smooth: random glides. Chaos: a Lorenz attractor, never the same twice. Rise: up once, then holds.
FREE / SYNC· FREESYNC: the rate in note values of the host's tempo. FREE: in Hz.
RETRIG / RUNNING· RETRIGRETRIG: every note starts the LFO from its beginning. RUNNING: it runs on and notes join it where it is.
RATE0.02 – 40 Hz · LFO 1 2 Hz, LFO 2 0.5 Hz; or 4, 2, 1, 1/2, 3/8, 1/4, 1/6, 1/8, 1/12, 1/16, 1/24, 1/32 · 1/6How fast it cycles (1/4 = a quarter note).
DEPTH0 – 100 % · 100 %How strongly it moves everything it is routed to.
FADE0 – 5 s · 0The time it takes to fade in after a note starts (vibrato that arrives late).

The thin bar at the panel's right shows the LFO moving. Its SKEW (lean the wave forward or back) is in VOICE on the FX page.

VISUALVISUAL / KNOBS: the curves

LFO 1, LFO 2 and SHIMMER each have a VISUAL / KNOBS switch in the title row, as the envelopes do (remembered for next time).

  • LFO curve: 1 to 16 cycles as RATE asks, as tall as DEPTH, fading in over FADE. Drag DEPTH up and down, RATE across (the first cycle's end), FADE across. The values read along the top: RATE 0.33 Hz DEPTH 100% FADE 0.
  • SHIMMER steps: 4 to 16 steps on lines for −12, 0, +12, +24, +36 semitones. Drag RATE across, GLIDE across, MIX up and down.
  • A click on an empty spot chooses that LFO (or SHIMMER) as the mod source.
LFO 1 and SHIMMER on KNOBS, LFO 2 on VISUAL with its three points.
SHIMSHIMMER: octave steps inside the sound

The outer unison copies of OSC A jump by whole octaves in time, so a pad sparkles through its octaves while the key you play never changes (with one copy, all of OSC A jumps). The number at the right shows the step now (+12 st, or 0).

ControlRange · defaultWhat it does
Pattern listUp, Up 2, Down, Up-Down, Random, Wide · UpThe octaves the copies step through.
SYNC / FREE· SYNCSteps in note values of the tempo, or in Hz.
RATE4 … 1/32 · 1/16; or 0.5 – 40 Hz · 6 HzHow long each step lasts.
MIX0 – 100 % · 0How many copies jump; 0 = SHIMMER off.
GLIDE0 – 200 ms · 4 msHow smoothly a copy slides to its new octave.
MICROSMICROS: the Kadabra's nine sensors

The Kadabra's nine motion axes, three by sensor, each in a cell of its own (row 4 of the SYNTH page, beside MOD). On their own they move nothing: what each one moves is set in MOD. Every factory preset routes Micros 1 – 6; 7 – 9 are left for you to route.

MicroCCSensorRangeHow it moves
1 · 2 · 321 · 22 · 23accelerometer (blue)−100 … +100 % (marked bipolar)Rests in the middle and swings both ways.
4 · 5 · 624 · 25 · 26gyroscope (orange)0 – 100 %Sweeps up from zero.
7 · 8 · 927 · 28 · 29magnetometer (lime)−100 … +100 % (marked bipolar)Rests in the middle and swings both ways.
  • Each cell shows the Micro's number (it lights in the Micro's colour while its CC arrives), its CC (CC21), the name the preset gives it (SHADE-SUN; without one: TONE, SPACE, FLOW, STEP-SEQ, MORPH, BLOOM, MAG X, MAG Y, MAG Z), its knob and value. You can drag the knob to try it.
  • A preset sets where each Micro rests; the Kadabra's next CC takes it from there.
  • Click a cell (off its knob) to choose that Micro as the mod source and see what it moves.
  • If Micro 1 hears nothing while pitch bend is moving, the footer says Micro 1 hears no CC but pitch bend is moving: Kadabra Senser, combi 12 (PB OFF): the Kadabra's X axis is sending pitch bend instead of CC 21.

See

QHow do I use Micros 7, 8 and 9 (the magnetometer)?
  1. On the SYNTH page, click the cell of Micro 7 (MAG X) in MICROS, off its knob (8 and 9 the same way).
  2. Drag the knob you want it to move (say CUTOFF) up or down: the arc shows how far.
  3. Press the × on the chosen source in MOD's title row (or ESC).
  4. Turn the Kadabra: the sound follows (Micro 7 listens to CC 27). No factory preset routes 7 – 9, so press SAVE AS to keep the sound as your own.
MOD: modulationChoose a source, drag any knob for how much; one list of 32 routes, source → target
CHIPSThe source chips

On the SYNTH page MOD (row 4, at the left) shows chips only for the sources that have no panel there: VELOCITY, KEY, WHEEL, PRESSURE, RANDOM, STEP-SEQ, ACCENT, ALTERNATE, SPLIT. The Micros, LFO 1 / 2, ENV 1 / 2 and SHIMMER are chosen on their own cells and panels. On the FX page every source is a chip (see MOD on the FX page). A badge on a chip's corner counts how many targets it moves. Hover a chip and the help line says what it is and what it moves now.

SourceWhat it is
1 … 9 (the Micros, by their names)The Kadabra's sensors: 1 – 3 (blue) and 7 – 9 (lime) swing −1 … +1 around the middle, 4 – 6 sweep 0 … 1 (orange).
LFO 1 · LFO 2The repeating waves, swinging both ways (violet).
ENV 1 · ENV 2Each note's loudness envelope; the free envelope (green).
VELOCITY · KEYHow hard the key was struck (0 … 1, for the whole note); which key: 0 at middle C (C4), −1 two and a half octaves below, +1 as far above.
WHEEL · PRESSUREThe mod wheel; aftertouch, how hard a held key is pressed (0 … 1).
RANDOM · SHIMMERA new random value for every note (−1 … +1); 1 while SHIMMER has a copy on another octave.
STEP-SEQ · ACCENTThe step sequencer's value times its AMOUNT; a pulse on every step, as tall as the step's bar, falling by DECAY.
ALTERNATE · SPLIT+1 and −1 on every other note; −1 below the split key, +1 from it up.
ASSIGNModulation on the knobs
  1. Choose the source: click its chip in MOD, an empty spot of LFO 1 / 2, ENV 1 / 2 or SHIMMER, a Micro's cell in MICROS, or an empty spot of STEP-SEQ on the FX page. Its panel is outlined in its colour.
  2. Every knob it can reach gets a faint ring; a bright arc runs from the knob's value to where the source takes it at full swing.
  3. Drag a knob up or down (or a tag sideways; 150 px is the whole swing) to set how much and which way. Double-click it for none.
  4. Press the × on the chosen source in MOD's title row (or ESC) when done.

While a source is chosen, dragging a knob sets the modulation, not the knob. A free slot is taken for you and freed again at zero. With no source chosen, a knob that something moves carries a small dot in that source's colour.

PICKThe chosen source and its ×

The source you chose shows as a pill in its colour in MOD's title row (3 LEAN-LUSH ×), on the SYNTH and the FX page.

  • The × on the pill, or ESC, lets it go: the knobs are plain knobs again.
  • A click on the source itself (its chip, panel, cell or the pill) never lets it go: it shows its boxes and lines again.
  • Change page with a source chosen and its lines show on the new page.
  • When none of its routes is in view, the MOD list scrolls to its first one.
TAGSTargets without a knob

While a source is chosen, small tags appear in the title rows: PITCH, PAN and PITCH B in OSC, AMP in ENV 1 (tremolo with an LFO, swells with an envelope), ENV SPEED in ENV 2 (every envelope time at once), and ATTACK in VOICE on the FX page (ENV 1's attack alone). Drag a tag sideways for how much; it shows the amount (AMP +13%).

FINDSeeing what a source moves

For a moment after you choose a source, every control it moves is boxed, with a line to it from where you clicked, and its MOD slots are boxed too. A target out of view gets a line to the OSC tab (A, B or C) or to the other page's tab that shows it. The status line then lists it: LFO 1 → Cutoff +5 %, Position B +22 %.

Micro 3 chosen by a click on its cell: the WARP and SUB knobs, the AMP tag, the B tab (for Osc B Level, out of view) and its three routes in the MOD list (scrolled to 11-14) are boxed, with lines from its cell. The pill 3 LEAN-LUSH with its × sits in MOD's title row, and the tags PITCH, PAN, PITCH B and ENV SPEED have appeared.
SLOTSThe MOD slots

32 slots in one list, the same on both pages: four at a time on the SYNTH page, eight on the FX page. The title row counts them (1-4 / 32); the ▲ ▼ arrows turn a page and the wheel over the list moves one slot. Each is source list → target list and a depth slider, −100 … +100 % (double-click = 0). A coloured mark sits left of every slot that carries the chosen source. When all 32 are used, the status line says so.

ListChoices, in the menu's order
SourcesOff, Micro 1 – 9, LFO 1, Env 2, Velocity, Key, Wheel, Aftertouch, Random, Shimmer, LFO 2, Env 1, Step-Seq, Accent, Alternate, Split
TargetsOff, Pitch, Position A, Warp A, Detune, Width, Osc A Level, In Level, Cutoff, Resonance, Drive, Amp, Pan, LFO 1 Rate, LFO 1 Depth, Shimmer Rate, Shimmer Mix, Delay Send, Reverb Send, Env Speed, Position B, Warp B, Osc B Level, FM, Sub Level, Noise Level, LFO 2 Rate, LFO 2 Depth, Pitch B, Drift, Osc C Level, Position C, Step-Seq Amount, Low Cut, Attack, Stereo Width, Air, Warmth, Chorus Mix, Phaser Depth, Warp 2 A, Warp 2 B

At full depth Cutoff moves five octaves either way, the LFO rates four. Delay Send, Reverb Send, Stereo Width, Air, Warmth, Chorus Mix and Phaser Depth act on the whole sound, so they follow only the sources that are the same for every note: the Micros, Wheel, Aftertouch, Step-Seq and Accent. An LFO, an envelope, Velocity, Key, Random, Shimmer, Alternate or Split routed to them does nothing.

QHow do I make a Kadabra motion move a knob?
  1. On the SYNTH page, click that Micro's cell in MICROS, off its knob (say 4, CC 24). On the FX page, click its chip in MOD.
  2. Drag the knob you want it to move (say CUTOFF) up: the arc shows how far.
  3. Press the × on the chosen source in MOD's title row (or ESC).
  4. Move the Kadabra: the sound follows.
QHow do I see what a Micro (or an LFO) moves?
  1. Hover the Micro's cell in MICROS (on the FX page: the Micro's or the LFO's chip in MOD): the help line lists what it moves.
  2. Or click it (an LFO: an empty spot of its panel): everything it moves is boxed for a moment, with lines to it, and the MOD list shows its routes.
  3. Press the × on the chosen source (or ESC) to let go.
QHow do I remove a modulation?
  1. Choose the source: its chip, its panel or its Micro cell.
  2. Double-click the knob (or tag) it moves: none, and its slot is freed.
  3. Or in the slot itself, double-click its depth slider, or set its source to Off.
QHow do I let go of the chosen mod source?
  1. Look at MOD's title row: the chosen source is the coloured pill there.
  2. Click the × at its end, or press ESC.
  3. The knobs turn the sound again. A click on the source itself does not let it go: it shows its lines again.
SAFETYRow 4 of the SYNTH page, at the right: the fixed last stage and the load switch
SAFESAFETY and the load switch

The fixed last stage: no bypass, no parameter. The panel shows:

ItemWhat it shows or does
ScopeThe output's waveform.
ECO · FULL · ULTRAThe load switch (default FULL). FULL plays every sound as designed and gives a heavy sound fewer voices to stay inside this K-Synth's share of the processor. ECO thins every new note (at most 2 unison copies an oscillator, no WARP 2) so more voices and more K-Synths fit. ULTRA plays every voice. A switch counts from the next note.
LIMITHow far the limiter is pulling the peaks down (0.0 dB), and its ceiling -0.3 dBTP.
LOADHow much of this K-Synth's share the sound takes (the bar is full at the share), or OVERLOAD.
Share boxHow much of one processor core this K-Synth may take. Click: Auto (default: one core shared by the K-Synths running; it reads AUTO 1 core, AUTO 1/16 …) or a fixed 100, 50, 25, 12.5 or 6.25 % of one core.
Bottom line10 of 10 voices fit (orange when fewer fit than VOICES), budget when live, ULTRA: every voice; then the latency (0.50 ms), and how many times the broken-number guard (NaN) and the clip guard have acted.

The voice budget acts only while playing live, never in a bounce. A processor that cannot keep up lets the oldest voices go, then fades to silence rather than crackling, and comes back.

QHow do I run many K-Synths at once?
  1. In each K-Synth, look at SAFETY: leave the share box on Auto, so the K-Synths share the cores.
  2. If the bottom line turns orange (3 of 16 voices fit), press ECO for thinner, lighter notes.
  3. For one sound that must have every voice, press ULTRA in that one only.
The FX pageSTEP-SEQ and the EQ, the effects after the voices, MOD with every source, DELAY, REVERB, CHORUS, VOICE
MAPThe FX page, area by area

Press the FX tab (or TAB from the SYNTH page). The top bar, the left column and the piano roll stay as they are.

AreaWhat lives there
Row 1STEP-SEQ (the step sequencer) · EQ (its curve over what you hear).
Row 2STEREO · WARMTH · GLUE · PHASER · VOCODER, each with its own ON / OFF.
Rows 3 – 4, at the leftMOD: every source as a chip, and the routes, eight at a time.
Row 3DELAY · REVERB · CHORUS.
Row 4VOICE: LOW CUT, KEY, RESO, LFO 1 SKEW, LFO 2 SKEW, SPLIT, IN OCT, OCT MIX.

OSC C is not on this page: all of it is on the SYNTH page, under the OSC tab C.

SEQSTEP-SEQ: the step sequencer

A step sequencer locked to the host's beat (it was called MOTION before 0.3.8; older presets load unchanged). It moves the sound, not the notes: as the mod sources STEP-SEQ and ACCENT, and as OSC C's rhythm. It keeps running with no note held, and follows the host's bar position while the host plays.

ControlRange · defaultWhat it does
ON / OFF· OFFSTEP-SEQ on or off.
FEELStraight, Triplet, Dotted · StraightThe steps' feel.
STEP4 … 1/32 · 1/16How long each step lasts.
16 bars0 – 100 % · 50 %Each step's value. Drag a bar up and down, or across several bars to paint them; double-click = back to 50 %. The step playing lights up.
Octave cells (under the bars)−1 … +3 · 0 (a dot)OSC C's octave on that step: click for one up, right-click for one down.
STEPS2 – 16 · 8How many steps before the pattern repeats (the bars beyond are grey).
AMOUNT0 – 100 % · 100 %How strongly STEP-SEQ moves what it is routed to (CC 24 usually brings it in).
SMOOTH0 – 100 % · 20 %0 = steps; higher = curves gliding from step to step.
DECAY0 – 100 % · 50 %How long each ACCENT pulse rings: short = ticks, long = swells.

A click on an empty spot of the panel chooses STEP-SEQ as the mod source. OSC C, which plays in its rhythm, is on the SYNTH page's OSC tab C.

QHow do I make a rhythm with STEP-SEQ?
  1. Press the FX tab and press ON in STEP-SEQ.
  2. Pick STEP (say 1/16) and turn STEPS to the length you want.
  3. Drag across the bars to paint the step values.
  4. Hear it: on the SYNTH page raise OSC C's LEVEL (OSC tab C), and back on the FX page click octave cells for +1 or +2 on some steps; or on the SYNTH page click the STEP-SEQ chip in MOD and drag CUTOFF.
EQEQ: the curve you drag

A high-pass, a low-pass and a notch on the whole sound, and two tone shapes, MUD and AIR (row 1, at the right). Its title row holds VISUAL / KNOBS, NOTCH (the notch on or off) and ON / OFF for the high-pass, the low-pass and the notch (default OFF; it fades in and out, never a click). MUD and AIR work whether the EQ is ON or not.

VISUAL (the default) draws the EQ's own curve over a live analyser of what you hear: 20 Hz – 20 kHz across, ±18 dB up and down. The values read along the top (HP 20 Hz · LP 20.0 kHz · MUD -0.9 dB · AIR +0.1 dB), or the value of the point under the mouse. Drag the five points:

PointDragRange · default
HPAcross: the high-pass, takes away the lows.20 Hz – 2 kHz · 20 Hz
LPAcross: the low-pass, takes away the highs.200 Hz – 20 kHz · 20 kHz
NOTCHAcross: its frequency. Up and down (or the wheel over it): narrower or wider, for a ringing frequency.40 Hz – 16 kHz · 1.0 kHz; Q 0.5 – 30 · 4
MUDUp and down: a wide cut or lift around 220 Hz.−12 … +6 dB · 0
AIRUp and down: a shelf at 9 kHz.−12 … +9 dB · 0

Dragging HP, LP or NOTCH switches the EQ ON (NOTCH switches the notch on too). Double-click a point = its default; right-click = the control menu. KNOBS shows six knobs instead: HP, LP, NOTCH, Q, MUD 220, AIR 9k. The VISUAL / KNOBS choice is remembered.

The HP point dragged to 121 Hz: the EQ has switched itself ON and its curve bends over the analyser of what is playing; the help line explains the points. SAVE AS has turned orange because the sound changed.
QHow do I shape the sound with the EQ curve?
  1. Press the FX tab; in EQ keep VISUAL on.
  2. Drag the HP point to the right to take away the lows (the EQ switches ON); drag LP to the left to take away the highs.
  3. Drag MUD down to clear the low middle, AIR up for open highs.
  4. For a ringing frequency, drag NOTCH onto the peak in the analyser, then up or down (or the wheel) to make it narrower or wider.
  5. Double-click a point to put it back.
FXSTEREO, WARMTH and GLUE

Each has an ON / OFF button in its title row (default OFF; its knobs are dim while off).

PanelControls · defaultWhat it does
STEREOWIDTH 0 – 200 % · 100 %; AIR 0 – 100 % · 0; MONO BELOW Off … 400 Hz · OffThe last word before SAFETY: width (0 = mono), air (widens only the highs), and everything below MONO BELOW made mono, for a solid low end in a club.
WARMTHTape / Tube · Tape; DRIVE 0 – 100 % · 30 %; MIX 0 – 100 % · 100 %Saturation after the voices: tape (soft, rounded highs) or tube (warmer, even harmonics).
GLUEDEPTH · 40 %; TIME · 40 %; UPWARD · 30 % (all 0 – 100 %)A three-band compressor, down and up, that holds the sound together. The green bar shows how much it works.
VOCPHASER and VOCODER
PanelControls · defaultWhat it does
PHASERStages 4, 6, 8, 12 · 6; SYNC / FREE · SYNC; RATE 4 … 1/32 · 1/2, or 0.02 – 10 Hz · 0.3 Hz; DEPTH · 60 %; CENTRE 60 Hz – 8 kHz · 700 Hz; FEEDBACK 0 – 92 % · 50 %; MIX · 50 %Sweeping notches, in time with the host or free. More stages, more notches; feedback rings more.
VOCODERMIX · 100 %; SPEED · 50 %; SHARP · 50 %; SIBILANCE · 20 % (all 0 – 100 %)The audio input speaks through the synth, in 16 bands. SPEED: how fast the bands follow the voice. SHARP: narrower bands, clearer words, thinner sound. SIBILANCE lets the voice's own S and T through.

Both have their own ON / OFF button (default OFF). The VOCODER needs a voice on the audio input.

SENDSDELAY and REVERB

The two send effects, in row 3 beside MOD. Each SEND knob sets how much of the sound goes to it.

DELAYRange · defaultWhat it does
FREE / SYNC and the division list· FREE; 4 … 1/32 · 3/8SYNC: the time in note values of the tempo, from the list beside it. FREE: the TIME knob (dim while SYNC).
SEND0 – 100 % · 0How much goes to the delay.
TIME1 – 1000 ms · 375 msThe time between echoes (when the delay is FREE).
FEEDBACK0 – 98 % · 50 %How many echoes.
PING-PONG0 – 100 % · 0How far the echoes bounce left and right.
TONE0 – 100 % · 100 %Lower makes each repeat darker.
REVERBRange · defaultWhat it does
Type listClassic, Hall, Plate, Shimmer · ClassicClassic is K-Player's reverb; Hall a dense hall; Plate dense and bright; Shimmer adds octaves up in the tail.
SEND0 – 100 % · 0How much goes to the reverb.
SIZE0 – 100 % · 72 %The room's size: a longer tail.
DAMP0 – 100 % · 35 %How fast the highs die away.
PRE-DELAY0 – 150 ms · 12 msThe gap before the reverb, to keep the attack clear.
QHow do I put the echoes in time with the music?
  1. Press the FX tab.
  2. In DELAY, turn SEND up.
  3. Press FREE so it reads SYNC.
  4. Pick the note value in the list beside it (say 3/8).
CHORCHORUS

The list: Off (default, costs nothing), Chorus (two voices swinging, a Juno's pair), Ensemble (a string machine), Dimension (wide, clean), Hyper (thick, moving). MIX 0 – 100 % (default 50 %). It runs in line, before the sends, and never delays the dry sound.

VOICEVOICE: the voice's extras
KnobRange · defaultWhat it does
LOW CUTOff (20 Hz) … 2 kHz · OffA high-pass on every voice: takes away what is below it.
KEY0 – 100 % · 0How much the low cut follows the key.
RESO0 – 100 % · 0A resonant peak just above the low cut: weight right where the low end should sit.
LFO 1 SKEW, LFO 2 SKEW−1.00 … +1.00 · 0Leans the LFO's wave forward or back: a sine leans, a triangle becomes a ramp.
SPLITC-1 … G9 · C4The key where the SPLIT source turns from −1 to +1 (the line on the piano roll).
IN OCT−1 … +1 · 0AUDIO IN FX: an octave layer of the input, one down or one up (lit only in FX).
OCT MIX0 – 100 % · 0How loud that octave layer is.
MODMOD on the FX page: every source

On the FX page MOD runs down the left over rows 3 and 4, with every source as a chip, nine to a row:

  • Row 1: the Micros 1 – 9, by the preset's names.
  • Row 2: LFO 1, LFO 2, ENV 1, ENV 2, SHIMMER, VELOCITY, KEY, WHEEL, PRESSURE.
  • Row 3: RANDOM, STEP-SEQ, ACCENT, ALTERNATE, SPLIT.

So what a Micro, an LFO or an envelope does to this page can be seen and set here. The list under the chips shows eight routes at a time (1-8 / 32). A source can move these controls here: the SEND of DELAY and of REVERB, CHORUS MIX, STEREO WIDTH and AIR, WARMTH DRIVE, PHASER DEPTH, STEP-SEQ AMOUNT, LOW CUT, and the ATTACK tag in VOICE. The sends and the effects follow only the Micros, WHEEL, PRESSURE, STEP-SEQ and ACCENT (see The MOD slots).

The chip 2 STILL-MIST chosen on the FX page: REVERB's SEND and CHORUS's MIX are boxed with lines from the chip, its routes 9 and 10 are boxed in the list, and a line goes to the SYNTH tab for the AMP route it has there. The ATTACK tag has appeared in VOICE.
QHow do I make a Micro move an effect?
  1. Press the FX tab.
  2. In MOD, click the Micro's chip (the first row, say 2).
  3. Drag the effect's knob up (say REVERB's SEND): the arc shows how far.
  4. Press the × on the chosen source (or ESC), then move the Kadabra.
VIEWThe FX page
STEP-SEQ's bars and octave cells beside the EQ, the five effects after the voices, MOD with every source as a chip and eight routes, DELAY, REVERB, CHORUS and VOICE.
The TABLE page: the wavetable editorDraw a table, shape its harmonics, write a formula, then play it on OSC A or B
TOOLSThe tool row

A table is a row of cycles (1 to 256). The A / B tabs in the title choose the oscillator you edit for; switching loads that oscillator's table in place of the one being edited (as FROM OSC does). The name and cycle count read at the right ("Basic Shapes" · 21 cycles).

ButtonWhat it does
FROM OSCTakes the oscillator's table again, as editable cycles.
NEWSine, Saw, Square, Triangle, Sine to Saw (32 cycles), Silence.
FORMULAA formula for every cycle at once (below).
PROCESSNormalise each cycle, Remove DC, Reverse, Invert, Smooth, Mirror the second half, Morph first to last (crossfade), Morph first to last (spectral), Normalise the table as one; then 1, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256 cycles to change how many it has.
IMPORTOpens a wavetable or audio file (.wav, .aif, .aiff, .flac, .wt) to edit.
SAVEWrites the table as a .wav wavetable where you choose (Serum and Surge open it too).
NAMEThe table's name.
UNDOOne step back.
USE ON OSCSaves the table as Wavetables/Edited/<name>.wav and plays it on the chosen oscillator (it lights up while there are edits not yet used). A preset that uses it finds it again.
HARMHARMONICS

The first 64 harmonics of the cycle shown, as bars in dB (0 at the top, −60 at the bottom; the first one green). Drag a bar up or down, or along several bars, to set their levels; the wave redraws at once.

DRAWBrushes, SNAP and LIVE
  • FREE: draw by hand. LINE: a straight line from where you pressed. SMOOTH: smooths the wave under the brush.
  • FLAT, RAMP UP, RAMP DOWN, ARCH, S-CURVE: fill the grid cell under the mouse with that shape, as tall as the mouse is high.
  • SNAP 16: the grid; click for the next size (OFF, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64), right-click for the one before.
  • LIVE: every edit is played on the oscillator at once (USE ON OSC after each one).

The big view shows the current cycle bright and its neighbours faint (cycle 1 / 21).

CYCLESThe cycles strip

Every cycle as a small picture: click one to edit it; the wheel scrolls the strip. The buttons: - removes the current cycle, + adds a copy of it after it (up to 256), COPY / PASTE a cycle, < / > the cycle before or after.

FORMThe FORMULA

One line computes every cycle. Across a cycle: x runs −1 … 1 and p 0 … 1; along the table: y runs 0 … 1, f is the cycle's number and n how many there are. Functions: sin, cos, tan, asin, acos, atan, abs, sqrt, exp, log, log2, floor, ceil, round, sign, fract, sinc, saw, tri, sqr, noise, pow, min, max, mod, atan2, step, clamp, lerp; constants pi and e. The first one offered morphs a sine into a saw:

sin(pi * x) * (1 - y) + saw(p * (1 + 7 * y)) * y

A mistake is named in the status line (formula: …) and nothing changes.

QHow do I draw my own wavetable and play it?
  1. Press the TABLE tab and choose A (or B).
  2. Press NEW ▸ Sine to Saw (32 cycles) to start, or keep the oscillator's table.
  3. Pick a brush (FREE) and draw on the big view; drag the HARMONICS bars.
  4. Press NAME and type a name.
  5. Press USE ON OSC, then on the SYNTH page turn POSITION.
VIEWThe TABLE page
The tool row, HARMONICS, the brushes with SNAP and LIVE, the big drawing view, and the cycles strip with its buttons.
MIDINotes, controllers, bank select and program change, MIDI learn
NOTESNotes and the player's hands
  • Notes with velocity, exact to the sample, on any MIDI channel.
  • Pitch bend over the Bend Range (default 2 semitones).
  • Mod wheel (CC 1) and aftertouch (channel or per-key pressure): the WHEEL and PRESSURE mod sources.
  • Sustain pedal (CC 64) holds the notes.
  • CC 123 lets every note go; CC 120 silences everything at once.
CCThe CC map, as it starts
CCControlNotes
21 – 29Micro 1 – 9The Kadabra's motion axes (27 – 29: the magnetometer). MIDI Learn never takes these numbers (they send all the time); Choose MIDI CC still can. A saved MIDI map from before gets CC 27 – 29 for Micros 7 – 9 when those numbers are free.
74Cutoff
71Resonance
1Mod wheelthe WHEEL source
64Sustain pedal
0Group (bank select)0 – 15 the K groups, 16 … your own; always, whatever is learned.
32Set0 Factory, 1 User 1, 2 User 2 …; always.

Every other control waits for MIDI Learn. K-Synth asks the host for every CC 0 – 127, so learning works in any VST3 host.

PCBank select and program change

A CC 0 chooses the group and a CC 32 the set; they are kept for the program changes that follow. A program change then plays that preset of the group: program change 0 is the group's first preset (shown as program 1). Until a CC 0 arrives, program changes count in K-Bass of the Factory. A number the group does not have leaves the sound alone, with a word in the status line (… program 140: no such preset). A program change reaches 0 – 127, so K-Bass's EDM basses (129 – 152) are chosen from the window or the host's list. The music carries on through the change.

The host's own preset list holds every preset of every set in one list (K-Pads: …, User 1 / K-Pads: …).

LEARNMIDI Learn: every control
  1. Right-click the control and choose MIDI Learn. The status line reads MIDI LEARN: move a controller for <name> (click anywhere to cancel) and the control blinks LEARN.
  2. Move the knob (an FXer combi on the Kadabra, a controller knob). The next CC takes it.

Or Choose MIDI CC ▸ a group of sixteen ▸ the number (each shows what it drives now; none removes it). A CC drives one control at a time. When a CC moves a control, the status line shows it for a moment (CC 74 → Cutoff). The map is remembered in ~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Synth/midi-learn.txt and inside each project.

QHow do I control a K-Synth knob from a Kadabra combi?
  1. Right-click the knob in K-Synth (say DRIVE) and choose MIDI Learn.
  2. On the Kadabra, in the FXer shape, move the combi's amount that sends a CC on this sound's MIDI channel.
  3. The knob now follows it; a small CCn shows beside it.
K-Synth with K-Player and Kadabra OSLoading it, feeding it audio, changing its sounds and moving it from the Kadabra
QHow do I load K-Synth in K-Player?
  1. On K-Player's PLAYER page, find a MIDI channel (violet MIDI chip), or add one with +.
  2. Set its MIDI IN to the Kadabra sound's channel.
  3. Click its empty Instrument box: the plug-in browser opens on INST ONLY.
  4. Choose K-Synth. Click the box again any time to open K-Synth's window.
INFeeding K-Synth audio in K-Player

Because K-Synth takes audio, K-Player puts an IN chip at the right of its Instrument box. Click it for the list REC IN (into the instrument): no input, DECK A, DECK B, and the audio interface's inputs as pairs (IN 1+2) and singly (IN 1). Right-click the chip = no input. The chip then shows the input's name. That input reaches K-Synth's AUDIO IN, VOCODER and the WARP mode Input FM only, never the channel strip itself.

SOUNDChanging K-Synth's sound from the Kadabra

K-Player passes a channel's program changes and bank selects to its Instrument box. So a program change from the Kadabra (the Sounder shape's Thumb 2: Change Sound combis send program numbers) plays that preset of the group K-Synth has latched; send CC 0 first to choose the group (and CC 32 for one of your sets). The PRESETS panel prints each group's CC 0 = n and each preset's number, so a set list can be read off it.

See

KOSThe Kadabra's hands on K-Synth
  • Motion axes (set in the Senser shape) arrive as Micros 1 – 6 on CC 21 – 26; every factory preset already routes all six. K-Synth also takes the magnetometer as Micros 7 – 9 on CC 27 – 29; no factory preset routes those.
  • If the Senser puts pitch bend on axis X, CC 21 stops and Micro 1 rests; K-Synth says so in the MICROS panel. Senser combi 12 (PB OFF) gives the axis back.
  • FXer combis send CCs: MIDI-learn them to any K-Synth control.
  • The tempo is K-Player's: synced LFOs, SHIMMER, STEP-SEQ, the PHASER and the delay follow it. With no tempo from the host they run at 120 BPM.

See

QHow do I pick a K-Synth preset from the Kadabra?
  1. In K-Synth, open the PRESETS panel and note the group's CC 0 = n and the preset's number.
  2. From the Kadabra (or any controller), on the channel's MIDI channel, send CC 0 = that group (CC 32 = 0 for the Factory, 1 for User 1).
  3. Send the program change: the preset's number minus one (program change 0 is preset 1).
  4. Later program changes stay in that group until a new CC 0 arrives.
QHow do I give K-Synth K-Player's language?
  1. In K-Player, open SETTINGS ▸ General (CMD+,).
  2. On the K-Sampler, K-Synth row, switch THE SAME LANGUAGE: ON.
  3. Choose the language: it is written into K-Synth's settings too.
  4. Close and open K-Synth's window: it speaks it.
Files, what is not there yet, troubleshootingWhere everything lives, what is still to come, and what the window is telling you
DIRSFolders and files
WhatWhere
The plug-in/Library/Audio/Plug-Ins/VST3/K-Synth.vst3 (put there by Install K-Synth <version>.pkg)
Factory presets (read-only)/Library/Application Support/Tribal-Tools/K-Synth/Factory/<K-Group>/*.ksynth; a copy is also inside the plug-in
Your presets~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Synth/Banks/User 1/<Group>/<Name>.ksynth (User 2 …)
Older presets (0.3.3 and before)~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Synth/Presets/<Group>/, shown in User 1
Wavetables~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Synth/Wavetables/; the TABLE page's in Wavetables/Edited/
MIDI map~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Synth/midi-learn.txt
Window settings~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Synth/settings.txt: the language, the OSC tab, VISUAL / KNOBS

A preset is a small text file, so it can be copied or shared. Each project keeps the sound, its preset's path, the CC map, the nine Micros, and the setup (ECO / FULL / ULTRA, the share, KEEP SPLIT). K-Synth's folder sits beside K-Sampler's and K-Player's in ~/Music/Tribal-Tools.

LATERWhat is not there yet
  • Mac only for now: a VST3 for macOS. Windows, Linux and AU versions are planned.
  • K-Synth will also run on the Kadabra board itself, without a computer; that version is not out yet.
  • No MPE and no arpeggiator (STEP-SEQ is K-Synth's step sequencer; it moves the sound, not the notes).
  • Glide and Bend Range have no knob in the window yet: set them as host parameters.
FIXTroubleshooting
  • No sound: check LEVEL is not at the bottom (off) and the OUT meter moves. In K-Player, check the channel's MIDI IN, that the Instrument box is not bypassed (B), and that the piano roll lights when you play.
  • A K-Vocoder or K-Audio FX preset is silent: they play the audio input. Give K-Synth one (the IN chip in K-Player, the side-chain elsewhere).
  • Micro 1 does not move: the Kadabra sends pitch bend on axis X instead of CC 21; Senser combi 12 (PB OFF).
  • A program change plays the wrong group: send CC 0 (the group) before it; K-Synth counts in the last group a CC 0 chose. no such preset: that group has fewer presets.
  • MIDI Learn will not take a motion axis: CC 21 – 29 belong to the Micros; use Choose MIDI CC to give one away.
  • A route to a send or an effect does nothing: the sends, STEREO WIDTH and AIR, WARMTH, CHORUS MIX and PHASER DEPTH follow only the Micros, WHEEL, PRESSURE, STEP-SEQ and ACCENT; an LFO, an envelope or another per-note source does not move them.
  • Orange 3 of 16 voices fit in SAFETY: the sound is heavy for its share of the processor; press ECO, give it a bigger share, or ULTRA.
  • OVERLOAD: the computer cannot keep up; the sound fades out and comes back. Use ECO or fewer voices.
  • Red FEEDBACK under IN: the input hears its own output (a microphone near the speakers) and was turned down 40 dB.
  • wavetable missing … using Basic Shapes: the preset's wavetable file was moved or deleted.
  • no tempo at the top right: the host sends no tempo; synced things run at 120 BPM.
Kadabra Ecosystem · VST3 instrument

K-Kick

Kadabra's kick drum instrument: the whole kick made by synthesis, a modelled bass drum on top, and 2454 factory kicks.

K-Kick builds a kick from scratch. The body is an oscillator whose pitch drops fast (the punch, then the sweep) onto the kick's note, with a sub under it. On top sit three layers: a click of filtered noise, a bass drum head (a struck membrane, modelled, not sampled) and a sample of your own.
After them come a filter, the amp envelope, drive and a transient shaper, an EQ over the live spectrum, and a fixed safety stage that keeps every sound under −0.3 dBTP. Every part is drawn as it plays.
It runs inside K-Player (the Instrument box of a MIDI channel) and in any VST3 host on the Mac. The Kadabra plays it by MIDI: notes are hits, the six Micros (CC 21–26) move what each preset routes them to, and a program change picks a preset.
• Version documented: K-Kick 0.3.1, macOS 11 or newer, Apple Silicon and Intel. One window, 1360 × 948.
• 2454 factory kicks in twenty groups: K-Kicks (22, hand-made) and nineteen banks of 128.
Back to top
At a glanceThe window panel by panel, how a hit is made, and the rules every control follows
MAPThe window, panel by panel

Everything is on one page. Top to bottom, left to right:

AreaWhat lives there
Top barTRIBAL TOOLS logo, K-KICK and the version · the SET box (FACTORY or USER 1, and the group) · the PRESET box · ◀ ▶ · SAVE AS / SAVE · VOICES 1 · the OUT meter · the host tempo (126.0 BPM) and how many hits sound (1 hit).
KADABRA column (far left)The Kadabra drawn in laser outline, the master LEVEL fader and the thin VEL fader beside it.
Row 1KICK (the hit drawn, EXPORT WAV) · PITCH (the pitch envelope, KEY, ROOT) · OSC (the body's wave, SUB OCT).
Row 2TOP · PUNCH (tabs CLICK, BD, SAMPLE) · ENV (VISUAL / KNOBS, 1-SHOT / GATE) · FILTER.
Row 3AMP (drive type, DRIVE, TONE, MIX, TRANSIENT, CLIP) · EQ (the spectrum and the HP, LP, N1, N2 and BELL points).
Row 4MOD: eleven source chips and twelve modulation slots.
Row 5MICROS (the Kadabra's six sensors) · MIX (the five layers) · AUDITION (the step grid, the KEY it plays, VEL, the HIT pad).
Row 6OUTPUT (WIDTH, BEND, what velocity moves, humanize) · SAFETY (scope, LIMIT, LOAD).
Far rightThe piano roll, A0 to C8, marked play: every hit lights its key.
Status lineLeft: what the control under the mouse does, or the latest message. Right: the preset's file, or factory preset.
FLOWHow a hit is made

Every note is one hit, made in this order:

  1. BODY (OSC + SUB) and TOP (CLICK + BD + SAMPLE), each at its own level (MIX).
  2. FILTER on the whole hit.
  3. The amp envelope (ENV) and the velocity.
  4. AMP: DRIVE, TONE, TRANSIENT, CLIP.
  5. The hits summed, then LEVEL and WIDTH.
  6. The EQ, then SAFETY, which no preset can switch off.
RULESRules every control follows
  • Drag a knob up or down; drag a slider or a fader along its line.
  • Double-click any knob, slider or point = back to its default (a Micro goes back to its rest).
  • Right-click (or ctrl-click) a control = its menu: Reset to default, MIDI Learn and Choose MIDI CC ▸.
  • The scroll wheel over a knob steps it.
  • A small CCnn beside a control = a MIDI CC moves it. A blinking red LEARN = it waits for one.
  • A small coloured dot by a knob = a MOD source moves it (the dot has the source's colour).
  • The status line at the bottom explains whatever is under the mouse.
  • No keyboard shortcuts: only RETURN and ESC in the PRESETS panel's name field.
LIVEWhat you hear at once, and what waits for the next hit

A hit takes most of its settings at the moment it starts. Changing them while it rings is heard from the next hit: the pitch envelope and END, the wave shapes, the decays and tunes, the envelope times, the filter type and its envelope, the drive type and the velocity amounts.

These change under a sounding hit too, with a short glide so nothing clicks: the layer levels (BODY, SUB, CLICK, BD, SAMPLE), DRIVE, TONE, MIX, CLIP, the TRANSIENT amounts, CUTOFF, RESO, LEVEL, WIDTH and the pitch wheel.

HOSTWhere K-Kick runs
  • K-Player, PLAYER page: load it into the + Instrument box of a MIDI channel. The channel's MIDI reaches it: notes, CCs, bank selects and program changes.
  • Any VST3 host on the Mac (macOS 11 or newer). It is an instrument with a MIDI input and a stereo output. The host lists every preset in its own preset list, as K-Techno: Concrete Rumbler or User 1 / K-Techno: My Kick.
  • A new K-Kick opens on Techno Punch, the first factory kick.
  • Its only delay is 0.5 ms (the limiter's look-ahead), and it tells the host so.

INSTThe installer

K-Kick comes as an installer package, Install K-Kick 0.3.1.pkg, for macOS 11 or newer on Apple Silicon and Intel. It has two parts:

PartWhere it goes
K-Kick plug-in (VST3)K-Kick.vst3 into /Library/Audio/Plug-Ins/VST3. Always installed.
Factory presetsThe 2454 factory kicks, a folder per group, into /Library/Application Support/Tribal-Tools/K-Kick/Factory. On by default; Customize in the installer can leave it out, and K-Kick then plays the same kicks from the copy built into the plug-in.

A newer installer first clears the Factory's group folders an older one put there, so a kick the new version no longer has does not stay behind. Your own presets in ~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Kick are never touched.

QHow do I install K-Kick?
  1. Open Install K-Kick 0.3.1.pkg and follow the installer's steps.
  2. Keep both parts: K-Kick plug-in (VST3) and Factory presets.
  3. Let your host rescan its plug-ins (in K-Player, press SCAN in the plug-in browser).
  4. Load K-Kick as an instrument: it opens on Techno Punch.
QHow do I load K-Kick in K-Player?
  1. Open K-Player's PLAYER page and pick a MIDI channel strip.
  2. Click its + Instrument box: the plug-in browser opens on INST ONLY.
  3. Pick K-Kick (if it is missing, press SCAN in the browser).
  4. Set the channel's MIDI IN to the channel of the Kadabra sound that should play the kick.
  5. Click the box again to open K-Kick's window.
QHow do I hear the kick without a keyboard?
  1. Press HIT in the AUDITION panel: its left edge plays soft, its right edge loud.
  2. Or click a key on the piano roll at the right (left part of the key soft, right part loud).
  3. Or click OFF in AUDITION so it reads ON: the kick plays on the lit steps.
Top barSET, PRESET, ◀ ▶, SAVE AS / SAVE, VOICES, OUT and the tempo
SETThe SET box

Shows where the sound comes from: the set in small letters (FACTORY in blue, USER 1, USER 2 … in orange) and the group's name (K-Kicks, K-Techno …). Under it, MIDI: CC 0 = 1, CC 32 = 0 gives the two numbers that choose this group and set by MIDI.

Click it to open the PRESETS panel and change set, group or preset.

PRESETThe PRESET box and its menu

Shows the preset's name: blue for a factory kick, orange for yours. An orange dot means unsaved changes. Under it: program 1 of 22 · factory (or yours), its place in its group. Click the box for the menu:

ItemWhat it does
1 Techno Punch, 2 909 Classic …The presets of the current group in the current set (✓ on the one playing). Click one to load it.
Save: replace User 1 / group / nameOnly on your own preset: writes the sound over its file.
Save As… (choose the set, the group and the name)Opens the SAVE AS panel.
Browse every set and group…Opens the PRESETS panel.
Init presetEvery control to its default, no sample, the Micros unnamed: a plain starting kick called Init.
Export the hit as a WAV…The same as EXPORT WAV.
Open the Banks folderShows ~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Kick/Banks in the Finder.
◀ ▶Previous and next preset

◀ and ▶ load the preset before or after the one playing, inside its set and group. At the end of the group they go round to the other end.

SAVESAVE AS / SAVE

The button reads SAVE AS when the sound came from the Factory, from Init, or was never saved: a click opens the SAVE AS panel. On your own preset it reads SAVE: a click offers Save: replace … or Save As…. It turns amber when there are unsaved changes.

The Factory is never written over.

VOICESVOICES

How many hits may sound at once, 1 to 4 (default 1). Click for the list: 1 voice: every hit chokes the one before, 2 voices: hits may overlap, and so on. A choked hit fades out in 3 ms, never cut. VOICES is saved with the preset. Right-click = the control menu.

OUTOUT, tempo and the logo
  • OUT: the output's peak, green, yellow above −6 dB, red at 0 dB.
  • The tempo (126.0 BPM) is the host's; it reads no tempo when the host gives none. Under it, 1 hit / 3 hits: how many hits sound now.
  • Click the TRIBAL TOOLS logo for the version and Open the K-Kick folder.
QHow do I start a kick from scratch?
  1. Click the PRESET box.
  2. Choose Init preset: a plain sine kick on 45 Hz with a little click and sub.
  3. Shape it in PITCH, OSC, TOP · PUNCH and ENV.
  4. Press SAVE AS to keep it (the name starts as My Kick).
Presets: sets, groups and the factory kicksThe PRESETS and SAVE AS panels, the twenty factory groups, what a preset keeps
SETSSets and groups

Every preset lives in a SET, in a GROUP inside it, under its NAME.

  • SET: the Factory (to play from, read-only), then your User 1, User 2 … (each a folder of your own).
  • GROUP: the twenty K groups (K-Kicks, K-Techno …), then groups you make yourself. Your own groups are numbered after the K groups, A to Z.

The same K groups exist in every User set, so a kick you change from K-Techno can be saved into User 1 / K-Techno.

PANELThe PRESETS panel

Opens from the SET box, or PRESET ▸ Browse every set and group…. The rest of the window is dimmed; a click outside the panel, CLOSE or the ✕ closes it.

ColumnWhat it does
SETFACTORY, USER 1 … with how many presets each holds, and + NEW SET (makes the next User set at once).
GROUPThe groups of that set, each with its count and its number (22 · CC 0 = 0). Nineteen fit at once: with more, the column reads scroll for more, and the scroll wheel over it brings up the rest (K-Percussion, your own groups). In a User set, + NEW GROUP sits at the end of the list: it asks for a name and makes its folder.
PRESETSThe group's presets, numbered. Click one to load it; double-click loads it and closes the panel. The scroll wheel scrolls the list (1-22 of 128 · scroll for more).
FooterThe set, the group, how many presets, and the MIDI numbers (MIDI: CC 32 = 0, CC 0 = 1). FOLDER shows that group's folder in the Finder.

The panel reads the disk each time it opens, so a .kkick file you copied in with the Finder shows up.

The PRESETS panel: FACTORY (2454) chosen, the first nineteen groups with their CC 0 numbers and scroll for more, K-Machines (CC 0 = 17) and its first 22 of 128 presets.
SAVEThe SAVE AS panel

The same three columns, with a NAME field in place of the list. Choose a User set (the Factory row reads read-only), then a group, then type the name. The presets already in that group are listed under the field: click one to take its name.

The footer says saves as ~/Music/…, or REPLACES … in orange when that name exists; the button then reads REPLACE. SAVE or RETURN saves; CANCEL or ESC closes.

2454The factory groups

Twenty groups, 2454 kicks. The nineteen banks hold sixteen styles of eight kicks each; each bank kick was rendered and measured before it was kept, peaks near −1.5 dBTP and is over within 3.5 s. Every factory kick routes at least two Micros (most of them all six), each named for what it does.

GroupCC 0KicksStyles
K-Kicks022Hand-made: Techno Punch, 909 Classic, 808 Deep Sub, Rumble Techno, Hard Techno Slam, Trance Lift, Psy Tight, Hardstyle Wall, House Round, Deep House Soft, DnB Punch, Dubstep Heavy, Minimal Tick, Acoustic BD, Tight Acoustic, Analog Boom, Big Room, Lo-Fi Crunch, Industrial Hammer, Sub Boom, Electro Tom, Click Layer.
K-Techno1128Rumble, Peak Time, Hard, Minimal, Industrial, Deep, Hypnotic, Driving, Raw, Dub Techno, Tribal, Acid Kick, Hardgroove, Melodic, Schranz, Warehouse.
K-Trance2128Uplifting, Psytrance, Progressive, Goa, Hard Trance, Tech Trance, Full-On, Dark Psy, Classic 90s, Euphoric, Hi-Tech, Vocal Trance, Acid Trance, Dream, Big Room, Nitzhonot.
K-Heavy3128Hardstyle, Rawstyle, Hardcore, Gabber, Uptempo, Frenchcore, Industrial Hardcore, Jumpstyle, Hard Dance, Terror, Crossbreed, Drum & Bass, Neuro, Dubstep, Trap 808, Breakcore.
K-Pop4128Pop Tight, Hip Hop, Trap, House, Deep House, Future Bass, Big Room EDM, Lo-Fi, R&B, Funk, Disco, Reggaeton, Afrobeats, Drill, Indie Rock, Boom Bap.
K-DnB5128Liquid, Jump Up, Neurofunk, Jungle, Techstep, Darkstep, Rollers, Halftime, Drumfunk, Dancefloor, Deep DnB, Minimal DnB, Ragga Jungle, Crossover, Breakbeat Hardcore, Autonomic.
K-Dubstep6128Deep Dub, Riddim, Brostep, Melodic Dubstep, Tearout, Future Garage, Halftime 140, Wobble, Grime 140, Chillstep, Drumstep, Hybrid Trap, Colour Bass, Deathstep, Dungeon, UK Garage.
K-Hip-Hop7128Boom Bap, Trap 808, Drill, G-Funk, Crunk, Lo-Fi Hip Hop, Memphis, Jersey Club, Phonk, Cloud Rap, Jazz Rap, Grime, Afro Trap, Plugg, Hyphy, Old School Electro.
K-Oldies8128Rock n Roll, Motown, Soul, Surf, Merseybeat, Psychedelic, Krautrock, Seventies Funk, Seventies Disco, Reggae, Ska, Swing, Blues, Country, Eighties Linn, Eighties Synth. Mostly built on the BD head.
K-Acoustic9128Rock 22, Jazz 18, Metal, Funk Tight, Studio Pop, Vintage 60s, Marching, Orchestral, Taiko, Floor Tom, Cajon, Djembe, Surdo, Open Boomy, Damped, Folk. Built on the BD head.
K-House10128Deep House, Tech House, Jackin, Chicago, French Filter, Progressive House, Afro House, Melodic House, Microhouse, Garage House, Tribal House, Bass House, Big Room House, Lo-Fi House, Soulful, Acid House.
K-Electro11128Electro, Breaks, Big Beat, Electroclash, Nu-Disco, Synthwave, Italo, Miami Bass, Freestyle, Ghettotech, Electro House, Fidget, Complextro, Chiptune, Electro Funk, Footwork.
K-World12128Cumbia, Baile Funk, Kuduro, Afrobeat, Amapiano, Gqom, Dancehall, Soca, Bhangra, Moombahton, Guarachero, Balkan, Oriental, Kizomba, Dembow, Samba Funk.
K-Cinematic13128Trailer Boom, Sub Drop, Impact, Braam, Heartbeat, Earthquake, Cannon, Door Slam, Thunder, Deep Impact, War Drum, Pulse, Horror Thud, Sci-Fi Hit, Epic Hybrid, Riser Hit.
K-IDM14128Glitch, Microsound, Braindance, Clicks and Cuts, Granular, Broken Beat, Wonky, Deconstructed, Noise Kick, Bitcrush, Ring Mod, FM Kick, Tape Stop, Reverse Feel, Drill n Bass, Ambient Techno.
K-Industrial15128EBM, Industrial, Aggrotech, Dark Electro, Power Noise, Rhythmic Noise, Industrial Techno, Witch House, Darkwave, Minimal Wave, Coldwave, Goth Club, Futurepop, Cyberpunk, Harsh, Military.
K-Sub16128Pure Sine, Long 808, Short 808, Distorted 808, Saturated Sub, Reese Sub, Square Sub, Triangle Sub, Clicky Sub, Boomy 808, Tuned Kick, Deep 30, Octave Sub, Punchy Sub, Driven 808, Soft Sub. Subs and 808s to play as a bass line: KEY is on in every one (ROOT C2).
K-Machines17128Nine Oh Nine, Eight Oh Eight, Seven Oh Seven, Six Oh Six, Nine Oh Eight, Linn, DMX, SP Twelve, MPC, CR Seventy Eight, Simmons, RX, Volca, Modular, Analog Deep, Digital Crunch: the classic drum machines.
K-Downtempo18128Trip Hop, Chillout, Lounge, Psybient, Dub, Nu Jazz, Downbeat, Lo-Fi Beats, Ambient Dub, Glitch Hop, Future Chill, Chillwave, Vaporwave, Slowcore, Balearic, Organic.
K-Percussion19128Low Tom, Mid Tom, High Tom, Timbale, Conga, Bongo, Bayan, Udu, Frame Drum, Bodhran, Log Drum, Kick Tom, Rototom, Octoban, Timpani, Doum. Toms and hand drums, built on the BD head; KEY is on in Log Drum and Timpani.

The preset names come from the style: Concrete Rumbler is a Rumble kick of K-Techno.

Inside a bank the styles come in the order of the table, eight kicks each: the first style is programs 1–8 (program change 0–7), the second 9–16 (8–15), and so on. The 5th style, for example, is programs 33–40 (program change 32–39).

FILEWhat a preset keeps

A preset is a small text file, <name>.kkick. It keeps every sound control (VOICES, LEVEL, ROOT and KEY too), the twelve MOD slots, each Micro's name and rest, the group, and the path of the SAMPLE file if there is one.

It does not keep the AUDITION settings, where the Micros stand now, or your MIDI map: those belong to the host project.

QHow do I choose a factory kick?
  1. Click the SET box (it reads FACTORY and a group): the PRESETS panel opens.
  2. Under SET, choose FACTORY.
  3. Under GROUP, choose a group, for example K-Techno.
  4. Click a preset to load it and play the Kadabra to hear it; double-click loads it and closes the panel.
  5. Back in the window, ◀ ▶ step through the group; press HIT to hear each one.
QHow do I save my own kick?
  1. Press SAVE AS in the top bar (on your own preset it reads SAVE: click it and choose Save As…).
  2. Under SET, choose a User set, for example USER 1.
  3. Under GROUP, choose a group, or + NEW GROUP for a folder of your own (it is at the end of the list: scroll down over the GROUP column to reach it).
  4. Type the NAME.
  5. Press SAVE or RETURN.
QHow do I update a kick I saved?
  1. Load your preset: its name is orange and the button reads SAVE.
  2. Change the sound: SAVE turns amber.
  3. Click SAVE and choose Save: replace User 1 / group / name.
QHow do I reach the groups at the end of the GROUP list?
  1. Click the SET box: the PRESETS panel opens.
  2. Hold the mouse over the GROUP column (it reads scroll for more) and scroll down: the list moves one group per step.
  3. K-Percussion comes into view, and in a User set your own groups and + NEW GROUP.
  4. By MIDI no scrolling is needed: CC 32 = 0 and CC 0 = 19, then a program change, loads a K-Percussion kick.
QHow do I find the kicks of one style, for example 909s or congas?
  1. Find the style in the factory groups table: its group, and its place in the row. 909s are the 1st style of K-Machines; congas the 5th of K-Percussion.
  2. Click the SET box, choose FACTORY and that group.
  3. The style's eight kicks sit together: the 1st style is presets 1–8, the 2nd 9–16, the 5th 33–40.
  4. Double-click the first of them (it loads and closes the panel), then use ▶ and HIT to hear the other seven.
QHow do I play a bass line with an 808 from K-Sub?
  1. Click the SET box, choose FACTORY and K-Sub, and double-click a kick (the Long 808 style is presets 9–16).
  2. KEY is already lit in PITCH: the ROOT key (C2) plays END itself, and every key above or below moves it by that many semitones.
  3. Hover END: the status line gives its note and cents. Drag END onto the note you want, close to 0 ct.
  4. Right-click that same note on the piano roll to make it ROOT: now every key plays its own note.
  5. Play the line on the Kadabra or the piano roll, and save the preset into a User set.
QHow do I get a tom or a hand drum?
  1. Click the SET box, choose FACTORY, and scroll the GROUP column down to K-Percussion (CC 0 = 19).
  2. Pick by place: Low Tom 1–8, Mid Tom 9–16, High Tom 17–24, Timbale 25–32, Conga 33–40, Bongo 41–48, Bayan 49–56, Udu 57–64, Frame Drum 65–72, Bodhran 73–80, Log Drum 81–88, Kick Tom 89–96, Rototom 97–104, Octoban 105–112, Timpani 113–120, Doum 121–128.
  3. They are built on the BD head: in TOP · PUNCH, click the BD tab; TUNE sets the head's pitch, BEATER soft felt to hard wood.
  4. For an acoustic kick drum, taiko, cajon, djembe or surdo, try K-Acoustic (CC 0 = 9).
KICKThe hit as it will sound, its numbers, and EXPORT WAV
VIEWThe display

The hit as it will sound, drawn again a moment after any change (rendering the hit… while it is being made):

  • Blue: the waveform.
  • Violet: the amp envelope over it.
  • Orange: the pitch, on the scale at the right (50 Hz to 2 kHz marked).

Lines every 100 ms. It plays the audition's key at full velocity: the key last played by hand, ROOT until then.

LINEThe line under it

LENGTH 420 ms · PEAK -2.5 dBTP · END 45.0 Hz F#1 -47 ct · on C2, and at the right 0.88 beats at 126:

ItemMeaning
LENGTHUntil the hit falls under −60 dB.
PEAKIts true peak.
ENDThe pitch it really ends on, with the nearest note and how many cents off.
on C2The key it was played on.
beats at 126The length in beats at the host tempo (120 when there is none).
WAVEXPORT WAV

Writes the hit as a 24-bit WAV at the host's sample rate, cut where it ends. It is mono unless WIDTH makes the two sides differ, then stereo. The save dialog starts in ~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Kick/Exports with the preset's name. It plays the same key as the display.

QHow do I export the kick as a WAV file?
  1. Play the key you want on the piano roll or the Kadabra (the export plays that key; ROOT until one was played).
  2. Press EXPORT WAV in the KICK panel (or PRESET ▸ Export the hit as a WAV…).
  3. Choose the name and the folder (it starts in Exports), and save.
PITCHThe sweep and the punch over END, KEY and ROOT
GRAPHThe pitch graph

Semitones above END (up) against time (across, stretched so the first milliseconds are wide). The faint line is the sweep alone, the bright one the sweep plus the punch. Three points:

  • START: drag up and down.
  • DECAY: drag across.
  • PUNCH: drag up and down (its height) and across (P. TIME).

The scroll wheel over the graph sets CURVE. Double-click a point = its default; right-click = its menu. The numbers are written over the graph, and the bottom line reads END 48.0 Hz G1 -36 ct (plus at ROOT with KEY on).

KNOBSThe PITCH knobs

The body's pitch falls in two stages: a fast PUNCH in the first milliseconds, and the SWEEP from START down to END, which lands exactly at the end of its DECAY.

KnobRangeDefaultWhat it does
START0 – +72 st+36 stHow far above END the sweep starts: the drop that makes the punch.
DECAY5 ms – 2.00 s250 msHow long the sweep takes to land on END.
CURVE0 – 100 %60 %The sweep's shape: 0 a straight line, 100 % a sharp drop that lands early.
PUNCH0 – +60 st+24 stA second, much faster drop on top of the sweep.
P. TIME0.5 – 80 ms8.0 msHow long the punch's drop takes.
END20 – 200 Hz45.0 HzThe note the kick ends on (F1 to F2 is the dance floor). Under the mouse the status line adds its note and cents.

Velocity can scale START and PUNCH: see VEL→PUNCH in OUTPUT.

KEYKEY and ROOT

KEY (default off): END follows the key you play. On the ROOT key the kick plays END itself; every key above or below moves it by that many semitones. Off, every key plays the same pitch.

ROOT C2 (default C2) opens a list from C1 to C4. Right-click any key on the piano roll to make it ROOT. ROOT is also the key the HIT pad and AUDITION play until you play one by hand, and the centre of the KEY source in MOD. Note names: C4 = MIDI note 60.

QHow do I tune the kick to my song?
  1. Hover END in PITCH: the status line shows END PITCH with its note and cents.
  2. Drag END up or down until the note is your song's key note, close to 0 ct.
  3. Check the KICK line: END … Hz is the pitch the hit really ends on.
QHow do I make the kick follow the keys I play?
  1. In PITCH, click KEY to light it.
  2. Click ROOT and choose the key that should play END itself (or right-click that key on the piano roll).
  3. Play: every key away from ROOT moves the kick's note by that many semitones.
QHow do I get more punch at the start of the kick?
  1. In PITCH, raise PUNCH and keep P. TIME short (a few ms).
  2. Raise START for a drop from higher up; raise CURVE to make it land sooner.
  3. For more snap, raise ATTACK under TRANSIENT in AMP, or the CLICK's LEVEL.
OSCThe body's wave, and the sub under it
OSCThe OSC controls

The display shows one cycle of the body's wave as it plays, the sub faint under it, and the start phase as an orange line. Its corner names the wave: sine, sine → triangle, triangle → saw, saw → square.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
SHAPE0 – 100 %0 %The wave: sine, then triangle, saw, square. More harmonics as it turns.
HARM0 – 100 %0 %Harmonics driven into the wave: a sine grows an edge.
PHASE0 – 359°0°Where in its cycle the body starts. 0 is the cleanest start.
SUB0 – 100 %30 %A sine under the body, following the same sweep (the same as SUB in MIX).
SUB OCT -1 / -2−1 or −2−1The sub one or two octaves under the body. Click to switch.

The body's own level is BODY in MIX.

TOP · PUNCHThree layers over the body: CLICK, BD and SAMPLE
TABSThe three tabs

Click CLICK, BD or SAMPLE to show that layer's controls. A tab outlined in orange, with brighter letters, is a layer that is heard (its LEVEL is above zero). All three can sound together; their levels are also in MIX. The tab you left open is remembered.

CLICKCLICK

White noise through a filter, gone in its own DECAY: the tick at the front of a kick.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
HIGH · BAND · LOWHIGHWhat the filter keeps: above TONE, around it, or below it.
LEVEL0 – 100 %50 %The click's level.
DECAY1 – 300 ms12 msHow long it lasts.
TONE200 Hz – 12.0 kHz3.0 kHzWhere it sits.
Q0 – 100 %30 %How narrow the filter is: a wide hiss to a pitched tick.
BDBD: a struck bass drum head

A model of a real bass drum: a round head with eight ringing modes, hit by a beater, with the shell's resonance. Nothing is sampled. Under the knobs a strip shows where the modes sit (orange) and the shell (violet), with head 80 Hz, 8 modes, 250 ms · shell 192 Hz.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
LEVEL0 – 100 %0 %The drum's level. At 100 % it peaks about like the body.
TUNE40 – 200 Hz80.0 HzThe head's pitch: 60–80 Hz is a kick drum, 100 and up a tom.
DECAY20 – 1500 ms250 msHow long the head rings.
BEATER0 – 100 %50 %Soft felt (left) to hard wood (right): a harder beater rings the higher modes and snaps.
BEND0 – +24 st+6 stThe head's pitch drop right after the hit: the acoustic thump.
TONE0 – 100 %50 %How much of the higher modes is heard, and how long they ring.
SHELL0 – 100 %30 %The shell's resonance, a little above the head.
SAMPLESAMPLE: a file of your own

A sound file played with every hit, pitched, started where you choose, cut by its own decay and high-passed out of the sub. Click the file box for its menu: Load a sample… (any .wav / .aiff / .flac / .mp3), Clear the sample, Show the file in Finder, Open the Samples folder. CLEAR takes it out. The waveform shows the file with its rate, mono or stereo, and length; click in it to move START (the green line). The knobs are dimmed until a file is loaded.

ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
LEVEL0 – 100 %0 %The sample's level.
PITCH−24 – +24 st+0 stTransposed in semitones.
START0 – 100 %0 %Where in the file it starts.
DECAYwhole – 2.00 swholeCut by its own fade; whole plays it to its end.
HI-PASSOff – 2.0 kHzOffKeeps the sample out of the sub.

The preset keeps the file's path, not the sound itself: leave the file where it is (the Samples folder is a good home).

QHow do I add a click on top?
  1. In TOP · PUNCH, click the CLICK tab.
  2. Raise LEVEL.
  3. Choose HIGH, BAND or LOW.
  4. Set TONE (where it sits) and Q (how narrow).
  5. Keep DECAY short for a tick, longer for a hiss.
QHow do I make it sound like a real bass drum?
  1. In TOP · PUNCH, click the BD tab and raise LEVEL.
  2. Set TUNE: 60–80 Hz for a kick drum, 100 Hz and up for a tom.
  3. Turn BEATER left for felt, right for wood.
  4. Set DECAY, BEND, TONE and SHELL by ear.
  5. For mostly drum, lower BODY in MIX. The K-Acoustic group starts you off.
QHow do I layer my own sample?
  1. In TOP · PUNCH, click the SAMPLE tab.
  2. Click the file box and choose Load a sample…; pick a .wav, .aiff, .flac or .mp3.
  3. Raise LEVEL.
  4. Click in the waveform where it should start.
  5. Set PITCH, DECAY and HI-PASS, then save the preset.
ENVThe amp envelope, drawn or as knobs; 1-SHOT or GATE
VIEWVISUAL and KNOBS

The button beside ENV switches the view (it is remembered):

  • VISUAL (default): the envelope as a curve with four points. Drag A, H and D across, CURVE up and down. Double-click a point = its default; right-click = its menu. The graph reads A 0.5 ms H 30 ms D 420 ms CURVE 60% and 450 ms: 0.95 beats at 126. In GATE a small REL knob sits at its bottom right.
  • KNOBS: the same settings as five knobs, with the hit lasts … ms under them.
ENVThe envelope settings
ControlRangeDefaultWhat it does
ATTACK (A)0.1 – 50 ms0.5 msFrom the hit to full level. Short = a snap.
HOLD (H)0 – 500 ms20 msHow long full level stays.
DECAY (D)20 ms – 4.00 s500 msFrom full level to silence: the kick's length.
CURVE0 – 100 %60 %The decay's shape: 0 a straight line, 100 % a sharp fall.
RELEASE (REL)1 ms – 2.00 s30 msGATE only: the fade after you let go of the key.
1-SHOT / GATE1-SHOT1-SHOT (plays out whole): the hit plays out whatever the key does. GATE (note-off releases): letting go fades it over RELEASE.
QHow do I make the kick shorter or longer?
  1. In ENV, drag the D point left (shorter) or right (longer). In KNOBS view, turn DECAY.
  2. Use HOLD to keep full level longer before the fall, and CURVE to shape it.
  3. Read the length and the beats at the bottom of the graph.
  4. To change how long the pitch falls, use DECAY in PITCH.
QHow do I make the kick stop when I let go of the key?
  1. In ENV, click 1-SHOT: it becomes GATE.
  2. Set the fade with the REL knob at the bottom right of the graph (or RELEASE in KNOBS view).
FILTEROne filter on the whole hit, with its own envelope
FILTERThe FILTER controls

After the layers, before the AMP. OFF (default) costs nothing (off: nothing runs). LOW, BAND and HIGH are 12 dB filters.

KnobRangeDefaultWhat it does
CUTOFF20 Hz – 20.0 kHz20.0 kHzThe filter's frequency. MIDI CC 74 by default.
RESO0 – 100 %0 %A peak at the cutoff. MIDI CC 71 by default.
ENV−96 – +96 st+0 stHow far the filter's own envelope moves the cutoff at the hit, up or down.
DECAY5 ms – 2.00 s150 msHow long that envelope takes to come back.
KEY0 – 100 %0 %How much the cutoff follows the key away from ROOT: 100 % = the same brightness on every key.
AMPDrive of five kinds, a transient shaper and a clipper
DRIVEDrive

Choose the kind in the list beside AMP (default Soft). The line at the bottom describes it, or says drive at zero: nothing runs.

KindSound
SoftA tanh, every harmonic.
TubeAsymmetric, even harmonics, warm.
TapeA soft knee and a dull top.
HardA straight clip, bright and flat.
FoldThe wave folded back, metallic.
KnobRangeDefaultWhat it does
DRIVE0 – 100 %0 %How hard the hit goes into the shaper (up to 26 dB): warmth, then grit.
TONE−100 – +100 %+0 %A tilt after the drive: darker left, brighter right.
MIX0 – 100 %100 %How much of the driven sound replaces the clean one.
TRANSTRANSIENT

ATTACK (−100 to +100 %, default +0 %): up for more snap at the front, down for less. SUSTAIN (same range): up for a longer, fuller tail, down for a tighter one. Each works up to 12 dB.

CLIPCLIP and INTO

CLIP (default off) is a ceiling the hit is pushed into, for loudness. INTO (0–100 %, default 30 %) is how hard, up to 20 dB; it is dimmed while CLIP is off.

QHow do I make the kick harder and louder?
  1. In AMP, choose the drive kind in the list (Soft, Tube, Tape, Hard, Fold).
  2. Raise DRIVE; set TONE and MIX.
  3. Click CLIP and raise INTO for loudness.
  4. Watch PEAK in the KICK line and LIMIT in SAFETY.
EQOn the output, over the live spectrum: HP, LP, two notches and a bell
GRAPHThe graph and its points

The bars are the output's spectrum (20 Hz to 20 kHz); the line is the EQ's curve. Four switches above it: EQ (the whole EQ, default off: nothing runs), N1, N2 and BELL (each off by default). Drag the points:

  • HP and LP: across.
  • N1, N2: across for the frequency, up for narrower, down for wider.
  • BELL: across for the frequency, up and down for the gain.

The scroll wheel over N1, N2 or BELL sets its Q. Double-click a point = its default. A moved point sweeps smoothly, without steps.

EQThe EQ settings

The sliders at the right show the values; the notch and bell frequencies are under them (N1 400 Hz N2 2.5 kHz BELL 60.0 Hz) and move with their points.

SettingRangeDefaultWhat it does
HP20 Hz – 2.0 kHz20.0 HzBelow this is cut, 12 dB an octave.
LP200 Hz – 20.0 kHz20.0 kHzAbove this is cut, 12 dB an octave.
N1 / N2 (point)40 Hz – 16.0 kHz400 Hz / 2.5 kHzA notch: one frequency taken out.
N1 Q / N2 Q0.5 – 30Q 4.0The notch's width: 0.5 wide, 30 hair-thin.
BELL (point)20 Hz – 4.0 kHz60.0 HzA boost or a cut around one frequency.
BELL dB−12 – +12 dB+0.0 dBThe bell's gain.
BELL Q0.3 – 8Q 1.0The bell's width.
QHow do I take out a boomy frequency?
  1. In EQ, click EQ and N1 to light them.
  2. Play the kick and drag the N1 point across to the boom; the spectrum bars show where it is.
  3. Drag the point up (narrower) or down (wider), or scroll over it.
  4. For a gentler, wider cut, use BELL with a negative gain instead.
MODEleven sources, twelve slots: who moves what, and how far
CHIPSThe source chips

Along the top of MOD: KEY (with the audition key and how far it is from ROOT, KEY C2 +0), VELOCITY, the six Micros by the names this preset gives them (1 TUNE … 6 WEIGHT), RANDOM, WHEEL and ALTERNATE.

  • A number in a circle = how many controls it moves.
  • A thin bar along the bottom = its value now (the Micros, the wheel, the last velocity).
  • Colours: Micros 1–3 blue, 4–6 orange, KEY and VELOCITY cyan, WHEEL pink, ALTERNATE green, RANDOM yellow.
  • Click a chip to choose it; click it again when done.
ARCSSetting a route from the knobs

With a chip chosen, every control it can move shows a faint ring, and a bright arc shows where the source takes it at its full swing. For a moment, the controls it moves are boxed in its colour, with a line from the chip to each; a Micro's chip also outlines the MICROS panel.

  • Drag a knob up (more) or down (less, or the other way): 150 pixels is the whole swing. Sliders: drag across. The LEVEL fader works too.
  • Double-click the knob = this source no longer moves it.
  • The status line lists what it moves: 1 TUNE → End Pitch +15 %.

A new route takes the first free slot. With all twelve in use: all 12 modulation slots are in use -- free one in MOD.

SLOTSThe twelve slots

Three columns of four, numbered 1–12. Each slot is a SOURCE list → a TARGET list → a DEPTH slider (−100 to +100 %, default +0 %): right adds, left takes away. A coloured stripe on the source shows a slot that is working. Several slots on one target add up. The slots are saved with the preset.

SOURCEThe sources
SourceIts value
KeyHow far the key played sits from ROOT: two octaves up = +100 %, two down = −100 %. On End Pitch at +100 % the kick follows the keyboard.
VelocityHow hard the key was hit, 0 to 100 %, fixed for that hit.
Micro 1 – 3Rest in the middle and swing both ways (−100 to +100 %).
Micro 4 – 6Rest at zero and go up to 100 %.
RandomA new draw between −100 and +100 % at every hit.
WheelThe mod wheel (CC 1), 0 to 100 %.
Alternate+100 % on one hit, −100 % on the next, and so on.

A hit reads its sources when it starts. The Micros and the wheel also keep moving the live targets (levels, DRIVE, TONE, MIX, CLIP, TRANSIENT, CUTOFF, RESO, WIDTH, LEVEL) while the hit sounds; on every other target they count from the next hit.

TARGETThe 35 targets and how far ±100 % reaches
TargetsAt ±100 %
End Pitch±2 octaves.
Start, Punch±24 semitones.
Pitch Decay, Punch Time, Click Decay, BD Decay, Decay, Filter Decay4 times longer or shorter (±2 octaves of time).
Attack8 times longer or shorter.
Hold±200 ms.
Click Tone±3 octaves.
BD Tune±1 octave.
Cutoff±4 octaves.
Sample Pitch±12 semitones.
Filter Env±48 semitones.
Level±12 dB.
Pitch Curve, Shape, Harmonics, Body, Sub, Click, BD, BD Beater, Sample, Decay Curve, Resonance, Drive, Mix, Clip, Width, Tone, Transient Atk, Transient Sus±100 % added to the knob.

The result always stays inside the control's own range.

VIEWA source chosen
The 1 TUNE chip chosen: END is boxed with a line from the chip, its arc shows how far Micro 1 moves it, slot 1 is boxed and the MICROS panel is outlined.
QHow do I make a Micro move a control?
  1. In MOD, click the Micro's chip, for example 4 DRIVE.
  2. Drag the knob it should move: up for more, down for the other way. The arc shows how far it goes.
  3. Move that Micro on the Kadabra (or its knob in MICROS) to hear it.
  4. Click the chip again when done, and save the preset.
QHow do I set a modulation slot by hand?
  1. In MOD, find a slot whose SOURCE reads None.
  2. Click SOURCE and pick one, for example Velocity.
  3. Click TARGET and pick what it moves, for example Click.
  4. Drag DEPTH right to add, left to take away.
QHow do I remove a modulation?
  1. In MOD, click the source's chip.
  2. Double-click the knob it moves: that route is gone and its slot is free.
  3. Or, in the slot itself, set SOURCE to None, or double-click DEPTH to bring it back to +0%.
QHow do I make every hit a little different?
  1. In OUTPUT, raise RND PITCH (up to 100 cents) and RND LEVEL (up to 6 dB).
  2. For more, click RANDOM in MOD and drag a knob such as DECAY or the CLICK's TONE a little: every hit takes a new value.
  3. ALTERNATE does the same as an up, down, up swing, hit by hit.
MICROSThe Kadabra's six sensors on CC 21–26, named by each preset
MICROThe MICROS panel

Six knobs, numbered 1–6, for the Kadabra's motion sensors on CC 21–26. Each is named for what it does in this preset (TUNE, LENGTH, PUNCH, DRIVE, TOP, WEIGHT …); a preset that names none shows TUNE, LENGTH, PUNCH, DRIVE, TOP, FILTER.

  • 1–3 (blue) rest in the middle and swing both ways (−100 to +100 %). 4–6 (orange) rest at zero (0 to 100 %).
  • A small light beside a knob flashes when its CC arrives.
  • A dimmed knob moves nothing in this preset: a Micro only works through a MOD route.
  • Turning a knob here does what moving the sensor does.

MENUA Micro's right-click menu
  • Name this Micro in the preset… – the name on its knob and its MOD chip.
  • Rest here – the preset loads with this Micro where it stands now.
  • Reset to its rest – back to the rest (double-click does the same).
  • MIDI Learn – give it another CC.

Names and rests are saved in the preset. Where the Micros stand now is saved in the host project.

QHow do I name a Micro and choose where it rests?
  1. In MICROS, right-click the Micro's knob and choose Name this Micro in the preset…; type the name.
  2. Turn the knob to where it should start.
  3. Right-click it again and choose Rest here.
  4. Save the preset: the name and the rest are kept in it.
MIX, AUDITION & the piano rollThe five layer levels, the kick played for you, and the keyboard at the right
MIXMIX

The five layers' levels in one place, each 0–100 %: BODY (default 100 %), SUB (30 %), CLICK (50 %), BD (0 %), SAMPLE (0 %). SUB, CLICK, BD and SAMPLE are the same settings as the levels in OSC and TOP · PUNCH; BODY lives only here. A name is dimmed while its layer is at zero.

AUDAUDITION

The kick played for you on a bar of sixteenths.

  • OFF / ON (default off).
  • 16 steps, the beats numbered 1–4. Click a step to light it, or drag across to paint. Lit by default: 1, 5, 9, 13 (every beat). The step playing turns orange.
  • While the host plays, it follows the host's grid exactly; while it stands, it runs at the host tempo (120 BPM without one).
  • The KEY box shows the key it plays: the last one played by hand (last played), or ROOT (= ROOT) until then.
  • VEL: the velocity it plays with (default 90 %).

The AUDITION settings are saved in the host project, not in a preset.

HITThe HIT pad

Press HIT for a hit on the audition's key, held while the mouse is down. Where you press sets the velocity: soft at the left edge, loud at the right.

KEYSThe piano roll
  • Every key the kick plays lights up, from MIDI too.
  • Click a key to play it: its left part soft, its right part loud. Drag up or down to play the keys you pass. That key becomes the audition's key.
  • Right-click a key to make it ROOT.
  • An orange tag marks ROOT C2; a blue tag HIT … marks the audition's key when it is not ROOT.
QHow do I play a pattern to test the kick?
  1. In AUDITION, click OFF so it reads ON.
  2. Click steps to light them, or drag across to paint them.
  3. Set VEL.
  4. Click a key on the piano roll to choose the key it plays.
  5. Tweak the sound while it plays; click ON again to stop.
OUTPUT, LEVEL & SAFETYWidth, bend, what velocity moves, humanize, the master faders and the fixed last stage
OUTOUTPUT
KnobRangeDefaultWhat it does
WIDTH0 – 100 %0 %Stereo width on the top, above 200 Hz. The low end stays mono and the mono sum never changes.
BEND0 – 24 st2How far the pitch wheel bends the kick.
VEL→PUNCH0 – 100 %30 %How much velocity scales START and PUNCH: a soft hit drops less.
VEL→TOP0 – 100 %50 %How much velocity scales the TOP layers: a soft hit clicks less.
VEL→DRIVE0 – 100 %0 %How much velocity scales DRIVE: a hard hit drives more.
RND PITCH0 – 100 ct0 ctHumanize: every hit a little sharp or flat, up to this much.
RND LEVEL0 – 6 dB0.0 dBHumanize: every hit a little louder or softer.
LEVELLEVEL and VEL (the KADABRA column)

LEVEL is the wide fader with a grip: the whole instrument's level, marked +6, 0, −6, −24, −60 and −∞ dB (default −1.9 dB). MIDI CC 7 by default; it is saved with the preset. Its changes glide, so moving it never clicks.

VEL is the thin line beside it: how much the key's velocity sets the loudness, from off (every hit as loud) to 100 % (soft keys quiet). Default 60 %.

SAFETYSAFETY

The fixed last stage: no preset and no control can switch it off. It protects your speakers and ears.

ReadoutMeaning
ScopeThe output, the last 85 ms.
LIMITHow much the limiter holds the output down right now (orange, red past −6 dB). The ceiling is −0.3 dBTP.
LOADHow much of the audio time K-Kick takes (green, orange past 60 %, red past 85 %); OVERLOAD when the computer cannot keep up.
0.50 ms · NaN 0 · chokes 0Its delay, how many times a broken number was caught, how many hits were choked.

The guards: a NaN guard (a broken number fades to silence instead of a burst), a DC blocker, a load governor (an overloaded computer lets hits go, then fades to silence rather than crackling, and comes back), the true-peak limiter (0.5 ms look-ahead), a clip guard and a 50 ms fade-in at start.

MIDI, K-Player & Kadabra OSWhat K-Kick hears, presets by program change, MIDI learn, and how it fits the Kadabra
MIDIWhat K-Kick hears
MessageWhat it does
NotesEvery note is a hit, exactly on time. Velocity sets the loudness (VEL) and what OUTPUT's VEL→ knobs move. Any key plays; with KEY on, the key sets the pitch.
Pitch bendBends the kick over BEND semitones.
CC 1The mod wheel: the WHEEL source in MOD.
CC 7LEVEL.
CC 21 – 26Micro 1 – 6.
CC 71 · CC 74RESO · CUTOFF.
CC 0 · CC 32The group and the set the next program change counts in. Always, whatever is learned.
Program changeLoads that preset of the group (0 = the first).
CC 123All notes off: the hits fade over RELEASE.
CC 120All sound off: everything silent at once, the EQ and the limiter cleared.

The CCs above are where a new K-Kick starts; MIDI learn can change them.

PROGPresets by MIDI
  • CC 32 = the set: 0 the Factory, 1 User 1, 2 User 2 …
  • CC 0 = the group: 0 K-Kicks, 1 K-Techno, 2 K-Trance, 3 K-Heavy, 4 K-Pop, 5 K-DnB, 6 K-Dubstep, 7 K-Hip-Hop, 8 K-Oldies, 9 K-Acoustic, 10 K-House, 11 K-Electro, 12 K-World, 13 K-Cinematic, 14 K-IDM, 15 K-Industrial, 16 K-Sub, 17 K-Machines, 18 K-Downtempo, 19 K-Percussion, then your own groups (20 and up).
  • A program change then counts inside them: 0 is the group's first preset (program 1 in the top bar).

The two numbers stay set until new ones arrive. The SET box and the PRESETS panel show the numbers of every set and group. A number with no preset writes … program N: no such preset in the status line.

LEARNMIDI learn

Every knob, slider, switch and list can be moved by a CC. Right-click it:

  • MIDI Learn (it shows now CC n when it has one): the status line reads MIDI LEARN: move a controller for … (click anywhere to cancel), and the next CC takes it.
  • Choose MIDI CC ▸ none, or a range (0-15 … 112-127) ▸ the number. Each number shows what it moves now.

One CC moves one control. A CC that drives a Micro is never taken by MIDI Learn (the motion sensors send all the time); to give CC 21–26 to something else, use Choose MIDI CC. When a CC moves a control, the status line shows CC 74 → Cutoff for a moment. The map is kept in midi-learn.txt and in each project.

KPInside K-Player

Load K-Kick into the + Instrument box of a MIDI channel. It hears that channel's MIDI only: the Kadabra's notes, its CCs, and program changes with their bank select in front. The box's MIDI button and B (bypass) work as for every plug-in. K-Kick's state, sound and MIDI map included, is saved in the K-Player session.

OSWith Kadabra OS
  • Notes: the sound's channel plays the kick; how hard you play sets loudness and punch.
  • Motion sensors (set up in the Senser shape): CC 21–26 move the six Micros, and so whatever the preset routes them to.
  • Program change (the Sounder shape's sound number): picks a preset in the current group.
  • Other CCs (an FXer combi, a motion axis): MIDI-learn them onto any control.

GENK-Player's Stem Trainer uses its kicks

When K-Kick is installed, the song generator in K-Player's Stem Trainer takes most of its kicks from K-Kick's presets, as they were made, a different one each song (the least used first). The GENERATE strip says KICKS: K-Kick, N presets - a different one each song. Presets that hold a SAMPLE are left out. This is for training only, not for playing.

QHow do I pick a K-Kick preset from the Kadabra?
  1. Look up the numbers in the PRESETS panel: the set (CC 32) and the group (CC 0 = …).
  2. Send CC 32 with the set (0 = Factory) and CC 0 with the group (1 = K-Techno).
  3. Send a program change: 0 is the group's first preset. On the Kadabra the Sounder shape sends one.
  4. In K-Player, send them on the channel K-Kick sits on.
QHow do I MIDI-learn a knob?
  1. Right-click the knob (or ctrl-click) and choose MIDI Learn.
  2. Move the control on the Kadabra, for example an FXer combi.
  3. The knob now shows CCnn.
  4. To choose the number yourself, use Choose MIDI CC ▸ a range ▸ the number; Choose MIDI CC ▸ none clears it.
Files, troubleshooting & not yetWhere K-Kick keeps its things, what a project remembers, common fixes
DIRSFolders
WhatWhere
Your presets~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Kick/Banks/User 1/<group>/<name>.kkick (User 2 …)
The Factory as files/Library/Application Support/Tribal-Tools/K-Kick/Factory/<group>/, read first when it is there. The same kicks are also built into the plug-in.
Samples~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Kick/Samples (where Load a sample… starts)
Exports~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Kick/Exports
MIDI map~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Kick/midi-learn.txt
Window settings~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Kick/settings.txt (VISUAL / KNOBS and the open TOP tab)
The plug-inK-Kick.vst3 in ~/Library/Audio/Plug-Ins/VST3 or /Library/Audio/Plug-Ins/VST3

The folder sits beside K-Synth's and K-Sampler's. To move a preset to another Mac, copy its .kkick file into a group folder there (and its sample, if it has one, then load the sample again).

PROJWhat a project remembers

The host project (or K-Player session) keeps the sound, the preset's file, the MIDI map, the AUDITION settings and where the Micros stand.

When the project opens and the preset's file is still there, K-Kick loads the file. So keep a changed sound with SAVE or SAVE AS before you close the project.

QHow do I update K-Kick to a new version?
  1. Open the new version's installer (Install K-Kick … .pkg) and install it.
  2. It replaces K-Kick.vst3 and the Factory's group folders. Your own presets in ~/Music/Tribal-Tools/K-Kick/Banks stay as they are.
  3. Let your host rescan its plug-ins.
  4. Check the version beside K-KICK in the top bar (v0.3.1), or click the TRIBAL TOOLS logo.
FIXTroubleshooting
  • No sound: press HIT. If you hear it, the MIDI is not arriving: in K-Player check the channel's MIDI IN and that B (bypass) is off. If not, check LEVEL and the MIX levels.
  • A Micro does nothing: its knob is dimmed, so no MOD slot routes it. Click its chip and drag a knob.
  • A program change does nothing: CC 0 and CC 32 point at a group or set without that many presets; the status line says no such preset.
  • the Factory is read-only: save into a User set: choose USER 1 (or another) in SAVE AS.
  • cannot load … after a preset loads: its sample file moved. Load it again in the SAMPLE tab and save.
  • The tempo reads no tempo: the host gives none; the AUDITION runs at 120 BPM.
SOONNot there yet
  • Mac only, as a VST3: no Windows, Linux or Kadabra-board version yet.
  • No LFO or second envelope as a MOD source, no second body oscillator.
  • No reverb or room on the top, no pan per layer.
  • The SAMPLE layer only sets its START: no end point and no loop.
Kadabra Ecosystem · Plug-ins

K-Plugins

The plug-ins that come with Kadabra and how they sit inside K-Player: K-Channel, K-Sampler and Surge XT.

The Kadabra OS Full Installation puts Tribal-Tools' own VST3 plug-ins in /Library/Audio/Plug-Ins/VST3, where K-Player and every other DAW find them. K-Channel is the channel strip (EQ, Gate, Compressor). K-Sampler is the pad instrument and has its own chapter. Surge XT is the free synthesizer that Kadabra's synth sounds are built on; it is installed separately, before the Kadabra bundle.
Inside K-Player every plug-in sits in a box: an Instrument box (MIDI channels, the K-SAMPLER box of a deck) or one of three insert boxes on a channel, a bus, a deck or the master. Every box has a MIDI button (learn any parameter to a Kadabra CC) and a B button (bypass).
Back to top
K-ChannelThe channel strip: 5-band EQ with analyzer, Gate, Compressor, Output
STRIPWhat K-Channel is

A dedicated channel strip with low latency, high sound quality and a small CPU footprint, made for Kadabra by IMI and Tribal-Tools. It bundles a 5-band EQ with a frequency display, a Gate for noise removal and rhythmic effects, and a Compressor for gain and punch, then an Output fader with a meter. It exposes 25 automatable parameters, so every knob can be learned to a Kadabra combi or motion axis from K-Player's parameter panel.

Typical places: insert 1 of a drum or vocal channel, the INPUT strip's inserts (a microphone), or the MASTER strip's inserts as the final chain. Presets and About are in the plug-in's header.

EQThe EQ

EQ On/Off sits above the curve display (±18 dB). Five bands, each with an on/off light and a type icon, a frequency knob, and (for the shelves and the peak) a gain knob; the peak band also has a Q knob. The numbered nodes 0 – 4 on the curve are the bands: drag a node to set frequency and gain directly.

BandTypeDefaults
0Low cut (high-pass)20 Hz
1Low shelf100 Hz, 0.0 dB
2Peak (bell)680 Hz, 0.0 dB, Q 1.50
3High shelf4.10 kHz, 0.0 dB
4High cut (low-pass)20.00 kHz
GATEGate

Switch it on with its light. Thresh (default −100 dB, fully open): the level under which the signal is silenced. Attack (default 0 ms) and Release (default 50 ms): how fast it opens and closes. Raise the threshold to remove hum and bleed between notes, or set a fast release for chopped, rhythmic pads.

COMPCompressor

Switch it on with its light. Thresh (default 0.0 dB), Ratio (default 1.0:1), Attack (default 50 ms), Release (default 150 ms). The orange bar beside the knobs is the gain-reduction meter (−6, −12, −18 dB marks). Lower the threshold and raise the ratio until the meter moves on the loud hits, then bring the Output up to match.

OUTOutput

The output fader (default 0.0 dB) with a stereo meter and clip lights. Use it to make up the gain the compressor took away, so bypassing the plug-in (the B button in K-Player) compares at equal loudness.

FXerPlaying K-Channel from the Kadabra
  1. In K-Player, hover the K-Channel box and press MIDI (EDIT on the PLAYER page).
  2. Click the CC chip of the parameter (say the low-shelf gain) and move an FXer combi's amount, or a Senser motion axis, on the Kadabra: the number is learned.
  3. Back in PERFORM, that combi or motion now moves the knob live, and the plug-in window follows.
Surge XT, K-Sampler and the older Kadabra samplersWhat else is in the bundle, and what replaced what
SURGESurge XT

Surge XT is the open-source synthesizer that Kadabra's synth sounds run on. It is downloaded from your account's Software & License page and must be installed before the Kadabra OS Full Installation. In the Starter session it plays the Bass and Pad channels. A Kadabra program change (with bank select) really changes its patch, so the Sounder shape can step through Kadabra's own Surge patch banks. Its window opens from its box in K-Player.

KSK-Sampler

Kadabra's pad sampler instrument. It has its own chapter:

OLDThe older Kadabra sampler plug-ins

Earlier bundles installed five separate instruments (Kadabra Electronic Drumkit, Acoustic Drums, Percussion, Grand Piano, Electric Piano, in /Library/Audio/Plug-Ins/VST3/K-Samplers). On the Mac they are replaced by K-Sampler: their sounds were recorded key by key, velocity by velocity, into K-Sampler's factory banks of the same names, with the velocity layers and round robins kept. Old sessions that still name them keep working while the plug-ins are installed; new sessions use K-Sampler.

VST3Any other VST3

K-Player hosts any VST3 in /Library/Audio/Plug-Ins/VST3 or ~/Library/Audio/Plug-Ins/VST3. It scans each one in a separate helper process, so a crashing plug-in is simply blacklisted with its reason (RESCAN BAD in the browser tries again) and K-Player keeps running. Every plug-in's exact state is saved in the session.

Kadabra Ecosystem · Assistant

KAI

Kadabra's Artificial Intelligence: ask how to do anything on your Kadabra, by typing or by speaking, right inside Kadabra OS.

KAI is a window inside Kadabra OS that knows this whole manual. Ask in your own words: KAI answers with the steps and with the manual's pictures, the Kadabra OS screen with the Combi marked and photos of the buttons to press.
KAI has 3 modes, the buttons at the top of its window: ONLINE (KAI's AI answers any question, over the internet), INTERNAL (KAI finds the answer in the manual on this computer: no internet, free and instant) and MANUAL (this manual itself, by chapter, with a search).
KAI speaks 9 languages: English, Hebrew, Arabic, Spanish, French, Portuguese, Japanese, Korean and Hindi. The Kadabra's own names (the Shapes, Thumb 1, Combi 7) stay in English, as on the Kadabra OS screen.
• KAI will grow: the plan is a creative assistant with its own Shape inside Kadabra OS, helping with rhythms, arpeggios, genres, intros and outros, songs and samplers. This chapter will grow with it.
Back to top
Asking KAIOpen it, ask in your own words, read the answer with its pictures
OPENWhere KAI is

In Kadabra OS, the top menu row has a KAI button with two choices: Ask AI opens KAI's window, Report opens it on its report form. Closing the window only hides it: open it again and your conversation is still there.

QHow do I ask KAI a question?
  1. Open KAI: the KAI button in Kadabra OS, then Ask AI.
  2. Pick a mode at the top: INTERNAL (free, works offline) or ONLINE (KAI's AI).
  3. Type your question in the box at the bottom, in your own words, and press Enter.
  4. Read the answer: its steps first, then its pictures. Click a picture to see it large.
  5. Ask the next question, or press NEW CHAT to start again. Esc stops an answer.
InfoONLINE, INTERNAL and MANUAL: which one to use
  • INTERNAL finds the answer in the manual on this computer: no internet, no AI, free and instant. It is the best place to start, and it is the one that follows your Kadabra step by step.
  • ONLINE is KAI's AI: it understands any question, even a long or unusual one, and can look at a picture you add (paste it, drop it on the window, or press +). It needs the internet, and each answer takes one action.
  • MANUAL is this manual inside KAI: pick a chapter, or type words to find every place they appear. READ IT IN YOUR BROWSER opens the whole manual as one page, from this computer.
TipGood questions

Name the Shape and what you want to do: "In the Looper, how do I quantize a loop?", "Which Combi sets the Viber's gate length?", "How do I make a Sound follow live harmony?". The names on the Kadabra OS screen (a Shape, a Thumb, a Combi's name) find the answer fastest. KAI also knows where your Kadabra is now, so "what does this Combi do?" works too.

ActionsWhat ONLINE costs: actions

Each ONLINE answer takes one action. Every new KAI starts with 100 welcome actions. More: press ACTIONS at the top, then ADD next to a pack (50 actions for $5): the payment page opens in your browser, and KAI adds the actions by itself once it is paid. A boost code from Tribal-Tools goes in the same panel (Have a boost code?, then ADD). When an answer fails, its action comes back. INTERNAL and MANUAL are always free.

QHow do I change KAI's language?
  1. Click LANGUAGE at the bottom right of KAI's window.
  2. Pick your language.
  3. ONLINE answers in it at once. INTERNAL and MANUAL download its language pack once (a few MB), then work in it offline.
Talking with KAIAsk by voice, from the Kadabra too, and hear KAI's answers
InfoKAI's engine

KAI hears you with its engine, a program that runs on this computer, with no internet: your voice never leaves the computer. It comes with the KAI Engine installer (GET ENGINE at the top of KAI's window), or with the full Kadabra installer. It runs only while it is switched on (ENGINE ON), at a low priority so the music always comes first, and switches itself off after 10 minutes unused. For now the engine is for Macs with Apple silicon (M1 or newer, macOS 12 or newer).

QHow do I speak a question to KAI?
  1. Switch KAI's engine on: ENGINE OFF at the top (or just hold the mic: KAI wakes it).
  2. Hold the mic button next to the question box (or the Space bar, while the box is empty) and speak.
  3. Let go: KAI writes what it heard and asks it. A quick click on the mic listens until you pause.
QHow do I talk to KAI with a button on the Kadabra?
  1. Hold KAI's talk button on the Kadabra (Kadabra OS sets which one).
  2. Speak while you hold it. The first time, KAI opens and wakes its engine: keep holding until the bottom of KAI's window says Listening....
  3. Let go: KAI asks what it heard, as if you had typed it.
QHow do I make KAI speak its answers?
  1. Click SPEAK OFF at the bottom of KAI's window: it turns to SPEAK ON.
  2. Ask a question: KAI reads the answer aloud, with this computer's own voice, in KAI's language.
  3. While KAI follows your Kadabra (below), it says each step when you get to it, and All done. at the end. Esc stops it.
KAI follows your KadabraThe step-by-step guide: do a step, and the next one lights up
InfoThe step-by-step guide

When an answer has steps on the Kadabra (go to a Shape, hold a Thumb, press a Combi), KAI follows your hands. A bar above the question box shows the step to do now, and how to get there from where you are, for example "Press Shifter 1: the Looper is in it." Do it on the Kadabra and the next step lights up; the dots show how far you are. NEXT skips a step KAI cannot see (a choice on the screen, a menu); STOP ends the guide. Only the newest answer is followed.

QWhy doesn't KAI follow my steps?
  • The bottom of KAI's window must show where your Kadabra is (the Shape, the Thumb, the BPM). If it shows nothing, this Kadabra OS does not tell KAI yet: update Kadabra OS.
  • The answer must have steps on the Kadabra itself. Steps in K-Player, K-Sampler or on the computer cannot be seen by KAI.
  • INTERNAL answers are the most precise for the guide: switch to INTERNAL and ask again.
Reports and sharingTell Tribal-Tools about a bug, a wish or a typo
ReportHow do I report a bug, a wish or a typo?
  1. Press REPORT at the top of KAI's window (or KAI, then Report, in Kadabra OS).
  2. Pick what it is: Bug, Feature, Typo or Other.
  3. Write what happened and how you got there (or hold the mic and say it). Add your e-mail if you would like an answer.
  4. Press SEND. It goes straight to the Tribal-Tools team, with your Kadabra OS version.
InfoHelp make KAI better

KAI asks once whether you would like to share your questions with Tribal-Tools: what you ask, KAI's answers and the pictures you add, with where your Kadabra was. Never your name or e-mail. It shows us what to add to the manual. Change it any time with the line Share my questions at the bottom of KAI's start page.

The manual on this computerWhat INTERNAL and MANUAL read, and the manual to read offline
InfoThe manual on this computer

INTERNAL and MANUAL read this manual, with all its pictures, from your computer. It comes with KAI's engine, with the full Kadabra installer, or on its own (GET THE MANUAL). When a newer one is out, NEW MANUAL appears at the bottom of KAI's window. The whole manual is also there as one page to read in a browser with no internet: in MANUAL mode, press READ IT IN YOUR BROWSER.

  • Mac: /Library/Application Support/Tribal-Tools/KAI/manual (installed for everyone), or ~/Library/Application Support/Tribal-Tools/KAI/manual (downloaded by KAI).
  • Windows: ProgramData\Tribal-Tools\KAI\manual, or AppData\Local\Tribal-Tools\KAI\manual.
  • Linux and Raspberry Pi: /usr/share/tribal-tools/kai/manual, or ~/.local/share/Tribal-Tools/KAI/manual.
When something is wrongKAI's own problems, and what to do about each one
FIXKAI says it needs the Kadabra manual

INTERNAL and MANUAL need the manual on this computer. Press GET THE MANUAL (it needs the internet once, about 95 MB), or install KAI's engine, which brings it. After that, both work with no internet.

FIXKAI could not read the manual

The copy on this computer is damaged or was not finished. Press GET THE MANUAL to download it again. If it happens again, send a Report.

FIXKAI stays on "Reading the manual..."

Reading it takes a second or two. A manual installed while KAI was open is noticed within a few seconds. If the message stays, close KAI's window and open it again.

FIXGET ENGINE is grey, or the engine does not download
  • A grey NO ENGINE means KAI could not ask its server where the engine is: check the internet connection, then open KAI's window again.
  • The engine is for Macs with Apple silicon (M1 or newer, macOS 12 or newer). On Windows, Linux and the Raspberry Pi it is not ready yet: INTERNAL, MANUAL and ONLINE work there without it.
  • You can also install it from its installer file: double-click KAI-Engine-...pkg and follow the steps.
FIX"Can't reach KAI's server"

ONLINE needs the internet. Check the connection and press RETRY; KAI also tries again by itself. Meanwhile INTERNAL and MANUAL work with no internet.

FIXThe engine takes long to start

The very first start after installing takes about half a minute: the computer prepares the engine once. After that it starts in a few seconds.

FIXKAI does not hear me
  • The first time, macOS asks whether Kadabra OS may use the microphone: press OK.
  • If you pressed Don't Allow: open System Settings, then Privacy & Security, then Microphone, and switch on Kadabra OS.
  • Check that the engine is on (voice ready at the bottom of KAI's window) and that the computer's microphone is the one you speak into.
FIXNo actions left

ONLINE stops when the actions run out. Press ACTIONS to add a pack, or type a boost code there. INTERNAL and MANUAL stay free meanwhile.

FIXKAI does not speak
  • SPEAK ON must be on, at the bottom of KAI's window, and the computer's sound must be up.
  • A language with no voice on this computer: on a Mac, open System Settings, then Accessibility, then Spoken Content, then System voice, then Manage Voices, and add one.
  • On Linux and the Raspberry Pi, install a voice once: sudo apt install espeak-ng.
Kadabra Ecosystem · Workflows

Combining

Putting the Shapes, K-Player and K-Sampler together to make music.

Each part of the ecosystem is documented on its own. This chapter is about the joints: which Kadabra OS Shape drives which K-Player or K-Sampler feature, and in what order to set things up so it just works.
• Placeholder This chapter is a first set of recipes drawn from the other chapters. It will be extended with pictures, videos and step-by-step lessons.
Back to top
How the parts connectThe one picture to keep in mind
Kadabra (or the K-Box) → Kadabra OS turns your playing into MIDI on the virtual "Kadabra" port → K-Player listens on that port; each Kadabra Sound is a MIDI channel, and each K-Player channel with that MIDI IN plays it through its Instrument (K-Sampler, Surge XT…) and inserts (K-Channel…) → the buses and the MASTER → your speakers. In the other direction, K-Player's LINK-KADABRA sends KEY, SCALE and HARMONY back to Kadabra OS, so the Shapes can follow a record.
Sounder picks the Sound = MIDI channel, and sends program changes
Scaler · Harmoner decide the notes; K-Player can feed them the key of a track
Looper · Arper · Viber generate the rhythm that K-Player records
FXer · Senser send CCs that any plug-in knob can learn
Temper tempo, which can lock to K-Player's MASTER BPM
Performer · Master states and macros = whole setups in one press
RecipesTen combinations that work today
1Sounder ↔ K-Player channels
  1. In Kadabra OS Sounder, each Sound sends on its own MIDI channel (1 … 16).
  2. In K-Player's PLAYER page, give a channel that number in its MIDI IN box and load an Instrument. The Starter session already maps channels 1 – 15.
  3. Two K-Player channels with the same MIDI IN layer two instruments under one Sound.
2Program changes → K-Sampler banks

A program change sent from a Sound reaches the K-Sampler in that channel's Instrument box and loads a bank without stopping the music: bank select 0 = factory banks, 1 = your banks; the program number is printed in K-Sampler's BANK menu. Put the bank changes you need on Master shape combis and a whole set list sits under your thumbs.

3Looper / Arper / Viber → RECORD in K-Player
  1. ARM the K-Player channels of the Sounds you will play (or arm from the Kadabra with CC 84 on each channel).
  2. Press RECORD (or CC 102 on channel 16), then play your loops and arpeggios.
  3. On STOP, every channel's audio lands on MIX & MASTER and every MIDI take on its ARRANGEMENT lane, all starting at the same instant: the loop you played is now an editable take.
4A record's key → Scaler and Harmoner
  1. Load a track on DECK A, run DETECT, and APPROVE the tonality markers you trust (fix tone, scale or degree with the < > buttons first).
  2. Press LINK-KADABRA in K-Player's top bar so it is lit (MIDI Settings ▸ Send to: the Kadabra port).
  3. Play the deck. Kadabra OS receives KEY and SCALE at every approved point, and HARMONY when Degree is on: your Scaler and Harmoner now play in the record's key, and change with it.
5FXer combis → any plug-in knob
  1. In K-Player (EDIT), hover the plug-in's box, press MIDI, click the CC chip of the parameter.
  2. On the Kadabra, in FXer, hold the combi and touch a key: the CC number is learned.
  3. From now on that combi's amount is that knob: K-Channel's compressor threshold, Surge's filter cutoff, K-Sampler's reverb size…

K-Sampler's own controls learn the same way from their right-click menu.

6Senser motion → the DELAY and REVERB buses

The Kadabra's motion axes send CC 21 – 29. In K-Player (EDIT), give BUS 1 a MIDI channel, then click the CC badge beside TIME, FDBK or SPREAD and pick the axis in the grid (those numbers are tinted for you). Tilt the Kadabra and the delay moves with you.

7Arper / Viber + K-Sampler beat repeat

Kadabra's Viber gates notes in time; K-Sampler's beat repeat retriggers the sample in time. Both follow the same master tempo, so a Viber-gated note into a K-Sampler pad with a 1/16 hold (CC 40 – 51 from a combi) stacks the two rhythms. Use POSITION and the envelope's DECAY to shape each pass.

8Temper ↔ MASTER BPM

One tempo for everything: either set K-Player's MASTER BPM and Kadabra's Temper by hand to the same number, or use SYNC IN in K-Player when Kadabra OS sends MIDI clock, so the decks, the arrangement (with BEAT-MIX) and every synced plug-in follow the Kadabra's tempo, including its tap-tempo and halving / doubling.

9Performer States ↔ K-Player Sessions

A Kadabra State saves the Shapes' side (sounds, loops, scale, key); a K-Player Session saves the sound side (channels, plug-ins and their exact state, decks, mix). Save both under the same name after you finish a setup, and load both before a show. The Master shape can hold the State; K-Player's File ▸ Open Recent holds the Session.

10Sampler shape + K-Sampler MIC-REC
  1. Route a microphone to K-Sampler's side-chain input (K-Player's INPUT device, or the host's routing).
  2. In K-Sampler, arm MIC-REC (this switches EDIT MODE on), and for a set of hits also AUTO-FILL + AUTO-CUT.
  3. Hold a pad's note from the Kadabra's Sampler shape and play the sounds into the microphone: released, they are cut one per pad, tuned to the group's notes if AUTO-TONE is on.
  4. Switch back to PERFORM MODE and play your new kit chromatically from the same shape.
↑ Back to top
Copied